HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Pictorial index
Search by illustration
1
For safety
and security
Make sure to read through them
2
Instrument
cluster
How to read the gauges and meters, the variety of
warning lights and indicators, etc.
3
Operation of
each component
Opening and closing the doors and windows,
adjustment before driving, etc.
4
Driving
Operations and advice which are necessary for driving
5
Audio system
Operating the audio system
6
Interior features
Usage of the interior features, etc.
7
Maintenance
and care
Caring for your vehicle and maintenance procedures
8
When trouble
arises
What to do in case of malfunction or emergency
9
Vehicle
specifications
Vehicle specifications, etc.
Index
Search by symptom
Search alphabetically
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 1 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
TABLE OF CONTENTS
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
For your information .......................8
Reading this manual.....................14
How to search ..............................15
Pictorial index ...............................16
1-1. For safe use
Before driving.......................36
For safety drive ....................38
Seat belts.............................40
SRS airbags.........................45
Exhaust gas precautions .....56
1-2. Child safety
Front passenger occupant
classification system..........57
Airbag manual on-off
system ...............................62
Riding with children..............64
Child restraint systems ........65
1-3. Theft deterrent system
Engine immobilizer
system .............................107
Alarm .................................116
2. Instrument cluster
Warning lights
and indicators.................. 120
Gauges and meters........... 128
Multi-information display
(Type A) .......................... 133
Multi-information display
(Type B) .......................... 136
Fuel consumption
information ...................... 144
3-1. Key information
Keys .................................. 148
3-2. Opening, closing and
locking the doors
Side doors ......................... 160
Access panels (smart-cab
models only).................... 166
Tailgate ............................. 167
Smart entry & start
system............................. 170
3-3. Adjusting the seats
Front seats ........................ 186
Rear seats......................... 188
Head restraints.................. 191
3-4. Adjusting the steering
wheel and mirrors
Steering wheel .................. 194
Inside rear view mirror....... 196
Outside rear view
mirrors............................. 197
1
For safety and security
2
Instrument cluster
3
Operation of
each component
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 2 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
3
1
9
8
6
5
4
3
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
7
3-5. Opening and closing
the windows
Power windows..................200
Quarter windows
(smart-cab models)..........204
Back window
(sliding type) ....................205
4-1. Before driving
Driving the vehicle .............208
Cargo and luggage ............221
Trailer towing (except
models for model code
destination W)..................222
Trailer towing (models for
model code destination
W) ....................................223
4-2. Driving procedures
Engine (ignition) switch
(vehicles without smart
entry & start system)........236
Engine (ignition) switch
(vehicles with smart
entry & start system)........239
Automatic transmission......247
Manual transmission..........254
Turn signal lever ................260
Parking brake.....................261
4-3. Operating the lights
and wipers
Headlight switch.................262
Fog light switch ..................269
Windshield wipers and
washer .............................271
4-4. Refueling
Opening the fuel tank
cap .................................. 274
4-5. Using the driving support
systems
Toyota Safety Sense......... 279
PCS (Pre-Crash
Safety system) ................ 287
LDA (Lane Departure
Alert) ............................... 300
RSA (Road Sign Assist).... 309
Cruise control .................... 314
Rear view monitor
system............................. 318
Four-wheel drive
system............................. 329
Rear differential
lock system ..................... 339
Stop & Start system
(Smart Stop).................... 343
Driving assist systems....... 353
Downhill assist control
system............................. 361
DPF (Diesel Particulate
Filter) system .................. 364
4-6. Driving tips
Winter driving tips.............. 368
5-1. Basic Operations
Audio system types ........... 374
Steering wheel audio
switches .......................... 376
AUX port/USB port ............ 379
5-2. Using the audio system
Optimal use of the audio
system............................. 380
4
Driving
5
Audio system
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 3 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
TABLE OF CONTENTS
4
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
5-3. Using the radio
Radio operation .................382
5-4. Playing an audio CD and
MP3/WMA discs
CD player operation...........387
5-5. Using an external device
Listening to an iPod ...........397
Listening USB memory
device ..............................405
Using the AUX port ............412
5-6. Using Bluetooth
®
devices
Bluetooth
®
audio/phone.....413
Using the steering
wheel switches ................418
Registering a Bluetooth
®
device ..............................419
5-7. “SETUP” menu
Using the “SETUP” menu
(“Bluetooth
*” menu).........420
Using the “SETUP” menu
(“TEL” or “PHONE”
menu) ..............................426
5-8. Bluetooth
®
Audio
Operating a Bluetooth
®
enabled portable
player...............................433
5-9. Bluetooth
®
Phone
Making a phone call...........435
Receiving a phone call.......437
Speaking on the phone......438
5-10.Bluetooth
®
Bluetooth
®
.........................440
6-1. Using the air conditioning
system and defogger
Manual air conditioning
system............................. 448
Automatic air conditioning
system............................. 456
Seat heaters...................... 465
6-2. Using the interior lights
Interior lights list ................ 466
•Personal/interior light
main switch ................... 467
•Personal/interior
lights ............................. 467
•Interior light...................467
6-3. Using the storage features
List of storage features...... 469
•Glove box......................470
•Console box..................470
•Cup holders..................471
•Bottle holders................472
•Auxiliary boxes..............473
Luggage compartment
features ........................... 476
6-4. Using the other interior
features
Other interior features ....... 477
•Sun visors.....................477
•Vanity mirror.................477
•Clock.............................478
•Power outlets................479
•Grocery bag hooks.......481
•Coat hooks....................482
•Armrest.........................482
ERA-GLONASS ................ 483
*: The Bluetooth
®
word mark and logos are registered
trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
6
Interior features
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 4 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
5
1
9
8
6
5
4
3
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
7
7-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle exterior ..........486
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle interior ...........489
7-2. Maintenance
Maintenance
requirements....................492
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Do-it-yourself service
precautions ......................495
Hood ..................................497
Engine compartment..........499
Tires...................................518
Tire inflation pressure ........526
Wheels...............................528
Air conditioning filter ..........530
Wireless remote control/
electronic key battery.......532
Checking and
replacing fuses ................535
Light bulbs .........................540
8-1. Essential information
Emergency flashers ...........556
If your vehicle has to
be stopped in an
emergency.......................557
8-2. Steps to take in an
emergency
If your vehicle needs
to be towed ..................... 559
If you think something is
wrong .............................. 564
Fuel pump shut off
system (gasoline engine
only) ................................ 565
Fire extinguisher................ 566
If a warning light turns on
or a warning buzzer
sounds ............................ 567
If a warning message is
displayed......................... 577
If you have a flat tire.......... 584
If the engine will not
start ................................. 601
If the electronic key does
not operate properly
(vehicles with smart
entry & start system) ....... 603
If the vehicle battery is
discharged ...................... 607
If your vehicle
overheats ........................ 613
If you run out of fuel
and the engine stalls
(diesel engine only)......... 616
If the vehicle becomes
stuck................................ 617
7
Maintenance and care
8
When trouble arises
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 5 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
TABLE OF CONTENTS
6
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
9-1. Specifications
Maintenance data
(fuel, oil level, etc.)...........620
Fuel information .................645
9-2. Customization
Customizable features .......648
9-3. Initialization
Items to initialize ................655
What to do if...
(Troubleshooting) .....................658
Alphabetical index ......................662
9
Vehicle specifications
Index
For vehicles with navigation system or multimedia system, refer to
the “Navigation and multimedia system Owner’s manual” for infor-
mation regarding the equipment listed below.
•Navigation system
•Audio system
•Hands-free system (for cellu-
lar phone)
Toy o ta M ot or E u r op e NV /SA , Av enue du Bou r g e t 6 0 - 11 40
Brussels, Belgium www.toyota-europe.com
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 6 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
7
1
9
8
6
5
4
3
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
7
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 7 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
8
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
For your information
Please note that this manual applies to all models and all equipment, includ-
ing options. Therefore, you may find some explanations for equipment not
installed on your vehicle.
All specifications provided in this manual are current at the time of printing.
However, because of the Toyota policy of continual product improvement, we
reserve the right to make changes at any time without notice.
Depending on specifications, the vehicle shown in the illustrations may differ
from your vehicle in terms of equipment.
Both genuine Toyota and a wide variety of other spare parts and accessories
for Toyota vehicles are currently available on the market. Should it be deter-
mined that any of the genuine Toyota parts or accessories supplied with the
vehicle need to be replaced, Toyota recommends that genuine Toyota parts
or accessories, be used to replace them. Other parts or accessories of
matching quality can also be used. Toyota cannot accept any liability or guar-
antee spare parts and accessories which are not genuine Toyota products,
nor for replacement or installation involving such parts. In addition, damage
or performance problems resulting from the use of non-genuine Toyota spare
parts or accessories may not be covered under warranty.
The installation of an RF-transmitter system in your vehicle could affect elec-
tronic systems such as:
● Multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system
● Cruise control system
● Anti-lock brake system
● SRS airbag system
● Seat belt pretensioner system
Be sure to check with any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another
duly qualified and equipped professional for precautionary measures or spe-
cial instructions regarding installation of an RF-transmitter system.
Further information regarding frequency bands, power levels, antenna posi-
tions and installation provisions for the installation of RF-transmitters, is avail-
able on request at any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly
qualified and equipped professional.
Main Owner’s Manual
Accessories, spare parts and modification of your Toyota
Installation of an RF-transmitter system
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 8 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
9
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
The SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner devices in your Toyota contain
explosive chemicals. If the vehicle is scrapped with the airbags and seat belt
pretensioners left as they are, this may cause an accident such as fire. Be
sure to have the systems of the SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner
removed and disposed of by a qualified service shop or by any authorized
Toyo ta d ea ler o r re p a ir er, o r an ot h er d uly q ua lif ied a nd eq ui p pe d pro fe ss i on a l
before you scrap your vehicle.
Scrapping of your Toyota
Your v ehicle c onta ins batt eries a n d/or ac cumula tors . D o not di scard t hem
into the environment but cooperate with separate collection
(Directive 2006/66/EC).
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 9 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
10
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
WARNING
■ General precautions while driving
Driving under the influence: Never drive your vehicle when under the influ-
ence of alcohol or drugs that have impaired your ability to operate your vehi-
cle. Alcohol and certain drugs delay reaction time, impair judgment and
reduce coordination, which could lead to an accident that could result in
death or serious injury.
Defensive driving: Always drive defensively. Anticipate mistakes that other
drivers or pedestrians might make and be ready to avoid accidents.
Driver distraction: Always give your full attention to driving. Anything that
distracts the driver, such as adjusting controls, talking on a cellular phone or
reading can result in a collision with resulting death or serious injury to you,
your occupants or others.
■ General precaution regarding children’s safety
Never leave children unattended in the vehicle, and never allow children to
have or use the key.
Children may be able to start the vehicle or shift the vehicle into neutral.
There is also a danger that children may injure themselves by playing with
the windows or other features of the vehicle. In addition, heat build-up or
extremely cold temperatures inside the vehicle can be fatal to children.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 10 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
11
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Check the model code to see what type of model your vehicle is.
Basic code
TGN1
∗6: Models with 2TR-FE engine
GUN1
∗6: Models with 1GD-FTV engine
GUN1
∗5: Models with 2GD-FTV engine
KUN1∗5: Models with 2KD-FTV engine
Driving system
2: 4WD models
3: Pre Runner (2WD models)
Cab type
B: Single-cab
C: Smart-cab
D: Double-cab
Made in
N: South Africa
T: Th ai lan d
Checking your vehicle’s model
G U N 1 2 5 – D T T H W
3
1
42 5 76
1
2
3
4
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 11 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
12
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Transmission type
T: Au to ma tic t ra ns mi s si on
M: 5-speed manual transmission
F: 6-speed manual transmission
Grade
H: HIGH
M: MID
S: STD
L: LOW
X: LOWEST
Destination
W: Models for European countries etc.
V: Models for Caucasus area etc.
Blank: Models for Kazakhstan etc.
The model code appears on the manufacturer’s label or plate with the head-
ing “MODEL”.
5
6
7
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 12 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
13
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
The label or plate is placed as shown in the following illustrations.
Type A
Type B
Type C
Type D
The manufacturer’s label is located on the
left pillar.
The manufacturer’s label is located on the
left pillar.
The manufacturer’s label is located on the
left pillar.
The manufacturer’s plate is located beside
the engine compartment.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 13 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
14
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Reading this manual
WARNING:
Explains something that, if not obeyed, could cause death or
serious injury to people.
NOTICE:
Explains something that, if not obeyed, could cause damage to
or a malfunction in the vehicle or its equipment.
Indicates operating or working procedures. Follow the steps
in numerical order.
Indicates the action (push-
ing, turning, etc.) used to
operate switches and other
devices.
Indicates the outcome of an
operation (e.g. a lid opens).
Indicates the component or
position being explained.
Means “Do not”, “Do not do
this”, or “Do not let this hap-
pen”.
1
2
3
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 14 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
15
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
How to search
■ Searching by name
•Alphabetical index......P. 662
■ Searching by installation
position
•Pictorial index...............P. 16
■ Searching by symptom or
sound
•What to do if...
(Troubleshooting) ....... P. 658
■ Searching by title
•Table of contents............P. 2
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 15 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
16
Pictorial index
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Pictorial index
■
Exterior
The shape of the headlights may differ depending on the grade, etc. (→P. 54 0 )
Side doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 160
Access panels (smart-cab models only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 166
Locking/unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 160
Opening/closing the door glasses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 200
Locking/unlocking by using the mechanical key
*
1
. . . . . . . . . P. 603
Warning lights
*
1
/warning messages*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 162, 571
Back window (sliding type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 205
Tailgate
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 167
Outside rear view mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 197
Adjusting the mirror angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 197
Folding the mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 198
Defogging the mirrors
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 449, 458
1
2
3
4
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 16 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
17
Pictorial index
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Windshield wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 271
Precautions against winter season . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 368
Fuel filler door
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 274
Refueling method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 274
Fuel type/fuel tank capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 627
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 518
Tire size/inflation pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 642
Winter tires/tire chain. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 368
Checking/rotation/tire pressure warning system
*
1
. . . . . . . . . P. 519
Coping with flat tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 584
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 497
Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 497
Engine oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 628
Coping with overheat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 613
Camera
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 318
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 262
Front position lights/daytime running lights
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . P. 262
Front fog lights*
1
/rear fog light*
1, 2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 269
Front turn signal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 260
Side turn signal lights (fender-mounted type or
mirror-mounted type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 260
Rear turn signal lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 260
Stop/tail lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 262
Downhill assist control system
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 361
License plate light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 262
Back-up lights
*
2
Shifting the shift lever to R. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 247, 254
5
6
7
8
9
Light bulbs of the exterior lights for driving
(Replacing method: P. 540, Watts: P. 644)
*
1
: If equipped
*
2
: They may be located on the opposite side depending on the target region.
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 17 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
18
Pictorial index
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■Instrument panel (Left-hand drive vehicles)
Engine switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 236, 239
Starting the engine/changing the positions or modes . . . P. 236, 239
Emergency stop of the engine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 557
When the engine will not start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 601
Warning messages
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 577
Shift lever (Automatic transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 247
Changing the shift position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 247
Precautions against towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 559
When the shift lever does not move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 252
Shift lever (Manual transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 254
Changing the shift position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 254
Precautions against towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 559
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 18 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
19
Pictorial index
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 128
Reading the meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 128
Adjusting the instrument panel light
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 128
Warning lights/indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 120
When the warning lights come on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 567
Multi-information display
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 133, 136
When the warning messages are displayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 577
Parking brake lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 261
Applying/releasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 261
Precautions against winter season . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 369
Warning light/buzzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 567
Turn signal lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 260
Headlight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 262
Headlights/front position lights/tail lights/daytime
running lights
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 262
Front fog lights*
1
/rear fog light*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 269
Windshield wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 271
Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 271
Adding washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 511
Warning messages
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 577
Hood lock release lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 497
Fuel filler door opener
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 276
Manual air conditioning system
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 448
Automatic air conditioning system
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 456
Audio system
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 374
AUX port/USB port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 379
Navigation system/Multimedia system
*
1, 2
Rear view monitor system*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 318
Clock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 478
*
1
: If equipped
*
2
: Refer to “Navigation and multimedia system Owner’s manual”.
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 19 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
20
Pictorial index
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■Switches (Left-hand drive vehicles)
Power window switches*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 200
Window lock switch
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 201
Door lock switch
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 162
Outside rear view mirror switches*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 197
DPF system switch
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 364
Heater idle up switch
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 450
Manual headlight leveling dial*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 264
LDA (Lane Departure Alert) switch
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 300
PCS (Pre-Crash Safety system) switch
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 287
Power heater switch
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 450, 459
Tire pressure warning reset switch
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 520
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 20 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
21
Pictorial index
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Audio remote control switches
*
1, 2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 376
Talk switch*
1, 2, 3
Meter control switches*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 137
“DISP” button
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 134
Cruise control switch*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 314
Tilt steering lock release lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 194
Telephone switches
*
1, 2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 418
*
1
: If equipped
*
2
: Refer to “Navigation and multimedia system Owner’s manual”.
*
3
: The switch can not be used depending on the type of
audio system or navigation system.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 21 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
22
Pictorial index
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Emergency flasher switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 556
Front-wheel drive control switch
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 329
Power outlets
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 479
Rear differential lock switch
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 339
“DAC” (Downhill Assist Control system) switch*
1
. . . . . . P. 361
VSC OFF switch
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 355
Stop & Start cancel switch
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 344
Seat heater switches*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 465
AUX port/USB port
*
1, 2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 22 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
23
Pictorial index
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■Interior (Left-hand drive vehicles)
SRS airbags*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 45
Floor mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 36
Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 186
Rear seats
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 188
Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 191
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 40
Console box
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 470
Inside lock buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 162
Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 471
Auxiliary boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 473
Bottle holders
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 472
*
1
: If equipped
*
2
: Refer to “Navigation and multimedia system Owner’s manual”.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 23 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
24
Pictorial index
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Cup holders*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 471
Auxiliary boxes
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 473
“PWR MODE” switch*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 249, 255
“ECO MODE” switch
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 249, 255
1
2
3
4
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 24 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
25
Pictorial index
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Inside rear view mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 196
Sun visors
*
2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 477
Vanity mirror
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 477
Personal lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 467
Interior lights
*
1, 3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 467
Personal/interior light main switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 467
Auxiliary boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 473
“SOS” button
*
1, 4
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 483
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
*
1
:If equipped
*
2
:NEVER use a rearward facing child
restraint on a seat protected by an
ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH
or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can
occur. (→P. 7 1 )
*
3
:The illustration shows the front, but they are also equipped in the rear.
*
4
:The button can not be used in vehicles without ERA-GLONASS.
*
1
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 25 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
26
Pictorial index
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■Instrument panel (Right-hand drive vehicles)
Engine switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 236, 239
Starting the engine/changing the positions or modes . . . P. 236, 239
Emergency stop of the engine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 557
When the engine will not start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 601
Warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 577
Shift lever (Automatic transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 247
Changing the shift position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 247
Precautions against towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 559
When the shift lever does not move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 252
Shift lever (Manual transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 254
Changing the shift position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 254
Precautions against towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 559
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 26 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
27
Pictorial index
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 128
Reading the meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 128
Adjusting the instrument panel light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 128
Warning lights/indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 120
When the warning lights come on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 567
Multi-information display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 133, 136
When the warning messages are displayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 577
Parking brake lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 261
Applying/releasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 261
Precautions against winter season . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 369
Warning light/buzzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 567
Turn signal lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 260
Headlight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 262
Headlights/front position lights/tail lights/daytime
running lights
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 262
Front fog lights*
1
/rear fog light*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 269
Windshield wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 271
Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 271
Adding washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 511
Warning messages
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 577
Hood lock release lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 497
Fuel filler door opener
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 276
Manual air conditioning system
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 448
Automatic air conditioning system
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 456
Audio system
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 374
AUX port/USB port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 379
Navigation system/Multimedia system
*
1, 2
Rear view monitor system*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 318
Clock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 478
*
1
: If equipped
*
2
: Refer to “Navigation and multimedia system Owner’s manual”.
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 27 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
28
Pictorial index
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■Switches (Right-hand drive vehicles)
Power window switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 200
Window lock switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 201
Door lock switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 162
Outside rear view mirror switches
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 197
Power heater switch
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 450, 459
Manual headlight leveling dial
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 264
LDA (Lane Departure Alert) switch*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 300
PCS (Pre-Crash Safety system) switch
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 287
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 28 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
29
Pictorial index
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Audio remote control switches
*
1, 2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 376
Talk switch*
1, 2, 3
Meter control switches*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 137
“DISP” button
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 134
Cruise control switch*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 314
Tilt steering lock release lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 194
Telephone switches
*
1, 2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 418
*
1
: If equipped
*
2
: Refer to “Navigation and multimedia system Owner’s manual”.
*
3
: The switch can not be used depending on the type of
audio system or navigation system.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 29 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
30
Pictorial index
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Emergency flasher switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 556
Front-wheel drive control switch
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 329
Power outlets
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 479
Rear differential lock switch
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 339
“DAC” (Downhill Assist Control system) switch*
1
. . . . . . P. 361
VSC OFF switch
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 355
Stop & Start cancel switch
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 344
Seat heater switches*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 465
AUX port/USB port
*
1, 2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 30 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
31
Pictorial index
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■Interior (Right-hand drive vehicles)
SRS airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 45
Floor mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 36
Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 186
Rear seats
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 188
Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 191
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 40
Console box
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 470
Inside lock buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 162
Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 471
Auxiliary boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 473
Bottle holders
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 472
*
1
: If equipped
*
2
: Refer to “Navigation and multimedia system Owner’s manual”.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 31 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
32
Pictorial index
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Cup holders*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 471
Auxiliary boxes
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 473
“PWR MODE” switch*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 249, 255
“ECO MODE” switch
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 249, 255
1
2
3
4
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 32 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
33
Pictorial index
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Inside rear view mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 196
Sun visors
*
2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 477
Vanity mirror
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 477
Personal lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 467
Interior lights
*
1, 3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 467
Personal/interior light main switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 467
Auxiliary boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 473
“SOS” button
*
1, 4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
*
1
:If equipped
*
2
:NEVER use a rearward facing child
restraint on a seat protected by an
ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH
or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can
occur. (→P. 7 1 )
*
3
:The illustration shows the front, but they are also equipped in the rear.
*
4
:The button can not be used in this vehicle.
*
1
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 33 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
34
Pictorial index
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 34 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
35
1
For safety and security
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
1-1. For safe use
Before driving.......................36
For safety drive ....................38
Seat belts.............................40
SRS airbags.........................45
Exhaust gas precautions .....56
1-2. Child safety
Front passenger occupant
classification system..........57
Airbag manual on-off
system ...............................62
Riding with children..............64
Child restraint systems ........65
1-3. Theft deterrent system
Engine immobilizer
system .............................107
Alarm .................................116
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 35 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
36
1-1. For safe use
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Before driving
Use only floor mats designed specifically for vehicles of the same
model and model year as your vehicle. Fix them securely in place
onto the carpet.
Insert the retaining hooks (clips)
into the floor mat eyelets.
Turn the upper knob of each
retaining hook (clip) to secure
the floor mats in place.
*:Always align the marks.
The shape of the retaining hooks (clips) may differ from that shown in the
illustration.
Floor mat
1
*
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 36 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
37
1-1. For safe use
1
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
For safety and security
WARNING
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause the driver’s floor mat to slip, possibly interfering
with the pedals while driving. An unexpectedly high speed may result or it may
become difficult to stop the vehicle. This could lead to an accident, resulting in
death or serious injury.
■ When installing the driver’s floor mat
● Do not use floor mats designed for other models or different model year
vehicles, even if they are Toyota Genuine floor mats.
● Only use floor mats designed for the driver’s seat.
● Always install the floor mat securely using the retaining hooks (clips) pro-
vided.
● Do not use two or more floor mats on top of each other.
● Do not place the floor mat bottom-side up or upside-down.
■ Before driving
● Check that the floor mat is securely
fixed in the correct place with all the
provided retaining hooks (clips). Be
especially careful to perform this check
after cleaning the floor.
● With the engine stopped and the shift
lever in P (automatic transmission) or N
(manual transmission), fully depress
each pedal to the floor to make sure it
does not interfere with the floor mat.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 37 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
38
1-1. For safe use
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
For safety drive
Adjust the angle of the seat-
back so that you are sitting
straight up and so that you do
not have to lean forward to
steer. (→P. 1 8 6)
Adjust the seat so that you can
depress the pedals fully and so
that your arms bend slightly at
the elbow when gripping the
steering wheel. (→P. 1 8 6 )
Vehicles with adjustable type head restraint: Lock the head restraint
in place with the center of the head restraint closest to the top of
your ears. (→P. 1 9 1 )
Wear the seat belt correctly. (→P. 40 )
Make sure that all occupants are wearing their seat belts before driv-
ing the vehicle. (→P. 40 )
Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child until the child
becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt.
(→P. 6 5)
For safe driving, adjust the seat and mirror to an appropriate
position before driving.
Correct driving posture
1
2
Correct use of the seat belts
3
4
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 38 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
39
1-1. For safe use
1
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
For safety and security
Make sure that you can see backward clearly by adjusting the inside
and outside rear view mirrors properly. (→P. 1 9 6, 1 9 7 )
Adjusting the mirrors
WARNING
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
● Do not adjust the position of the driver’s seat while driving.
Doing so could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
● Do not place a cushion between the driver or passenger and the seatback.
A cushion may prevent correct posture from being achieved, and reduce
the effectiveness of the seat belt and head restraint.
● Do not place anything under the front seats.
Objects placed under the front seats may become jammed in the seat
tracks and stop the seat from locking in place. This may lead to an acci-
dent and the adjustment mechanism may also be damaged.
● Always observe the legal speed limit when driving on public roads.
● When driving over long distances, take regular breaks before you start to
feel tired.
Also, if you feel tired or sleepy while driving, do not force yourself to con-
tinue driving and take a break immediately.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 39 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
40
1-1. For safe use
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Seat belts
◆ 3-point type
● Extend the shoulder belt so
that it comes fully over the
shoulder, but does not come
into contact with the neck or
slide off the shoulder.
● Position the lap belt as low
as possible over the hips.
● Adjust the position of the
seatback. Sit up straight and
well back in the seat.
● Do not twist the seat belt.
◆ 2-point type (if equipped)
● Position the lap belt as low
as possible over the hips and
remove excess length of the
belt.
● Front seat only: Adjust the
position of the seatback. Sit
up straight and well back in
the seat.
● Do not twist the seat belt.
Make sure that all occupants are wearing their seat belts before
driving the vehicle.
Correct use of the seat belts
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 40 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
41
1-1. For safe use
1
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
For safety and security
To f as ten th e s e a t belt , p u sh the
plate into the buckle until a click
sound is heard.
To re l ea s e the s ea t b elt, p r e s s
the release button.
Push the seat belt shoulder
anchor down while pulling the
lock release knob.
Push the seat belt shoulder
anchor up.
Move the height adjuster up and
down as needed until you hear a
click.
Lengthen
Shorten
Fastening and releasing the seat belt
Release button
1
2
Adjusting the seat belt shoulder anchor height (if equipped for
front seats)
1
2
Adjusting the length of the belt (2-point type seat belt) (if
equipped)
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 41 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
42
1-1. For safe use
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Vehicles without SRS side and curtain shield airbags
The pretensioners help the seat
belts to quickly restrain the occu-
pants by retracting the seat belts
when the vehicle is subjected to
certain types of severe frontal col-
lision.
The pretensioners do not activate
in the event of a minor frontal
impact, a side impact, a rear
impact or a vehicle rollover.
Vehicles with SRS side and curtain shield airbags
The pretensioners help the seat belts to quickly restrain the occupants
by retracting the seat belts when the vehicle is subjected to certain
types of severe frontal or side collision.
The pretensioners do not activate in the event of a minor frontal impact, a
minor side impact, a rear impact or a vehicle rollover.
■ Emergency locking retractor (ELR) (3-point type seat belt)
The retractor will lock the belt during a sudden stop or on impact. It may also
lock if you lean forward too quickly. A slow, easy motion will allow the belt to
extend so that you can move around fully.
■ Child seat belt usage
The seat belts of your vehicle were principally designed for persons of adult
size.
● Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child, until the child
becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt. (→ P. 65)
● When the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat
belt, follow the instructions regarding seat belt usage. (→P. 4 0 )
■ Replacing the belt after the pretensioner has been activated (if
equipped)
If the vehicle is involved in multiple collisions, the pretensioner will activate for
the first collision, but will not activate for the second or subsequent collisions.
■ Seat belt regulations
If seat belt regulations exist in the country where you reside, please contact
any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and
equipped professional for seat belt replacement or installation.
Seat belt pretensioners (if equipped)
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 42 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
43
1-1. For safe use
1
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
For safety and security
WARNING
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of injury in the event of
sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
■ Wearing a seat belt
● Ensure that all passengers wear a seat belt.
● Always wear a seat belt properly.
● Each seat belt should be used by one person only. Do not use a seat belt
for more than one person at once, including children.
● To y o ta re com me n ds tha t chi ldr en be s ea ted in t h e re a r sea t and al w ay s
use a seat belt and/or an appropriate child restraint system.
● To a c h ie v e a pr ope r sea t in g p os iti on, do not re cli ne the se at mor e t han
necessary. The seat belt is most effective when the occupants are sitting
up straight and well back in the seats.
● Do not wear the shoulder belt under your arm.
● Always wear your seat belt low and snug across your hips.
■ Pregnant women
■ People suffering illness
Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt in the proper way. (→P. 4 0 )
Obtain medical advice and wear the seat
belt in the proper way. (→P. 4 0)
Women who are pregnant should posi-
tion the lap belt as low as possible over
the hips in the same manner as other
occupants, extending the shoulder belt
completely over the shoulder and avoid-
ing belt contact with the rounding of the
abdominal area.
If the seat belt is not worn properly, not
only the pregnant woman, but also the
fetus could suffer death or serious injury
as a result of sudden braking or a colli-
sion.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 43 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
44
1-1. For safe use
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
WARNING
■ When children are in the vehicle
→P. 8 1
■ Seat belt pretensioners (if equipped)
If the pretensioner has activated, the SRS warning light will come on. In that
case, the seat belt cannot be used again and must be replaced at any
authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped
professional.
■ Adjustable shoulder anchor (if equipped)
Always make sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of your
shoulder. The belt should be kept away from your neck, but not falling off
your shoulder. Failure to do so could reduce the amount of protection in an
accident and cause death or serious injuries in the event of a sudden stop,
sudden swerve or accident. (→P. 4 1 )
■ Seat belt damage and wear
● Do not damage the seat belts by allowing the belt, plate, or buckle to be
jammed in the door.
● Inspect the seat belt system periodically. Check for cuts, fraying, and loose
parts. Do not use a damaged seat belt until it is replaced. Damaged seat
belts cannot protect an occupant from death or serious injury.
● Ensure that the belt and plate are locked and the belt is not twisted.
If the seat belt does not function correctly, immediately contact any autho-
rized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped pro-
fessional.
● Replace the seat assembly, including the belts, if your vehicle has been
involved in a serious accident, even if there is no obvious damage.
● Do not attempt to install, remove, modify, disassemble or dispose of the
seat belts. Have any necessary repairs carried out by any authorized
Toy ota d ea ler or r e pai r er, or a no th er duly qu al ifi ed and equ ipp ed p ro fe s -
sional. Inappropriate handling may lead to incorrect operation.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 44 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
45
1-1. For safe use
1
For safety and security
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
SRS airbags
∗
◆ SRS front airbags
SRS driver airbag/front passenger airbag (if equipped)
Can help protect the head and chest of the driver and front pas-
senger from impact with interior components
SRS driver’s knee airbag (if equipped)
Can help provide driver protection
◆ SRS side and curtain shield airbags
SRS side airbags (if equipped)
Can help protect the torso of the front seat occupants
SRS curtain shield airbags (if equipped)
Can help protect primarily the head of occupants in the outer
seats
∗: If equipped
The SRS airbags inflate when the vehicle is subjected to certain
types of severe impacts that may cause significant injury to the
occupants. They work together with the seat belts to help reduce
the risk of death or serious injury.
1
2
3
4
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 45 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
46
1-1. For safe use
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
SRS airbag system components
Front impact sensors
Front passenger occupant clas-
sification system (ECU and
sensors) (if equipped)
“PASSENGER AIR BAG” indi-
cator (if equipped)
Airbag manual on-off switch
(if equipped)
Front passenger airbag
(if equipped)
Side impact sensors (front
door) (if equipped)
Seat belt pretensioners and
force limiters (if equipped)
Safing sensor (front) (if
equipped)
Side airbags (if equipped)
Curtain shield airbags
(if equipped)
Side impact sensors (rear)
(if equipped)
SRS warning light
Driver airbag
Driver’s knee airbag
(if equipped)
Airbag sensor assembly
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 46 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
47
1-1. For safe use
1
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
For safety and security
The main SRS airbag system components are shown above. The
SRS airbag system is controlled by the airbag sensor assembly. As
the airbags deploy, a chemical reaction in the inflators quickly fills the
airbags with non-toxic gas to help restrain the motion of the occu-
pants.
Bench type front seat: The SRS airbags are designed to protect the
driver and front outside passenger, and they are not designed to pro-
tect an occupant in the front center seating position.
WARNING
■ SRS airbag precautions
Observe the following precautions regarding the SRS airbags.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
● The driver and all passengers in the vehicle must wear their seat belts
properly.
The SRS airbags are supplemental devices to be used with the seat belts.
● The SRS driver airbag deploys with considerable force, and can cause
death or serious injury especially if the driver is very close to the airbag.
Since the risk zone for the driver’s airbag is the first 50 - 75 mm (2 - 3 in.)
of inflation, placing yourself 250 mm (10 in.) from your driver airbag pro-
vides you with a clear margin of safety. This distance is measured from
the center of the steering wheel to your breastbone. If you sit less than
250 mm (10 in.) away now, you can change your driving position in sev-
eral ways:
•Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the ped-
als comfortably.
•Slightly recline the back of the seat. Although vehicle designs vary,
many drivers can achieve the 250 mm (10 in.) distance, even with the
driver seat all the way forward, simply by reclining the back of the seat
somewhat. If reclining the back of your seat makes it hard to see the
road, raise yourself by using a firm, non-slippery cushion, or raise the
seat if your vehicle has that feature.
•If your steering wheel is adjustable, tilt it downward. This points the air-
bag toward your chest instead of your head and neck.
The seat should be adjusted as recommended above, while still maintain-
ing control of the foot pedals, steering wheel, and your view of the instru-
ment panel controls.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 47 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
48
1-1. For safe use
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
WARNING
■ SRS airbag precautions
● Vehicles with SRS front passenger airbag: The SRS front passenger air-
bag also deploys with considerable force, and can cause death or serious
injury especially if the front passenger is very close to the airbag. The front
passenger seat should be as far from the airbag as possible with the seat-
back adjusted, so the front passenger sits upright.
● Vehicles with SRS front passenger airbag: Improperly seated and/or
restrained infants and children can be killed or seriously injured by a
deploying airbag. An infant or child who is too small to use a seat belt
should be properly secured using a child restraint system. Toyota strongly
recommends that all infants and children be placed in the rear seats (if
equipped) of the vehicle and properly restrained. The rear seats (if
equipped) are safer for infants and children than the front passenger seat.
(→P. 6 5)
■ SRS airbag precautions
● Vehicles with SRS front passenger air-
bag: Do not sit on the edge of the seat
or lean against the dashboard.
● Vehicles with SRS front passenger air-
bag: Do not allow a child to stand in
front of the SRS front passenger airbag
unit or sit on the knees of a front pas-
senger.
● Vehicles with SRS front passenger air-
bag: Do not allow the front seat occu-
pants to hold items on their knees.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 48 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
49
1-1. For safe use
1
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
For safety and security
WARNING
■ SRS airbag precautions
● Vehicles with SRS side and curtain
shield airbags: Do not lean against the
door, the roof side rail or the front, side
and rear pillars.
● Vehicles with SRS side and curtain
shield airbags: Do not allow anyone to
kneel on the passenger seat toward the
door or put their head or hands outside
the vehicle.
● Do not attach anything to or lean any-
thing against areas such as the dash-
board, steering wheel pad and lower
portion of the instrument panel.
These items can become projectiles
when the SRS driver, front passenger
and knee airbags (if equipped) deploy.
● Vehicles with SRS side and curtain
shield airbags: Do not attach anything
to areas such as a door, windshield
glass, side door glass, front or rear pil-
lar, roof side rail and assist grip.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 49 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
50
1-1. For safe use
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
WARNING
■ SRS airbag precautions
● Vehicles with SRS side and curtain shield airbags: Do not hang coat hang-
ers or other hard objects on the coat hooks. All of these items could
become projectiles and may cause death or serious injury, should the SRS
curtain shield airbags deploy.
● Vehicles with SRS driver’s knee airbag: If the vinyl cover is put on the area
where the SRS knee airbag will deploy, be sure to remove it.
● Vehicles with SRS side and curtain shield airbags: Do not use seat acces-
sories which cover the parts where the SRS side airbags inflate as they
may interfere with inflation of the airbags. Such accessories may prevent
the side airbags from activating correctly, disable the system or cause the
side airbags to inflate accidentally, resulting in death or serious injury.
● Do not strike or apply significant levels of force to the area of the SRS air-
bag components.
Doing so can cause the SRS airbags to malfunction.
● Do not touch any of the component parts immediately after the SRS air-
bags have deployed (inflated) as they may be hot.
● If breathing becomes difficult after the SRS airbags have deployed, open a
door or window to allow fresh air in, or leave the vehicle if it is safe to do
so. Wash off any residue as soon as possible to prevent skin irritation.
● Vehicles with SRS side and curtain shield airbags: If the areas where the
SRS airbags are stored, such as the steering wheel pad and front and rear
pillar garnishes, are damaged or cracked, have them replaced by any
authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and
equipped professional.
● Vehicles without SRS side and curtain shield airbags: If the areas where
the SRS airbags are stored, such as the steering wheel pad, are damaged
or cracked, have them replaced by any authorized Toyota dealer or
repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional.
● Vehicles with front passenger occupant classification system: Do not place
anything, such as a cushion, on the front passenger’s seat. Doing so will
disperse the passenger’s weight, which prevents the sensor from detect-
ing the passenger’s weight properly. As a result, the SRS front airbags for
the front passenger may not deploy in the event of a collision.
● Vehicles without smart entry & start sys-
tem: Do not attach any heavy, sharp or
hard objects such as keys or accesso-
ries to the key. The objects may restrict
the SRS knee airbag (if equipped) infla-
tion or be thrust into the driver’s seat
area by the force of the deploying air-
bag, thus causing a danger.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 50 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
51
1-1. For safe use
1
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
For safety and security
WARNING
■ Modification and disposal of SRS airbag system components
Do not dispose of your vehicle or perform any of the following modifications
without consulting any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly
qualified and equipped professional. The SRS airbags may malfunction or
deploy (inflate) accidentally, causing death or serious injury.
● Installation, removal, disassembly and repair of the SRS airbags
● Repairs, modifications, removal or replacement of the steering wheel,
instrument panel, dashboard, seats or seat upholstery, front, side and rear
pillars or roof side rails
● Repairs or modifications of the front fender, front bumper, or side of the
occupant compartment
● Installation of a grille guard (bull bars, kangaroo bar, etc.), snow plows or
winches
● Modifications to the vehicle’s suspension system
● Installation of electronic devices such as mobile two-way radios (RF-trans-
mitter) and CD players
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 51 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
52
1-1. For safe use
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■ If the SRS airbags deploy (inflate)
● Slight abrasions, burns, bruising etc., may be sustained from SRS airbags,
due to the extremely high speed deployment (inflation) by hot gases.
● A loud noise and white powder will be emitted.
● Vehicles without SRS curtain shield airbags: Parts of the airbag module
(steering wheel hub, airbag cover and inflator) as well as the front seats may
be hot for several minutes. The airbag itself may also be hot.
● Vehicles with SRS curtain shield airbags: Parts of the airbag module (steer-
ing wheel hub, airbag cover and inflator) as well as the front seats, parts of
the front and rear pillars, and roof side rails, may be hot for several minutes.
The airbag itself may also be hot.
● The windshield may crack.
● Vehicles with ERA-GLONASS: If the SRS airbags deploy, the system is
designed to send an emergency call to the Public Safety Answering Point
(PSAP), notifying them of the vehicle’s location (without needing to push the
“SOS” button) and an agent will attempt to speak with the occupants to
ascertain the level of emergency and assistance required. If the occupants
are unable to communicate, the agent automatically treats the call as an
emergency and helps to dispatch the necessary emergency services.
(→P. 4 8 3)
■ SRS airbag deployment conditions (SRS front airbags)
● The SRS front airbags will deploy in the event of an impact that exceeds the
set threshold level (the level of force corresponding to an approximately 20 -
30 km/h [12 - 18 mph] frontal collision with a fixed wall that does not move or
deform).
However, this threshold velocity will be considerably higher in the following
situations:
•If the vehicle strikes an object, such as a parked vehicle or sign pole,
which can move or deform on impact
•If the vehicle is involved in an underride collision, such as a collision in
which the front of the vehicle “underrides”, or goes under, the bed of a
truck
● Depending on the type of collision, it is possible that only the seat belt pre-
tensioners will activate.
● Vehicles with front passenger occupant classification system: The SRS front
airbags for the front passenger will not activate if there is no passenger sit-
ting in the front passenger seat. However, the SRS front airbags for the front
passenger may deploy if luggage is put in the seat, even if the seat is unoc-
cupied.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 52 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
53
1-1. For safe use
1
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
For safety and security
■ SRS airbag deployment conditions (SRS side and curtain shield airbags)
● The SRS side and curtain shield airbags will deploy in the event of an
impact that exceeds the set threshold level (the level of force corresponding
to the impact force produced by an approximately 1500 kg [3300 lb.] vehicle
colliding with the vehicle cabin from a direction perpendicular to the vehicle
orientation at an approximate speed of 20 - 30 km/h [12 - 18 mph]).
● The SRS side and curtain shield airbags may also deploy in the event of a
severe frontal collision.
■ Conditions under which the SRS airbags may deploy (inflate), other than
a collision
The SRS front airbags, SRS side and curtain shield airbags may also deploy
if a serious impact occurs to the underside of your vehicle. Some examples
are shown in the illustration.
■ Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbags (SRS front air-
bags)
The SRS front airbags do not generally inflate if the vehicle is involved in a
side or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low-speed frontal
collision. But, whenever a collision of any type causes sufficient forward
deceleration of the vehicle, deployment of the SRS front airbags may occur.
● Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or hard
surface
● Falling into or jumping over a deep hole
● Landing hard or falling
● Collision from the side
● Collision from the rear
● Vehicle rollover
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 53 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
54
1-1. For safe use
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■ Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbags
(SRS side and curtain shield airbags)
The SRS side and curtain shield airbags may not activate if the vehicle is
subjected to a collision from the side at certain angles, or a collision to the
side of the vehicle body other than the passenger compartment.
The SRS side and curtain shield airbags do not generally inflate if the vehicle
is involved in a rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low-speed
side or low-speed frontal collision.
■ When to contact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another
duly qualified and equipped professional
In the following cases, the vehicle will require inspection and/or repair. Con-
tact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and
equipped professional as soon as possible.
● Any of the SRS airbags have been inflated.
● Collision from the side to the vehicle
body other than the passenger compart-
ment
● Collision from the side at an angle
● Collision from the rear
● Vehicle rollover
● The front of the vehicle is damaged or
deformed, or was involved in an acci-
dent that was not severe enough to
cause the SRS airbags to inflate.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 54 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
55
1-1. For safe use
1
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
For safety and security
● Vehicles with SRS side and curtain
shield airbags: A portion of a door or its
surrounding area is damaged or
deformed, or the vehicle was involved in
an accident that was not severe enough
to cause the SRS side and curtain shield
airbags to inflate.
● Vehicles without SRS driver’s knee air-
bag: The pad section of the steering
wheel or dashboard near the front pas-
senger airbag is scratched, cracked, or
otherwise damaged.
Vehicles with SRS driver ’s knee airbag:
The pad section of the steering wheel,
dashboard near the front passenger air-
bag cover or lower portion of the instru-
ment panel is scratched, cracked, or
otherwise damaged.
● Vehicles with SRS side airbags: The sur-
face of the seats with the side airbag is
scratched, cracked, or otherwise dam-
aged.
● Vehicles with SRS curtain shield air-
bags: The portion of the front pillars, rear
pillars or roof side rail garnishes (pad-
ding) containing the curtain shield air-
bags inside is scratched, cracked, or
otherwise damaged.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 55 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
56
1-1. For safe use
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Exhaust gas precautions
Harmful substance to the human body is included in exhaust
gases if inhaled.
WARNING
Exhaust gases include harmful carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause exhaust gases enter the vehicle and may lead to
an accident caused by light-headedness, or may lead to death or a serious
health hazard.
■ Important points while driving
If you smell exhaust gases in the vehicle, open the windows and have the
vehicle inspected at any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another
duly qualified and equipped professional as soon as possible.
■ When parking
● If the vehicle is in a poorly ventilated area or a closed area, such as a
garage, stop the engine.
● Do not leave the vehicle with the engine running for a long time.
If such a situation cannot be avoided, park the vehicle in an open space
and ensure that exhaust fumes do not enter the vehicle interior.
● Do not leave the engine running in an area with snow build-up, or where it
is snowing. If snowbanks build up around the vehicle while the engine is
running, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle.
■ Exhaust pipe
The exhaust system needs to be checked periodically. If there is a hole or
crack caused by corrosion, damage to a joint or abnormal exhaust noise, be
sure to have the vehicle inspected and repaired by any authorized Toyota
dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 56 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
57
1-2. Child safety
1
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
For safety and security
Front passenger occupant classification
system
∗
SRS warning light
Seat belt reminder light
“PASSENGER AIR BAG” indicator
Vehicles without smart entry & start system: The ON indicator light turns on
when the airbag system is on (only when the engine switch is in the “ON”
position).
Vehicles with smart entry & start system: The ON indicator light turns on
when the airbag system is on (only when the engine switch is in IGNITION
ON mode).
∗: If equipped
Your vehicle is equipped with a front passenger occupant classi-
fication system. This system detects the conditions of the front
passenger seat and activates or deactivates the devices for the
front passenger.
1
2
3
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 57 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
58
1-2. Child safety
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■ Adult*
1
■ Child*
4
or child restraint system*
5
Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant classi-
fication system
Indicator/
warning light
“PASSENGER AIR BAG” indicator ON indicator
SRS warning light Off
Seat belt reminder light
Off
*
2
or
flashing
*
3
Devices
Front passenger airbag
Activated
Side airbag on the front passenger seat
Curtain shield airbag in the front
passenger side
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner
Indicator/
warning light
“PASSENGER AIR BAG” indicator
OFF
indicator
*
6
SRS warning light Off
Seat belt reminder light
Off*
2
or
flashing*
3
Devices
Front passenger airbag Deactivated
Side airbag on the front passenger seat
Activated
Curtain shield airbag in the front
passenger side
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 58 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
59
1-2. Child safety
1
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
For safety and security
■ Unoccupied
■ There is a malfunction in the system
Indicator/
warning light
“PASSENGER AIR BAG” indicator Not illuminated
SRS warning light
Off
Seat belt reminder light
Devices
Front passenger airbag Deactivated
Side airbag on the front passenger seat
Activated
Curtain shield airbag in the front
passenger side
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner
Activated
*
7
or
deactivated
*
8
Indicator/
warning light
“PASSENGER AIR BAG” indicator OFF indicator
SRS warning light On
Seat belt reminder light flashing
Devices
Front passenger airbag Deactivated
Side airbag on the front passenger seat
Activated
Curtain shield airbag in the front
passenger side
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 59 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
60
1-2. Child safety
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
*
1
:The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller
adult sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her
as a child depending on his/her physique and posture.
*
2
:In the event the front passenger is wearing a seat belt.
*
3
:In the event the front passenger does not wear a seat belt.
*
4
:When a larger child who has outgrown a child restraint system sits in the
front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her as an adult
depending on his/her physique or posture.
*
5
:For the child’s safety, install the child restraint system to a rear seat.
When it is unavoidable, a child restraint system can be installed on the
front passenger seat. A rear-facing child restraint system should be
installed when “OFF” of the “PASSENGER AIR BAG” indicator is illumi-
nated. (→P. 65 )
*
6
:In case the indicator light is not illuminated, consult this manual on how to
install the child restraint system properly. (→P. 6 5 )
*
7
:In the event of a side collision.
*
8
:In the event of a frontal collision.
WARNING
■ Front passenger occupant classification system precautions
Observe the following precautions regarding the front passenger occupant
classification system.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
● Wear the seat belt properly.
● Make sure the front passenger’s seat belt plate has not been left inserted
into the buckle before someone sits in the front passenger seat.
● Do not apply a heavy load to the front passenger seat or equipment (e.g.
seatback pocket or armrest).
● Do not put weight on the front passenger seat by putting your hands or
feet on the front passenger seat seatback from the rear passenger seat.
● Do not let a rear passenger lift the front passenger seat with their feet or
press on the seatback with their legs.
● Do not put objects under the front passenger seat.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 60 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
61
1-2. Child safety
1
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
For safety and security
WARNING
■ Front passenger occupant classification system precautions
● Do not recline the front passenger seatback so far that it touches a rear
seat. This may cause “OFF” of the “PASSENGER AIR BAG” indicator to
be illuminated, which indicates that the SRS airbags for the front passen-
ger will not activate in the event of a severe accident. If the seatback
touches the rear seat, return the seatback to a position where it does not
touch the rear seat. Keep the front passenger seatback as upright as pos-
sible when the vehicle is moving. Reclining the seatback excessively may
lessen the effectiveness of the seat belt system.
● If an adult sits in the front passenger seat, “ON” of the “PASSENGER AIR
BAG” indicator is illuminated. If “OFF” of the “PASSENGER AIR BAG” indi-
cator is illuminated, ask the passenger to sit up straight, well back in the
seat, feet on the floor, and with the seat belt worn correctly. If “OFF” of the
“PASSENGER AIR BAG” indicator still remains illuminated, either ask the
passenger to move to the rear seat, or if that is not possible, move the
front passenger seat fully rearward.
● When it is unavoidable to install a child restraint system on the front pas-
senger seat, install the child restraint system on the front passenger seat
in the proper order. (→P. 6 5)
● Do not modify or remove the front seats.
● Do not kick the front passenger seat or subject it to severe impact. Other-
wise, the SRS warning light may come on to indicate a malfunction of the
front passenger occupant classification system. In this case, contact any
authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and
equipped professional immediately.
● Child restraint systems installed on the rear seat should not contact the
front seatbacks.
● Do not use a seat accessory, such as a cushion and seat cover, that cov-
ers the seat cushion surface.
● Do not modify or replace the upholstery of the front seat.
● When it is unavoidable to install a rear-facing child restraint system on the
front passenger seat, do not release the seat belt while the vehicle is mov-
ing. Doing so may cause the airbag system to be on.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 61 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
62
1-2. Child safety
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Airbag manual on-off system
∗
“PASSENGER AIR BAG” indi-
cator
Vehicles without smart entry & start
system: The ON indicator light
turns on when the airbag system is
on (only when the engine switch is
in the “ON” position).
Vehicles with smart entry & start
system: The ON indicator light
turns on when the airbag system is
on (only when the engine switch is
in IGNITION ON mode).
Airbag manual on-off switch
∗: If equipped
This system deactivates the front passenger airbag.
Only deactivate the airbag when using a child restraint system
on the front passenger seat.
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 62 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
63
1-2. Child safety
1
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
For safety and security
Vehicles without smart entry &
start system:
Insert the key into the cylinder and
turn to the “OFF” position.
The OFF indicator light turns on
(only when the engine switch is in
the “ON” position).
Vehicles with smart entry & start
system:
Insert the mechanical key into the cylinder and rotate to the “OFF”
position.
The OFF indicator light turns on (only when the engine switch is in
IGNITION ON mode).
■ “PASSENGER AIR BAG” indicator lights information
If any of the following problems occur, it is possible that there is a malfunction
in the system. Have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Toyota dealer or
repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional.
● Neither “ON” nor “OFF” comes on.
● The indicator light does not change when the airbag manual on-off switch is
switched to “ON” or “OFF”.
Deactivating the front seat passenger airbag
WARNING
■ When installing a child restraint system
For safety reasons, always install the child restraint system in a rear seat. In
the event that the rear seat cannot be used, the front seat can be used as
long as the airbag manual on-off system is set to “OFF”.
If the airbag manual on-off system is left on, the strong impact of the airbag
deployment (inflation) may cause serious injury or even death.
■ When a child restraint system is not installed on the front passenger
seat
Ensure that the airbag manual on-off system is set to “ON”.
If it is left off, the airbag may not deploy in the event of an accident, which
may result in serious injury or even death.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 63 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
64
1-2. Child safety
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Riding with children
● It is recommended that children sit in the rear seats (if equipped) to
avoid accidental contact with the shift lever, wiper switch etc.
● Use the rear door child-protector lock (double-cab models only) or
the window lock switch (vehicles with power windows) to avoid chil-
dren opening the door while driving or operating the power window
accidentally.
● Do not let small children operate equipment which may catch or
pinch body parts, such as the power window (if equipped), hood,
tailgate (if equipped), seats etc.
Observe the following precautions when children are in the vehi-
cle.
Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child, until the
child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat
belt.
WARNING
Never leave children unattended in the vehicle, and never allow children to
have or use the key.
Children may be able to start the vehicle or shift the vehicle into neutral.
There is also a danger that children may injure themselves by playing with
the windows or other features of the vehicle. In addition, heat build-up or
extremely cold temperatures inside the vehicle can be fatal to children.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 64 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
65
1-2. Child safety
1
For safety and security
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Child restraint systems
Points to remember................................................................. P. 65
Child restraint system ............................................................. P. 67
When using a child restraint system ....................................... P. 70
Child restraint system installation method
•Fixed with a seat belt (except for Kazakhstan)................... P. 73
•Fixed with a seat belt (for Kazakhstan)................................P. 82
•Fixed with an ISOFIX rigid anchor
(if equipped except for Kazakhstan).................................... P. 89
•Fixed with an ISOFIX rigid anchor (for Kazakhstan)............P. 97
•Using an anchor bracket (for top strap) (if equipped)........ P. 104
● Prioritize and observe the warnings, as well as the laws and regula-
tions for child restraint systems.
● Choose a child restraint system that suits your vehicle and is appro-
priate to the age and size of the child.
● Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child until the child
becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt.
Before installing a child restraint system in the vehicle, there are
precautions that need to be observed, different types of child
restraint systems, as well as installation methods, etc., written in
this manual.
● Use a child restraint system when riding with a small child that
can not properly use a seat belt. For the child’s safety, install the
child restraint system to a rear seat. Be sure to follow the installa-
tion method that is in the operation manual enclosed with the
restraint system.
● Except for Kazakhstan: The use of a Toyota genuine child
restraint system is recommended, as it is safer to use in this vehi-
cle. Toyota genuine child restraint systems are made specifically
for Toyota vehicles. They can be purchased at a Toyota dealer.
Table of contents
Points to remember
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 65 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
66
1-2. Child safety
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
WARNING
■ When a child is riding
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
● For effective protection in automobile accidents and sudden stops, a child
must be properly restrained, using a seat belt or child restraint system
depending on the age and size of the child.
● To y o ta str on gl y urg es the u se of a pr op er chi l d re st ra in t sys te m th at co n-
forms to the size of the child, installed on the rear seat. According to acci-
dent statistics, the child is safer when properly restrained in the rear seat
than in the front seat.
● Holding a child in your or someone else’s arms is not a substitute for a
child restraint system. In an accident, the child can be crushed against the
windshield or between the holder and the interior of the vehicle.
■ Handling the child restraint system
If the child restraint system is not properly fixed in place, the child or other
passengers may be seriously injured or even killed in the event of sudden
braking, sudden swerving, or an accident.
● If the vehicle were to receive a strong impact from an accident, etc., it is
possible that the child restraint system has damage that is not readily visi-
ble. In such cases, do not reuse the restraint system.
● Depending on the child restraint system, installation may be difficult or
impossible. In those cases, check whether the child restraint system is
suitable for installment in the vehicle. (→P. 7 3, 8 2 , 8 9 , 9 7) B e s ur e t o i ns ta ll
and observe the usage rules after carefully reading the child restraint sys-
tem fixing method in this manual, as well as the operation manual
enclosed with the child restraint system.
● Keep the child restraint system properly secured on the seat even if it is
not in use. Do not store the child restraint system unsecured in the pas-
senger compartment.
● If it is necessary to detach the child restraint system, remove it from the
vehicle.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 66 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
67
1-2. Child safety
1
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
For safety and security
Install the available child restraint system in vehicle upon confirming
the following items.
■ Standards for child restraint systems
Use a child restraint system that conforms to ECE R44
*
1
or
ECE R129
*
1, 2
.
The following approval mark is displayed on child restraint systems
which are conformed.
Check for an approval mark attached to the child restraint system.
Example of the displayed regu-
lation number
ECE R44 approval mark
*
3
The weight range of the child
who is applicable for an
ECE R44 approval mark is
indicated.
ECE R129 approval mark
*
3
The height range of the child
who is applicable as well as
available weights for an
ECE R129 approval mark is
indicated.
*
1
:ECE R44 and ECE R129 are U.N. regulations for child restraint sys-
tems.
*
2
:The child restraint systems mentioned in the table may not be available
outside of the EU area.
*
3
:The displayed mark may differ depending on the product.
Child restraint system
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 67 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
68
1-2. Child safety
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■
Mass group (ECE R44 only)
This Mass group table is required when confirming the child
restraint system compatibility. Confirm in accordance with the child
restraint system compatibility table. (→P. 7 3 , 8 2 , 9 1 , 99 ).
The child restraint system which conforms to the standard of
ECE R44 is categorized into 5 groups according to the weight of the
child.
*:The age range is a standard approximation. Choose according to the
weight of the child.
Mass group Child weight Reference age*
Group 0 until 10 kg (22 lb.) about 9 months
Group 0+ until 13 kg (28 lb.) about 1.5 years
Group I
9 - 18 kg
(20 to 39 lb.)
from 9 months - about 4 years
Group II
15 - 25 kg
(34 to 55 lb.)
from 3 years - about 7 years
Group III
22 - 36 kg
(49 to 79 lb.)
from 6 years - about 12 years
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 68 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
69
1-2. Child safety
1
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
For safety and security
■ Types of child restraint system installation methods
Confirm with the operation manual enclosed with the child restraint
system about the instruction of the child restraint system.
Installation method Page
Seat belt attach-
ment
P. 7 3 , 8 2
ISOFIX rigid anchor
attachment
P. 8 9 , 9 7
Anchor brackets
(for top strap)
attachment
P. 1 04
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 69 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
70
1-2. Child safety
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
When using a child restraint system
WARNING
■ When using a child restraint system
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
● Vehicles with front passenger occupant classification system: Never use a
rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat when “ON”
of the “PASSENGER AIR BAG” indicator is illuminated. (→P. 5 7 )
The force of the rapid inflation of the front passenger airbag can cause
death or serious injury to children in the event of an accident.
● Vehicles without front passenger
occupant classification system or airbag
manual on-off switch: Never use a rear-
facing child restraint system on the front
passenger seat.
The force of the rapid inflation of the
front passenger airbag can cause death
or serious injury to children in the event
of an accident.
● Vehicles with airbag manual on-off
switch: Never use a rear-facing child
restraint system on the front passenger
seat when the airbag manual on-off
switch is on. (→P. 62 )
The force of the rapid inflation of the
front passenger airbag can cause death
or serious injury to children in the event
of an accident.
● On some models: There is a label(s) on
the passenger side sun visor, indicating
it is forbidden to attach a rear-facing
child restraint system to the front
passenger seat.
Details of the label(s) are shown in the
illustration below. The label type B
includes information written in the
language of your country.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 70 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
71
1-2. Child safety
1
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
For safety and security
WARNING
Type A
Type B
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 71 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
72
1-2. Child safety
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
WARNING
■ When using a child restraint system
● Vehicles with SRS side and curtain shield airbags: Do not allow the child to
lean his/her head or any part of his/her body against the door or the area
of the seat, front or rear pillars, or roof side rails from which the SRS side
airbags or SRS curtain shield airbags deploy even if the child is seated in
the child restraint system. It is dangerous if the SRS side airbags and cur-
tain shield airbags inflate, and the impact could cause death or serious
injury to the child.
● When a junior seat is installed, always ensure that the shoulder belt is
positioned across the center of the child’s shoulder. The belt should be
kept away from the child’s neck, but not so that it could fall off the child’s
shoulder.
● Use child restraint system suitable to the age and size of the child and
install it to the rear seat.
● Vehicles with SRS front passenger air-
bag: Only put a forward-facing child
restraint system on the front seat when
unavoidable. When installing a forward-
facing child restraint on the front pas-
senger seat, move the seat as far back
as possible. Failing to do so may result
in death or serious injury if the airbags
deploy (inflate).
● Double-cab models: If the driver’s seat
interferes with the child restraint system
and prevents it from being attached cor-
rectly, attach the child restraint system
to the right-hand rear seat (left-hand
drive vehicles) or the left-hand rear seat
(right-hand drive vehicles). (→P. 79 , 93 )
● Double-cab models: Adjust the front
passenger seat so that it does not inter-
fere with the child restraint system.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 72 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
73
1-2. Child safety
1
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
For safety and security
◆ Confirming the possible installation seating positions and the
Mass Group for the seat belt installation type child restraint
systems.
Confirm the corresponding [Mass group] from the weight of the
child (→P. 6 8 )
(Ex. 1) When the weight is 12 kg, [Mass group 0+]
(Ex. 2) When the weight is 15 kg, [Mass group I]
Confirm and select the appropriate possible seating position for
the child restraint system and the corresponding type of system
from the [Child restraint systems fastened with SEAT BELT -
Compatibility and Recommended child restraint systems table].
(→P. 7 3 )
◆ Child restraint systems fastened with SEAT BELT - Compatibil-
ity and Recommended child restraint systems table
If your child restraint system is of “universal” category, you can
install it on the positions mentioned by U or UF in the table below
(UF is for forward-facing child restraint systems only). Child
restraint systems category and mass group can be found in the
child restraint system manual.
If your child restraint system is not of the “universal” category (or if
you cannot find information in the table below), please refer to the
child restraint system “vehicle list” for compatibility information or
ask the retailer of your child seat.
Child restraint system fixed with a seat belt (except for
Kazakhstan)
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 73 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
74
1-2. Child safety
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Single-cab models
Key of letters inserted in the above table:
X: Not suitable seat position for children in this mass group.
U: Suitable for “universal” category child restraint systems approved
for use in this mass group.
UF: Suitable for forward-facing “universal” category child restraint sys-
tems approved for use in this mass group.
L: Suitable for “specific vehicles”, “restricted”, or “semi-universal”,
category child restraint systems approved for use in this mass
group.
*
1
:Adjust the seatback angle to the most upright position. Move the front seat
fully rearward. If the passenger seat height can be adjusted, move it to the
upper most position.
Mass groups
Seating position
Recommended
Child Restraint
Systems
Front passenger seat
Vehicles with front
passenger occupant
classification system
Passenger airbag
indicator light
ON OFF*
3
0
Up to 10 kg
(22 lb.)
X
U
*
1
L*
1
“TOYOTA G 0+, BABYSAFE
PLUS”
“TOYOTA MINI”
“TOYOTA G 0+, BABYSAFE
PLUS with SEAT BELT
FIXATION, BASE PLATFORM”
0+
Up to 13 kg
(28 lb.)
X
U
*
1
L*
1
I
9 to 18 kg
(20 to 39 lb.)
Rearward-
facing —
X
U
*
1, 2
“TOYOTA DUO+”
Forward-
facing —
UF
*
1, 2
II, III
15 to 36 kg
(34 to 79 lb.)
UF*
1, 2
U*
1, 2
“TOYOTA KIDFIX XP SICT”
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 74 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
75
1-2. Child safety
1
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
For safety and security
*
2
:If the head restraint interferes with your child restraint system, and the
head restraint can be removed, remove the head restraint. Otherwise, put
the head restraint in the upper most position.
*
3
:When it is unavoidable to install a rear-facing child restraint system on the
front passenger seat, a child restraint system can be installed if the PAS-
SENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is lit.
Smart-cab models
Key of letters inserted in the above table:
X: Not suitable seat position for children in this mass group.
U: Suitable for “universal” category child restraint systems approved
for use in this mass group.
Mass groups
Seating position
Recommended
Child Restraint
Systems
Front
passenger
seat
Rear seat
Vehicles with front
passenger occupant
classification system
Passenger airbag
indicator light
ON OFF*
3
0
Up to 10 kg
(22 lb.)
X
U
*
1
L*
1
X
“TOYOTA G 0+, BABY
SAFE PLUS”
“TOYOTA MINI”
“TOYOTA G 0+, BABY
SAFE PLUS with SEAT
BELT FIXATION, BASE
PLATFORM”
0+
Up to 13 kg
(28 lb.)
X
U
*
1
L*
1
X
I
9 to 18 kg
(20 to 39 lb.)
Rearward-
facing
—
X
U*
1, 2
X
“TOYOTA DUO+”
Forward-
facing
—
UF
*
1, 2
II, III
15 to 36 kg
(34 to 79 lb.)
UF
*
1, 2
U*
1, 2
X
“TOYOTA KIDFIX XP
SICT”
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 75 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
76
1-2. Child safety
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
UF: Suitable for forward-facing “universal” category child restraint sys-
tems approved for use in this mass group.
L: Suitable for “specific vehicles”, “restricted”, or “semi-universal”,
category child restraint systems approved for use in this mass
group.
*
1
:Adjust the seatback angle to the most upright position. Move the front seat
fully rearward. If the passenger seat height can be adjusted, move it to the
upper most position.
*
2
:If the head restraint interferes with your child restraint system, and the
head restraint can be removed, remove the head restraint. Otherwise, put
the head restraint in the upper most position.
*
3
:When it is unavoidable to install a rear-facing child restraint system on the
front passenger seat, a child restraint system can be installed if the PAS-
SENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is lit.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 76 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
77
1-2. Child safety
1
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
For safety and security
Double-cab models
Mass
groups
Seating position
Recommended
Child
Restraint
Systems
Front passenger seat Rear seat
Vehicles with
airbag manual
on-off switch
Vehicles with
front passenger
occupant
classification
system
Out-
board
Center
Airbag manual
on-off switch
Passenger
airbag
indicator light
ON OFF ON OFF*
3
0
Up to 10 kg
(22 lb.)
X
U
*
1
L*
1
X
U
*
1
L*
1
U
L
X
“TOYOTA G
0+, BABY
SAFE PLUS”
“TOYOTA
MINI”
“TOYOTA G
0+, BABY
SAFE PLUS
with SEAT
BELT
FIXATION,
BASE
PLATFORM”
0+
Up to 13 kg
(28 lb.)
X
U
*
1
L*
1
X
U
*
1
L*
1
U
L
X
I
9 to 18 kg
(20 to 39
lb.)
Rearward-
facing
—
X
U
*
1, 2
Rearward-
facing
—
X
U
*
1, 2
U*
2
X
“TOYOTA
DUO+”
Forward-
facing
—
UF*
1, 2
Forward-
facing
—
UF*
1, 2
II, III
15 to 36 kg
(34 to 79
lb.)
UF
*
1, 2
U*
1, 2
UF*
1, 2
U*
1, 2
U*
2
X
“TOYOTA
KIDFIX XP
SICT”
(Can be fit-
ted to the
vehicle’s
ISOFIX
mountings.)
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 77 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
78
1-2. Child safety
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Key of letters inserted in the above table:
X: Not suitable seat position for children in this mass group.
U: Suitable for “universal” category child restraint systems approved
for use in this mass group.
UF: Suitable for forward-facing “universal” category child restraint sys-
tems approved for use in this mass group.
L: Suitable for “specific vehicles”, “restricted”, or “semi-universal”,
category child restraint systems approved for use in this mass
group.
*
1
:Adjust the seatback angle to the most upright position. Move the front seat
fully rearward. If the passenger seat height can be adjusted, move it to the
upper most position.
*
2
:If the head restraint interferes with your child restraint system, and the
head restraint can be removed, remove the head restraint. Otherwise, put
the head restraint in the upper most position.
*
3
:When it is unavoidable to install a rear-facing child restraint system on the
front passenger seat, a child restraint system can be installed if the PAS-
SENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is lit.
Double-cab models: When securing some types of child restraint sys-
tems in rear seat, it may not be possible to properly use the seat belts
in positions next to the child restraint without interfering with it or
affecting seat belt effectiveness. Be sure your seat belt fits snugly
across your shoulder and low on your hips. If it does not, or if it inter-
feres with the child restraint, move to a different position. Failure to do
so may result in death or serious injury.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 78 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
79
1-2. Child safety
1
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
For safety and security
The child restraint systems mentioned in the table may not be avail-
able outside the EU area.
● Double-cab models: When installing a child restraint in the rear
seats, adjust the front seat so that it does not interfere with the child
or child restraint system.
● When installing a child seat with support base, if the child seat inter-
feres with the seatback when latching it into the support base,
adjust the seatback rearward until there is no interference.
● When installing a forward-fac-
ing child seat, if there is a gap
between the child seat and the
seatback, adjust the seatback
angle until good contact is
achieved.
● If the seat belt shoulder anchor
is ahead of the child seat belt
guide, move the seat cushion
forward.
● When installing a junior seat, if the child in your child restraint sys-
tem is in a very upright position, adjust the seatback angle to the
most comfortable position. And if the seat belt shoulder anchor is
ahead of the child seat belt guide, move the seat cushion forward.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 79 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
80
1-2. Child safety
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
◆ Installing child restraint system using a seat belt
Install the child restraint system in accordance to the operation
manual enclosed with the child restraint system.
Front seat
Adjust the seatback angle to the most upright position. Move the
front seat fully rearward. (→P. 1 8 6 )
When it is unavoidable to install a rear-facing child restraint sys-
tem on the front passenger seat, a child restraint system can be
installed if the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is lit.
If the head restraint interferes with your child restraint system,
and the head restraint can be removed, remove the head
restraint. Otherwise, put the head restraint in the upper most
position. (→P. 1 9 1 )
Rear seat
If the head restraint interferes with your child restraint system,
and the head restraint can be removed, remove the head
restraint. Otherwise, put the head restraint in the upper most
position. (→P. 1 9 1 )
Run the seat belt through the child restraint system and insert the
plate into the buckle. Make sure that the belt is not twisted.
Securely fix the seat belt to the child restraint system in accor-
dance to the directions enclosed with the child restraint system.
If your child restraint system
is not equipped with a lock-
off (a seat belt locking fea-
ture), secure the child
restraint system using a lock-
ing clip.
After installing the child restraint system, rock it back and forth to
ensure that it is installed securely. (→P. 8 1 )
1
2
3
4
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 80 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
81
1-2. Child safety
1
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
For safety and security
◆ Removing a child restraint system installed with a seat belt
Press the buckle release button and fully retract the seat belt.
When releasing the buckle, the child restraint system may spring up due
to the rebound of the seat cushion. Release the buckle while holding
down the child restraint system.
Since the seat belt automatically reels itself, slowly return it to the stow-
ing position.
■ When installing a child restraint system
You ma y ne e d a l ockin g clip t o instal l th e chil d r estra int sys tem. Follow th e
instructions provided by the manufacturer of the system. If your child restraint
system does not provide a locking clip, you can purchase the following item
from any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and
equipped professional: Locking clip for child restraint system
(Part No. 73119-22010)
■ When removing the head restraint to install a child restraint system
After removing the child restraint system, make sure to reinstall the head
restraint.
WARNING
■ When installing a child restraint system
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
● Do not allow children to play with the seat belt. If the seat belt becomes
twisted around a child’s neck, it may lead to choking or other serious inju-
ries that could result in death. If this occurs and the buckle cannot be
unfastened, scissors should be used to cut the belt.
● Ensure that the belt and plate are securely locked and the seat belt is not
twisted.
● Shake the child restraint system left and right, and forward and backward
to ensure that it has been securely installed.
● After securing a child restraint system, never adjust the seat.
● When a junior seat is installed, always ensure that the shoulder belt is
positioned across the center of the child’s shoulder. The belt should be
kept away from the child’s neck, but not so that it could fall off the child’s
shoulder.
● Follow all installation instructions provided by the child restraint system
manufacturer.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 81 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
82
1-2. Child safety
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■
Child restraint system compatibility for various seating posi-
tions
The child restraint system suitability table (→P. 8 2 ) , w i th s y m b ol s ,
displays the types of usable child restraint systems and possible
seating position installation for the child restraint system owned by
the customer. Confirm also in accordance with [Confirming the pos-
sible installation seating positions and the Mass Group for the seat
belt installation type child restraint systems].
◆ Confirming the possible installation seating positions and the
Mass Group for the seat belt installation type child restraint
systems
Confirm the corresponding [Mass group] from the weight of the
child (→P. 6 8 )
(Ex. 1) When the weight is 12 kg, [Mass group 0+]
(Ex. 2) When the weight is 15 kg, [Mass group I]
Confirm and select the appropriate possible seating position for
the child restraint system and the corresponding type of system
from the [Child restraint systems fastened with SEAT BELT -
Compatibility table]. (→P. 8 2 )
◆ Child restraint systems fastened with SEAT BELT - Compatibil-
ity table
If your child restraint system is of “universal” category, you can
install it on the positions mentioned by U or UF in the table below
(UF is for forward-facing child restraint systems only). Child
restraint systems category and mass group can be found in the
child restraint system manual.
If your child restraint system is not of the “universal” category (or if
you cannot find information in the table below), please refer to the
child restraint system “vehicle list” for compatibility information or
ask the retailer of your child seat.
Child restraint system fixed with a seat belt (for Kazakhstan)
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 82 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
83
1-2. Child safety
1
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
For safety and security
Single-cab models
Key of letters inserted in the above table:
X: Not suitable seat position for children in this mass group.
U: Suitable for “universal” category child restraint systems approved
for use in this mass group.
UF: Suitable for forward-facing “universal” category child restraint sys-
tems approved for use in this mass group.
*
1
:Adjust the seatback angle to the most upright position. Move the front
seat fully rearward. If the passenger seat height can be adjusted, move it
to the upper most position.
*
2
:If the head restraint interferes with your child restraint system, and the
head restraint can be removed, remove the head restraint. Otherwise, put
the head restraint in the upper most position.
Mass groups
Seating position
Front passenger seat
0
Up to 10 kg
(22 lb.)
X
0+
Up to 13 kg
(28 lb.)
X
I
9 to 18 kg
(20 to 39 lb.)
Rearward-facing
X
Forward-facing
UF
*
1, 2
II, III
15 to 36 kg
(34 to 79 lb.)
UF*
1, 2
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 83 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
84
1-2. Child safety
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Smart-cab models
Key of letters inserted in the above table:
X: Not suitable seat position for children in this mass group.
U: Suitable for “universal” category child restraint systems approved
for use in this mass group.
UF: Suitable for forward-facing “universal” category child restraint sys-
tems approved for use in this mass group.
*
1
:Adjust the seatback angle to the most upright position. Move the front
seat fully rearward. If the passenger seat height can be adjusted, move it
to the upper most position.
*
2
:If the head restraint interferes with your child restraint system, and the
head restraint can be removed, remove the head restraint. Otherwise, put
the head restraint in the upper most position.
Mass groups
Seating position
Front passenger seat Rear seat
0
Up to 10 kg
(22 lb.)
X X
0+
Up to 13 kg
(28 lb.)
X X
I
9 to 18 kg
(20 to 39 lb.)
Rearward-facing
X
X
Forward-facing
UF
*
1, 2
II, III
15 to 36 kg
(34 to 79 lb.)
UF*
1, 2
X
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 84 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
85
1-2. Child safety
1
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
For safety and security
Double-cab models
Key of letters inserted in the above table:
X: Not suitable seat position for children in this mass group.
U: Suitable for “universal” category child restraint systems approved
for use in this mass group.
UF: Suitable for forward-facing “universal” category child restraint sys-
tems approved for use in this mass group.
*
1
:Adjust the seatback angle to the most upright position. Move the front
seat fully rearward. If the passenger seat height can be adjusted, move it
to the upper most position.
*
2
:If the head restraint interferes with your child restraint system, and the
head restraint can be removed, remove the head restraint. Otherwise, put
the head restraint in the upper most position.
Mass groups
Seating position
Front
passenger seat
Rear seat
Outboard Center
0
Up to 10 kg
(22 lb.)
X U X
0+
Up to 13 kg
(28 lb.)
X U X
I
9 to 18 kg
(20 to 39 lb.)
Rearward-
facing
X
U*
2
X
Forward-
facing
UF
*
1, 2
II, III
15 to 36 kg
(34 to 79 lb.)
UF*
1, 2
U*
2
X
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 85 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
86
1-2. Child safety
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Double-cab models: When securing some types of child restraint sys-
tems in rear seat, it may not be possible to properly use the seat belts
in positions next to the child restraint without interfering with it or
affecting seat belt effectiveness. Be sure your seat belt fits snugly
across your shoulder and low on your hips. If it does not, or if it inter-
feres with the child restraint, move to a different position. Failure to do
so may result in death or serious injury.
◆ Installing child restraint system using a seat belt
Install the child restraint system in accordance to the operation
manual enclosed with the child restraint system.
Front seat:
Adjust the seatback angle to the most upright position. Move the
front seat fully rearward. (→P. 1 8 6 )
If the head restraint interferes with your child restraint system,
and the head restraint can be removed, remove the head
restraint. Otherwise, put the head restraint in the upper most
position. (→P. 1 9 1 )
Rear seat:
If the head restraint interferes with your child restraint system,
and the head restraint can be removed, remove the head
restraint. Otherwise, put the head restraint in the upper most
position. (→P. 1 9 1 )
Run the seat belt through the
child restraint system and
insert the plate into the
buckle. Make sure that the
belt is not twisted. Securely
fix the seat belt to the child
restraint system in accor-
dance to the directions
enclosed with the child
restraint system.
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 86 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
87
1-2. Child safety
1
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
For safety and security
If your child restraint system
is not equipped with a lock-
off (a seat belt locking fea-
ture), secure the child
restraint system using a lock-
ing clip.
After installing the child restraint system, rock it back and forth to
ensure that it is installed securely. (→P. 8 8 )
◆ Removing a child restraint system installed with a seat belt
Press the buckle release button and fully retract the seat belt.
When releasing the buckle, the child restraint system may spring up due
to the rebound of the seat cushion. Release the buckle while holding
down the child restraint system.
Since the seat belt automatically reels itself, slowly return it to the stow-
ing position.
■ When installing a child restraint system
You ma y ne e d a l ockin g clip t o instal l th e chil d r estra int sys tem. Follow th e
instructions provided by the manufacturer of the system. If your child restraint
system does not provide a locking clip, you can purchase the following item
from any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and
equipped professional: Locking clip for child restraint system
(Part No. 73119-22010)
■ When removing the head restraint to install a child restraint system
After removing the child restraint system, make sure to reinstall the head
restraint.
3
4
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 87 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
88
1-2. Child safety
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
WARNING
■ When installing a child restraint system
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
● Do not allow children to play with the seat belt. If the seat belt becomes
twisted around a child’s neck, it may lead to choking or other serious inju-
ries that could result in death. If this occurs and the buckle cannot be
unfastened, scissors should be used to cut the belt.
● Ensure that the belt and plate are securely locked and the seat belt is not
twisted.
● Shake the child restraint system left and right, and forward and backward
to ensure that it has been securely installed.
● After securing a child restraint system, never adjust the seat.
● When a junior seat is installed, always ensure that the shoulder belt is
positioned across the center of the child’s shoulder. The belt should be
kept away from the child’s neck, but not so that it could fall off the child’s
shoulder.
● Follow all installation instructions provided by the child restraint system
manufacturer.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 88 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
89
1-2. Child safety
1
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
For safety and security
■ ISOFIX rigid anchors (ISOFIX child restraint system)
Lower anchors are provided for
the outboard rear seats. (Tags
displaying the location of the
anchors are attached to the
seats.)
Child restraint system fixed with an ISOFIX rigid anchor (if
equipped except for Kazakhstan)
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 89 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
90
1-2. Child safety
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■
Confirming the Mass group and Size class for ECE R44 ISOFIX
corresponding child restraint systems
Confirm the corresponding [Mass group] from the weight of the
child (→P. 6 8 )
(Ex. 1) When the weight is 12 kg, [Mass group 0+]
(Ex. 2) When the weight is 15 kg, [Mass group I]
Confirming Size class
Select the Size class corresponding to [Mass group] confirmed in
step from the [Child restraint systems fastened with ISOFIX
(ECE R44) - Compatibility and Recommended child restraint sys-
tems table] (→P. 91 )
*.
(Ex. 1) When [Mass group 0+], the corresponding size class is
[C], [D], [E].
(Ex. 2) When [Mass group I], the corresponding size class is [A],
[B], [B1], [C], [D].
*:However, listings that are marked with [X] can not be selected, despite
having the corresponding size class in the suitability table of the [Seat-
ing position]. Also, select the product designated by [Recommended
Child Restraint Systems] (→P. 9 2) , if t he l is ti ng i s m ar ke d w it h [I L] .
1
2
1
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 90 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
91
1-2. Child safety
1
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
For safety and security
■ Child restraint systems fastened with ISOFIX (ECE R44) - Com-
patibility and Recommended child restraint systems table
ISOFIX child restraint systems are divided in different “size class”.
According to this “size class”, you will be allowed to use it in the
vehicle seating position mentioned in the table below. To know your
child restraint system “size class” and “mass group”, please refer to
the child restraint system manual.
If your child restraint system has no “size class” (or if you cannot
find information in the table below), please refer to the child
restraint system “vehicle list” for compatibility information or ask the
retailer of your child seat.
Size class Description
AFull-height, forward-facing child restraint systems
BReduced-height forward-facing child restraint systems
B1 Reduced-height forward-facing child restraint systems
CFull-size rearward-facing child restraint systems
DReduced-size rearward-facing child restraint systems
ERearward-facing infant seat
FLeft lateral-facing (carrycot) infant seat
GRight lateral-facing (carrycot) infant seat
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 91 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
92
1-2. Child safety
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Double-cab models
Mass
groups
Size class
Seating position
Recommended
Child Restraint
Systems
Front
seat
Rear seat
Passen-
ger seat
Outboard
Center
Carrycot
FXXX
-
GXXX
0
Up to 10 kg
(22 lb.)
EXILX
“TOYOTA MINI”
“TOYOTA MIDI”
0+
Up to 13 kg
(28 lb.)
EXILX
DXILX
CXILX
I
9 to 18 kg
(20 to 39 lb.)
DXILX
-
CXILX
BX
IUF
*
IL*
X“TOYOTA MIDI”
B1 X
IUF
*
IL*
X
“TOYOTA DUO+”
“TOYOTA MIDI”
AX
IUF
*
IL*
X“TOYOTA MIDI”
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 92 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
93
1-2. Child safety
1
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
For safety and security
Key of letters inserted in the above table:
X: Not suitable seat position for ISOFIX child restraint systems in
this mass group and/or size class.
IUF: Suitable for ISOFIX forward-facing child restraint systems of “uni-
versal” category approved for use in this mass group.
IL: Suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems of the categories for
“specific vehicles”, “restricted”, or “semi-universal” approved for
use in this mass group.
*:If the head restraint interferes with your child restraint system, and the
head restraint can be removed, remove the head restraint. Otherwise, put
the head restraint in the upper most position.
When securing some types of child restraint systems in rear seat, it
may not be possible to properly use the seat belts in positions next to
the child restraint without interfering with it or affecting seat belt effec-
tiveness. Be sure your seat belt fits snugly across your shoulder and
low on your hips. If it does not, or if it interferes with the child restraint,
move to a different position. Failure to do so may result in death or
serious injury.
The child restraint systems mentioned in the table may not be avail-
able outside the EU area.
● When installing a child restraint in the rear seats, adjust the front
seat so that it does not interfere with the child or child restraint sys-
tem.
● When using a “TOYOTA MINI” or “TOYOTA MIDI”, adjust the sup-
port leg and ISOFIX connectors as follows:
Lock the ISOFIX connectors
where number 3 can be
seen.
Lock the support leg where 6
holes can be seen.
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 93 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
94
1-2. Child safety
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■
i-Size child restraint systems fastened with ISOFIX
(ECE R129) - Compatibility table
If your child restraint system is of “i-Size” category, you can install it
on the positions mentioned by i-U in the table below.
Child restraint system category can be found in the child restraint
system manual.
Double-cab models
Key of letters inserted in the above table:
X: Not suitable for use with i-Size child restraint systems.
i-U: Suitable for i-Size “universal” child restraint systems forward and
rearward facing.
*:If the head restraint interferes with your child restraint system, and the
head restraint can be removed, remove the head restraint. Otherwise, put
the head restraint in the upper most position.
When securing some types of child restraint systems in rear seat, it
may not be possible to properly use the seat belts in positions next to
the child restraint without interfering with it or affecting seat belt effec-
tiveness. Be sure your seat belt fits snugly across your shoulder and
low on your hips. If it does not, or if it interferes with the child restraint,
move to a different position. Failure to do so may result in death or
serious injury.
● When installing a child restraint in the rear seats, adjust the front
seat so that it does not interfere with the child or child restraint sys-
tem.
Seating position
Front seat Rear seat
Passenger seat Outboard Center
i-Size child
restraint systems
X i-U* X
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 94 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
95
1-2. Child safety
1
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
For safety and security
■ Installation with ISOFIX rigid anchor (ISOFIX child restraint
system)
Install the child restraint system in accordance to the operation
manual enclosed with the child restraint system.
If the head restraint interferes with your child restraint system,
and the head restraint can be removed, remove the head
restraint. Otherwise, put the head restraint in the upper most
position. (→P. 1 9 1 )
Check the positions of the
exclusive fixing bars, and
install the child restraint sys-
tem to the seat.
The bars are installed in the
clearance between the seat
cushion and seatback.
After installing the child restraint system, rock it back and forth to
ensure that it is installed securely. (→P. 8 1 )
1
2
3
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 95 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
96
1-2. Child safety
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■ When removing the head restraint to install a child restraint system
After removing the child restraint system, make sure to reinstall the head
restraint.
WARNING
■ When installing a child restraint system
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
● After securing a child restraint system, never adjust the seat.
● When using the lower anchors, be sure that there are no foreign objects
around the anchors and that the seat belt is not caught behind the child
restraint system.
● Follow all installation instructions provided by the child restraint system
manufacturer.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 96 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
97
1-2. Child safety
1
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
For safety and security
■ ISOFIX rigid anchors (ISOFIX child restraint system)
Lower anchors are provided for
the outboard rear seats. (Tags
displaying the location of the
anchors are attached to the
seats.)
■ Child restraint system compatibility for various seating posi-
tions
The child restraint system compatibility table (→P. 9 9 ) , w i t h s y m-
bols, displays the types of usable child restraint systems and possi-
ble seating position installation for the child restraint system owned
by the customer. Confirm in accordance with the listed Size class,
Anchor, as well as [Confirming the Mass group and Size class for
ECE R44 ISOFIX corresponding child restraint systems].
Child restraint system fixed with an ISOFIX rigid anchor (for
Kazakhstan)
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 97 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
98
1-2. Child safety
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■
Confirming the Mass group and Size class for ECE R44 ISOFIX
corresponding child restraint systems
Confirm the corresponding [Mass group] from the weight of the
child (→P. 6 8 )
(Ex. 1) When the weight is 12 kg, [Mass group 0+]
(Ex. 2) When the weight is 15 kg, [Mass group I]
Confirming Size class
Select the Size class corresponding to [Mass group] confirmed in
step from the [Child restraint systems fastened with ISOFIX
(ECE R44) - Compatibility table] (→P. 9 9)
*.
(Ex. 1) When [Mass group 0+], the corresponding size class is
[C], [D], [E].
(Ex. 2) When [Mass group I], the corresponding size class is [A],
[B], [B1], [C], [D].
*:However, listings that are marked with [X] can not be selected, despite
having the corresponding size class in the suitability table of the [Seat-
ing position].
1
2
1
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 98 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
99
1-2. Child safety
1
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
For safety and security
■ Child restraint systems fastened with ISOFIX (ECE R44) - Com-
patibility table
ISOFIX child restraint systems are divided in different “size class”.
According to this “size class”, you will be allowed to use it in the
vehicle seating position mentioned in the table below. To know your
child restraint system “size class” and “mass group”, please refer to
the child restraint system manual.
If your child restraint system has no “size class” (or if you cannot
find information in the table below), please refer to the child
restraint system “vehicle list” for compatibility information or ask the
retailer of your child seat.
Size class Description
AFull-height, forward-facing child restraint systems
BReduced-height forward-facing child restraint systems
B1 Reduced-height forward-facing child restraint systems
CFull-size rearward-facing child restraint systems
DReduced-size rearward-facing child restraint systems
ERearward-facing infant seat
FLeft lateral-facing (carrycot) infant seat
GRight lateral-facing (carrycot) infant seat
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 99 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
100
1-2. Child safety
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Double-cab models
Key of letters inserted in the above table:
X: Not suitable seat position for ISOFIX child restraint systems in
this mass group and/or size class.
IUF: Suitable for ISOFIX forward-facing child restraint systems of “uni-
versal” category approved for use in this mass group.
IL: Suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems of the categories for
“specific vehicles”, “restricted”, or “semi-universal” approved for
use in this mass group.
*:If the head restraint interferes with your child restraint system, and the
head restraint can be removed, remove the head restraint. Otherwise, put
the head restraint in the upper most position.
Mass groups Size class
Seating position
Front seat Rear seat
Passenger
seat
Outboard Center
Carrycot
FX X X
GX X X
0
Up to 10 kg
(22 lb.)
EX IL X
0+
Up to 13 kg
(28 lb.)
EX IL X
DX IL X
CX IL X
I
9 to 18 kg
(20 to 39 lb.)
DX IL X
CX IL X
BXIUF
* X
B1 X IUF* X
AXIUF* X
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 100 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
101
1-2. Child safety
1
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
For safety and security
When securing some types of child restraint systems in rear seat, it
may not be possible to properly use the seat belts in positions next to
the child restraint without interfering with it or affecting seat belt effec-
tiveness. Be sure your seat belt fits snugly across your shoulder and
low on your hips. If it does not, or if it interferes with the child restraint,
move to a different position. Failure to do so may result in death or
serious injury.
■ i-Size child restraint systems fastened with ISOFIX (ECE R129)
- Compatibility table
If your child restraint system is of “i-Size” category, you can install it
on the positions mentioned by i-U in the table below.
Child restraint system category can be found in the child restraint
system manual.
Double-cab models
Key of letters inserted in the above table:
X: Not suitable for use with i-Size child restraint systems.
i-U: Suitable for i-Size “universal” child restraint systems forward and
rearward facing.
*:If the head restraint interferes with your child restraint system, and the
head restraint can be removed, remove the head restraint. Otherwise, put
the head restraint in the upper most position.
Seating position
Front seat Rear seat
Passenger seat Outboard Center
i-Size child
restraint
systems
X
i-U
*
X
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 101 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
102
1-2. Child safety
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
When securing some types of child restraint systems in rear seat, it
may not be possible to properly use the seat belts in positions next to
the child restraint without interfering with it or affecting seat belt effec-
tiveness. Be sure your seat belt fits snugly across your shoulder and
low on your hips. If it does not, or if it interferes with the child restraint,
move to a different position. Failure to do so may result in death or
serious injury.
● When installing a child restraint in the rear seats, adjust the front
seat so that it does not interfere with the child or child restraint sys-
tem.
■ Installation with ISOFIX rigid anchor (ISOFIX child restraint
system)
Install the child restraint system in accordance to the operation
manual enclosed with the child restraint system.
If the head restraint interferes with your child restraint system,
and the head restraint can be removed, remove the head
restraint. Otherwise, put the head restraint in the upper most
position. (→P. 1 9 1 )
Check the positions of the
exclusive fixing bars, and
install the child restraint sys-
tem to the seat.
The bars are installed in the
clearance between the seat
cushion and seatback.
After installing the child restraint system, rock it back and forth to
ensure that it is installed securely. (→P. 8 8 )
1
2
3
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 102 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
103
1-2. Child safety
1
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
For safety and security
■ When removing the head restraint to install a child restraint system
After removing the child restraint system, make sure to reinstall the head
restraint.
WARNING
■ When installing a child restraint system
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
● After securing a child restraint system, never adjust the seat.
● When using the lower anchors, be sure that there are no foreign objects
around the anchors and that the seat belt is not caught behind the child
restraint system.
● Follow all installation instructions provided by the child restraint system
manufacturer.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 103 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
104
1-2. Child safety
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■
Anchor bracket (for top strap)
Anchor bracket are provided for the outboard rear seat.
Use anchor bracket when fixing
the top strap.
■ Fixing the top strap to the anchor bracket
Install the child restraint system in accordance to the operation
manual enclosed with the child restraint system.
Remove the head restraint.
Using an anchor bracket (for top strap) (if equipped)
Anchor bracket
Top str a p
1
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 104 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
105
1-2. Child safety
1
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
For safety and security
Pull up the anchor strap
router.
Route the top strap through
the anchor strap router as
shown in the illustration.
Latch the hook onto the
anchor bracket and tighten
the top strap.
Make sure the top strap is
securely latched. (→P. 8 1 )
■ When removing the head restraint to install a child restraint system
After removing the child restraint system, make sure to reinstall the head
restraint.
2
Anchor strap router
3
Anchor bracket
4
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 105 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
106
1-2. Child safety
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
WARNING
■ When installing a child restraint system
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
● Firmly attach the top strap.
● Do not attach the top strap to anything other than the anchor bracket.
● After securing a child restraint system, never adjust the seat.
● Follow all installation instructions provided by the child restraint system
manufacturer.
● When installing the child restraint system, do not install the head restraint.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 106 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
107
1
1-3. Theft deterrent system
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
For safety and security
Engine immobilizer system
∗
Vehicles without smart entry &
start system:
The indicator light flashes after
the key has been removed from
the engine switch to indicate that
the system is operating.
The indicator light stops flashing
after the registered key has been
inserted into the engine switch to
indicate that the system has been
canceled.
∗: If equipped
The vehicle’s keys have built-in transponder chips that prevent
the engine from starting if a key has not been previously regis-
tered in the vehicle’s on-board computer.
Never leave the keys inside the vehicle when you leave the vehi-
cle.
This system is designed to help prevent vehicle theft but does not
guarantee absolute security against all vehicle thefts.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 107 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
108
1-3. Theft deterrent system
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Vehicles with smart entry & start system:
The indicator light flashes after the engine switch has been turned off
to indicate that the system is operating.
The indicator light stops flashing after the engine switch has been
turned to ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode to indicate that the
system has been canceled.
■ System maintenance
The vehicle has a maintenance-free type engine immobilizer system.
■ Conditions that may cause the system to malfunction
● If the grip portion of the key is in contact with a metallic object
● If the key is in close proximity to or touching a key to the security system
(key with a built-in transponder chip) of another vehicle
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 108 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
109
1-3. Theft deterrent system
1
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
For safety and security
■ Certification for the engine immobilizer system
Vehicles without smart entry & start system
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 109 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
110
1-3. Theft deterrent system
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 110 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
111
1-3. Theft deterrent system
1
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
For safety and security
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 111 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
112
1-3. Theft deterrent system
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Vehicles with smart entry & start system
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 112 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
113
1-3. Theft deterrent system
1
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
For safety and security
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 113 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
114
1-3. Theft deterrent system
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 114 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
115
1-3. Theft deterrent system
1
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
For safety and security
NOTICE
■ To ensure the system operates correctly
Do not modify or remove the system. If modified or removed, the proper
operation of the system cannot be guaranteed.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 115 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
116
1-3. Theft deterrent system
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Alarm
∗
The alarm uses light and sound to give an alert when an intrusion is
detected.
The alarm is triggered in the following situations when the alarm is
set:
Except for Kazakhstan and Morocco
● A locked door is opened in any way other than using the entry func-
tion (vehicles with smart entry & start system), wireless remote con-
trol or mechanical key.
● The hood is opened.
For Kazakhstan and Morocco
● A locked door is opened in any way other than using the entry func-
tion (vehicles with smart entry & start system) or wireless remote
control.
● The hood is opened.
Close the doors and hood, and
lock all the doors using the entry
function (vehicles with smart entry
& start system) or wireless remote
control. The system will be set
automatically after 30 seconds.
Except for Kazakhstan and
Morocco: The alarm can also be
set using the mechanical key.
The indicator light changes from being on to flashing when the system is
set.
∗: If equipped
The alarm
Setting the alarm system
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 116 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
117
1-3. Theft deterrent system
1
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
For safety and security
Do one of the following to deactivate or stop the alarms:
Except for Kazakhstan and Morocco
● Unlock the doors.
● Start the engine. (The alarm will be deactivated or stopped after a
few seconds.)
For Kazakhstan and Morocco
● Unlock the doors using the entry function (vehicles with smart
entry & start system) or the wireless remote control.
● Start the engine. (The alarm will be deactivated or stopped after a
few seconds.)
■ System maintenance
The vehicle has a maintenance-free type alarm system.
■ Items to check before locking the vehicle
To p re ve nt un ex p ec te d tr i gg er ing o f the alarm and vehicle theft, make sure of
the following:
● Nobody is in the vehicle.
● The windows are closed before the alarm is set.
● No valuables or other personal items are left in the vehicle.
Deactivating or stopping the alarm
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 117 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
118
1-3. Theft deterrent system
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■ Triggering of the alarm
The alarm may be triggered in the following situations:
(Stopping the alarm deactivates the alarm system.)
● For Kazakhstan and Morocco: The
doors are unlocked using the key and
are opened.
● A person inside the vehicle opens a door
or hood.
NOTICE
■ To ensure the system operates correctly
Do not modify or remove the system. If modified or removed, the proper
operation of the system cannot be guaranteed.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 118 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
119
2
Instrument cluster
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
2. Instrument cluster
Warning lights
and indicators ..................120
Gauges and meters ...........128
Multi-information display
(Type A)...........................133
Multi-information display
(Type B)...........................136
Fuel consumption
information.......................144
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 119 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
120
2. Instrument cluster
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Warning lights and indicators
Vehicles without multi-information display
Vehicles with multi-information display type A
The warning lights and indicators on the instrument cluster and
center panel inform the driver of the status of the vehicle’s vari-
ous systems.
For the purpose of explanation, the following illustrations dis-
play all warning lights and indicators illuminated.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 120 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
121
2. Instrument cluster
2
Instrument cluster
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Vehicles with multi-information display type B
The positions of some warning lights and indicators differ depending on
vehicles.
Warning lights inform the driver of malfunctions in the indicated vehi-
cle’s systems.
Warning lights
*
1
Brake system warning
light (→P. 5 67 )
*
1, 2
Malfunction indicator
lamp (→P. 5 6 8 )
*
1
(if equipped)
Charging system
warning light (→P. 5 6 7 )
*
1
SRS warning light
(→P. 5 6 8 )
*
1
(if equipped)
Low engine oil pressure
warning light (→P. 5 6 7 )
*
1
ABS warning light
(→P. 5 6 8 )
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 121 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
122
2. Instrument cluster
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
*
1
(if equipped)
Slip indicator light
(→P. 5 6 8)
(if equipped)
Open door warning light
(→P. 5 7 1 )
*
3
(if equipped)
Four-wheel drive
indicator light (→P. 5 69 )
Driver’s and front
passenger’s seat belt
reminder light (→P. 5 71 )
*
3
(if equipped)
Low speed four-wheel
drive indicator light
(→P. 5 6 9)
*
7
(if equipped)
Rear passengers’ seat
belt reminder lights
(→P. 5 7 1 )
*
3
(if equipped)
Rear differential lock
indicator light (→P. 5 69 )
Low fuel level warning
light (→P. 5 71 )
*
1
(if equipped)
Timing belt replacement
warning light (→P. 5 6 9 )
*
1
(if equipped)
Low engine oil level
warning light (→P. 5 71 )
*
1
(if equipped)
Fuel system warning
light
(→P. 5 69 )
*
1
(if equipped)
Master warning light
(→P. 5 7 1 )
*
1, 4
(if equipped)
Brake Override System
warning light (→P. 5 7 0 )
(if equipped)
Go to service warning
light (→P. 5 74 )
*
1, 4
(if equipped)
PCS warning light
(→P. 5 7 0)
*
1, 4
(if equipped)
Stop & Start cancel
indicator (→P. 5 7 2 )
*
5, 6
(if equipped)
LDA indicator (→P. 5 7 1 )
Parking brake indicator
light (→P. 5 72 )
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 122 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
123
2. Instrument cluster
2
Instrument cluster
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
*
1
:These lights turn on when the engine switch is turned to the “ON” position
(vehicles without smart entry & start system) or IGNITION ON mode (vehi-
cles with smart entry & start system) to indicate that a system check is
being performed. They will turn off after the engine is started, or after a few
seconds. There may be a malfunction in a system if a light does not come
on, or if the lights do not turn off. Have the vehicle inspected by any autho-
rized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped pro-
fessional.
*
2
:The light turns on or flashes to indicate a malfunction.
*
3
:The light flashes rapidly to indicate a malfunction.
*
4
:The light flashes to indicate a malfunction.
*
5
:Vehicles with multi-information display type B.
*
6
:The light illuminates in yellow to indicate a malfunction.
*
7
:The lights illuminate on the center panel.
*
1
(if equipped)
Speed warning light
(→P. 5 7 2)
*
1
(if equipped)
Tire pressure warning
light (→P. 5 72 )
(if equipped)
Low AdBlue™ level
warning light (→P. 5 7 2 )
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 123 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
124
2. Instrument cluster
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
The indicators inform the driver of the operating state of the vehicle’s
various systems.
Indicators
Turn signal indicator
(→P. 2 6 0)
(if equipped)
“SET” indicator
(→P. 3 1 4 )
Headlight high beam
indicator (→P. 2 64 )
(if equipped)
“ECO MODE” indicator
(→P. 2 4 9 , 2 5 5 )
Ta i l l ig h t i n d i ca to r
(→P. 2 6 2)
(if equipped)
“PWR MODE” indicator
(→P. 2 4 9 , 2 5 5 )
(if equipped)
Front fog light indicator
(→P. 2 6 9)
*
1
(if equipped)
Downhill assist control
system indicator
(→P. 3 6 1 )
(if equipped)
Rear fog light indicator
(→P. 2 7 0)
*
1, 2
(if equipped)
Slip indicator (→P. 35 4)
*
1
(if equipped)
Eco Driving Indicator
Light (→P. 1 2 6)
*
1
(if equipped)
VSC OFF indicator
(→P. 3 5 5 )
*
1
(if equipped)
Stop & Start indicator
(→P. 3 4 3)
*
1
(if equipped)
“TRC OFF” indicator
(→P. 3 5 5 )
*
1
(if equipped)
Stop & Start cancel
indicator (→P. 3 44 )
(4WD models)
Four-wheel drive
indicator (→P. 3 2 9 )
(diesel engine)
Engine preheating
indicator (→P. 2 36 , 239 )
(4WD models)
Low speed four-wheel
drive indicator light
(→P. 3 2 9 )
(if equipped)
Cruise control indicator
(→P. 3 1 4)
(if equipped)
Rear differential lock
indicator (→P. 3 3 9 )
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 124 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
125
2. Instrument cluster
2
Instrument cluster
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
*
1
:These lights turn on when the engine switch is turned to the “ON” position
(vehicles without smart entry & start system) or IGNITION ON mode (vehi-
cles with smart entry & start system) to indicate that a system check is
being performed. They will turn off after the engine is started, or after a few
seconds. There may be a malfunction in a system if a light does not come
on, or if the lights do not turn off. Have the vehicle inspected by any autho-
rized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped pro-
fessional.
*
2
:The light flashes to indicate that the system is operating.
*
3
:The light turns on when the system is turned off.
*
4
:The light illuminates in green when the system is operating. When the lane
departure alert function is operating, the light illuminates in green (vehicles
with multi-information display type A) or flashes in yellow (vehicles with
multi-information display type B).
*
5
:The light illuminates on the center panel.
*
1, 3
(if equipped)
PCS warning light
(→P. 2 9 1)
Parking brake indicator
light (→P. 2 61 )
*
4
(if equipped)
LDA indicator (→P. 3 0 3 )
*
1, 5
(if equipped)
“PASSENGER AIR
BAG” indicator
(→P. 57 , 62 )
(if equipped)
Low outside
temperature indicator
(→P. 1 2 9)
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 125 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
126
2. Instrument cluster
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■ Eco Driving Indicator (if equipped)
If the vehicle exceeds Zone of Eco driving, the right side of Eco Driving Indi-
cator Zone Display will blink (vehicles with multi-information display type A)
or illuminate (vehicles with multi-information display type B).
Eco Driving Indicator Light and Eco Driving Indicator Zone Display will not
operate in the following conditions:
● The shift lever is in anything other than D. (vehicles with automatic transmis-
sion)
● The shift lever is in R. (vehicles with manual transmission)
● The vehicle is in the power mode. (if equipped) (→P. 2 49 , 2 5 5 )
● Downhill assist control system is operating. (if equipped) (→P. 36 1)
● Front-wheel drive control switch is in L4. (if equipped) (→P. 3 29 )
● The vehicle speed is approximately 130 km/h (81 mph) or higher.
Eco Driving Indicator Light
Vehicles with automatic transmission:
During Eco-friendly acceleration (Eco
driving), Eco Driving Indicator Light will
turn on. When the accelerator pedal is
depressed excessively, or when the
vehicle is stopped, the light turns off.
Vehicles with manual transmission:
During Eco-friendly acceleration or in
Eco-friendly shift position (Eco driving),
Eco Driving Indicator Light will turn on.
When the accelerator pedal is
depressed excessively, or when the
vehicle is stopped, the light turns off.
Eco Driving Indicator Zone Display (if
equipped)
Suggests Zone of Eco driving with cur-
rent Eco driving ratio based on acceler-
ation.
Zone of Eco driving
Eco driving ratio based on acceleration
1
2
3
4
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 126 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
127
2. Instrument cluster
2
Instrument cluster
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Eco Driving Indicator Light can be activated or deactivated.
Vehicles without multi-information display:
Press and hold the odometer/trip meter display change button for more than
2 seconds to complete the setting.
Vehicles with multi-information display: →P. 6 4 9
While the odometer is being displayed,
press and hold the odometer/trip meter
display change button to display the Eco
Driving Indicator Light customization
screen.
Press the odometer/trip meter display
change button to set Eco Driving Indicator
Light to on or off.
WARNING
■ If a safety system warning light does not come on
Should a safety system light such as ABS and the SRS warning light not
come on when you start the engine, this could mean that these systems are
not available to help protect you in an accident, which could result in death
or serious injury. Have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Toyota
dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional
immediately if this occurs.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 127 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
128
2. Instrument cluster
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Gauges and meters
Vehicles without multi-information display
Vehicles with multi-information display type A
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 128 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
129
2. Instrument cluster
2
Instrument cluster
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Vehicles with multi-information display type B
The units used on the speedometer may differ depending on the target
region, and the positions of the outside temperature and shift position indi-
cators differ depending on vehicles.
Tacho m e t e r
Displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute.
Outside temperature
Displays the outside temperature. The temperature range that can be dis-
played is from -40°C (-40°F) to 50°C (122°F). The low outside temperature
indicator comes on when the ambient temperature is approximately 3°C
(37°F) or lower, and goes off when approximately 5°C (41°F) or higher.
(→P. 1 25 )
Speedometer
Displays the vehicle speed.
Fuel gauge
Displays the quantity of fuel remaining in the tank.
Odometer/trip meter display change button
→P. 1 30
1
2
3
4
5
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 129 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
130
2. Instrument cluster
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Odometer and trip meter
Odometer:
Displays the total distance the vehicle has been driven.
Trip meter:
Displays the distance the vehicle has been driven since the meter was last
reset. Trip meters A and B can be used to record and display different dis-
tances independently.
Multi-information display
Presents the driver with a variety of driving-related data. (→P. 1 3 3 , 1 36 )
Shift position and shift range (automatic transmission)
Displays the selected shift position or selected shift range. (→P. 2 4 7)
Engine coolant temperature gauge
Displays the engine coolant temperature.
Vehicles without multi-information display
Pressing this button switches between odometer and trip meter dis-
plays.
Odometer
Trip meter A
*
Trip meter B*
*:Pressing and holding the button
will reset the trip meter.
Changing the display
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 130 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
131
2. Instrument cluster
2
Instrument cluster
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Vehicles with multi-information display
Pressing this button switches among odometer, trip meter and instru-
ment panel light control displays.
Odometer
Trip meter A
*
1
Trip meter B*
1
Instrument panel light control
display
*
2
*
1
:Pressing and holding the button
will reset the trip meter.
*
2
:Pressing and holding the button
will adjust brightness of the instru-
ment panel lights.
For vehicles with multi-information
display type A: Only the meter
panel brightness can be adjusted.
■ The meters illuminate when
The engine switch is in the “ON” position (vehicles without smart entry & start
system) or IGNITION ON mode (vehicles with smart entry & start system).
■ The brightness of the instrument panel lights (vehicles with multi-infor-
mation display)
The instrument panel brightness levels when the tail lights are on and off can
be adjusted individually. (on vehicles with multi-information display type A,
only the meter panel brightness can be adjusted)
When the headlight switch is turned to on, the brightness will be reduced
slightly unless the instrument panel brightness level is set to the brightest set-
ting.
■ When disconnecting and reconnecting battery terminals
The trip meter data will be reset.
1
2
3
4
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 131 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
132
2. Instrument cluster
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■ Outside temperature display
In the following situations, the correct outside temperature may not be dis-
played, or the display may take longer than normal to change:
● When the vehicle is stopped, or moving at low speeds (less than 20 km/h
[12 mph])
● When the outside temperature has changed suddenly (at the entrance/exit
of a garage, tunnel, etc.)
■ When “--” is displayed
The system may be malfunctioning. Take your vehicle to any authorized
Toyo ta dea ler o r re pair e r, o r ano th er duly qualified and equipped professional.
WARNING
■ The information display at low temperatures (vehicles with multi-infor-
mation display type B)
Allow the interior of the vehicle to warm up before using the liquid crystal
information display. At extremely low temperatures, the display monitor may
respond slowly, and display changes may be delayed.
For vehicles with automatic transmission: For example, there is a lag
between the driver’s shifting and the new gear number appearing on the
display. This lag could cause the driver to downshift again, causing rapid
and excessive engine braking and possibly an accident resulting in death or
injury.
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the engine and its components
● Do not let the indicator needle of the tachometer enter the red zone, which
indicates the maximum engine speed.
● The engine may be overheating if the engine coolant temperature gauge is
in the red zone (H). In this case, immediately stop the vehicle in a safe
place, and check the engine after it has cooled completely. (→P. 6 13 )
■ The information display at low temperatures (vehicles with multi-infor-
mation display type A)
Allow the interior of the vehicle to warm up before using the liquid crystal
information display. At extremely low temperatures, the display monitor may
respond slowly, and display changes may be delayed.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 132 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
133
2
2. Instrument cluster
Instrument cluster
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Multi-information display (Type A)
∗
The multi-information display presents the driver with a variety of driv-
ing-related data.
● Trip information (→P. 1 3 4)
Displays driving range, fuel con-
sumption and other cruising-
related information.
● Setting (→P. 6 4 9)
The settings of the following items
can be changed.
•Language
Select to change the language
on the display.
•Units
Select to change the units for measure of the fuel consumption.
•Eco Driving Indicator Light
Select to activate/deactivate the Eco Driving Indicator Light.
● LDA (Lane Departure Alert) (→P. 30 0)
Displays the lane departure alert function display when the system is
turned on.
● Warning messages (→P. 5 7 7)
Displays warning messages and measures to be taken if a malfunction is
detected.
∗: If equipped
Display contents
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 133 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
134
2. Instrument cluster
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
“DISP” button
Items displayed can be switched
by pressing the “DISP” button.
■
Current fuel consumption
Displays the current rate of fuel consumption.
■ Average fuel consumption
Displays the average fuel consumption since the engine switch is
turned to the “ON” position (vehicles without smart entry & start sys-
tem) or IGNITION ON mode (vehicles with smart entry & start sys-
tem).
•The function can be reset by pressing the “DISP” button for longer than
1 second when the average fuel consumption is displayed.
•Use the displayed average fuel consumption as a reference.
■
Driving range
Displays the estimated maximum distance that can be driven with
the quantity of fuel remaining.
•This distance is computed based on your average fuel consumption. As
a result, the actual distance that can be driven may differ from that dis-
played.
•When only a small amount of fuel is added to the tank, the display may
not be updated.
When refueling, turn the engine switch to the “LOCK” position (vehicles
without smart entry & start system) or off (vehicles with smart entry &
start system). If the vehicle is refueled without turn the engine switch to
the “LOCK” position or off, the display may not updated.
Switching the display
Trip information
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 134 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
135
2. Instrument cluster
2
Instrument cluster
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■
Average vehicle speed
Displays the average vehicle speed since the engine switch is
turned to the “ON” position (vehicles without smart entry & start sys-
tem) or IGNITION ON mode (vehicles with smart entry & start sys-
tem).
The function can be reset by pressing the “DISP” button for longer than
1 second when the average vehicle speed is displayed.
■
Elapsed time
Displays the elapsed time after the engine switch is turned to the
“ON” position (vehicles without smart entry & start system) or IGNI-
TION ON mode (vehicles with smart entry & start system).
•When the engine switch is turned on, time is counted from 00:00. When
the time exceeds 99:59, the counter returns to 00:00.
•The function can be reset by pressing the “DISP” button for longer than
1 second when the elapsed time is displayed.
■
Eco Driving Indicator Zone Display (if equipped)
Displays Zone of Eco driving with current Eco driving ratio based on
acceleration. (→P. 12 6)
■ Display off
A blank screen is displayed.
■ Setting display automatic cancelation
In the following situations, setting display in which the settings can be
changed through the “DISP” button will automatically be turned off.
● If a warning message appears while the setting display is displayed
● When the vehicle begins to move while the setting display is displayed
■ When disconnecting and reconnecting battery terminals
The trip information data and settings will be reset.
■ Liquid crystal display
Small spots or light spots may appear on the display. This phenomenon is
characteristic of liquid crystal displays, and there is no problem continuing to
use the display.
■ Customization
Settings (e.g. on/off operation of the Eco Driving Indicator Light) can be
changed.
(Customizable features: →P. 6 4 8)
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 135 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
136
2. Instrument cluster
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Multi-information display (Type B)
∗
The multi-information display presents the driver with a variety of vehi-
cle data.
The following information will be
displayed when a menu icon is
selected. (→P. 1 3 7 )
Some of the information may be
displayed automatically depend-
ing on the situation.
Drive information
Select to display various drive data. (→P. 1 3 8 )
Navigation system-linked display (if equipped)
Select to display the following navigation system-linked information.
•Route guidance
•Compass display
Audio system-linked display (if equipped)
Select to enable selection of an audio source or track on the meter
using the meter control switches.
Driving assist system information (if equipped)
Select to display the LDA (Lane Departure Alert) or RSA (Road Sign
Assist) information, when the system is used. (→P. 30 0, 3 09 )
∗: If equipped
Display contents
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 136 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
137
2. Instrument cluster
2
Instrument cluster
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Warning message display
Select to display warning messages and measures to be taken if a
malfunction is detected. (→P. 5 7 7 )
Settings display
Select to change the meter display settings. (→P. 6 5 0)
The multi-information display is
operated using the meter control
switches.
Enter/Set
Select an item/Change pages
Return to the previous screen
Press: Displays the screen reg-
istered as the top screen
When no screen has been registered, the drive information screen will be
displayed.
Press and hold: Registers the currently displayed screen as the top
screen
When the confirmation screen is displayed, select yes to register the
screen. If the selected screen cannot be registered, a registration failure
message will be shown.
Operating the meter control switches
1
2
3
4
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 137 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
138
2. Instrument cluster
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Items displayed can be switched by pressing “<” or “>” of the meter
control switches to select and pressing “∧” or “∨”.
● Current fuel economy (bar type/value type)
*
1, 2
Displays the current rate of fuel consumption.
● Average fuel economy (after reset*
3
/after start/after refuel)*
1, 2
Displays the average fuel consumption since the function was
reset, the engine was started and the vehicle was refueled respec-
tively.
● Average speed (after reset
*
3
/after start)*
1
Displays the average vehicle speed since function was reset and
the engine was started respectively.
● Elapsed time (after reset
*
3
/after start)*
1
Displays the elapsed time since the function was reset and the
engine was started respectively.
● Distance (range/after start)
*
1
Displays the estimated maximum distance that can be driven with
the quantity of fuel remaining and the distance driven after the
engine was started respectively.
•This distance is computed based on your average fuel consump-
tion. As a result, the actual distance that can be driven may differ
from that displayed.
•When only a small amount of fuel is added to the tank, the dis-
play may not be updated.
When refueling, turn the engine switch off. If the vehicle is refu-
eled without turning the engine switch off, the display may not be
updated.
Drive information
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 138 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
139
2. Instrument cluster
2
Instrument cluster
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
● Idling stop (if equipped)
Displays the total idling stop time (engine stop time via the Stop &
Start system) after resetting and engine startup. (→P. 3 4 8 )
● Eco Driving Indicator Zone Display (if equipped)
Displays Zone of Eco driving with current Eco driving ratio based on
acceleration. (→P. 12 6)
● Eco Score (if equipped)
Displays the eco-driving total count to help improve the customer’s
eco driving techniques. (→P. 1 4 1 )
● Eco Saving
Displays the fuel consumption comparison, the average fuel con-
sumption after reset, and the cost of the consumed fuel. (→P. 14 2)
● Vehicle sway warning (if equipped)
Detects the sway of the vehicle within a lane, which is often associ-
ated with a decrease in the driver’s attention level, and displays the
decrease in attention using a bar display.
The longer the bar length, the more the driver may need to rest.
This display is a part of the LDA (Lane Departure Alert) system. The dis-
play is enabled when the operating conditions of the vehicle sway warn-
ing function are met. (→P. 3 0 0 )
● Display off
A blank screen is displayed.
*
1
:Can be registered to drive information 1 and 2. (→P. 1 4 0 )
*
2
:Use the displayed fuel consumption as a reference.
*
3
:Resetting procedures:
•Select a function to be reset using the meter control switches and then
press and hold to reset.
•If there is more than one function that can be reset, check boxes will be
displayed next to those functions.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 139 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
140
2. Instrument cluster
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
The settings of the following items can be changed, refer to P. 648
● RSA (Road Sign Assist) (if equipped)
Select to set the followings.
• RSA on/off
•Notification method (excess speed/others
*)
•Excess speed notification level
● Idling stop (if equipped)
Select to change the idling stop time when the air conditioning sys-
tem is turned on.
● Language
Select to change the language on the display.
● Units
Select to change the unit for measure of the fuel consumption.
● Eco Driving Indicator Light (if equipped)
Select to activate/deactivate the Eco Driving Indicator Light.
(
→P. 1 2 6)
● switch settings
You can register 1 screen as the top screen. To register, press and
hold while the desired screen is displayed.
● Drive information 1 and 2
Select to select up to 2 items that will be displayed on a drive infor-
mation screen, up to 2 drive information screens can be set.
● Pop-up display
Select to set the following pop-up displays, which may appear in
some situations, on/off.
• Route guidance display of the navigation system-linked system
(if equipped)
•Incoming call display of the hands-free phone system (if
equipped)
● Accent color
Select to change the accent colors on the screen, such as the cur-
sor color.
Settings display
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 140 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
141
2. Instrument cluster
2
Instrument cluster
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
● Eco Saving
Select to set or change the fuel consumption comparison and fuel
price.
● Initialization
Registered or changed meter settings will be deleted or returned to
their default setting.
*:No-overtaking notification only.
■ Pop-up display
In some situations, such as when a switch operation is performed, a pop-up
display will be temporarily displayed on the multi-information display.
The pop-up display function can be set on/off. (→P. 6 50 )
■ Eco Score (if equipped)
Driving conditions are displayed in 5 stages and divided into 3 categories:
start, cruise and stop. Every time the vehicle is stopped, the score is dis-
played. (Every time the vehicle is accelerated the score that was last dis-
played is reset. Accumulative scores are not calculated.)
Eco cruise
Displays the eco level calculated from acceleration operation amount when
driving the vehicle
Eco stop
Displays the eco level calculated from time between releasing the accelera-
tor pedal and vehicle stop
Eco Score
To t a l s th e c ou n ts of t he ec o s ta r t , ec o
cruise and eco stop, and displays the
result.
Eco start
Displays the eco level calculated from
degree of acceleration when starting
the vehicle
1
2
3
4
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 141 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
142
2. Instrument cluster
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
If the accelerator pedal is not depressed, such as when the vehicle is driven
using cruise control (if equipped), the driven distance is not included in the
Eco Score.
The Eco Score evaluation differs depending on the driving conditions and
environmental factors. The Eco Score may not be linked to fuel consumption.
The Eco Score will not operate in the following conditions:
● The vehicle speed is approximately 130 km/h (80 mph) or higher.
● The shift lever is in a position other than D. (vehicles with automatic trans-
mission)
● Front-wheel drive control switch is in L4. (if equipped)
● Downhill assist control system is operating. (if equipped)
● The vehicle is in the power mode. (if equipped)
■ Eco Saving
Displays the fuel consumption comparison, the average fuel consumption
after reset, and the cost of the consumed fuel.
•The function can be reset by pressing more than 1 second when the
average fuel consumption after reset is displayed
•Use the average fuel consumption as a reference
Savings/fuel cost
Displays the possible savings if the fuel consumption comparison is set,
and displays the actual fuel cost if the fuel consumption comparison is not
set.
Use the displayed fuel cost and savings as a reference. Depending on refuel-
ing methods, driving conditions and environmental factors, the displayed fuel
cost may differ from the actual fuel cost, and in some cases, the fuel cost and
savings may not be linked to the Eco Score evaluation.
■ Eco Saving setting
The fuel price and fuel consumption comparison settings can be set in the
settings display. Use the meter control switches to select while the vehicle
is stopped and press , and select “Eco Saving” and press .
Fuel consumption comparison
Displays the set fuel consumption that
is compared with the actual fuel con-
sumption.
Average fuel consumption after reset
Displays the average fuel consumption
since the function was reset.
1
2
3
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 142 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
143
2. Instrument cluster
2
Instrument cluster
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■ Setting display automatic cancelation
In the following situations, setting display in which the settings can be
changed through the meter control switches will automatically be turned off.
● If a warning message appears while the setting display is displayed
● When the vehicle begins to move while the setting display is displayed
■ When disconnecting and reconnecting battery terminals
The drive information data and settings will be reset.
■ Liquid crystal display
Small spots or light spots may appear on the display. This phenomenon is
characteristic of liquid crystal displays, and there is no problem continuing to
use the display.
WARNING
■ Eco Score
Use the Eco Score as a reference. Always drive safely in accordance with
road and traffic conditions.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 143 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
144
2. Instrument cluster
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Fuel consumption information
∗
Press the “CAR” button.
Select “Trip information” or “Past record”.
■ Trip information
If the trip information screen does not appear, select “Trip informa-
tion”.
Average vehicle speed
Cruising range
Previous fuel consumption
per minute
Current fuel consumption
Reset the trip information
data
Elapsed time
“Past record” screen appears
Average fuel consumption for the past 15 minutes is divided by
color into past averages and averages attained since the engine
switch was last turned to the “ON” position (vehicles without smart
entry & start system) or IGNITION ON mode (vehicles with smart
entry & start system). Use the displayed average fuel consumption
as a reference.
These images are examples only, and may vary slightly from actual
conditions.
∗: If equipped
The fuel consumption information can be displayed on the navi-
gation system or multimedia system screen.
Display the trip information or past record screen
Fuel consumption
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 144 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
145
2. Instrument cluster
2
Instrument cluster
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■
Past record
If the past record screen does not appear, select “Past record”.
Best recorded fuel consump-
tion
Previous fuel consumption
record
Current fuel consumption
Reset the past record data
Update the past record data
“Trip information” screen
appears
The average fuel consumption history is divided by color into past
averages and the average fuel consumption since the last updated.
Use the displayed average fuel consumption as a reference.
These images are examples only, and may vary slightly from actual
conditions.
■ Resetting the data
Selecting “Clear” on the “Trip information” screen will reset the trip informa-
tion data.
Selecting “Clear” on the “Past record” screen will reset the past record data.
■ Updating the past record data
Selecting “Update” on the “Past record” screen will update the past record
data.
Also, the average fuel consumption displayed in the multi-information display
will be reset at the same time.
■ Cruising range
Displays the estimated maximum distance that can be driven with the quan-
tity of fuel remaining.
This distance is computed based on your average fuel consumption. As a
result, the actual distance that can be driven may differ from that displayed.
1
2
3
4
5
6
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 145 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
146
2. Instrument cluster
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 146 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
147
3
Operation of
each component
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
3-1. Key information
Keys...................................148
3-2. Opening, closing and
locking the doors
Side doors..........................160
Access panels (smart-cab
models only) ....................166
Tailgate ..............................167
Smart entry & start
system .............................170
3-3. Adjusting the seats
Front seats.........................186
Rear seats .........................188
Head restraints ..................191
3-4. Adjusting the steering
wheel and mirrors
Steering wheel ...................194
Inside rear view mirror .......196
Outside rear view
mirrors .............................197
3-5. Opening and closing
the windows
Power windows..................200
Quarter windows
(smart-cab models)..........204
Back window
(sliding type) ....................205
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 147 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
148
3-1. Key information
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Keys
The following keys are provided with the vehicle.
Type A
Master keys
Valet key
Key number plate
Type B
Master keys
Valet key
Key number plate
Type C
Master keys
Operating the wireless remote con-
trol function (→P. 1 50 )
Valet key
Key number plate
The keys
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 148 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
149
3-1. Key information
3
Operation of each component
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Type D
Master keys
Operating the wireless remote con-
trol function (→P. 1 50 )
Valet key
Key number plate
Type E (vehicles with smart entry & start system)
Electronic keys
•Operating the smart entry & start
system (→P. 1 7 0)
•Operating the wireless remote
control function (→P. 1 50 )
Mechanical keys
Key number plate
Type F (vehicles with smart entry & start system)
Electronic keys
•Operating the smart entry & start
system (→P. 1 7 0)
•Operating the wireless remote
control function (→P. 1 50 )
Mechanical keys
Key number plate
Mechanical keys (supplemen-
tary keys)
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 149 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
150
3-1. Key information
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Vehicles without smart entry & start system
Locks all the doors (→P. 1 6 0 )
Check that the door is securely
locked.
Unlocks all the doors (→P. 1 6 0)
Sounds the alarm
* (→P. 15 1 )
*:If equipped
Vehicles with smart entry & start system
Locks all the doors (→P. 1 6 0 )
Check that the door is securely
locked.
Unlocks all the doors (→P. 1 6 0)
Releasing
To r el ea s e t he ke y, pre ss the bu t-
ton.
Folding
To s to w t he k ey back in its ca se ,
push the key back to the stowed
position while pressing the button.
Wireless remote control (if equipped)
1
2
3
1
2
Using the master key (type C and D)
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 150 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
151
3-1. Key information
3
Operation of each component
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
To tak e o u t th e m e chani cal k ey,
slide the release lever and take
the key out.
The mechanical key can only be
inserted in one direction, as the
key only has grooves on one side.
If the key cannot be inserted in a
lock cylinder, turn it over and re-
attempt to insert it.
After using the mechanical key, store it in the electronic key. Carry the
mechanical key together with the electronic key. If the electronic key bat-
tery is depleted or the entry function does not operate properly, you will
need the mechanical key. (→P. 6 0 3 )
■ Panic mode (if equipped)
■ When required to leave the vehicle’s key with a parking attendant
Lock the glove box as circumstances demand. (→P. 47 0)
Vehicles without smart entry & start system
Carry the master key for your own use and provide the attendant with the
valet key.
Vehicles with smart entry & start system
Remove the mechanical key for your own use and provide the attendant with
the electronic key only. If there is the supplementary key, carry the supple-
mentary key for your own use as well as the mechanical key.
Using the mechanical key (vehicles with smart entry & start sys-
tem)
When is pressed for longer than
about one second, an alarm will sound
intermittently and the vehicle lights will
flash to deter any person from trying to
break into or damage your vehicle.
To sto p th e al arm , pr es s an y but to n on t he
wireless remote control.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 151 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
152
3-1. Key information
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■ If you lose your keys
New genuine keys can be made by any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer,
or another duly qualified and equipped professional using a master key (vehi-
cles without smart entry & start system) or the other key of the same type
(vehicles with smart entry & start system), and the key number stamped on
your key number plate. Keep the plate in a safe place such as your wallet, not
in the vehicle.
■ When riding in an aircraft (type C, D, E and F)
When bringing a key with wireless remote control function onto an aircraft,
make sure you do not press any buttons on the key while inside the aircraft
cabin. If you are carrying the key in your bag etc., ensure that the buttons are
not likely to be pressed accidentally. Pressing a button may cause the key to
emit radio waves that could interfere with the operation of the aircraft.
■ Key battery depletion
Vehicles without smart entry & start system
If the wireless remote control function does not operate, the battery may be
depleted. Replace the battery when necessary. (→P. 5 3 2 )
Vehicles with smart entry & start system
→P. 1 75
■ If “KEY BATTERY LOW”/“Key battery low” is shown on the multi-infor-
mation display (if equipped)
The electronic key has a low battery. Replace the electronic key battery.
■ Replacing the electronic key battery
→P. 5 32
■ Confirmation of the registered key number
The number of keys already registered to the vehicle can be confirmed. Ask
any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and
equipped professional for details.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 152 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
153
3-1. Key information
3
Operation of each component
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■ Certification for wireless remote control
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 153 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
154
3-1. Key information
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 154 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
155
3-1. Key information
3
Operation of each component
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 155 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
156
3-1. Key information
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 156 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
157
3-1. Key information
3
Operation of each component
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 157 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
158
3-1. Key information
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
For vehicles sold in Serbia
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 158 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
159
3-1. Key information
3
Operation of each component
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
NOTICE
■ To prevent key damage
● Do not drop the keys, subject them to strong shocks or bend them.
● Do not expose the keys to high temperatures for long periods of time.
● Do not get the keys wet or wash them in an ultrasonic washer etc.
● Do not attach metallic or magnetic materials to the keys or place the keys
close to such materials.
● Do not disassemble the keys.
● Do not attach a sticker or anything else to the surface of the electronic key.
● Do not place the keys near objects that produce magnetic fields, such as
TVs, audio systems and induction cookers, or medical electrical equip-
ment, such as low-frequency therapy equipment.
■ Carrying the electronic key on your person (vehicles with smart entry
& start system)
Carry the electronic key 10 cm (3.9 in.) or more away from electric appli-
ances that are turned on. Radio waves emitted from electric appliances
within 10 cm (3.9 in.) of the electronic key may interfere with the key, caus-
ing the key to not function properly.
■ In case of a smart entry & start system malfunction or other key-related
problems (vehicles with smart entry & start system)
Ta k e y o ur v eh i c le wi t h a ll th e e le c t ro nic k e ys p r o vi de d w i t h yo u r ve hic le t o
any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and
equipped professional.
■ When an electronic key is lost (vehicles with smart entry & start sys-
tem)
If the electronic key remains lost, the risk of vehicle theft increases signifi-
cantly. Visit any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly quali-
fied and equipped professional immediately with all remaining electronic
keys that were provided with your vehicle.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 159 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
160
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Side doors
◆ Smart entry & start system (if equipped)
While carrying the electronic
key, press the button to lock
and unlock.
After locking, check that the
door is securely locked.
◆ Wireless remote control (if equipped)
Locks all the doors
Check that the door is securely locked.
Unlocks all the doors
The vehicle can be locked and unlocked using the entry func-
tion, wireless remote control, key or door lock switch.
Locking and unlocking the doors from outside
Vehicles without smart entry &
start system
Vehicles with smart entry &
start system
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 160 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
161
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
3
Operation of each component
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
◆ Key
Vehicles without smart entry & start system
Vehicles without power door
lock system:
Locks the door
Unlocks the door
Vehicles with power door lock
system:
Locks all the doors
Unlocks all the doors
Vehicles with smart entry & start system
The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the mechanical
key. (→P. 6 0 3)
■ Operation signals
A buzzer (if equipped) sounds and the emergency flashers flash to indicate
that the doors have been locked/unlocked using the smart entry & start sys-
tem or the wireless remote control. (Locked: once; Unlocked: twice)
■ Security feature
If a door is not opened within approximately 30 seconds after the vehicle is
unlocked using the smart entry & start system or the wireless remote control,
the security feature automatically locks the vehicle again.
■ Door lock buzzer (vehicles with wireless remote control and smart entry
& start system)
If an attempt to lock the doors is made when a door is not fully closed, a
buzzer sounds continuously for 5 seconds. Fully close the door to stop the
buzzer, and lock the vehicle once more.
■ If the entry function (vehicles with smart entry & start system) or the
wireless remote control (if equipped) does not operate properly
● Vehicles without smart entry & start system: Use the key to lock and unlock
the doors. (→P. 1 61 )
● Vehicles with smart entry & start system: Use the mechanical key to lock
and unlock the doors. (→P. 6 03 )
● Replace the battery with a new one if it is depleted. (→P. 5 3 2 )
1
2
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 161 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
162
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■ Setting the alarm (if equipped)
Locking the doors will set the alarm system. (→P. 11 6 )
■ If a symbol indicating one or more doors are open is shown on the multi-
information display (if equipped)
One or more of the doors is not fully closed. The system also indicates which
doors are not fully closed. If the vehicle reaches a speed of 5 km/h (3 mph),
master warning light flashes and a buzzer sounds to indicate that the door(s)
are not yet fully closed.
Make sure that all the doors are closed.
◆ Door lock switch (if equipped)
Locks all the doors
Unlocks all the doors
◆ Inside lock button
Locks the door
Unlocks the door
The driver’s door can be opened
by pulling the inside handle
even if the lock button is in the
lock position.
Locking and unlocking the doors from inside
1
2
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 162 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
163
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
3
Operation of each component
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Move the inside lock button to the lock position.
Close the door while pulling the door handle.
Vehicles without smart entry & start system (vehicles with power door
lock system): The driver’s door cannot be locked if either of the door is
open and the key is in the engine switch.
Vehicles with smart entry & start system: The door cannot be locked if
the engine switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode, or the
electronic key is left inside the vehicle.
However, the key may not be detected correctly and the door may be
locked.
The door cannot be opened from
inside the vehicle when the lock is
set.
Unlock
Lock
These locks can be set to prevent
children from opening the rear
doors. Push down on each rear
door switch to lock both rear doors.
The following functions can be set or canceled:
Locking the front doors from the outside without a key
Rear door child-protector lock (double-cab models only)
1
2
1
2
Automatic door locking and unlocking systems (if equipped)
Function Operation
Speed linked door lock-
ing function
All the doors are locked when the vehicle speed
is approximately 20 km/h (12 mph) or higher.
(Even if the vehicle is subject to a strong impact,
all the doors will not be unlocked automatically.)
Driver’s door linked door
unlocking function
All the doors are unlocked when the driver’s
door is opened within approximately 45 seconds
after turning the engine switch off.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 163 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
164
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■
Setting and canceling the functions
To s w i t c h be t w e e n s et ting a n d cance l i n g, fo l l ow th e proce d u re
below.
Close all the doors and turn the engine switch to IGNITION ON
mode (vehicles with smart entry & start system) or the “ON” posi-
tion (vehicles without smart entry & start system). (Perform step
within 20 seconds.)
Shift the shift lever to other
than P (vehicles with auto-
matic transmission only), and
press and hold the driver’s
door lock switch ( or
) for approximately 5
seconds and then release.
The shift lever and switch posi-
tions corresponding to the
desired function to be set are
shown in the following table.
Use the same procedure to cancel the function.
When the setting or canceling operation is complete, all the doors are
locked and then unlocked.
1
2
2
Function
Driver’s door lock
switch position
Speed linked door locking function
Driver’s door linked door unlocking function
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 164 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
165
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
3
Operation of each component
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■ Conditions affecting operation
Vehicles without smart entry & start system
The wireless remote control function may not operate normally in the follow-
ing situations:
● Near a TV tower, radio station, electric power plant, airport or other facility
that generates strong radio waves
● When carrying a portable radio, cellular phone or other wireless communi-
cation device
● When multiple wireless keys are in the vicinity
● When the wireless key is in contact with, or is covered by a metallic object
● When a wireless key (that emits radio waves) is being used nearby
● When the wireless key has been left near an electrical appliance such as a
personal computer
Vehicles with smart entry & start system
→P. 1 73
WARNING
■ To prevent an accident
Observe the following precautions while driving the vehicle.
Failing to do so may result in a door opening and an occupant falling out,
resulting in death or serious injury.
● Ensure that all doors are properly closed and locked.
● Do not pull the inside handle of the doors while driving.
Be especially careful for the driver’s door, as the door may be opened
even if the inside lock button is in locked position.
● Set the rear door child-protector locks when children are seated in the rear
seats.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 165 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
166
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Access panels (smart-cab models only)
Open the front door widely.
Pull (from the outside) or push
(from the inside) the inside han-
dle of the access panels.
Open the access panels.
You can open and close the access panels only when the front door is
widely opened.
The access panels (rear door) can be opened using the inside
handle.
1
2
NOTICE
■ When opening or closing the front door and access panels
The front door and access panels could be damaged if they hit each other
when being opened or closed.
3
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 166 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
167
3
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
Operation of each component
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Tailgate
∗
Lock with the master key or the
mechanical key
Unlock with the master key or
the mechanical key
Type A
Unlock the latches and open the
tailgate slowly.
The support stays will hold the tail-
gate horizontal.
After closing the tailgate, try pulling
it toward you to make sure it is
securely locked.
∗: If equipped
The tailgate can be locked/unlocked and opened by the follow-
ing procedures.
Locking and unlocking the tailgate (vehicles with key hole)
1
2
Opening the tailgate
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 167 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
168
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Type B
Pull the handle and open the tail-
gate slowly.
The support stays will hold the tail-
gate horizontal.
After closing the tailgate, try pulling
it toward you to make sure it is
securely locked.
Release the brackets on the sup-
port stays from the lugs on both
sides as shown in the illustration.
The rear step bumper is for rear
end protection and easier step-up
loading.
Lowering the tailgate
Rear step bumper (if equipped)
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 168 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
169
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
3
Operation of each component
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
WARNING
■ Caution while driving
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
● Do not drive with the tailgate open.
● Do not get on the rear step bumper.
NOTICE
■ After closing the tailgate
Try pulling it toward you to make sure it is securely locked.
■ To prevent damage to the rear step bumper
Do not allow more than one person to get on the rear step bumper at a time.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 169 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
170
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Smart entry & start system
∗
● Locks and unlocks the doors (→P. 1 60 )
● Starts and stops the engine (→P. 2 3 9 )
■ Antenna location
∗: If equipped
The following operations can be performed simply by carrying
the electronic key on your person, for example in your pocket.
The driver should always carry the electronic key.
Antennas outside the cabin
Antennas inside the cabin
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 170 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
171
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
3
Operation of each component
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■ Effective range (areas within which the electronic key is detected)
When starting the engine or changing engine switch modes
The system can be operated when the electronic key is inside the vehicle.
(The electronic key is not detected when it is on the floor or on the instru-
ment panel.)
■ Battery-saving function
The battery-saving function will be activated in order to prevent the electronic
key battery and the battery from being discharged while the vehicle is not in
operation for a long time.
■ Electronic Key Battery-Saving Function
When battery-saving mode is set, battery depletion is minimized by stopping
the electronic key from receiving radio waves.
When locking or unlocking the doors
The system can be operated when the
electronic key is within about 0.7 m (2.3
ft.) of either of the lock/unlock button on
the outside door handle. (Only the
doors detecting the key can be oper-
ated.)
Press twice while pressing and
holding . Confirm that the electronic
key indicator flashes 4 times.
While the battery-saving mode is set, the
smart entry & start system cannot be
used. To cancel the function, press any of
the electronic key buttons.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 171 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
172
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■ Alarms and warning indicators
A combination of exterior and interior alarms as well as warning messages
shown on the multi-information display are used to prevent theft of the vehicle
and accidents resulting from erroneous operation. Take appropriate mea-
sures in response to any warning message on the multi-information display.
The following table describes circumstances and correction procedures when
only alarms are sounded.
Alarm Situation Correction procedure
Exterior alarm
sounds once for 5
seconds
An attempt was made to lock
the vehicle while a door was
open.
Close all of the doors
and lock the doors
again.
Interior alarm
pings continu-
ously
The engine switch was
turned to ACCESSORY
mode while the driver’s door
was open (or the driver’s
door was opened while the
engine switch was in
ACCESSORY mode).
Turn the engine switch
off and close the
driver’s door.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 172 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
173
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
3
Operation of each component
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■ Conditions affecting operation
The smart entry & start system uses weak radio waves. In the following situa-
tions, the communication between the electronic key and the vehicle may be
affected, preventing the smart entry & start system, wireless remote control
and engine immobilizer system from operating properly.
(Ways of coping: →P. 6 03 )
● When the electronic key battery is depleted
● Near a TV tower, electric power plant, gas station, radio station, large dis-
play, airport or other facility that generates strong radio waves or electrical
noise
● When carrying a portable radio, cellular phone, cordless phone or other
wireless communication device
● When the electronic key is in contact with, or is covered by the following
metallic objects
•Cards to which aluminum foil is attached
•Cigarette boxes that have aluminum foil inside
•Metallic wallets or bags
•Coins
•Hand warmers made of metal
•Media such as CDs and DVDs
● When multiple electronic keys are in the vicinity
● When other wireless keys (that emit radio waves) are being used nearby
● When carrying the electronic key together with the following devices that
emit radio waves
•Another vehicle’s electronic key or a wireless key that emits radio waves
•Personal computers or personal digital assistants (PDAs)
•Digital audio players
•Portable game systems
● If window tint with a metallic content or metallic objects are attached to the
rear window
● When the electronic key is placed near a battery charger or electronic devices
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 173 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
174
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■ Note for the entry function
● Even if the electronic key is within the effective range (detection areas)
when locking or unlocking the doors, the system may not operate properly if
the electronic key is too close to the window or outside door handle, near
the ground, or in a high place.
● Do not leave the electronic key on top of the instrument panel or near the
door pockets when exiting the vehicle. Depending on the radio wave recep-
tion conditions, it may be detected by the antenna outside the cabin and the
doors will become lockable from the outside, possibly trapping the electronic
key inside the vehicle.
● As long as the electronic key is within the effective range, the doors may be
locked or unlocked by anyone. However, only the doors detecting the elec-
tronic key can be used to unlock the vehicle.
● Even if the electronic key is not inside the vehicle, it may be possible to start
the engine if the electronic key is near the window.
● If the wireless remote control is used to lock the doors when the electronic
key is near the vehicle, there is a possibility that the door may not be
unlocked by the entry function. (Use the wireless remote control to unlock
the doors.)
● Pulling the outside door handle while pressing the lock/unlock button on the
outside door handle may prevent the doors from being unlocked. In this
case, return the door handle to the original position, press the lock/unlock
button again, and check that the doors unlock before pulling the door handle
again.
● Unlocking the vehicle may take more time if another electronic key is within
the effective range.
■ When the vehicle is not driven for extended periods
● To p r e v e n t t he f t of t h e ve hi cl e, do n ot l e a ve t h e e le c tr o ni c k ey w it h in 2 m
(6 ft.) of the vehicle.
● The smart entry & start system can be deactivated in advance. Ask any
authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped
professional for details.
■ To operate the system properly
Make sure to carry the electronic key when operating the system. Do not get
the electronic key too close to the vehicle when operating the system from the
outside of the vehicle.
Depending on the position and holding condition of the electronic key, the key
may not be detected correctly and the system may not operate properly. (The
alarm may go off accidentally, or the door lock prevention function may not
operate.)
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 174 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
175
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
3
Operation of each component
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■ If the smart entry & start system does not operate properly
● Locking and unlocking the doors: Use the mechanical key. (→P. 6 03 )
● Starting the engine: →P. 60 4
■ Electronic key battery depletion
● The standard battery life is 1 to 2 years.
● If the battery becomes low, an alarm will sound in the cabin when the engine
stops.
● As the electronic key always receives radio waves, the battery will become
depleted even if the electronic key is not used. The following symptoms indi-
cate that the electronic key battery may be depleted. Replace the battery
when necessary. (→P. 5 32 )
•The smart entry & start system or the wireless remote control does not
operate.
•The detection area becomes smaller.
•The LED indicator on the key surface does not turn on.
● To a vo id se r io us de t e r i o ra t i o n, do no t le av e th e el e ct ro n ic k ey w it hi n 1 m ( 3
ft.) of the following electrical appliances that produce a magnetic field:
•TVs
•Personal computers
•Cellular phones, cordless phones and battery chargers
•Recharging cellular phones or cordless phones
•Table lamps
•Induction cookers
■ If “KEY LEFT INSIDE VEHICLE”/“Key left inside vehicle” is shown on the
multi-information display (if equipped)
An attempt was made to lock the doors using the smart entry & start system
while the electronic key was still inside the vehicle, or an attempt was made
to lock either front door by opening a door and putting the inside lock button
into the lock position, then closing the door by pulling on the outside door
handle with the electronic key still inside the vehicle.
Retrieve the electronic key from the vehicle and lock the doors again.
■ Customization that can be configured at any authorized Toyota dealer or
repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional
Settings (e.g. smart entry & start system) can be changed.
(Customizable features: →P. 6 4 8)
■ If the smart entry & start system has been deactivated in a customized
setting
● Locking and unlocking the doors:
Use the wireless remote control or mechanical key. (→P. 1 60 , 60 3)
● Starting the engine and changing engine switch modes: →P. 6 04
● Stopping the engine: →P. 2 4 1
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 175 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
176
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■ Certification for smart entry & start system
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 176 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
177
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
3
Operation of each component
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 177 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
178
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 178 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
179
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
3
Operation of each component
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 179 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
180
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 180 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
181
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
3
Operation of each component
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 181 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
182
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 182 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
183
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
3
Operation of each component
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 183 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
184
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 184 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
185
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
3
Operation of each component
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
WARNING
■ Caution regarding interference with electronic devices
● People with implantable cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization
therapy-pacemakers or implantable cardioverter defibrillators should main-
tain a reasonable distance between themselves and the smart entry &
start system antennas. (→P. 1 70 )
The radio waves may affect the operation of such devices. If necessary,
the entry function can be disabled. Ask any authorized Toyota dealer or
repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional for details,
such as the frequency of radio waves and timing of the emitting radio
waves. Then, consult your doctor to see if you should disable the entry
function.
● Users of any electrical medical device other than implantable cardiac
pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization therapy-pacemakers or implant-
able cardioverter defibrillators should consult the manufacturer of the
device for information about its operation under the influence of radio
waves.
Radio waves could have unexpected effects on the operation of such
medical devices.
Ask any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and
equipped professional for details on disabling the entry function.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 185 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
186
3-3. Adjusting the seats
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Front seats
Manual seat (separated type)
Seat position adjustment lever
Seatback angle adjustment
lever
Vertical height adjustment lever
(if equipped for driver’s seat
only)
Manual seat (bench type)
Seat position adjustment lever
(driver’s seat only)
Seatback angle adjustment
lever
Adjustment procedure
1
2
3
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 186 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
187
3-3. Adjusting the seats
3
Operation of each component
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Power seat (driver’s seat only)
Seat position adjustment switch
Seatback angle adjustment
switch
Seat cushion (front) angle
adjustment switch
Vertical height adjustment
switch
1
2
3
4
WARNING
■ When adjusting the seat position
● Ta ke ca re w h en a dj ust in g t he s e at p os iti on t o e ns ur e t ha t oth er pa sse n-
gers are not injured by the moving seat.
● Do not put your hands under the seat or near the moving parts to avoid
injury.
Fingers or hands may become jammed in the seat mechanism.
■ Seat adjustment
● To r e du c e t he r is k of s lid in g u nd er the l ap b el t dur in g a col l isi on , do not
recline the seat more than necessary.
If the seat is too reclined, the lap belt may slide past the hips and apply
restraint forces directly to the abdomen, or your neck may contact the
shoulder belt, increasing the risk of death or serious injury in the event of
an accident.
Adjustments should not be made while driving as the seat may unexpect-
edly move and cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
● Manual seat: After adjusting the seat, make sure that the seat is locked in
position.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 187 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
188
3-3. Adjusting the seats
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Rear seats
∗
Unhook the lock release lever.
Pull the seat cushions up and
then pull toward the front of
vehicle.
The seat cushions can be removed
separately.
Type A
Pull the head restraint up.
Pull the strap and raise the bot-
tom cushion.
The latch under the bottom cush-
ion will release allowing the bottom
cushion to be raised.
∗: If equipped
Removing the rear seat cushions (if equipped for smart-cab
models)
1
2
Raising the bottom cushion (double-cab models)
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 188 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
189
3-3. Adjusting the seats
3
Operation of each component
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Anchor the strap to the head
restraint.
Vehicles without the rear center
seat head restraint: Anchor the
strap to the rear outboard seat
head restraint.
Type B
Pull the head restraints up.
Pull the straps and raise the
bottom cushions.
The latch under the bottom cush-
ions will release allowing the bot-
tom cushions to be raised.
3
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 189 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
190
3-3. Adjusting the seats
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Anchor the straps to the head
restraints.
3
WARNING
Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or
serious injury.
■ When removing the rear seat cushions
● Do not remove the rear seat cushions while driving.
● Be careful not to hit the removed rear seat cushions against a person or
drop it on yourself.
■ When reinstalling the rear seat cushions or returning the bottom cush-
ions to their original position
● Be careful not to get your hands or feet pinched in the seat.
● Make sure there are no obstacles under the seat which would prevent the
seat from properly locking into place.
● Make sure the rear seat cushions and bottom cushion are securely locked
by pushing it upward and downward.
● Check that the seat belts are not twisted or caught in the bottom cushions.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 190 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
191
3
3-3. Adjusting the seats
Operation of each component
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Head restraints
Adjustable type
Up
Pull the head restraints up.
Down
Push the head restraint down while
pressing the lock release button.
Integrated type
Head restraints cannot be adjusted and removed.
Adjustable type
Up
Pull the head restraints up.
Down
Push the head restraint down while
pressing the lock release button.
Integrated type
Head restraints cannot be adjusted and removed.
Head restraints are provided for driver’s seat, front passenger’s
seat, outboard rear seats and center rear seats (if equipped).
Front seats
Lock release button
1
2
Rear seats (if equipped)
Lock release button
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 191 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
192
3-3. Adjusting the seats
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■ Removing the head restraints
■ Installing the head restraints
■ Adjusting the height of the head restraints
■ Adjusting the rear center seat head restraint (if equipped)
Always raise the head restraint one level from the stowed position when
using.
Pull the head restraint up while pressing
the lock release button.
Align the head restraint with the installa-
tion holes and push it down to the lock
position.
Press and hold the lock release button
when lowering the head restraint.
Make sure that the head restraints are
adjusted so that the center of the head
restraint is closest to the top of your ears.
Lock release
button
Lock release
button
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 192 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
193
3-3. Adjusting the seats
3
Operation of each component
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
WARNING
■ Head restraint precautions
Observe the following precautions regarding the head restraints. Failure to
do so may result in death or serious injury.
● Use the head restraints designed for each respective seat.
● Adjust the head restraints to the correct position at all times.
● After adjusting the head restraints, push down on them and make sure
they are locked in position.
● Do not drive with the head restraints removed.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 193 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
194
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Steering wheel
Hold the steering wheel and
push the lever down.
Type A
Adjust to the ideal position by
moving the steering wheel verti-
cally.
After adjustment, pull the lever up
to secure the steering wheel.
Type B
Adjust to the ideal position by
moving the steering wheel hori-
zontally and vertically.
After adjustment, pull the lever up
to secure the steering wheel.
Adjustment procedure
1
2
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 194 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
195
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
3
Operation of each component
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
To sound the horn, press on or
close to the mark.
■ After adjusting the steering wheel
Make sure that the steering wheel is securely locked.
The horn may not sound if the steering wheel is not securely locked.
Horn
WARNING
■ Caution while driving
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.
Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and cause an acci-
dent, resulting in death or serious injury.
■ After adjusting the steering wheel
Make sure that the steering wheel is securely locked.
Otherwise, the steering wheel may move suddenly, possibly causing an
accident, and resulting in death or serious injury.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 195 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
196
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Inside rear view mirror
The height of the rear view mirror can be adjusted to suit your driving
posture.
Adjust the height of the rear view
mirror by moving it up and down.
Reflected light from the headlights of vehicles behind can be reduced
by operating the lever.
Normal position
Anti-glare position
The rear view mirror’s position can be adjusted to enable suffi-
cient confirmation of the rear view.
Adjusting the height of rear view mirror
Anti-glare function
1
2
WARNING
Do not adjust the position of the mirror while driving.
Doing so may lead to mishandling of the vehicle and cause an accident,
resulting in death or serious injury.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 196 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
197
3
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
Operation of each component
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Outside rear view mirrors
Manual adjustable type
Adjust a mirror.
Power adjustable type
To sele c t a m i r ror to a d ju s t, tu rn
the switch.
Left
Right
To ad ju st the mi r r o r, m o v e the
switch.
Up
Right
Down
Left
Adjustment procedure
1
1
2
2
1
2
3
4
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 197 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
198
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Manual folding type
Push the mirror back in the direc-
tion of the vehicle’s rear.
Power folding type
Press the switch.
Folding
Extending
■ Mirror angle can be adjusted when (power adjustable type)
Vehicles without smart entry & start system
The engine switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.
Vehicles with smart entry & start system
The engine switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode.
■ When the mirrors are fogged up (vehicles with outside rear view mirror
defoggers)
The outside rear view mirrors can be cleared using the mirror defoggers. Turn
on the rear window defogger to turn on the outside rear view mirror defog-
gers. (→P. 4 4 9, 4 58 )
Folding the mirrors
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 198 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
199
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
3
Operation of each component
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
WARNING
■ Important points while driving
Observe the following precautions while driving.
Failure to do so may result in loss of control of the vehicle and cause an
accident, resulting in death or serious injury.
● Do not adjust the mirrors while driving.
● Do not drive with the mirrors folded.
● Both the driver and passenger side mirrors must be extended and properly
adjusted before driving.
■ When a mirror is moving (power adjustable type)
To av oid p e r s o n a l in j u r y a n d m i rr or m a l f u nc t io n , be c ar e f ul n ot t o g e t y o u r
hand caught by the moving mirror.
■ When the mirror defoggers are operating (vehicles with outside rear
view mirror defoggers)
Do not touch the rear view mirror surfaces, as they can become very hot
and burn you.
NOTICE
■ If ice should jam the mirror
Do not operate the control or scrape the mirror face. Use a spray de-icer to
free the mirror.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 199 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
200
3-5. Opening and closing the windows
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Power windows
∗
The power windows can be opened and closed using the switches.
Operating the switch moves the windows as follows:
Type A
Closing
Opening
One-touch opening
*
(driver’s window only)
*:To stop the window partway,
operate the switch in the opposite
direction.
Type B
Closing
Opening
One-touch opening
*
(driver’s window only)
One-touch closing
*
(driver’s window only)
*:To stop the window partway,
operate the switch in the opposite
direction.
∗: If equipped
Opening and closing procedures
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 200 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
201
3-5. Opening and closing the windows
3
Operation of each component
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Type C
Closing
Opening
One-touch opening
*
One-touch closing*
*:To stop the window partway,
operate the switch in the opposite
direction.
Press the switch down to lock the
passenger window switches.
Use this switch to prevent children
from accidentally opening or clos-
ing a passenger window.
■ The power windows can be operated when
Vehicles without smart entry & start system
The engine switch is in the “ON” position.
Vehicles with smart entry & start system
The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■ Jam protection function (windows with one-touch function for type B
and C)
If an object becomes jammed between the window and the window frame
while the window is closing, window movement is stopped and the window is
opened slightly.
■ Catch protection function (windows with one-touch function for type B
and C)
If an object becomes caught between the door and window while the window
is opening, window movement is stopped.
1
2
3
4
Window lock switch
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 201 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
202
3-5. Opening and closing the windows
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■ Operating the power windows after turning the engine off
Vehicles without smart entry & start system
The power windows can be operated for approximately 45 seconds even
after the engine switch is turned to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position. They can-
not, however, be operated once either front door is opened.
Vehicles with smart entry & start system
The power windows can be operated for approximately 45 seconds even
after the engine switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned off. They
cannot, however, be operated once either front door is opened.
■ When the window cannot be opened or closed (windows with one-touch
function for type B and C)
When the jam protection function or catch protection function operates
unusually and the window cannot be opened or closed, perform the following
operations with the power window switch of that door.
● Stop the vehicle. With the engine switch in the “ON” position (vehicles with-
out smart entry & start system) or IGNITION ON mode (vehicles with smart
entry & start system), within 4 seconds of the jam protection function or
catch protection function activating, continually operate the power window
switch in the one-touch closing direction or one-touch opening direction so
that the window can be opened and closed.
● If the window cannot be opened and closed even when performing the
above operations, perform the following procedure for function initialization.
Turn the engine switch to the “ON” position (vehicles without smart entry
& start system) or IGNITION ON mode (vehicles with smart entry & start
system).
Pull and hold the power window switch in the one-touch closing direction
and completely close the window.
Release the power window switch for a moment, resume pulling the
switch in the one-touch closing direction, and hold it there for approxi-
mately 6 seconds or more.
Press and hold the power window switch in the one-touch opening direc-
tion. After the window is completely opened, continue holding the switch
for an additional 1 second or more.
Release the power window switch for a moment, resume pushing the
switch in the one-touch opening direction, and hold it there for approxi-
mately 4 seconds or more.
Pull and hold the power window switch in the one-touch closing direction
again. After the window is completely closed, continue holding the switch
for a further 1 second or more.
If you release the switch while the window is moving, start again from the
beginning.
If the window reverses and cannot be fully closed or opened, have the vehi-
cle inspected by any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly
qualified and equipped professional.
1
2
3
4
5
6
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 202 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
203
3-5. Opening and closing the windows
3
Operation of each component
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
WARNING
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
■ Closing the windows
● The driver is responsible for all the power window operations, including the
operation for the passengers. In order to prevent accidental operation,
especially by a child, do not let a child operate the power windows. It is
possible for children and other passengers to have body parts caught in
the power window. Also, when riding with a child, it is recommended to use
the window lock switch. (→P. 2 0 1 )
● Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their body
in a position where it could be caught when a window is being operated.
● When exiting the vehicle, turn the engine switch off, carry the key and exit
the vehicle along with the child. There may be accidental operation, due to
mischief, etc., that may possibly lead to an accident.
■ Jam protection function (windows with one-touch function for type B
and C)
● Never use any part of your body to intentionally activate the jam protection
function.
● The jam protection function may not work if something gets jammed just
before the window is fully closed. Be careful not to get any part of your
body jammed in the window.
■ Catch protection function (windows with one-touch function for type B
and C)
● Never use any part of your body or clothing to intentionally activate the
catch protection function.
● The catch protection function may not work if something gets caught just
before the window is fully opened. Be careful not to get any part of your
body or clothing caught in the window.
NOTICE
■ Jam protection function and catch protection function (windows with
one-touch function for type B and C)
If the door is forcefully closed while the window is being opened or closed,
the jam protection function or catch protection function may operate and the
window may reverse directions or stop.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 203 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
204
3-5. Opening and closing the windows
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Quarter windows (smart-cab models)
The quarter windows can be opened and closed using the latch han-
dle.
To op en the qu arter win do ws , pu ll
the latch handle toward you and
swing it fully out.
To close the quarter windows,
reverse the opening procedure.
■ Closing the quarter windows
Make sure that the quarter windows are securely closed after closing them.
Opening and closing procedures
WARNING
■ Opening or closing the quarter windows
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
● Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their body
in a position where it could be caught when a window is being operated.
● Do not allow children to operate the quarter windows.
Closing a quarter window on someone can cause serious injury, and in
some instances, even death.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 204 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
205
3
3-5. Opening and closing the windows
Operation of each component
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Back window (sliding type)
The back window can be opened and closed using the lock release
lever.
To ope n t h e ba c k w i nd o w, pus h
the lock release lever and slide
the back window.
To c lose the back w indo w, r e v e rse
the opening procedure.
■ Closing the back window
Make sure that the back window is securely closed after closing it.
Opening and closing procedures
WARNING
■ Opening or closing the back window
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
● Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their body
in a position where it could be caught when the window is being operated.
● Do not allow children to operate the back window.
Closing the back window on someone can cause serious injury, and in
some instances, even death.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 205 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
206
3-5. Opening and closing the windows
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 206 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
207
4
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
4-1. Before driving
Driving the vehicle .............208
Cargo and luggage ............221
Trailer towing (except
models for model code
destination W)..................222
Trailer towing (models for
model code destination
W) ....................................223
4-2. Driving procedures
Engine (ignition) switch
(vehicles without smart
entry & start system)........236
Engine (ignition) switch
(vehicles with smart
entry & start system)........239
Automatic transmission .....247
Manual transmission..........254
Turn signal lever................260
Parking brake ....................261
4-3. Operating the lights
and wipers
Headlight switch ................262
Fog light switch..................269
Windshield wipers and
washer.............................271
4-4. Refueling
Opening the fuel tank
cap...................................274
4-5. Using the driving support
systems
Toyota Safety Sense .........279
PCS (Pre-Crash
Safety system).................287
LDA (Lane Departure
Alert) ................................300
RSA (Road Sign Assist).....309
Cruise control.....................314
Rear view monitor
system .............................318
Four-wheel drive
system .............................329
Rear differential
lock system......................339
Stop & Start system
(Smart Stop) ....................343
Driving assist systems .......353
Downhill assist control
system .............................361
DPF (Diesel Particulate
Filter) system ...................364
4-6. Driving tips
Winter driving tips ..............368
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 207 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
208
4-1. Before driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Driving the vehicle
→P. 2 36 , 2 3 9
Automatic transmission
With the brake pedal depressed, shift the shift lever to D. (→P. 2 4 7)
Release the parking brake. (→P. 2 6 1 )
Gradually release the brake pedal and gently depress the accelera-
tor pedal to accelerate the vehicle.
Manual transmission
While depressing the clutch pedal, shift the shift lever to 1.
(→P. 2 5 4 )
Release the parking brake. (→P. 2 6 1 )
Gradually release the clutch pedal. At the same time, gently
depress the accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehicle.
The following procedures should be observed to ensure safe
driving:
Starting the engine
Driving
1
2
3
1
2
3
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 208 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
209
4-1. Before driving
4
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Automatic transmission
With the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal.
If necessary, set the parking brake.
If the vehicle is to be stopped for an extended period of time, shift the shift
lever to P or N. (→P. 24 7)
Manual transmission
While depressing the clutch pedal, depress the brake pedal.
If necessary, set the parking brake.
If the vehicle is to be stopped for an extended period of time, shift the shift
lever to N. (→P. 25 4)
Automatic transmission
With the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal.
Set the parking brake (→P. 2 6 1) , a n d s h if t t he s hi ft l ev e r t o P
(→P. 2 4 7 ).
Vehicles without smart entry & start system:
Turn the engine switch to the “LOCK” position to stop the engine.
Vehicles with smart entry & start system:
Press the engine switch to stop the engine.
Lock the door, making sure that you have the key on your person.
If parking on a hill, block the wheels as needed.
Stopping
Parking the vehicle
1
2
1
2
1
2
3
4
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 209 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
210
4-1. Before driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Manual transmission
While depressing the clutch pedal, depress the brake pedal.
Shift the shift lever to N. (→P. 25 4)
If parking on a hill, shift the shift lever to 1 or R as needed.
Set the parking brake. (→P. 26 1 )
Vehicles without smart entry & start system:
Turn the engine switch to the “LOCK” position to stop the engine.
Vehicles with smart entry & start system:
Press the engine switch to stop the engine.
Lock the door, making sure that you have the key on your person.
If parking on a hill, block the wheels as needed.
Automatic transmission
Make sure that the parking brake is set and shift the shift lever to D.
Gently depress the accelerator pedal.
Release the parking brake.
Manual transmission
With the parking brake firmly set and the clutch pedal fully
depressed, shift the shift lever to 1.
Lightly depress the accelerator pedal at the same time as gradually
releasing the clutch pedal.
Release the parking brake.
Starting off on a steep uphill
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
1
2
3
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 210 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
211
4-1. Before driving
4
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■ When starting off on an uphill (vehicles with hill-start assist control sys-
tem)
The hill-start assist control will activate. (→P. 35 3)
■ Driving in the rain
● Drive carefully when it is raining, because visibility will be reduced, the win-
dows may become fogged-up, and the road will be slippery.
● Drive carefully when it starts to rain, because the road surface will be espe-
cially slippery.
● Refrain from high speeds when driving on an expressway in the rain,
because there may be a layer of water between the tires and the road sur-
face, preventing the steering and brakes from operating properly.
■ Engine speed while driving (automatic transmission)
In the following conditions, the engine speed may become high while driving.
This is due to automatic up-shifting control or down-shifting implementation to
meet driving conditions. It does not indicate sudden acceleration.
● The vehicle is judged to be driving uphill or downhill
● When the accelerator pedal is released
■ Restraining the engine output (Brake Override System)
● When the accelerator and brake pedals are depressed at the same time, the
engine output may be restrained.
● Vehicles without multi-information display: A warning light comes on while
the system is operating. (→P. 57 0)
● Vehicles with multi-information display: A warning message is displayed on
the multi-information display while the system is operating.
■ Breaking in your new Toyota
To ext en d t h e li f e of th e ve hi c le , o bse rv i n g th e fo llo wi ng p re cau ti on s i s r ec om -
mended:
● For the first 300 km (200 miles):
Avoid sudden stops.
● For the first 800 km (500 miles) (models for model code destination W
*):
Do not tow a trailer. (→P. 2 2 3 )
*:See “Checking your vehicle’s model” if you are not sure of which model
your vehicle is. (→P. 11 )
● For the first 1000 km (600 miles):
•Do not drive at extremely high speeds.
•Avoid sudden acceleration.
•Do not drive continuously in the low gears.
•Do not drive at a constant speed for extended periods.
•Do not drive slowly with the manual transmission in a high gear.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 211 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
212
4-1. Before driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■ Idling time before stopping the engine (diesel engine only)
To pr ev e n t dam ag e to the tu rb oc ha rg er, al lo w the e ng in e to idl e im med ia te ly
after high-speed driving or driving up a hill.
■ Operating your vehicle in a foreign country
Comply with the relevant vehicle registration laws and confirm the availability
of the correct fuel. (→P. 62 7)
■ Eco-friendly driving
→P. 1 26
■ After driving on muddy roads in poor condition (for EURO VI models*)
Check the cooling fins of the urea injector and clear away any foreign objects
or substances such as leaves or mud. If any of the above parts is extremely
dirty or you are not sure of their condition, have your vehicle inspected by any
authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped
professional.
*:EURO VI is an emission standard. If it is not clear that your vehicle meets
relevant standards, contact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or
another duly qualified and equipped professional.
Driving condition Idling time
Normal city driving Not necessary
High-speed driving
Constant speed of approx.
80 km/h (50 mph)
Approximately
20 seconds
Constant speed of approx.
100 km/h (62 mph)
Approximately
1 minute
Steep hill driving or continuous driving at 100 km/h
(62 mph) or more (race track driving etc.)
Approximately
2 minutes
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 212 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
213
4-1. Before driving
4
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
WARNING
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
■ When starting the vehicle
On vehicles with automatic transmission, always keep your foot on the
brake pedal while stopped with the engine running. This prevents the vehi-
cle from creeping.
■ When driving the vehicle
● Do not drive if you are unfamiliar with the location of the brake and accel-
erator pedals to avoid depressing the wrong pedal.
•Accidentally depressing the accelerator pedal instead of the brake
pedal will result in sudden acceleration that may lead to an accident.
•When backing up, you may twist your body around, leading to a diffi-
culty in operating the pedals. Make sure to operate the pedals properly.
•Make sure to keep a correct driving posture even when moving the
vehicle only slightly. This allows you to depress the brake and accelera-
tor pedals properly.
•Depress the brake pedal using your right foot. Depressing the brake
pedal using your left foot may delay response in an emergency, result-
ing in an accident.
● Do not drive the vehicle over or stop the vehicle near flammable materials.
The exhaust system and exhaust gases can be extremely hot. These hot
parts may cause a fire if there is any flammable material nearby.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 213 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
214
4-1. Before driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
WARNING
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
■ When driving the vehicle
● During normal driving, do not turn off the engine. Turning the engine off
while driving will not cause loss of steering or braking control, but the
power assist to these systems will be lost. This will make it more difficult to
steer and brake, so you should pull over and stop the vehicle as soon as it
is safe to do so.
However, in the event of an emergency, such as if it becomes impossible
to stop the vehicle in the normal way: →P. 5 5 7
● Use engine braking (downshift) to maintain a safe speed when driving
down a steep hill.
Using the brakes continuously may cause the brakes to overheat and lose
effectiveness. (→P. 2 48 )
● Do not adjust the positions of the steering wheel, the seat, or the inside or
outside rear view mirrors while driving.
Doing so may result in a loss of vehicle control.
● Always check that all passengers’ arms, heads or other parts of their body
are not outside the vehicle.
● On vehicles with manual transmission, do not operate the clutch halfway
for a long period of time unless it is necessary. Doing so could not only
speed up clutch wear, but could also damage the clutch or even cause a
fatal accident such as vehicle fire.
■ When driving on slippery road surfaces
● Sudden braking, acceleration and steering may cause tire slippage and
reduce your ability to control the vehicle.
● Sudden acceleration, engine braking due to shifting, or changes in engine
speed could cause the vehicle to skid.
● After driving through a puddle, lightly depress the brake pedal to make
sure that the brakes are functioning properly. Wet brake pads may prevent
the brakes from functioning properly. If the brakes on only one side are wet
and not functioning properly, steering control may be affected.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 214 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
215
4-1. Before driving
4
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
WARNING
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
■ When shifting the shift lever
● On vehicles with automatic transmission, do not let the vehicle roll back-
wards while the shift lever is in a driving position, or roll forward while the
shift lever is in R.
Doing so may cause the engine to stall or lead to poor brake and steering
performance, resulting in an accident or damage to the vehicle.
● On vehicles with automatic transmission, do not shift the shift lever to P
while the vehicle is moving.
Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle
control.
● Do not shift the shift lever to R while the vehicle is moving forward.
Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle
control.
● Do not shift the shift lever to a driving position while the vehicle is moving
backward.
Doing so can damage to the transmission and may result in a loss of vehi-
cle control.
● Moving the shift lever to N while the vehicle is moving will disengage the
engine from the transmission. Engine braking is not available when N is
selected.
● On vehicles with automatic transmission, be careful not to shift the shift
lever with the accelerator pedal depressed. Shifting the shift lever to a
gear other than P or N may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the
vehicle that may cause an accident.
■ If you hear a squealing or scraping noise (brake pad wear indicators)
Have the brake pads checked and replaced by any authorized Toyota
dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional as
soon as possible.
Rotor damage may result if the pads are not replaced when needed.
It is dangerous to drive the vehicle when the wear limits of the brake pads
and/or those of the brake discs are exceeded.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 215 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
216
4-1. Before driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
WARNING
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
■ When the vehicle is stopped
● Do not race the engine.
If the vehicle is in any gear other than P (vehicles with automatic transmis-
sion only) or N, the vehicle may accelerate suddenly and unexpectedly,
causing an accident.
● On vehicles with automatic transmission, in order to prevent accidents due
to the vehicle rolling away, always keep depressing the brake pedal while
the engine is running, and apply the parking brake as necessary.
● If the vehicle is stopped on an incline, in order to prevent accidents caused
by the vehicle rolling forward or backward, always depress the brake pedal
and securely apply the parking brake as needed.
● Avoid revving or racing the engine.
Running the engine at high speed while the vehicle is stopped may cause
the exhaust system to overheat, which could result in a fire if combustible
material is nearby.
■ When the vehicle is parked
● Do not leave glasses, cigarette lighters, spray cans, or soft drink cans in
the vehicle when it is in the sun.
Doing so may result in the following:
•Gas may leak from a cigarette lighter or spray can, and may lead to a
fire.
•The temperature inside the vehicle may cause the plastic lenses and
plastic material of glasses to deform or crack.
•Soft drink cans may fracture, causing the contents to spray over the
interior of the vehicle, and may also cause a short circuit in the vehicle’s
electrical components.
● Do not leave cigarette lighters in the vehicle. If a cigarette lighter is in a
place such as the glove box or on the floor, it may be lit accidentally when
luggage is loaded or the seat is adjusted, causing a fire.
● Do not attach adhesive discs to the windshield or windows. Do not place
containers such as air fresheners on the instrument panel or dashboard.
Adhesive discs or containers may act as lenses, causing a fire in the vehi-
cle.
● Do not leave a door or window open if the curved glass is coated with a
metallized film such as a silver-colored one. Reflected sunlight may cause
the glass to act as a lens, causing a fire.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 216 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
217
4-1. Before driving
4
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
WARNING
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
■ When the vehicle is parked
● Always apply the parking brake, shift the shift lever to P (vehicles with
automatic transmission only), stop the engine and lock the vehicle.
Do not leave the vehicle unattended while the engine is running.
If the vehicle is parked with the shift lever in P but the parking brake is not
set, the vehicle may start to move, possibly leading to an accident.
● Do not touch the exhaust pipes while the engine is running or immediately
after turning the engine off.
Doing so may cause burns.
■ When taking a nap in the vehicle
Always turn the engine off. Otherwise, if you accidentally move the shift
lever or depress the accelerator pedal, this could cause an accident or fire
due to engine overheating. Additionally, if the vehicle is parked in a poorly
ventilated area, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle, leading to
death or a serious health hazard.
■ When braking
● When the brakes are wet, drive more cautiously.
Braking distance increases when the brakes are wet, and this may cause
one side of the vehicle to brake differently than the other side. Also, the
parking brake may not securely hold the vehicle.
● If the power brake assist function does not operate, do not follow other
vehicles closely and avoid hills or sharp turns that require braking. In this
case, braking is still possible, but the brake pedal should be depressed
more firmly than usual. Also, the braking distance will increase. Have your
brakes fixed immediately.
● Do not pump the brake pedal if the engine stalls.
Each push on the brake pedal uses up the reserve for the power-assisted
brakes.
● The brake system consists of 2 individual hydraulic systems: If one of the
systems fails, the other will still operate. In this case, the brake pedal
should be depressed more firmly than usual and the braking distance will
increase.
Have your brakes fixed immediately.
■ If the vehicle becomes stuck (4WD models)
Do not spin the wheels excessively when any of the tires is up in the air, or
the vehicle is stuck in sand, mud, etc. This may damage the driveline com-
ponents or propel the vehicle forward or backward, causing an accident.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 217 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
218
4-1. Before driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
NOTICE
■ When driving the vehicle
● Do not depress the accelerator and brake pedals at the same time during
driving, as this may restrain the engine output.
● On vehicles with automatic transmission, do not use the accelerator pedal
or depress the accelerator and brake pedals at the same time to hold the
vehicle on a hill.
● On vehicles with manual transmission, do not shift gears unless the clutch
pedal is fully depressed. After shifting, do not release the clutch pedal
abruptly. Doing so may damage the clutch, transmission and gears.
● On vehicles with manual transmission, observe the following to prevent
the clutch from being damaged.
•Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal while driving.
Doing so may cause clutch trouble.
•Do not use any gear other than the 1st gear when starting off and mov-
ing forward.
Doing so may damage the clutch.
•Do not use the clutch to hold the vehicle when stopping on an uphill
grade.
Doing so may damage the clutch.
● On vehicles with manual transmission, do not shift the shift lever to R
when the vehicle is still moving. Doing so may damage the clutch, trans-
mission and gears.
● On vehicles with manual transmission, if you cannot accelerate the vehicle
even when the clutch is engaged and the accelerator pedal is depressed,
this may mean that the clutch is slipping, and the vehicle may be rendered
undriveable. Have any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another
duly qualified and equipped professional inspect the vehicle as soon as
possible.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 218 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
219
4-1. Before driving
4
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
NOTICE
■ When parking the vehicle
On vehicles with automatic transmission, always set the parking brake, and
shift the shift lever to P. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to move or
the vehicle may accelerate suddenly if the accelerator pedal is accidentally
depressed.
■ Avoiding damage to vehicle parts
● Do not turn the steering wheel fully in either direction and hold it there for
an extended period of time.
Doing so may damage the power steering pump.
● When driving over bumps in the road, drive as slowly as possible to avoid
damaging the wheels, underside of the vehicle, etc.
● Diesel engine: Make sure to idle the engine immediately after high-speed
driving or hill climbing. Stop the engine only after the turbocharger has
cooled down.
Failure to do so may cause damage to the turbocharger.
■ If you get a flat tire while driving
A flat or damaged tire may cause the following situations. Hold the steering
wheel firmly and gradually depress the brake pedal to slow down the vehi-
cle.
● It may be difficult to control your vehicle.
● The vehicle will make abnormal sounds or vibrations.
● The vehicle will lean abnormally.
Information on what to do in case of a flat tire. (→P. 58 4)
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 219 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
220
4-1. Before driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
NOTICE
■ When encountering flooded roads
Do not drive on a road that has flooded after heavy rain etc. Doing so may
cause the following serious damage to the vehicle:
● Engine stalling
● Short in electrical components
● Engine damage caused by water immersion
In the event that you drive on a flooded road and the vehicle is flooded, be
sure to have any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly quali-
fied and equipped professional check the following:
● Brake function
● Changes in quantity and quality of oil and fluid used for the engine, trans-
mission, transfer (4WD models), differential, etc.
● Lubricant condition for the propeller shaft, bearings and suspension joints
(where possible), and the function of all joints, bearings, etc.
■ Off-road driving (vehicles with type A wheel ornaments [→P. 5 9 1 ] )
When driving on muddy roads, rocky terrain or sand, or crossing rivers,
remove the wheel ornaments. Driving with the wheel ornaments installed
may cause the wheel ornaments to be damaged or even fall off.
After off-road driving with the wheel ornaments removed, remove dirt or for-
eign objects from the wheel before reinstalling the wheel ornaments.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 220 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
221
4
4-1. Before driving
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Cargo and luggage
Take notice of the following information about storage precau-
tions, cargo capacity and load.
WARNING
■ Things that must not be carried in the rear deck
The following things may cause a fire if loaded in the rear deck:
● Receptacles containing gasoline
● Aerosol cans
■ Storage precautions
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may prevent the pedals from being depressed properly,
may block the driver’s vision, or may result in items hitting the driver or pas-
sengers, possibly causing an accident.
● Stow cargo and luggage in the rear deck whenever possible.
● Except for single-cab models: Do not stack anything behind the front seats
higher than the seatbacks.
● Do not place cargo or luggage in or on the following locations.
•At the feet of the driver
•On the front passenger or rear seats (if equipped) (when stacking
items)
•On the instrument panel
•On the dashboard
● Secure all items in the occupant compartment.
● Never allow anyone to ride in the rear deck. It is not designed for passen-
gers. They should ride in their seats with their seat belts properly fastened.
Otherwise, they are much more likely to suffer death or serious bodily
injury, in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
■ Load and distribution
● Do not overload your vehicle.
● Do not apply loads unevenly.
Improper loading may cause deterioration of steering or braking control
which may cause death or serious injury.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 221 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
222
4-1. Before driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Trailer towing (except models for model
code destination W
∗
)
∗: See “Checking your vehicle’s model” if you are not sure of which model your vehicle is.
(→P. 11 )
Toyota does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle.
Toyota also does not recommend the installation of a tow hitch
or the use of a tow hitch carrier for a wheelchair, scooter, bicy-
cle, etc. Your vehicle is not designed for trailer towing or for the
use of tow hitch mounted carriers.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 222 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
223
4
4-1. Before driving
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Trailer towing (models for model code
destination W
∗
)
◆ Weight limits
Check the allowable towing capacity, GVM (Gross Vehicle Mass),
MPAC (Maximum Permissible Axle Capacity), and permissible
drawbar load before towing. (→P. 6 21 )
◆ Towing hitch/bracket
Toyota recommends the use of the Toyota hitch/bracket for your
vehicle. Other products of a suitable nature and comparable quality
may also be used.
∗: See “Checking your vehicle’s model” if you are not sure of which model your vehicle is.
(→P. 11 )
Your vehicle is designed primarily as a passenger-and-load-car-
rying vehicle. Towing a trailer will have an adverse effect on han-
dling, performance, braking, durability, and fuel consumption.
Your safety and satisfaction depend on the proper use of correct
equipment and cautious driving habits. For your safety and the
safety of others, do not overload the vehicle or trailer.
To tow a trailer safely, use extreme care and drive the vehicle in
accordance with the trailer’s characteristics and operating con-
ditions.
Toyota warranties do not apply to damage or malfunction
caused by towing a trailer for commercial purposes.
Ask your local authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another
duly qualified and equipped professional for further details
before towing, as there are additional legal requirements in
some countries.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 223 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
224
4-1. Before driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
570 mm (22.4 in.)
570 mm (22.4 in.)
Installation positions for the towing hitch/bracket and hitch ball
1
2
178 mm (7.0 in.)
183 mm (7.2 in.)
183 mm (7.2 in.)
193 mm (7.6 in.)
225/70R17C tires:
382 mm (15.0 in.)
265/65R17 or 265/60R18 tires:
381 mm (15.0 in.)
373 mm (14.7 in.)
427 mm (16.8 in.)
576 mm (22.7 in.)
641 mm (25.2 in.)
1343 mm (52.9 in.)
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 224 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
225
4-1. Before driving
4
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Your vehicle will handle differently when towing a trailer. In order to
avoid accident death or serious injury, keep the following in mind
when towing:
■ Checking connections between trailer and lights
Stop the vehicle and check the operation of the connection between
the trailer and lights after driving for a brief period as well as before
starting off.
■ Practicing driving with a coupled trailer
● Get the feel for turning, stopping and reversing with the trailer
coupled by practicing in an area with no or light traffic.
● When reversing with a coupled trailer, hold the section of the
steering wheel nearest to you and rotate clockwise to turn the
trailer left or counterclockwise to turn it right. Always rotate a little
at a time to prevent steering error. Have someone guide you
when reversing to lessen the risk of accident.
■ Increasing vehicle-to-vehicle distance
At a speed of 10 km/h (6 mph), the distance to the vehicle running
ahead of you should be equivalent to or greater than the combined
length of your vehicle and trailer. Avoid sudden braking that may
cause skidding. Otherwise, the vehicle may spin out of control. This
is especially true when driving on wet or slippery road surfaces.
■ Sudden acceleration/steering input/cornering
Executing sharp turns when towing may result in the trailer colliding
with your vehicle. Decelerate well in advance when approaching
turns and take them slowly and carefully to avoid sudden braking.
■ Important points regarding turning
The wheels of the trailer will travel closer to the inside of the curve
than the wheels of the vehicle. To make allowance for this, take the
turns wider than you would normally do.
Guidance
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 225 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
226
4-1. Before driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■
Important points regarding stability
Vehicle movement resulting from uneven road surfaces and strong
crosswinds will affect handling. The vehicle may also be rocked by
passing buses or large trucks. Frequently check behind when mov-
ing alongside such vehicles. As soon as such vehicle movement
occurs, immediately start to decelerate smoothly by slowly applying
the brakes. Always steer the vehicle straight ahead while braking.
■ Passing other vehicles
Consider the total combined length of your vehicle and trailer and
ensure that the vehicle-to-vehicle distance is sufficient before exe-
cuting lane changes.
■ Transmission information
Vehicles with manual transmission: To maintain engine braking effi-
ciency when using engine braking, do not use 5th gear and 6th
gear.
Vehicles with automatic transmission: To maintain engine braking
efficiency when using engine braking, do not use the transmission
in D. Transmission shift range position must be in 4 or lower, in S
mode.
■ If the engine overheats
Towin g a loa ded tr a il er up a lo n g , s t e e p in c l ine in t e mpe rat ur es
exceeding 30°C (85°F) may result in the engine overheating. If the
engine coolant temperature gauge indicates that the engine is over-
heating, turn the air conditioning off immediately, leave the road and
stop the vehicle in a safe place. (→P. 6 1 3 )
■ When parking the vehicle
Always place wheel chocks under the wheels of both the vehicle
and trailer. Firmly set the parking brake and shift the shift lever to P
for automatic transmissions, and 1 or R for manual transmissions.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 226 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
227
4-1. Before driving
4
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
WARNING
Follow all the instructions described in this section. Failure to do so could
cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
■ Trailer towing precautions
When towing, make sure that none of the weight limits are exceeded.
(→P. 2 28 )
■ Vehicle speed in towing
Observe the legal maximum speeds for trailer towing.
■ Before descending hills or long declines
Reduce speed and downshift. However, never downshift suddenly while
descending steep or long down hill grades.
■ Operation of the brake pedal
Do not hold the brake pedal depressed often or for long periods of time.
Doing so may result in the brake overheating or reduce braking effects.
■ To avoid accident or injury
● The gross combination mass (sum of your vehicle mass plus its load and
the total trailer mass) must not exceed the following:
Single-cab models
5530 kg (12191 lb.): Pre Runner
5850 kg (12897 lb.): 4WD models
Smart-cab models
5850 kg (12897 lb.)
Double-cab models
5850 kg (12897 lb.): Except Pre Runner for EURO V
* models for Turkey
*:EURO V is an emission standard. If it is not clear that your vehicle meets
relevant standards, contact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or
another duly qualified and equipped professional.
● Do not use cruise control (if equipped) when trailer towing.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 227 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
228
4-1. Before driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■
Total trailer weight and permissible drawbar load
Tota l tra il er we ig ht
Weight of the trailer itself plus
the trailer load should be within
the maximum towing capacity.
Exceeding this weight is danger-
ous. (→P. 6 21 )
When towing a trailer, use a fric-
tion coupler or friction stabilizer
(sway control device).
When the total trailer weight is over 2000 kg (4409 lb.), a friction stabi-
lizer (sway control device) is required.
Permissible drawbar load
Allocate the trailer load so that the drawbar load is greater than 25 kg
(55.1 lb.) or 4% of the towing capacity. Do not let the drawbar load
exceed the indicated weight. (→P. 62 1)
Important points regarding trailer loads (except for single-cab
4WD models, smart-cab 4WD models without rear seat cushion
and GUN125L-CNFSHW3 model
*)
*: The model code is indicated on the manufacturer’s plate or label. (→P. 6 23 )
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 228 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
229
4-1. Before driving
4
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■
Information tag (manufacturer’s label)
Gross vehicle mass
The combined weight of the driver, passengers, cargo, towing
hitch, total curb mass and drawbar load must not exceed the
gross vehicle mass. Exceeding this weight is dangerous.
Maximum permissible rear axle capacity
The weight borne by the rear axle should not exceed the maxi-
mum permissible rear axle capacity. Exceeding this weight is
dangerous.
The values for towing capacity were derived from testing con-
ducted at sea level. Take note that engine output and towing
capacity will be reduced at high altitudes.
1
2
Type A Type B
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 229 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
230
4-1. Before driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■ Tire information
● Increase the tire inflation pressure to 20.0 kPa (0.2 kgf/cm
2
or bar, 3 psi)
greater than the recommended value when towing. (→P. 6 42 )
● Increase the air pressure of the trailer tires in accordance with the total
trailer weight and according to the values recommended by the manufac-
turer of your trailer.
■ Trailer lights
Check that the turn signal lights and stoplights are operating correctly every
time you hitch up the trailer. Directly wiring up to your vehicle may damage
the electrical system and stop the lights from functioning correctly.
■ Break-in schedule
Toyo ta re com me nd s t ha t vehi cl e s fi tt e d with n ew p ow er t ra in comp on en ts
should not be used for towing trailers for the first 800 km (500 miles).
■ Safety checks before towing
● Check that the maximum load limit for the towing hitch/bracket and hitch ball
is not exceeded. Bear in mind that the coupling weight of the trailer will add
to the load exerted on the vehicle. Also make sure that the total load exerted
on the vehicle is within the range of the weight limits. (→P. 2 2 8 )
● Ensure that the trailer load is secure.
● Supplementary outside rear view mirrors should be added to the vehicle if
the traffic behind cannot be clearly seen with standard mirrors. Adjust the
extending arms of these mirrors on both sides of the vehicle so that they
always provide maximum visibility of the road behind.
■ Maintenance
● Maintenance must be performed more frequently when using the vehicle for
towing due to the greater weight burden placed on the vehicle compared to
normal driving.
● Retighten all bolts securing the hitching ball and bracket after towing for
approximately 1000 km (600 miles).
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 230 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
231
4-1. Before driving
4
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■ If trailer sway occurs
One or more factors (crosswinds, passing vehicles, rough roads, etc.) can
adversely affect handling of your vehicle and trailer, causing instability.
● If trailer swaying occurs:
•Firmly grip the steering wheel. Steer straight ahead.
Do not try to control trailer swaying by turning the steering wheel.
•Begin releasing the accelerator pedal immediately but very gradually to
reduce speed.
Do not increase speed. Do not apply vehicle brakes.
If you make no extreme correction with the steering or brakes, your vehicle
and trailer should stabilize (if enabled, Trailer Sway Control can also help to
stabilize the vehicle and trailer.).
● After the trailer swaying has stopped:
•Stop in a safe place. Get all occupants out of the vehicle.
•Check the tires of the vehicle and the trailer.
•Check the load in the trailer.
Make sure the load has not shifted.
Make sure the tongue weight is appropriate, if possible.
•Check the load in the vehicle.
Make sure the vehicle is not overloaded after occupants get in.
If you cannot find any problems, the speed at which trailer swaying
occurred is beyond the limit of your particular vehicle-trailer combination.
Drive at a lower speed to prevent instability. Remember that swaying of the
towing vehicle-trailer increases as speed increases.
NOTICE
■ When the rear bumper strengthening material is aluminum
Ensure the steel bracket part does not come directly in contact with that
area.
When steel and aluminum come into contact, there is a reaction similar to
corrosion, which will weaken the section concerned and may result in dam-
age. Apply a rust inhibitor to parts that will come in contact when attaching a
steel bracket.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 231 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
232
4-1. Before driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■
Total trailer weight and permissible drawbar load
Tota l tra il er we ig ht
Weight of the trailer itself plus
the trailer load should be within
the maximum towing capacity.
Exceeding this weight is danger-
ous. (→P. 6 21 )
When towing a trailer, use a fric-
tion coupler or friction stabilizer
(sway control device).
When the total trailer weight is over 2000 kg (4409 lb.), a friction stabi-
lizer (sway control device) is required.
Permissible drawbar load
Allocate the trailer load so that the drawbar load is greater than 25 kg
(55.1 lb.) or 4% of the towing capacity. Do not let the drawbar load
exceed the indicated weight. (→P. 62 1)
Important points regarding trailer loads (for single-cab 4WD
models, smart-cab 4WD models without rear seat cushion and
GUN125L-CNFSHW3 model
*)
*: The model code is indicated on the manufacturer’s plate or label. (→P. 6 23 )
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 232 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
233
4-1. Before driving
4
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■
Information tag (manufacturer’s label)
Gross vehicle mass
The combined weight of the driver, passengers, cargo, towing
hitch, total curb mass and drawbar load must not exceed the
gross vehicle mass. Exceeding this weight is dangerous.
Maximum permissible rear axle capacity
The weight borne by the rear axle should not exceed the maxi-
mum permissible rear axle capacity. Exceeding this weight is
dangerous.
The values for towing capacity were derived from testing con-
ducted at sea level. Take note that engine output and towing
capacity will be reduced at high altitudes.
1
2
Type A Type B
WARNING
■ When the total trailer weight exceeds 3200kg (7055 lb.)
Do not exceed the legal speed limit for towing a trailer or 90 km/h (56 mph),
whichever is lower.
Failing to observe this precaution may lead to an accident causing death or
serious injury.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 233 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
234
4-1. Before driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■ Tire information
● Increase the tire inflation pressure to 20.0 kPa (0.2 kgf/cm
2
or bar, 3 psi)
greater than the recommended value when towing. (→P. 6 42 )
● Increase the air pressure of the trailer tires in accordance with the total
trailer weight and according to the values recommended by the manufac-
turer of your trailer.
■ Trailer lights
Check that the turn signal lights and stoplights are operating correctly every
time you hitch up the trailer. Directly wiring up to your vehicle may damage
the electrical system and stop the lights from functioning correctly.
■ Break-in schedule
Toyo ta re com me nd s t ha t vehi cl e s fi tt e d with n ew p ow er t ra in comp on en ts
should not be used for towing trailers for the first 800 km (500 miles).
■ Safety checks before towing
● Check that the maximum load limit for the towing hitch/bracket and hitch ball
is not exceeded. Bear in mind that the coupling weight of the trailer will add
to the load exerted on the vehicle. Also make sure that the total load exerted
on the vehicle is within the range of the weight limits. (→P. 2 3 2 )
● Ensure that the trailer load is secure.
● Supplementary outside rear view mirrors should be added to the vehicle if
the traffic behind cannot be clearly seen with standard mirrors. Adjust the
extending arms of these mirrors on both sides of the vehicle so that they
always provide maximum visibility of the road behind.
■ Maintenance
● Maintenance must be performed more frequently when using the vehicle for
towing due to the greater weight burden placed on the vehicle compared to
normal driving.
● Retighten all bolts securing the hitching ball and bracket after towing for
approximately 1000 km (600 miles).
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 234 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
235
4-1. Before driving
4
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■ If trailer sway occurs
One or more factors (crosswinds, passing vehicles, rough roads, etc.) can
adversely affect handling of your vehicle and trailer, causing instability.
● If trailer swaying occurs:
•Firmly grip the steering wheel. Steer straight ahead.
Do not try to control trailer swaying by turning the steering wheel.
•Begin releasing the accelerator pedal immediately but very gradually to
reduce speed.
Do not increase speed. Do not apply vehicle brakes.
If you make no extreme correction with the steering or brakes, your vehicle
and trailer should stabilize (if enabled, Trailer Sway Control can also help to
stabilize the vehicle and trailer.).
● After the trailer swaying has stopped:
•Stop in a safe place. Get all occupants out of the vehicle.
•Check the tires of the vehicle and the trailer.
•Check the load in the trailer.
Make sure the load has not shifted.
Make sure the tongue weight is appropriate, if possible.
•Check the load in the vehicle.
Make sure the vehicle is not overloaded after occupants get in.
If you cannot find any problems, the speed at which trailer swaying
occurred is beyond the limit of your particular vehicle-trailer combination.
Drive at a lower speed to prevent instability. Remember that swaying of the
towing vehicle-trailer increases as speed increases.
NOTICE
■ When the rear bumper strengthening material is aluminum
Ensure the steel bracket part does not come directly in contact with that
area.
When steel and aluminum come into contact, there is a reaction similar to
corrosion, which will weaken the section concerned and may result in dam-
age. Apply a rust inhibitor to parts that will come in contact when attaching a
steel bracket.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 235 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
236
4-2. Driving procedures
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Engine (ignition) switch (vehicles without
smart entry & start system)
Automatic transmission (gasoline engine)
Check that the parking brake is set.
Check that the shift lever is set in P.
Firmly depress the brake pedal.
Turn the engine switch to the “START” position to start the engine.
Automatic transmission (diesel engine)
Check that the parking brake is set.
Check that the shift lever is set in P.
Firmly depress the brake pedal.
Turn the engine switch to the “ON” position.
The indicator turns on.
After the indicator light goes out, turn the engine switch to the
“START” position to start the engine.
Manual transmission (gasoline engine)
Check that the parking brake is set.
Check that the shift lever is set in N.
Firmly depress the clutch pedal.
Turn the engine switch to the “START” position to start the engine.
Manual transmission (diesel engine)
Check that the parking brake is set.
Check that the shift lever is set in N.
Firmly depress the clutch pedal.
Turn the engine switch to the “ON” position.
The indicator turns on.
After the indicator light goes out, turn the engine switch to the
“START” position to start the engine.
Starting the engine
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
5
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 236 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
237
4-2. Driving procedures
4
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
“LOCK”
The steering wheel is locked and
the key can be removed. (Vehicles
with automatic transmission: The
key can be removed only when the
shift lever is in P.)
“ACC”
Some electrical components such
as the audio system can be used.
“ON”
All electrical components can be used.
“START”
For starting the engine.
■ Turning the key from “ACC” to “LOCK”
Shift the shift lever to P (automatic transmission) or N (manual transmis-
sion). (→P. 2 4 7, 2 5 4 )
■ If the engine does not start (vehicles with engine immobilizer system)
The engine immobilizer system may not have been deactivated. (→P. 1 0 7 )
Contact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified
and equipped professional.
Changing the engine switch positions
1
2
Push in the key and turn it to the
“LOCK” position.
3
4
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 237 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
238
4-2. Driving procedures
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■ When the steering lock cannot be released
■ Key reminder function (if equipped)
A buzzer sounds if the driver’s door is opened while the engine switch is in
the “LOCK” or “ACC” position to remind you to remove the key.
When starting the engine, the engine
switch may seem stuck in the “LOCK”
position. To free it, turn the key while turn-
ing the steering wheel slightly left and
right.
WARNING
■ When starting the engine
Always start the engine while sitting in the driver’s seat. Do not depress the
accelerator pedal while starting the engine under any circumstances.
Doing so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
■ Caution when driving
Do not turn the engine switch to the “LOCK” position while driving.
If in an emergency, you must turn the engine off while the vehicle is moving,
turn the engine switch only to the “ACC” position to stop the engine. An
accident may result if the engine is stopped while driving. (→P. 5 5 7)
NOTICE
■ To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the engine switch in the “ACC” or “ON” position for long peri-
ods of time without the engine running.
■ When starting the engine
● Do not crank the engine for more than 30 seconds at a time. This may
overheat the starter and wiring system.
● Do not race a cold engine.
● If the engine becomes difficult to start or stalls frequently, have your vehi-
cle checked by any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly
qualified and equipped professional immediately.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 238 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
239
4
4-2. Driving procedures
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Engine (ignition) switch (vehicles with
smart entry & start system)
Automatic transmission
Check that the parking brake is set.
Check that the shift lever is set in P.
Firmly depress the brake pedal.
A message will be displayed on the
multi-information display. If it is not
displayed, the engine cannot be
started.
Press the engine switch shortly
and firmly.
When operating the engine switch,
one short, firm press is enough. It
is not necessary to press and hold
the switch.
The engine will crank until it starts
or for up to 30 seconds, whichever
is less.
Continue depressing the brake pedal until the engine is completely started.
Diesel engine only: the indicator turns on. The engine will start after
the indicator light goes out.
The engine can be started from any engine switch mode.
Performing the following operations when carrying the elec-
tronic key on your person starts the engine or changes engine
switch modes.
Starting the engine
1
2
3
4
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 239 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
240
4-2. Driving procedures
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Manual transmission
Check that the parking brake is set.
Check that the shift lever is set in N.
Firmly depress the clutch pedal.
A message will be displayed on the
multi-information display. If it is not
displayed, the engine cannot be
started.
Press the engine switch shortly
and firmly.
When operating the engine switch,
one short, firm press is enough. It
is not necessary to press and hold
the switch.
The engine will crank until it starts
or for up to 30 seconds, whichever
is less.
Continue depressing the clutch pedal until the engine is completely
started.
Diesel engine only: the indicator turns on. The engine will start after
the indicator light goes out.
The engine can be started from any engine switch mode.
1
2
3
4
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 240 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
241
4-2. Driving procedures
4
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Automatic transmission
Stop the vehicle.
Set the parking brake (→P. 2 6 1) , a n d s h if t t he s hi ft l ev e r t o P.
Press the engine switch.
Release the brake pedal and check that the display on the instru-
ment cluster is off.
Manual transmission
Stop the vehicle.
Shift the shift lever to N.
Set the parking brake. (→P. 26 1 )
Press the engine switch.
Release the brake pedal and check that the display on the instru-
ment cluster is off.
Stopping the engine
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
5
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 241 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
242
4-2. Driving procedures
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Modes can be changed by pressing the engine switch with brake
pedal (vehicles with automatic transmission) or clutch pedal (vehicles
with manual transmission) released. (The mode changes each time
the switch is pressed.)
Off
*
The emergency flashers can be
used.
ACCESSORY mode
Some electrical components such
as the audio system can be used.
“ACCESSORY” will be displayed
on the multi-information display.
IGNITION ON mode
All electrical components can be
used.
“IGNITION ON” will be displayed
on the multi-information display.
*:If the shift lever is in a position other than P when turning off the engine,
the engine switch will be turned to ACCESSORY mode, not to off (vehicles
with automatic transmission only).
If the engine is stopped with the shift lever in a position other than P,
the engine switch will not be turned off but instead be turned to
ACCESSORY mode. Perform the following procedure to turn the
switch off:
Check that the parking brake is set.
Shift the shift lever to P.
Check that “TURN OFF VEHICLE”/“Turn off vehicle” is displayed
on the multi-information display and then press the engine switch
once.
Changing engine switch modes
1
2
3
When stopping the engine with the shift lever in a position other
than P (vehicles with automatic transmission)
1
2
3
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 242 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
243
4-2. Driving procedures
4
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Check that “TURN OFF VEHICLE”/“Turn off vehicle” on the multi-
information display is off.
■ Note for the electronic key
Carry the electronic key on your person, for example in your pocket.
The smart entry & start system does not operate properly if the electronic key
is on the floor or the instrument panel, or in the door pockets, cup holders or
auxiliary boxes.
■ Auto power off function
Vehicles with automatic transmission
If the vehicle is left in ACCESSORY mode for more than 20 minutes or IGNI-
TION ON mode (the engine is not running) for more than an hour with the
shift lever in P, the engine switch will automatically turn off. However, this
function cannot entirely prevent battery discharge. Do not leave the vehicle
with the engine switch in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode for long peri-
ods of time when the engine is not running.
Vehicles with manual transmission
If the vehicle is left in ACCESSORY mode for more than 20 minutes or IGNI-
TION ON mode (the engine is not running) for more than an hour, the engine
switch will automatically turn off. However, this function cannot entirely pre-
vent battery discharge. Do not leave the vehicle with the engine switch in
ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode for long periods of time when the
engine is not running.
■ Operation of the engine switch
If the switch is not pressed shortly and firmly, the engine switch mode may
not change or the engine may not start.
■ Electronic key battery depletion
→P. 1 75
■ Conditions affecting operation
→P. 1 73
■ Note for the entry function
→P. 1 74
■ If the engine does not start
The engine immobilizer system may not have been deactivated. (→P. 1 0 7 )
Contact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified
and equipped professional.
4
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 243 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
244
4-2. Driving procedures
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■ Steering lock
After turning the engine switch off and opening and closing the doors, the
steering wheel will be locked due to the steering lock function. Operating the
engine switch again automatically cancels the steering lock.
■ When the steering lock cannot be released
■ Steering lock motor overheating prevention
To pre ve nt th e s te eri ng l ock mot or f ro m ove r h ea tin g, the moto r m a y be sus -
pended if the engine is turned on and off repeatedly in a short period of time.
In this case, refrain from running the engine. After about 10 seconds, the
steering lock motor will resume functioning.
■ If “SMART ENTRY & START SYSTEM MALFUNCTION SEE OWNER’S
MANUAL”/“Smart Entry & Start System malfunction See owner’s man-
ual” is shown on the multi-information display (if equipped)
The system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by any autho-
rized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped profes-
sional immediately.
■ If the electronic key battery is depleted
→P. 5 32
■ If the smart entry & start system has been deactivated in a customized
setting
→P. 6 03
A message will be displayed on the multi-
information display.
Check that the shift lever is set in P
(except manual transmission). Press the
engine switch while turning the steering
wheel left and right.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 244 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
245
4-2. Driving procedures
4
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
WARNING
■ When starting the engine
Always start the engine while sitting in the driver’s seat. Do not depress the
accelerator pedal while starting the engine under any circumstances.
Doing so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
■ Caution while driving
If engine failure occurs while the vehicle is moving, do not lock or open the
doors until the vehicle reaches a safe and complete stop. Activation of the
steering lock in this circumstance may lead to an accident, resulting in
death or serious injury.
■ Stopping the engine in an emergency
● If you want to stop the engine in an emergency while driving the vehicle,
press and hold the engine switch for more than 2 seconds, or press it
briefly 3 times or more in succession. (→P. 5 5 7)
However, do not touch the engine switch while driving except in an emer-
gency. If the engine switch is pressed while the vehicle is moving, the
warning message “PUSH AND HOLD ENGINE SWITCH FOR EMER-
GENCY STOP”/“Push and hold engine switch for emergency stop” is dis-
played on the multi-information display and a buzzer sounds. Turning the
engine off while driving will not cause loss of steering or braking control,
but the power assist to these systems will be lost. This will make it more
difficult to steer and brake, so you should pull over and stop the vehicle as
soon as it is safe to do so.
● To r es ta r t the en gi n e aft er t ur ni n g o ff th e e ng in e wh il e d r ivi n g, sh ift t he s hift
lever to N (automatic transmission) or depress the clutch pedal (manual
transmission) and then press the engine switch.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 245 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
246
4-2. Driving procedures
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
NOTICE
■ To prevent battery discharge
● Do not leave the engine switch in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode
for long periods of time without the engine running.
● If “ACCESSORY” or “IGNITION ON” is displayed on the multi-information
display while the engine is not running, the engine switch is not off. Exit the
vehicle after turning the engine switch off.
● On vehicles with automatic transmission, do not stop the engine when the
shift lever is in a position other than P. If the engine is stopped in another
shift lever position, the engine switch will not be turned off but instead be
turned to ACCESSORY mode. If the vehicle is left in ACCESSORY mode,
battery discharge may occur.
■ When starting the engine
● Do not race a cold engine.
● If the engine becomes difficult to start or stalls frequently, have your vehi-
cle checked by any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly
qualified and equipped professional immediately.
■ Symptoms indicating a malfunction with the engine switch
If the engine switch seems to be operating somewhat differently than usual,
such as the switch sticking slightly, there may be a malfunction. Contact any
authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped
professional immediately.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 246 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
247
4
4-2. Driving procedures
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Automatic transmission
∗
Vehicles without smart entry & start system
While the engine switch is in the “ON” position, move the shift
lever with the brake pedal depressed.
When shifting the shift lever between P and D, make sure that the
vehicle is completely stopped.
Vehicles with smart entry & start system
While the engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode, move the
shift lever with the brake pedal depressed.
When shifting the shift lever between P and D, make sure that the
vehicle is completely stopped.
∗: If equipped
Select a shift position appropriate for the driving conditions.
Shifting the shift lever
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 247 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
248
4-2. Driving procedures
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
*
1
:To improve fuel efficiency and reduce noises, set the shift lever in the D
position for normal driving.
*
2
:Selecting shift ranges using S mode restricts the upper limit of the possi-
ble gear ranges, controls engine braking force, and prevents unneces-
sary upshifting.
Shift position purpose
Shift position Function
P Parking the vehicle/starting the engine
R Reversing
N
Neutral
(Condition in which the power is not transmitted)
D Normal driving*
1
S S mode driving*
2
(→P. 2 50 )
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 248 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
249
4-2. Driving procedures
4
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
The following modes can be selected to suit driving conditions.
■ Eco drive mode
Use Eco drive mode to help achieve low fuel consumption during
trips that involve frequent accelerating.
Press the “ECO MODE” switch
to select Eco drive mode.
The “ECO MODE” indicator light
will come on.
Press the switch again to cancel
Eco drive mode.
■
Power mode
Use when high levels of response and feeling are desirable, such
as when driving in mountainous regions or when overtaking.
Press the “PWR MODE” switch
to select power mode.
The “PWR MODE” indicator light
will come on.
Press the switch again to cancel
power mode.
Selecting the driving mode
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 249 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
250
4-2. Driving procedures
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
To e n t e r S m od e , shift th e s h ift le ve r to S. S hift ra ng e s can be s e lect ed
by operating the shift lever, allowing you to drive in the shift range of
your choosing. The shift range can be selected by the shift lever.
Upshifting
Downshifting
The selected shift range, from 1 to
6, will be displayed in the meter.
The initial shift range in S mode is
set automatically to 5 or 4 accord-
ing to vehicle speed. However, the
initial shift range may be set to 3 if
AI-SHIFT has operated while the
shift lever was in D. (→P. 2 53 )
■
Shift ranges and their functions
● Automatically selecting shift ranges between 1 and 6 according
to vehicle speed and driving conditions. But the gear is limited
according to selected range.
● You can choo se from 6 levels of e ngine braking force.
● A lower shift range will provide greater engine braking force than
a higher shift range, and the engine speed will also increase.
Selecting shift ranges in the S position
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 250 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
251
4-2. Driving procedures
4
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■ S mode
When the shift range is 4 or lower, holding the shift lever toward “+” sets the
shift range to 6.
■ Downshifting restrictions warning buzzer
To h el p e ns ur e s a fet y a nd dr iv ing p er fo rm an ce, d ow nsh ift i ng o pe ra t io n ma y
sometimes be restricted. In some circumstances, downshifting may not be
possible even when the shift lever is operated. (A buzzer will sound twice.)
■ Operation of the air conditioning system in Eco drive mode (vehicles
with automatic air conditioning system)
Eco drive mode controls the heating/cooling operations and fan speed of the
air conditioning system to enhance fuel efficiency (→P. 4 61 ). To i m pr o ve a i r
conditioning performance, adjust the fan speed or turn off Eco drive mode.
■ Deactivation of the driving mode
● Eco drive mode will not be canceled until the “ECO MODE” switch is
pressed, even if the engine is turned off after driving in Eco drive mode.
● Power mode will be canceled if the engine is turned off after driving in power
mode.
■ When driving with cruise control activated (if equipped)
Even when performing the following actions with the intent of enabling engine
braking, engine braking will not activate because cruise control will not be
canceled.
● While driving in S mode, downshifting to 5 or 4. (→P. 2 5 0 )
● When switching the driving mode to power mode while driving in D.
(→P. 2 4 9)
■ Shift lock system
The shift lock system is a system to prevent accidental operation of the shift
lever in starting.
The shift lever can be shifted from P only when the engine switch is in the
“ON” position (vehicles without smart entry & start system) or IGNITION ON
mode (vehicles with smart entry & start system) and the brake pedal is being
depressed.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 251 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
252
4-2. Driving procedures
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■ If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P
First, check whether the brake pedal is being depressed.
If the shift lever cannot be shifted with your foot on the brake pedal, there may
be a problem with the shift lock system. Have the vehicle inspected by any
authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped
professional immediately.
The following steps may be used as an emergency measure to ensure that
the shift lever can be shifted.
Releasing the shift lock:
Set the parking brake.
Vehicles without smart entry & start system:
Turn the engine switch to the “LOCK” position.
Vehicles with smart entry & start system:
Turn the engine switch off.
Depress the brake pedal.
■ If the “S” indicator does not come on or the “D” indicator is displayed
even after shifting the shift lever to S
This may indicate a malfunction in the automatic transmission system. Have
the vehicle inspected by any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another
duly qualified and equipped professional immediately.
Pry the cover up with a flathead screw-
driver or equivalent tool.
To p r e v e n t da mag e to th e co ve r, c ov er
the tip of the screwdriver with a rag.
Press the shift lock override button.
The shift lever can be shifted while the
button is pressed.
1
2
3
4
5
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 252 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
253
4-2. Driving procedures
4
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■ Transmission protection function
If the tires spin continually when the vehicle becomes stuck in mud, dirt or
snow, or if the accelerator pedal is depressed and released repeatedly while
driving, the automatic transmission temperature may become too high and
the automatic transmission may be damaged.
To a voi d da ma gin g t he a ut o ma ti c t ra ns m is sio n, t he s y st em ma y te mp or ar ily
lock the gear.
If the automatic transmission temperature falls, the gear locking is canceled
and the automatic transmission is returned to the normal operation.
■ If the warning message is displayed
When the warning message goes out, the vehicle can be driven again.
If the warning message does not go out after waiting a while, have your vehi-
cle inspected by any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly
qualified and equipped professional.
■ AI-SHIFT
The AI-SHIFT automatically selects the suitable gear according to driver per-
formance and driving conditions.
The AI-SHIFT automatically operates when the shift lever is in D. (Shifting the
shift lever to S cancels the function.)
If the automatic transmission fluid temper-
ature warning message is displayed while
driving, make sure to return to D position
driving and reduce speed by easing off
the accelerator pedal. Stop the vehicle in
a safe place, shift the shift lever to P and
let the engine idle until the warning mes-
sage goes out.
WARNING
■ When driving on slippery road surfaces
Do not accelerate or shift gears suddenly.
Sudden changes in engine braking may cause the vehicle to spin or skid,
resulting in an accident.
■ To prevent an accident when releasing the shift lock
Before pressing the shift lock override button, make sure to set the parking
brake and depress the brake pedal.
If the accelerator pedal is accidentally depressed instead of the brake pedal
when the shift lock override button is pressed and the shift lever is shifted
out of P, the vehicle may suddenly start, possibly leading to an accident
resulting in death or serious injury.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 253 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
254
4-2. Driving procedures
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Manual transmission
∗
5-speed transmission
Fully depress the clutch pedal
before operating the shift lever,
and then release it slowly.
If it is difficult to shift in reverse,
shift the shift lever to N, release the
clutch pedal momentarily, and then
try again.
6-speed transmission
Fully depress the clutch pedal
before operating the shift lever,
and then release it slowly.
∗: If equipped
Shifting the shift lever
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 254 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
255
4-2. Driving procedures
4
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
The following modes can be selected to suit driving conditions.
■ Eco drive mode
Use Eco drive mode to help achieve low fuel consumption during
trips that involve frequent accelerating.
Press the “ECO MODE” switch
to select Eco drive mode.
The “ECO MODE” indicator light
will come on.
Press the switch again to cancel
Eco drive mode.
■
Power mode
Use when high levels of response and feeling are desirable, such
as when driving in mountainous regions or when overtaking.
Press the “PWR MODE” switch
to select power mode.
The “PWR MODE” indicator light
will come on.
Press the switch again to cancel
power mode.
Selecting the driving mode (if equipped)
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 255 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
256
4-2. Driving procedures
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■ Maximum downshifting speeds
Observe the downshifting speeds in the following table to prevent over-rev-
ving the engine.
5-speed transmission
4WD models (front-wheel drive control switch in H2 or H4):
km/h (mph)
*
1
:TGN126L-DTMLKV and TGN126L-DTMSK models*
3
*
2
:TGN126L-DTMLK models*
3
*
3
:See “Checking your vehicle’s model” if you are not sure of which model
your vehicle is. (→P. 11 )
4WD models (front-wheel drive control switch in L4):
km/h (mph)
*
1
:TGN126L-DTMLKV and TGN126L-DTMSK models*
3
*
2
:TGN126L-DTMLK models*
3
*
3
:See “Checking your vehicle’s model” if you are not sure of which model
your vehicle is. (→P. 11 )
Maximum speed
Shift position 1 2 3 4
225/70R17C tires 38 (23) 71 (44) 114 (70)
164 (101)
265/65R17 tires 39 (24) 72 (44) 117 (72)
168 (104)
205R16C tires
39 (24)*
1
37 (22)*
2
73 (45)*
1
69 (42)*
2
118 (73)
*
1
112 (69)
*
2
170 (105)
*
1
160 (99)
*
2
Maximum speed
Shift position 1 2 3 4
225/70R17C tires 15 (9) 28 (17) 45 (27)
64 (39)
265/65R17 tires 15 (9) 28 (17) 46 (28)
65 (40)
205R16C tires 15 (9)
28 (17)*
1
27 (16)*
2
46 (28)
*
1
44 (27)
*
2
66 (41)
*
1
63 (39)
*
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 256 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
257
4-2. Driving procedures
4
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
6-speed transmission
4WD models (front-wheel drive control switch in H2 or H4):
km/h (mph)
Maximum speed
Shift position 1 2 3 4 5
2GD-FTV
engine
205R16C
tires
34 (21) 67 (41)
113
(70)
163
(101)
170
(105)
225/70R17C
tires
35 (21) 69 (42)
116
(72)
167
(103)
170
(105)
265/65R17,
265/60R18
tires
36 (22) 70 (43)
118
(73)
170
(105)
170
(105)
2KD-FTV
engine
205R16C
tires
30 (18) 59 (36) 99 (61)
142
(88)
150
(93)
225/70R17C
tires
29 (18) 57 (35) 97 (60)
139
(86)
150
(93)
265/65R17
tires
30 (18) 59 (36) 98 (60)
142
(88)
150
(93)
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 257 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
258
4-2. Driving procedures
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
4WD models (front-wheel drive control switch in L4):
km/h (mph)
Pre Runner:
km/h (mph)
Maximum speed
Shift position 1 2 3 4 5
2GD-FTV
engine
205R16C
tires
13 (8) 26 (16) 44 (27) 64 (39) 82 (50)
225/70R17C
tires
14 (8) 27 (16) 45 (27) 65 (40) 84 (52)
265/65R17
tires
14 (8) 27 (16) 46 (28) 67 (41) 86 (53)
265/60R18
tires
14 (8) 28 (17) 46 (28) 67 (41) 86 (53)
2KD-FTV
engine
205R16C
tires
12 (7) 23 (14) 39 (24) 56 (34) 67 (41)
225/70R17C
tires
11 (6) 22 (13) 38 (23) 54 (33) 66 (41)
265/65R17
tires
12 (7) 23 (14) 38 (23) 55 (34) 67 (41)
Maximum speed
Shift position 1 2 3 4 5
225/70R17C tires 35 (21) 69 (42)
116
(72)
167
(103)
175
(108)
265/60R18 tires 36 (22) 70 (43)
118
(73)
171
(106)
175
(108)
265/65R17 tires 36 (22) 70 (43)
118
(73)
170
(105)
175
(108)
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 258 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
259
4-2. Driving procedures
4
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■ Operation of the air conditioning system in Eco drive mode (vehicles
with automatic air conditioning system)
Eco drive mode controls the heating/cooling operations and fan speed of the
air conditioning system to enhance fuel efficiency (→P. 4 61 ). To i m pr o ve a i r
conditioning performance, adjust the fan speed or turn off Eco drive mode.
■ Deactivation of the driving mode
● Eco drive mode will not be canceled until the “ECO MODE” button is
pressed, even if the engine is turned off after driving in Eco drive mode.
● Power mode will be canceled if the engine is turned off after driving in power
mode.
■ Reverse warning buzzer (6-speed transmission)
A buzzer will sound to alert the driver if the shift lever is shifted to the R posi-
tion.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 259 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
260
4-2. Driving procedures
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Turn signal lever
Right turn
Left turn
Lane change to the right (move
the lever partway and release
it)
The right hand signals will flash 3
times.
Lane change to the left (move
the lever partway and release
it)
The left hand signals will flash 3
times.
■ Turn signals can be operated when
Vehicles without smart entry & start system
The engine switch is in the “ON” position.
Vehicles with smart entry & start system
The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■ If the indicator flashes faster than usual
Check that a light bulb in the front or rear turn signal lights has not burned
out.
■ If the turn signals stop flashing before a lane change has been per-
formed
Operate the lever again.
■ To discontinue flashing of the turn signals during a lane change
Operate the lever in the opposite direction.
■ Customization
The number of times the turn signals flash during a lane change can be
changed.
(Customizable features: →P. 6 4 8)
Operating instructions
1
2
3
4
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 260 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
261
4
4-2. Driving procedures
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Parking brake
Sets the parking brake
Fully pull the parking brake while
depressing the brake pedal.
At this time, the parking brake indi-
cator light will come on.
Releases the parking brake
Slightly raise the lever and lower it
completely while pressing the but-
ton.
At this time, the parking brake indi-
cator light will go off.
■ Parking the vehicle
→P. 2 09
■ Parking brake engaged warning buzzer
→P. 5 72
■ Usage in winter time
→P. 3 68
1
2
NOTICE
■ Before driving
Fully release the parking brake.
Driving the vehicle with the parking brake set will lead to brake components
overheating, which may affect braking performance and increase brake
wear.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 261 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
262
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Headlight switch
Turning the end of the lever turns on the lights as follows:
Type A
The headlights, front posi-
tion, tail, license plate,
instrument panel and
daytime running lights (if
equipped) (
→
P. 2 6 6 ) t u r n
on and off automatically
(when the engine switch
is in the “ON” position
[vehicles without smart
entry & start system] or
IGNITION ON mode
[vehicles with smart entry
& start system]).
The front position, tail,
license plate and instru-
ment panel lights turn
on.
The headlights and all lights listed above turn on.
The headlights can be operated manually or automatically.
Operating instructions
1
2
3
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 262 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
263
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
4
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Type B
Vehicles without day-
time running light sys-
tem: Off.
Vehicles with daytime
running light system:
The daytime running
lights turn on. (→
P. 2 6 6
)
The headlights, front posi-
tion, tail, license plate,
instrument panel and
daytime running lights (if
equipped) (
→
P. 2 6 6 ) t u r n
on and off automatically
(when the engine switch
is in the “ON” position
[vehicles without smart
entry & start system] or
IGNITION ON mode
[vehicles with smart entry
& start system]).
The front position, tail, license plate and instrument panel
lights turn on.
The headlights and all lights listed above turn on.
1
2
(if equipped)
3
4
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 263 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
264
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
With the headlights on, push
the lever away from you to turn
on the high beams.
Pull the lever toward you to the
center position to turn the high
beams off.
Pull the lever toward you and
release it to flash the high
beams once.
You can flash the high beams with the headlights on or off.
The level of the headlights can be adjusted according to the number
of passengers and the loading condition of the vehicle.
Raises the level of the head-
lights
Lowers the level of the head-
lights
Turning on the high beam headlights
1
2
Manual headlight leveling dial (if equipped)
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 264 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
265
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
4
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■
Guide to dial settings
*
1
:Vehicles with Heavy Duty Suspension.*
3
*
2
:Vehicles without Heavy Duty Suspension.*
3
*
3
:Contact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified
and equipped professional, if you are not sure of which specifications your
vehicle is equipped with.
Occupancy and luggage load
conditions
Dial position
Occupants
Luggage
load
Single-cab
and
smart-cab
models
Double-cab models
Left-hand
drive
vehicles
Right-hand
drive
vehicles
Driver None 0 0 0
Driver
Full
luggage
loading
2.5
2.5*
1
3*
2
3
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 265 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
266
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
This system allows the headlights and front position lights to be turned
on for 30 seconds when the engine switch is turned to the “LOCK”
position (vehicles without smart entry & start system) or off (vehicles
with smart entry & start system).
Pull the lever toward you and
release it with the light switch is in
or after turning the
engine switch to the “LOCK” posi-
tion (vehicles without smart entry
& start system) or off (vehicles
with smart entry & start system).
Pull the lever toward you and
release it again to turn off the
lights.
■ Daytime running light system (if equipped)
To m ak e y ou r v e h ic le m or e v i si b le t o other drivers during daytime driving, the
daytime running lights turn on automatically whenever the engine is started
with the headlight switch in or . (Illuminate brighter than the front
position lights.) The daytime running light system is not designed for use at
night.
■ Headlight control sensor (if equipped)
Follow me home system (if equipped)
The sensor may not function properly if an
object is placed on the sensor, or anything
that blocks the sensor is affixed to the
windshield.
Doing so interferes with the sensor
detecting the level of ambient light and
may cause the automatic headlight sys-
tem to malfunction.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 266 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
267
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
4
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■ Automatic light off system (if equipped)
Models for model code destination V* and Blank* (except for Kazakhstan,
Morocco and Egypt)
The lights turn off after the engine switch is turned to the “LOCK” position
(vehicles without smart entry & start system) or off (vehicles with smart entry
& start system) and the driver’s door is opened.
To tu rn th e li gh ts on ag ai n, t ur n the e ng ine sw it c h to the “ON ” pos iti on ( ve hi -
cles without smart entry & start system) or to
IGNITION ON mode (vehicles
with smart entry & start system), or turn the light switch to
or once
and then back to or .
Models for model code destination W*, Kazakhstan, Morocco and Egypt
When the light switch is in or :
The headlights and front fog lights turn off after the engine switch is turned to
the “LOCK” position (vehicles without smart entry & start system) or off (vehi-
cles with smart entry & start system).
When the light switch is in AUTO:
The lights turn off after the engine switch is turned to the “LOCK” position
(vehicles without smart entry & start system) or off (vehicles with smart entry
& start system).
To tu rn th e li gh ts on ag ai n, t ur n the e ng ine sw it c h to the “ON ” pos iti on ( ve hi -
cles without smart entry & start system) or to IGNITION ON mode (vehicles
with smart entry & start system), or turn the light switch to
or once
and then back to or .
*:See “Checking your vehicle’s model” if you are not sure of which model
your vehicle is. (→P. 11 )
■ Light reminder buzzer (if equipped)
Vehicles without smart entry & start system
A buzzer sounds when the engine switch is turned to the “LOCK” position, the
key is removed and the driver’s door is opened while the lights are turned on.
Vehicles with smart entry & start system
A buzzer sounds when the engine switch is turned off and the driver’s door is
opened while the lights are turned on.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 267 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
268
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■ Battery-saving function
Models for model code destination V* and Blank* (except for Kazakhstan,
Morocco and Egypt)
In order to prevent the battery of the vehicle from discharging, if the head-
lights and/or tail lights are on when the engine switch is turned to the “LOCK”
position (vehicles without smart entry & start system) or off (vehicles with
smart entry & start system), the battery-saving function will operate and auto-
matically turn off all the lights after approximately 20 minutes.
Models for model code destination W*, Kazakhstan, Morocco and Egypt
In order to prevent the battery of the vehicle from discharging, if the light
switch is in or position when the engine switch is turned to the
“LOCK” position (vehicles without smart entry & start system) or off (vehicles
with smart entry & start system), the battery-saving function will operate and
automatically turn off all the lights after approximately 20 minutes.
When any of the following are performed, the battery-saving function is can-
celed once and then reactivated. All the lights will turn off automatically 20
minutes after the battery-saving function has been reactivated:
● When the headlight switch is operated
● When a door is closed once and then opened
*:See “Checking your vehicle’s model” if you are not sure of which model
your vehicle is. (→P. 11 )
■ Automatic headlight leveling system (if equipped)
The level of the headlights is automatically adjusted according to the number
of passengers and the loading condition of the vehicle to ensure that the
headlights do not interfere with other road users.
■ Customization
Settings (e.g. light sensor sensitivity) can be changed.
(Customizable features: →P. 6 4 8)
NOTICE
■ To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the lights on longer than necessary when the engine is not
running.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 268 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
269
4
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Fog light switch
∗
■ Front fog light switch (if equipped)
Turns the front fog lights
off
Turns the front fog lights
on
∗: If equipped
The fog lights secure excellent visibility in difficult driving con-
ditions, such as in rain and fog.
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 269 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
270
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■
Rear fog light switch (if equipped)
Turns the rear fog light on
Releasing the switch ring
returns it to .
Operating the switch ring again
turns the rear fog light off.
■
Front and rear fog light switch (if equipped)
Turns the front and rear
fog lights off
Turns the front fog lights
on
Turns both front and
rear fog lights on
Releasing the switch ring
returns it to .
Operating the switch ring again
turns only the rear fog lights off.
■ Fog lights can be used when
The headlights or front position lights are turned on.
1
2
3
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 270 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
271
4
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Windshield wipers and washer
The wiper operation is selected by moving the lever as follows.
■ Windshield wipers without intermittent operation
Low speed operation
High speed operation
Tem p o r a r y op erat i o n
Washer operation
Operating the wiper lever
1
2
3
4
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 271 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
272
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■
Windshield wipers with intermittent operation
Intermittent operation
Low speed operation
High speed operation
Tem p o r a r y op erat i o n
If equipped, wiper intervals can be adjusted when intermittent oper-
ation is selected.
Increases the intermittent
windshield wiper frequency
Decreases the intermittent
windshield wiper frequency
1
2
3
4
5
6
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 272 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
273
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
4
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Washer/wiper dual operation
The wipers will automatically
operate a couple of times after
the washer squirts.
If the headlights are on, the
headlight cleaners will operate
once.
And then, the headlight cleaners
will operate every five times you
pull the lever. (if equipped)
■ The windshield wipers and washer can be operated when
The engine switch is in the “ON” position (vehicles without smart entry & start
system) or IGNITION ON mode (vehicles with smart entry & start system).
■ If no windshield washer fluid sprays
Check that the washer nozzles are not blocked if there is washer fluid in the
windshield washer fluid reservoir.
7
WARNING
■ Caution regarding the use of washer fluid
When it is cold, do not use the washer fluid until the windshield becomes
warm. The fluid may freeze on the windshield and cause low visibility. This
may lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.
NOTICE
■ When the windshield is dry
Do not use the wipers, as they may damage the windshield.
■ When the washer fluid tank is empty
Do not operate the switch continually as the washer fluid pump may over-
heat.
■ When a nozzle becomes blocked
In this case, contact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another
duly qualified and equipped professional.
Do not try to clear it with a pin or other object. The nozzle will be damaged.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 273 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
274
4-4. Refueling
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Opening the fuel tank cap
● Close all the doors and windows, and turn the engine switch to the
“LOCK” position (vehicles without smart entry & start system) or off
(vehicles with smart entry & start system).
● Confirm the type of fuel.
■ Fuel types
→P. 6 45
■ Fuel tank opening for unleaded gasoline (gasoline engine)
To hel p pr ev en t inc o rr e c t f u eli ng , yo ur v ehi cl e has a fue l tank ope ni ng th at
only accommodates the special nozzle on unleaded fuel pumps.
Perform the following steps to open the fuel tank cap:
Before refueling the vehicle
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 274 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
275
4-4. Refueling
4
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
WARNING
■ When refueling the vehicle
Observe the following precautions while refueling the vehicle. Failure to do
so may result in death or serious injury.
● After exiting the vehicle and before opening the fuel cap, touch an
unpainted metal surface to discharge any static electricity. It is important to
discharge static electricity before refueling because sparks resulting from
static electricity can cause fuel vapors to ignite while refueling.
● Type A (→P. 2 76 ) o nl y : A lw a y s ho l d t he g r i ps o n t h e f u e l t a n k c a p a n d tu r n
it slowly to remove it.
A whooshing sound may be heard when the fuel tank cap is loosened.
Wait until the sound cannot be heard before fully removing the cap. In hot
weather, pressurized fuel may spray out the filler neck and cause injury.
● Do not allow anyone that has not discharged static electricity from their
body to come close to an open fuel tank.
● Do not inhale vaporized fuel.
Fuel contains substances that are harmful if inhaled.
● Do not smoke while refueling the vehicle.
Doing so may cause the fuel to ignite and cause a fire.
● Do not return to the vehicle or touch any person or object that is statically
charged.
This may cause static electricity to build up, resulting in a possible ignition
hazard.
■ When refueling
Observe the following precautions to prevent fuel overflowing from the fuel
tank:
● Securely insert the fuel nozzle into the fuel filler neck.
● Stop filling the tank after the fuel nozzle automatically clicks off.
● Do not top off the fuel tank.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 275 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
276
4-4. Refueling
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■
Type A
Pull up the opener to open
the fuel filler door.
Turn the fuel tank cap slowly to remove it and hang it on the back
of the fuel filler door.
NOTICE
■ Refueling
● Do not spill fuel during refueling.
Doing so may damage the vehicle, such as causing the emission control
system to operate abnormally or damaging fuel system components or the
vehicle’s painted surface.
● Vehicles with DPF system:
Use the specified fuel. If fuel other than the specified fuel is used, white
smoke may be continuously emitted from the exhaust pipe during regener-
ating the filter. (→P. 36 4)
Opening the fuel tank cap
1
2
Without over fender With over fender
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 276 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
277
4-4. Refueling
4
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■
Type B
To unlo ck th e fuel ta n k ca p ,
insert the key and turn it
counterclockwise.
Turn the fuel tank cap slowly
to open.
Make sure not to hold and turn
the key.
■
Type A
After refueling, turn the fuel
tank cap until you hear a click.
Once the cap is released, it will
turn slightly in the opposite
direction.
1
2
Closing the fuel tank cap
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 277 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
278
4-4. Refueling
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■
Type B
Close the fuel tank cap
Make sure to put the fuel tank
cap with the arrow upward and
turn it slowly to close.
When turning the fuel tank cap,
do not hold and turn the key.
Lock the fuel cap
Turning the fuel cap key clock-
wise.
Arrow
1
2
WARNING
■ When replacing the fuel tank cap
Do not use anything but a genuine Toyota fuel tank cap designed for your
vehicle. Doing so may cause a fire or other incident which may result in
death or serious injury.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 278 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
279
4
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Toyota Safety Sense
∗
◆ PCS (Pre-Crash Safety system)
∗
→P. 2 8 7
◆ LDA (Lane Departure Alert)
∗
→P. 3 0 0
◆ RSA (Road Sign Assist)
∗
→P. 3 0 9
∗: If equipped
The Toyota Safety Sense consists of the following drive assist
systems and contributes to a safe and comfortable driving expe-
rience:
WARNING
■ Toyota Safety Sense
The Toyota Safety Sense is designed to operate under the assumption that
the driver will drive safely, and is designed to help reduce the impact to the
occupants and the vehicle in the case of a collision or assist the driver in
normal driving conditions.
As there is a limit to the degree of recognition accuracy and control perfor-
mance that this system can provide, do not overly rely on this system. The
driver is always responsible for paying attention to the vehicle’s surround-
ings and driving safely.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 279 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
280
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
The pre-crash safety system is equipped with a sophisticated com-
puter that will record certain data, such as:
•Accelerator status
•Brake status
•Vehicle speed
•Operation status of the pre-crash safety system functions
•Information (such as the distance and relative speed between your
vehicle and the vehicle ahead or other objects)
The pre-crash safety system does not record conversations, sounds
or pictures.
● Data usage
Toyota ma y use th e d ata r ec or ded in t his co m p u t er to d i a gnose
malfunctions, conduct research and development, and improve
quality.
Toyota will n o t d is c lose t he re co r ded da ta t o a thi rd pa r t y e x c ep t:
•With the consent of the vehicle owner or with the consent of the
lessee if the vehicle is leased
•In response to an official request by the police, a court of law or a
government agency
•For use by Toyota in a lawsuit
•For research purposes where the data is not tied to a specific
vehicle or vehicle owner
Vehicle data recording
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 280 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
281
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Two types of sensors, located behind the front grille and windshield,
detect information necessary to operate the drive assist systems.
Radar sensor
Camera sensor
Sensors
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 281 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
282
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
WARNING
■ To avoid malfunction of the radar sensor
Observe the following precautions.
Otherwise, the radar sensor may not operate properly, possibly leading to
an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
● Keep the radar sensor and front grille emblem clean at all times.
● Do not attach accessories, stickers (including transparent stickers) or
other items to the radar sensor, front grille emblem or surrounding area.
● Do not subject the radar sensor or surrounding area to a strong impact.
If the radar sensor, front grille, or front bumper has been subjected to a
strong impact, have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Toyota dealer
or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional.
● Do not disassemble the radar sensor.
● Do not modify or paint the radar sensor, front grille emblem or surrounding
area.
● If the radar sensor, front grille, or front bumper needs to be removed and
installed, or replaced, contact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or
another duly qualified and equipped professional.
Radar sensor
Front grille emblem
If the front of the radar sensor or the
front or back of the front grille emblem
is dirty or covered with water droplets,
snow, etc., clean it.
Clean the radar sensor and front grille
emblem with a soft cloth so you do not
mark or damage them.
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 282 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
283
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
WARNING
■ To avoid malfunction of the camera sensor
Observe the following precautions.
Otherwise, the camera sensor may not operate properly, possibly leading to
an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
● Keep the windshield clean at all times.
•If the windshield is dirty or covered with an oily film, water droplets,
snow, etc., clear the windshield.
•If a glass coating agent is applied to the windshield, it will still be neces-
sary to use the windshield wipers to remove water droplets, etc. from
the area of the windshield in front of the camera sensor.
•If the inner side of the windshield where the camera sensor is installed
is dirty, contact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly
qualified and equipped professional.
● If the part of the windshield in front of the camera sensor is fogged up or
covered with condensation or ice, use the windshield defogger to remove
the fog, condensation or ice. (→P. 4 4 9 , 4 58 )
● If water droplets cannot be properly removed from the area of the wind-
shield in front of the camera sensor by the windshield wipers, replace the
wiper insert or wiper blade.
If the wiper inserts or wiper blades need to be replaced, contact any autho-
rized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped pro-
fessional.
● Do not attach window tinting to the windshield.
● Do not install an antenna or attach stick-
ers (including transparent stickers) or
other items to the area of the windshield
in front of the camera sensor (shaded
area in the illustration).
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 283 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
284
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
WARNING
● Replace the windshield if it is damaged or cracked.
If the windshield needs to be replaced, contact any authorized Toyota
dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional.
● Do not get the camera sensor wet.
● Do not allow bright lights to shine into the camera sensor.
● Do not dirty or damage the camera sensor.
When cleaning the inside of the windshield, do not allow glass cleaner to
contact the lens. Also, do not touch the lens.
If the lens is dirty or damaged, contact any authorized Toyota dealer or
repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional.
● Do not subject the camera sensor to a strong impact.
● Do not change the installation position or direction of the camera sensor or
remove it.
● Do not disassemble the camera sensor.
● Do not install an electronic device or device that emits strong electric
waves near the camera sensor.
● Do not modify any components of the vehicle around the camera sensor
(inside rear view mirror, etc.) or ceiling.
● Do not attach any accessories that may obstruct the camera sensor to the
hood, front grille or front bumper. Contact any authorized Toyota dealer or
repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional for details.
● If a surfboard or other long object is to be mounted on the roof, make sure
that it will not obstruct the camera sensor.
● Do not modify the headlights or other lights.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 284 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
285
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■ Certification
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 285 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
286
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 286 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
287
4
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
PCS (Pre-Crash Safety system)
∗
∗: If equipped
The pre-crash safety system uses a radar sensor and camera
sensor to detect vehicles and pedestrians in front of your vehi-
cle. When the system determines that the possibility of a frontal
collision with a vehicle or pedestrian is high, a warning operates
to urge the driver to take evasive action and the potential brake
pressure is increased to help the driver avoid the collision. If the
system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision with
a vehicle or pedestrian is extremely high, the brakes are auto-
matically applied to help avoid the collision or help reduce the
impact of the collision.
The pre-crash safety system can be disabled/enabled and the warn-
ing timing can be changed. (→P. 29 1)
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 287 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
288
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
◆ Pre-crash warning
When the system determines
that the possibility of a frontal
collision is high, a buzzer will
sound and a warning message
will be displayed on the multi-
information display to urge the
driver to take evasive action.
◆ Pre-crash brake assist
When the system determines that the possibility of a frontal colli-
sion is high, the system applies greater braking force in relation to
how strongly the brake pedal is depressed.
◆ Pre-crash braking
When the system determines that the possibility of a frontal colli-
sion is high, the system warns the driver. If the system determines
that the possibility of a frontal collision is extremely high, the brakes
are automatically applied to help avoid the collision or reduce the
collision speed.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 288 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
289
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
WARNING
■ Limitations of the pre-crash safety system
● The driver is solely responsible for safe driving. Always drive safely, taking
care to observe your surroundings.
Do not use the pre-crash safety system instead of normal braking opera-
tions under any circumstances. This system will not prevent collisions or
lessen collision damage or injury in every situation. Do not overly rely on
this system. Failure to do so may lead to an accident, resulting in death or
serious injury.
● Although this system is designed to help avoid a collision or help reduce
the impact of the collision, its effectiveness may change according to vari-
ous conditions, therefore the system may not always be able to achieve
the same level of performance.
Read the following conditions carefully. Do not overly rely on this system
and always drive carefully.
•Conditions under which the system may operate even if there is no pos-
sibility of a collision: →P. 2 9 3
•Conditions under which the system may not operate properly: →P. 2 96
● Do not attempt to test the operation of the pre-crash safety system your-
self, as the system may not operate properly, possibly leading to an acci-
dent.
■ Pre-crash braking
● When the pre-crash braking function is operating, a large amount of brak-
ing force will be applied.
● If the vehicle is stopped by the operation of the pre-crash braking function,
the pre-crash braking function operation will be canceled after approxi-
mately 2 seconds. Depress the brake pedal as necessary.
● The pre-crash braking function may not operate if certain operations are
performed by the driver. If the accelerator pedal is being depressed
strongly or the steering wheel is being turned, the system may determine
that the driver is taking evasive action and possibly prevent the pre-crash
braking function from operating.
● In some situations, while the pre-crash braking function is operating, oper-
ation of the function may be canceled if the accelerator pedal is depressed
strongly or the steering wheel is turned and the system determines that
the driver is taking evasive action.
● If the brake pedal is being depressed, the system may determine that the
driver is taking evasive action and possibly delay the operation timing of
the pre-crash braking function.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 289 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
290
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
WARNING
■ When to disable the pre-crash safety system
In the following situations, disable the system, as it may not operate prop-
erly, possibly leading to an accident resulting in death or serious injury:
● When the vehicle is being towed
● When your vehicle is towing another vehicle
● When transporting the vehicle via truck, boat, train or similar means of
transportation
● When the vehicle is raised on a lift with the engine running and the tires
are allowed to rotate freely
● When inspecting the vehicle using a drum tester such as a chassis dyna-
mometer or speedometer tester, or when using an on vehicle wheel bal-
ancer
● When a strong impact is applied to the front bumper or front grille, due to
an accident or other reasons
● If the vehicle cannot be driven in a stable manner, such as when the vehi-
cle has been in an accident or is malfunctioning
● When the vehicle is driven in a sporty manner or off-road
● When the tires are not properly inflated
● When the tires are very worn
● When tires of a size other than specified are installed
● When tire chains are installed
● When a compact spare tire or an emergency tire puncture repair kit is used
● If equipment (snow plow, etc.) that may obstruct the radar sensor or cam-
era sensor is temporarily installed to the vehicle
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 290 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
291
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■
Disabling the pre-crash safety system
Press the PCS switch for 3 sec-
onds or more.
The PCS warning light will turn
on and a message will be dis-
played on the multi-information
display.
To en ab le th e s ys te m , p re s s th e
PCS switch again.
The system is enabled each time the engine switch is turned to the “ON”
position (vehicles without smart entry & start system) or IGNITION ON
mode (vehicles with smart entry & start system).
■
Changing the pre-crash warning timing
Press the PCS switch to display
the current warning timing on
the multi-information display.
Each time the PCS switch is
pressed with the warning timing
displayed, the warning timing
will change as follows.
The operation timing setting is
retained when the engine switch
is turned to the “LOCK” position
(vehicles without smart entry &
start system) or off (vehicles
with smart entry & start system).
Far
The warning will begin to oper-
ate earlier than with the default
timing.
Middle
This is the default setting.
Near
The warning will begin to operate later than with the default timing.
Changing settings of the pre-crash safety system
IN45PK070GE
1
2
3
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 291 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
292
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■ Operational conditions
The pre-crash safety system is enabled and the system determines that the
possibility of a frontal collision with a vehicle or pedestrian is high.
Each function is operational at the following speeds:
● Pre-crash warning:
•Vehicle speed is between approximately 10 and 180 km/h (7 and
110 mph). (For detecting a pedestrian, vehicle speed is between approxi-
mately 10 and 80 km/h [7 and 50 mph]. For detecting a stationary vehicle,
vehicle speed is between approximately 10 and 90 km/h [7 and 55 mph].)
•The relative speed between your vehicle and the vehicle or pedestrian
ahead is approximately 10 km/h (7 mph) or more.
● Pre-crash brake assist:
•Vehicle speed is between approximately 30 and 180 km/h (19 and
110 mph). (For detecting a pedestrian, vehicle speed is between approxi-
mately 30 and 80 km/h [19 and 50 mph]. For detecting a stationary vehi-
cle, vehicle speed is between approximately 30 and 90 km/h [19 and
55 mph].)
•The relative speed between your vehicle and the vehicle or pedestrian
ahead is approximately 30 km/h (19 mph) or more.
● Pre-crash braking:
•Vehicle speed is between approximately 10 and 180 km/h (7 and
110 mph). (For detecting a pedestrian, vehicle speed is between approxi-
mately 10 and 80 km/h [7 and 50 mph]. For detecting a stationary vehicle,
vehicle speed is between approximately 10 and 90 km/h [7 and 55 mph].)
•The relative speed between your vehicle and the vehicle or pedestrian
ahead is approximately 10 km/h (7 mph) or more.
The system may not operate in the following situations:
● If a battery terminal has been disconnected and reconnected and then the
vehicle has not been driven for a certain amount of time
● If the shift lever is in R
● If VSC is disabled (only the pre-crash warning function will be operational)
● If the low speed four-wheel drive indicator light is illuminated (only the
pre-crash warning function will be operational)
● If the PCS warning light is flashing or illuminated
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 292 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
293
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■ Pedestrian detection function
■ Cancelation of the pre-crash braking
If either of the following occur while the pre-crash braking function is operat-
ing, it will be canceled:
● The accelerator pedal is depressed strongly.
● The steering wheel is turned sharply or abruptly.
■ Conditions under which the system may operate even if there is no pos-
sibility of a collision
● In some situations such as the following, the system may determine that
there is a possibility of a frontal collision and operate.
•When passing a vehicle or pedestrian
•When changing lanes while overtaking a preceding vehicle
•When overtaking a preceding vehicle that is changing lanes
The pre-crash safety system detects
pedestrians based on the size, profile,
and motion of a detected object. However,
a pedestrian may not be detected
depending on the surrounding brightness
and the motion, posture, and angle of the
detected object, preventing the system
from operating properly. (→P. 29 8)
•When overtaking a preceding vehicle
that is making a left/right turn
•When passing a vehicle in an oncom-
ing lane that is stopped to make a
right/left turn
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 293 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
294
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
•When rapidly closing on a vehicle ahead
•If the front of the vehicle is raised or lowered, such as when the road sur-
face is uneven or undulating
•When approaching objects on the roadside, such as guardrails, utility
poles, trees, or walls
•When driving on a narrow path surrounded by a structure, such as in a
tunnel or on an iron bridge
•When there is a metal object (manhole cover, steel plate, etc.), steps, or a
protrusion on the road surface or roadside
•When driving on a road where relative
location to vehicle ahead in an adja-
cent lane may change, such as on a
winding road
•When there is a vehicle, pedestrian,
or object by the roadside at the
entrance of a curve
•When a crossing pedestrian
approaches very close to the vehicle
•When passing through a place with a
low structure above the road (low ceil-
ing, traffic sign, etc.)
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 294 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
295
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
•When rapidly closing on an electric toll gate barrier, parking area barrier,
or other barrier that opens and closes
•When using an automatic car wash
•When the vehicle is hit by water, snow, dust, etc. from a vehicle ahead
•When driving through steam or smoke
•When there are patterns or paint on the road or a wall that may be mis-
taken for a vehicle or pedestrian
•When driving near an object that reflects radio waves, such as a large
truck or guardrail
•When driving near a TV tower, broadcasting station, electric power plant,
or other location where strong radio waves or electrical noise may be
present
•When passing under an object (bill-
board, etc.) at the top of an uphill road
•When driving through or under
objects that may contact the vehicle,
such as thick grass, tree branches, or
a banner
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 295 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
296
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■ Situations in which the system may not operate properly
● In some situations such as the following, a vehicle may not be detected by
the radar sensor and camera sensor, preventing the system from operating
properly:
•If an oncoming vehicle is approaching your vehicle
•If a vehicle ahead is a motorcycle or bicycle
•When approaching the side or front of a vehicle
•If a preceding vehicle has a small rear end, such as an unloaded truck
•If a vehicle ahead is carrying a load which protrudes past its rear bumper
•If a vehicle ahead is irregularly shaped, such as a tractor or side car
•If the sun or other light is shining directly on a vehicle ahead
•If a vehicle cuts in front of your vehicle or emerges from beside a vehicle
•If a vehicle ahead makes an abrupt maneuver (such as sudden swerving,
acceleration or deceleration)
•When suddenly cutting behind a preceding vehicle
•If a preceding vehicle has a low rear
end, such as a low bed trailer
•If a vehicle ahead has extremely high
ground clearance
•When a vehicle ahead is not directly
in front of your vehicle
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 296 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
297
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
•When driving in inclement weather such as heavy rain, fog, snow or a
sandstorm
•When the vehicle is hit by water, snow, dust, etc. from a vehicle ahead
•When driving through steam or smoke
•When driving in a place where the surrounding brightness changes sud-
denly, such as at the entrance or exit of a tunnel
•When a very bright light, such as the sun or the headlights of oncoming
traffic, shines directly into the camera sensor
•When the surrounding area is dim, such as at dawn or dusk, or while at
night or in a tunnel
•After the engine has started the vehicle has not been driven for a certain
amount of time
•While making a left/right turn and for a few seconds after making a left/
right turn
•While driving on a curve and for a few seconds after driving on a curve
•If your vehicle is skidding
•If the wheels are misaligned
•If a wiper blade is blocking the camera sensor
•The vehicle is wobbling.
•The vehicle is being driven at extremely high speeds.
•When driving on a hill
•If the radar sensor or camera sensor is misaligned
● In some situations such as the following, sufficient braking force may not be
obtained, preventing the system from performing properly:
•If the braking functions cannot operate to their full extent, such as when
the brake parts are extremely cold, extremely hot, or wet
•If the vehicle is not properly maintained (brakes or tires are excessively
worn, improper tire inflation pressure, etc.)
•When the vehicle is being driven on a gravel road or other slippery sur-
face
•If the front of the vehicle is raised or
lowered
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 297 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
298
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
● Some pedestrians such as the following may not be detected by the radar
sensor and camera sensor, preventing the system from operating properly:
•Pedestrians shorter than approximately 1 m (3.2 ft.) or taller than approx-
imately 2 m (6.5 ft.)
•Pedestrians wearing oversized clothing (a rain coat, long skirt, etc.), mak-
ing their silhouette obscure
•Pedestrians who are carrying large baggage, holding an umbrella, etc.,
hiding part of their body
•Pedestrians who are bending forward or squatting
•Pedestrians who are pushing a stroller, wheelchair, bicycle or other vehi-
cle
•Groups of pedestrians which are close together
•Pedestrians who are wearing white and look extremely bright
•Pedestrians in the dark, such as at night or while in a tunnel
•Pedestrians whose clothing appears to be nearly the same color or
brightness as their surroundings
•Pedestrians near walls, fences, guardrails, or large objects
•Pedestrians who are on a metal object (manhole cover, steel plate, etc.)
on the road
•Pedestrians who are walking fast
•Pedestrians who are changing speed abruptly
•Pedestrians running out from behind a vehicle or a large object
•Pedestrians who are extremely close to the side of the vehicle (outside
rear view mirror, etc.)
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 298 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
299
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■ If the PCS warning light flashes and a warning message is displayed on
the multi-information display
The pre-crash safety system may be temporarily unavailable or there may be
a malfunction in the system.
● In the following situations, the warning light will turn off, the message will
disappear and the system will become operational when normal operating
conditions return:
•When the radar sensor or camera sensor or the area around either sen-
sor is hot, such as in the sun
•When the radar sensor or camera sensor or the area around either sen-
sor is cold, such as in an extremely cold environment
•When the radar sensor or front grille emblem is dirty or covered with
snow, etc.
•When the part of the windshield in front of the camera sensor is fogged
up or covered with condensation or ice.
(Defogging the windshield: →P. 44 9 , 4 5 8)
•If the camera sensor is obstructed, such as when the hood is open or a
sticker is attached to the windshield near the camera sensor
● If the PCS warning light continues to flash or the warning message does not
disappear, the system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected
by any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and
equipped professional immediately.
■ If VSC is disabled
● If VSC is disabled (→P. 3 55 ), t he p r e - cr as h b ra k e a s si st a n d p re -c ra sh b r a k-
ing functions are also disabled.
● The PCS warning light will turn on and “VSC TURNED OFF PRE-CRASH
BRAKE SYSTEM UNAVAILABLE”/“VSC Turned Off Pre-Crash Brake Sys-
tem Unavailable” will be displayed on the multi-information display.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 299 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
300
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
LDA (Lane Departure Alert)
∗
When driving on roads with white (yellow) lines, this function alerts the
driver when the vehicle might depart from its lane.
The LDA system recognizes visi-
ble white (yellow) lines with the
camera sensor on the upper por-
tion of the front windshield.
◆ Lane departure alert function
When the system determines
that the vehicle might depart
from its lane, a warning is dis-
played on the multi-information
display and the warning buzzer
sounds to alert the driver.
When the warning buzzer
sounds, check the surrounding
road situation and carefully
operate the steering wheel to
move the vehicle back to the
center of the lane.
∗: If equipped
Summary of functions
Functions included in LDA system
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 300 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
301
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
◆ Vehicle sway warning function
When the vehicle is swaying or
appears as if it may depart from
its lane multiple times, the
warning buzzer sounds and a
message is displayed on the
multi-information display to alert
the driver.
WARNING
■ Before using LDA system
Do not rely solely upon the LDA system. The LDA system does not auto-
matically drive the vehicle or reduce the amount of attention that must be
paid to the area in front of the vehicle. The driver must always assume full
responsibility for driving safely by paying careful attention to the surround-
ing conditions and operating the steering wheel to correct the path of the
vehicle. Also, the driver must take adequate breaks when fatigued, such as
from driving for a long period of time.
Failure to perform appropriate driving operations and pay careful attention
may lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.
■ To avoid operating LDA system by mistake
When not using the LDA system, use the LDA switch to turn the system off.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 301 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
302
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
WARNING
■ Situations unsuitable for LDA system
Do not use the LDA system in the following situations.
The system may not operate properly and lead to an accident, resulting in
death or serious injury.
● A spare tire, tire chains, etc., are equipped.
● Objects or patterns that could be mistaken for white (yellow) lines are
present on the side of the road (guardrails, curbs, reflective poles, etc.).
● Vehicle is driven on a snow-covered road.
● White (yellow) lines are difficult to see due to rain, snow, fog, dust, etc.
● Asphalt repair marks, white (yellow) line marks, etc., are present due to
road repair.
● Vehicle is driven in a temporary lane or restricted lane due to construction
work.
● Vehicle is driven in a construction zone.
■ Preventing LDA system malfunctions and operations performed by
mistake
● Do not modify the headlights or place stickers, etc., on the surface of the
lights.
● Do not modify the suspension etc. If the suspension etc. needs to be
replaced, contact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly
qualified and equipped professional.
● Do not install or place anything on the hood or grille. Also, do not install a
grille guard (bull bars, kangaroo bar, etc.).
● If your windshield needs repairs, contact any authorized Toyota dealer or
repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 302 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
303
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Press the LDA switch to turn the
LDA system on.
The LDA indicator illuminates.
Press the LDA switch again to turn
the LDA system off.
When the LDA system is turned on
or off, operation of the LDA system
continues in the same condition
the next time the engine is started.
LDA indicator
The illumination condition of the
indicator informs the driver of
the system operation status.
Vehicles with multi-informa-
tion display type A
Illuminated in green:
LDA system is operating.
Illuminated in green with the
lane departure alert function
display on:
Lane departure alert function is
operating.
Vehicles with multi-information display type B
Illuminated in green:
LDA system is operating.
Flashing in yellow:
Lane departure alert function is operating.
Turning LDA system on
Indications on multi-information display
1
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 303 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
304
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Lane departure alert function display
Vehicles with multi-information display type A:
Vehicles with multi-information display type B:
2
Solid lane lines are shown Thin lines are shown
Indicates that the system is recog-
nizing white (yellow) lines. When
the vehicle departs from its lane,
the white line displayed on the
side the vehicle departs from
flashes.
Indicates that the system is not
able to recognize white (yellow)
lines or is temporarily canceled.
Inside of displayed white lines
is white
Inside of displayed white lines
is black
Indicates that the system is recog-
nizing white (yellow) lines. When
the vehicle departs from its lane,
the white line displayed on the
side the vehicle departs from
flashes orange.
Indicates that the system is not
able to recognize white (yellow)
lines or is temporarily canceled.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 304 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
305
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■ Operation conditions of each function
● Lane departure alert function
This function operates when all of the following conditions are met.
•LDA is turned on.
•Vehicle speed is approximately 50 km/h (32 mph) or more.
•System recognizes white (yellow) lines.
•Width of traffic lane is approximately 3 m (9.8 ft.) or more.
•Turn signal lever is not operated.
•Vehicle is driven on a straight road or around a gentle curve with a
radius of more than approximately 150 m (492 ft.).
•No system malfunctions are detected. (→P. 3 0 7)
● Vehicle sway warning function
This function operates when all of the following conditions are met.
•LDA is turned on.
•Vehicle speed is approximately 50 km/h (32 mph) or more.
•Width of traffic lane is approximately 3 m (9.8 ft.) or more.
•No system malfunctions are detected. (→P. 3 0 7)
■ Temporary cancellation of functions
When operation conditions are no longer met, a function may be temporarily
canceled. However, when the operation conditions are met again, operation
of the function is automatically restored. (→P. 3 0 5 )
■ Lane departure alert function
The warning buzzer may be difficult to hear due to external noise, audio play-
back, etc.
■ White (yellow) lines are only on one side of road
The LDA system will not operate for the side on which white (yellow) lines
could not be recognized.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 305 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
306
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■ Conditions in which functions may not operate properly
In the following situations, the camera sensor may not detect white (yellow)
lines and various functions may not operate normally.
● There are shadows on the road that run parallel with, or cover, the white
(yellow) lines.
● The vehicle is driven in an area without white (yellow) lines, such as in front
of a tollgate or checkpoint, or at an intersection, etc.
● The white (yellow) lines are cracked, or “Raised pavement marker” or
stones are present.
● The white (yellow) lines cannot be seen or are difficult to see due to sand,
etc.
● The vehicle is driven on a road surface that is wet due to rain, puddles, etc.
● The traffic lines are yellow (which may be more difficult to recognize than
lines that are white).
● The white (yellow) lines cross over a curb, etc.
● The vehicle is driven on a bright surface, such as concrete.
● The vehicle is driven on a surface that is bright due to reflected light, etc.
● The vehicle is driven in an area where the brightness changes suddenly,
such as at the entrances and exits of tunnels, etc.
● Light from the headlights of an oncoming vehicle, the sun, etc., enters the
camera.
● The vehicle is driven where the road diverges, merges, etc.
● The vehicle is driven on a slope.
● The vehicle is driven on a road which tilts left or right, or a winding road.
● The vehicle is driven on an unpaved or rough road.
● The vehicle is driven around a sharp curve.
● The traffic lane is excessively narrow or wide.
● The vehicle is extremely tilted due to carrying heavy luggage or having
improper tire pressure.
● The distance to the preceding vehicle is extremely short.
● The vehicle is moving up and down a large amount due to road conditions
during driving (poor roads or road seams).
● The headlight lenses are dirty and emit a faint amount of light at night, or the
beam axis has deviated.
● The vehicle has just changed lanes or crossed an intersection.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 306 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
307
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■ Warning message
If the following warning message is displayed on the multi-information dis-
play, follow the appropriate troubleshooting procedure.
Warning message Details/Actions
“LDA MALFUNCTION
VISIT YOUR DEALER”/
“LDA malfunction
Visit your dealer”
The system may not be operating
properly.
→ Have the vehicle inspected at any
authorized Toyota dealer or
repairer, or another duly qualified
and equipped professional.
“FORWARD CAMERA
SYSTEM
UNAVAILABLE
CLEAN WINDSHIELD”/
“Forward Camera
System
Unavailable
Clean Windshield”
Dirt, rain, condensation, ice, snow,
etc., are present on the windshield in
front of the camera sensor.
→ Turn the LDA system off, remove
any dirt, rain, condensation, ice,
snow, etc., from the windshield, and
then turn the LDA system back on.
“FORWARD CAMERA
SYSTEM
UNAVAILABLE”/
“Forward Camera
System
Unavailable”
The operation conditions of the cam-
era sensor (temperature, etc.) are not
met.
→ When the operation conditions of
the camera sensor (temperature,
etc.) are met, the LDA system will
become available. Turn the LDA
system off, wait for a little while,
and then turn the LDA system back
on.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 307 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
308
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
If a different warning message is displayed, follow the instructions displayed
on the screen.
“LDA UNAVAILABLE”/
“LDA unavailable”
The LDA system is temporarily can-
celed due to a malfunction in a sensor
other than the camera sensor.
→ Turn the LDA system off and follow
the appropriate troubleshooting
procedures for the warning mes-
sage. Afterward, drive the vehicle
for a short time, and then turn the
LDA system back on.
“LDA UNAVAILABLE
BELOW APPROX
50km/h”/
“LDA unavailable
Below approx
50km/h”
The LDA system cannot be used as
the vehicle speed is less than approxi-
mately 50 km/h (32 mph).
→ Drive the vehicle at approximately
50 km/h (32 mph) or more.
“LDA UNAVAILABLE
BELOW APPROX
32MPH”/
“LDA unavailable
Below approx
32MPH”
“LDA UNAVAILABLE
AT CURRENT SPEED”/
“LDA unavailable
at current speed”
The LDA system cannot be used as
the vehicle speed is too high.
→ Reduce the vehicle speed.
Warning message Details/Actions
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 308 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
309
4
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
RSA (Road Sign Assist)
∗
RSA recognizes specific road
signs using the camera sensor
and provides information to the
driver via the multi-information
display.
If the system judges that the vehicle is being driven over the speed
limit, performing prohibited actions, etc., in relation to the recognized
road signs, it alerts the driver using a warning display and warning
buzzer
*.
*:This setting needs to be customized.
∗: If equipped
Summary of function
camera sensor
WARNING
■ Before using the RSA
Do not rely solely upon the RSA system. RSA is a system which supports
the driver by providing information, but it is not a replacement for a driver’s
own vision and awareness. Drive safely by always paying careful attention
to the traffic rules.
Inappropriate or negligent driving could lead to an unexpected accident.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 309 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
310
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
After the camera sensor recognizes a sign, it is displayed on the multi-
information display when the vehicle passes the sign.
● When the driving assist system
information is selected, a maxi-
mum of 3 signs can be dis-
played. (→P. 13 6 )
● When other than the driving
assist system information is
selected, a speed limit sign, a
highway sign or an all canceled
sign can be displayed.
(→P. 1 3 6 )
A no overtaking sign and a
speed limit sign with supple-
mental mark are not displayed.
However, if signs other than
speed limit signs are recog-
nized, they are mentioned in a
stack under the current speed
limit sign.
Indication on the multi-information display
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 310 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
311
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
The following types of road signs, including electronic signs and blink-
ing signs, are recognized.
A non-official (not meeting the Vienna Convention) or a recently introduced
traffic sign may not be recognized.
Types of recognized road signs
Type Multi-information display
Speed limit begins/ends*
1
Highway entrance/exit
Speed limit with
supplemental
mark
(Displayed simul-
taneously with
speed limit)
(Display example)
Wet
Rain
Ice
On/off ramp*
2
Supplemental
mark exists
(Contents not rec-
ognized)
No overtaking begins/ends
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 311 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
312
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
*
1
:A speed limit sign with a value greater than 130 may not be recognized
and a wrong speed limit may be displayed.
*
2
:If the turn signal indicator is not operated when changing lanes, the mark
does not display.
In the following situations, the RSA system alerts the driver using a
warning display.
● When the vehicle speed exceeds the speed warning threshold
applied to the speed limit of the sign displayed on the multi-informa-
tion display, the sign color becomes inverted.
● If it is detected that your vehicle is overtaking when a no overtaking
sign is displayed on the multi-information display, the sign flashes.
Depending on the situation, traffic environment (traffic direction,
speed, unit) may be detected incorrectly and a warning display may
not operate properly.
■ Automatic turn-off of RSA sign display
One or more signs automatically turn off in the following situations.
● A new sign is not recognized for a certain distance.
● The road changes due to a left or right turn, etc.
■ Conditions in which the function may not operate or detect correctly
In the following situations, RSA does not operate normally and may not rec-
ognize signs, display the incorrect sign, etc. However, this does not indicate a
malfunction.
● The camera sensor is misaligned due to a strong impact being applied to
the sensor, etc.
● Dirt, snow, stickers, etc., are on the windshield near the camera sensor.
● In inclement weather such as heavy rain, fog, snow or sand storms
● Light from an oncoming vehicle, the sun, etc., enters the camera sensor.
● The sign is dirty, faded, tilted or bent, and if an electronic sign, the contrast
is poor.
● All or part of the sign is hidden by the leaves of a tree, a pole, etc.
All canceled
(All restrictions canceled. Returns to
default road regulation.)
Warning display
Type Multi-information display
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 312 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
313
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
● The sign is only visible to the camera sensor for a short amount of time.
● The driving scene (turning, lane change, etc.) is judged incorrectly.
● Even if it is a sign not appropriate for the currently traveled lane, such a sign
exists directly after a freeway branches, or in an adjacent lane just before
merging.
● Stickers are attached to the rear of the preceding vehicle.
● A sign resembling a system compatible sign is recognized.
● The vehicle is driven in a country with a different direction of traffic.
● Side road speed signs may be detected and displayed (if positioned in sight
of the camera sensor) while the vehicle is traveling on the main road.
● Roundabout exit road speed signs may be detected and displayed (if posi-
tioned in sight of the camera sensor) while traveling on a roundabout.
● The speed information displayed on the meter and that displayed on the
Navigation system (if equipped) may be different due to the Navigation sys-
tem or Multimedia system using map data.
■ When driving vehicle in country with different speed unit
Since RSA recognizes signs based on the set unit of the meter, it is neces-
sary to change the set unit of the meter. Adjust the set unit of the meter to the
speed unit of signs in the current location. (→P. 6 49 )
■ Turning the system on/off
Use the meter control switches to select while the vehicle is stopped and
press , and select and press .
■ Speed limit sign display
If the engine switch was last turned to the “LOCK” position (vehicles without
smart entry & start system) or off (vehicles with smart entry & start system)
while a speed limit sign was displayed on the multi-information display, the
same sign displays again when the engine switch is turned to the “ON” posi-
tion (vehicles without smart entry & start system) or IGNITION ON mode
(vehicles with smart entry & start system).
■ Customization
Setting (e.g. speeding warning threshold) can be changed.
(Customizable feature: →P. 6 4 8)
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 313 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
314
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Cruise control
∗
Use the cruise control to maintain a set speed without depressing the
accelerator pedal.
Indicators
Cruise control switch
Press the “ON-OFF” button to
activate the cruise control.
Cruise control indicator will come
on.
Press the button again to deacti-
vate the cruise control.
Accelerate or decelerate the
vehicle to the desired speed,
and push the lever down to set
the speed.
“SET” indicator will come on.
The vehicle speed at the moment
the lever is released becomes the
set speed.
∗: If equipped
Summary of functions
1
2
Setting the vehicle speed
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 314 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
315
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
To c hang e th e s et s p e e d , o p e rate t he l eve r u n t il t he d e sired se t sp e e d
is obtained.
Increases the speed
Decreases the speed
Fine adjustment: Momentarily
move the lever in the desired direc-
tion.
Large adjustment: Hold the lever in
the desired direction.
The set speed will be increased or decreased as follows:
Fine adjustment: By approximately 1.6 km/h (1 mph) each time the lever is
operated.
Large adjustment: The set speed can be increased or decreased continu-
ally until the lever is released.
Pulling the lever toward you
cancels the constant speed
control.
The speed setting is also canceled
when the brakes are applied or the
clutch pedal (manual transmission
only) is depressed.
Pushing the lever up resumes
the constant speed control.
Resuming is available when the vehicle speed is more than approximately
40 km/h (25 mph).
Adjusting the set speed
1
2
Canceling and resuming the constant speed control
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 315 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
316
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■ Cruise control can be set when
● The shift lever is in the D or range 4 or higher of S has been selected. (vehi-
cles with automatic transmission)
● Vehicle speed is above approximately 40 km/h (25 mph).
■ Accelerating after setting the vehicle speed
● The vehicle can be accelerated normally. After acceleration, the set speed
resumes.
● Even without canceling the cruise control, the set speed can be increased
by first accelerating the vehicle to the desired speed and then pushing the
lever down to set the new speed.
■ Automatic cruise control cancelation
Cruise control will stop maintaining the vehicle speed in any of the following
situations:
● Actual vehicle speed falls more than approximately 16 km/h (10 mph) below
the preset vehicle speed.
At this time, the memorized set speed is not retained.
● Actual vehicle speed is below approximately 40 km/h (25 mph).
● VSC is activated. (if equipped)
● 4WD models: The front-wheel drive control switch is switched between H2
and H4.
● TRC or A-TRC is activated for a period of time.
● When the VSC, TRC or A-TRC system is turned off. (if equipped)
■ If the warning message for the cruise control is shown on the multi-
information display
Press the “ON-OFF” button once to deactivate the system, and then press
the button again to reactivate the system.
If the cruise control speed cannot be set or if the cruise control cancels imme-
diately after being activated, there may be a malfunction in the cruise control
system. Have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Toyota dealer or
repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 316 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
317
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
WARNING
■ To avoid operating the cruise control by mistake
Switch the cruise control off using the “ON-OFF” button when not in use.
■ Situations unsuitable for cruise control
Do not use cruise control in any of the following situations.
Doing so may result in loss of control and could cause an accident resulting
in death or serious injury.
● In heavy traffic
● On roads with sharp bends
● On winding roads
● On slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or snow
● On steep hills
Vehicle speed may exceed the set speed when driving down a steep hill.
● When your vehicle is towing a trailer (models for model code destination
W
*) or during emergency towing
*:See “Checking your vehicle’s model” if you are not sure of which model
your vehicle is. (→P. 11 )
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 317 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
318
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Rear view monitor system
∗
The rear view monitor system will
activate when the shift lever is in
R. (→P. 2 47 , 25 4 )
The rear view monitor system will
be deactivated when the shift lever
is in any position other than R.
When the shift lever is shifted to
the R position and any mode but-
ton (such as “SETUP”) is pressed,
the rear view monitor system is
canceled, and the screen is
switched to the mode of the button
that was pressed.
∗: If equipped
The rear view monitor system assists the driver by displaying an
image of the view behind the vehicle with fixed guide lines while
backing up, for example while parking.
The screen illustrations used in this text are intended as examples,
and may differ from the image that is actually displayed on the
screen.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 318 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
319
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■
Screen description
Vehicles without smart entry & start system
The rear view monitor system screen will be displayed if the shift
lever is shifted to R while the engine switch is in the “ON” position.
Vehicles with smart entry & start system
The rear view monitor system screen will be displayed if the shift
lever is shifted to R while the engine switch is in IGNITION ON
mode.
Vehicle width guide line
The line indicates a guide path when the vehicle is being backed straight
up.
The displayed width is wider than the actual vehicle width.
Vehicle center guide line
The line indicates the estimated vehicle center on the ground.
Distance guide line (red)
The line shows distance behind the vehicle, a point approximately 0.5 m
(1.5 ft.) from the edge of the bumper.
Distance guide line (blue)
The line shows distance behind the vehicle, a point approximately 1 m
(3 ft.) from the edge of the bumper.
Using the rear view monitor system
1
2
3
4
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 319 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
320
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■
Area displayed on screen
The rear view monitor system
displays an image of the view
from the bumper of the rear
area of the vehicle.
The image on the rear view
monitor system screen can be
adjusted. Refer to the “Naviga-
tion and multimedia system
Owner’s manual”.
•The area displayed on the
screen may vary according to
vehicle orientation conditions.
•Objects which are close to either
corner of the bumper or under
the bumper cannot be dis-
played.
•The camera uses a special lens.
The distance of the image that
appears on the screen differs
from the actual distance.
•Items which are located higher than the camera may not be displayed
on the monitor.
Rear view monitor system precautions
Corners of bumper
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 320 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
321
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■
Rear view monitor system camera
The camera for the rear view monitor system is located on the tail-
gate.
● Using the camera
If dirt or foreign matter (such as water droplets, snow, mud etc.)
is adhering to the camera, it cannot transmit a clear image. In
this case, flush it with a large quantity of water and wipe the cam-
era lens clean with a soft and wet cloth.
■ Differences between the screen and the actual road
The distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide lines may not
actually be parallel with the dividing lines of the parking space, even
when they appear to be so. Be sure to check visually.
The distances between the vehicle width guide lines and the left
and right dividing lines of the parking space may not be equal, even
when they appear to be so. Be sure to check visually.
The distance guide lines give a distance guide for flat road sur-
faces. In any of the following situations, there is a margin of error
between the fixed guide lines on the screen and the actual dis-
tance/course on the road.
Type A Type B
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 321 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
322
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
● When the ground behind the vehicle slopes up sharply
The distance guide lines will
appear to be closer to the
vehicle than the actual dis-
tance. Because of this,
objects will appear to be fur-
ther away than they actually
are. In the same way, there
will be a margin of error
between the guide lines and
the actual distance/course on
the road.
● When the ground behind the vehicle slopes down sharply
The distance guide lines will
appear to be further from the
vehicle than the actual dis-
tance. Because of this,
objects will appear to be
closer than they actually are.
In the same way, there will be
a margin of error between
the guide lines and the actual
distance/course on the road.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 322 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
323
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
● When any part of the vehicle sags
When any part of the vehicle
sags due to the number of
passengers or the distribu-
tion of the load, there is a
margin of error between the
fixed guide lines on the
screen and the actual dis-
tance/course on the road.
■ When approaching three-dimensional objects
The distance guide lines are displayed according to flat surfaced
objects (such as the road). It is not possible to determine the posi-
tion of three-dimensional objects (such as vehicles) using the vehi-
cle width guide lines and distance guide lines. When approaching a
three-dimensional object that extends outward (such as the flatbed
of a truck), be careful of the following.
● Vehicle width guide lines
Visually check the surround-
ings and the area behind the
vehicle. In the case shown in
the illustration, the truck
appears to be outside of the
vehicle width guide lines and
the vehicle does not look as if
it hits the truck. However, the
rear body of the truck may
actually cross over the vehi-
cle width guide lines. In real-
ity if you back up as guided
by the vehicle width guide
lines, the vehicle may hit the
truck.
A margin of error
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 323 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
324
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
● Distance guide lines
Visually check the surround-
ings and the area behind the
vehicle. On the screen, it
appears that a truck is park-
ing at point . However, in
reality if you back up to point
, you will hit the truck. On
the screen, it appears that
is closest and is farthest
away. However, in reality, the
distance to and is the
same, and is further than
and .
2
1
1
3
1 3
2
1 3
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 324 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
325
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■
If you notice any symptoms
If you notice any of the following symptoms, refer to the likely cause
and the solution, and re-check.
If the symptom is not resolved by the solution, have the vehicle
inspected by any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another
duly qualified and equipped professional.
Things you should know
Likely cause Solution
The image is difficult to see
•The vehicle is in a dark area
•The temperature around the lens
is either high or low
•The outside temperature is low
•There are water droplets on the
camera
•It is raining or humid
•Foreign matter (mud etc.) is
adhering to the camera
•There are scratches on the cam-
era
•Sunlight or headlights are shining
directly into the camera
•The vehicle is under fluorescent
lights, sodium lights, mercury
lights etc.
If this happens due to these causes,
it does not indicate a malfunction.
Back up while visually checking the
vehicle’s surroundings. (Use the
monitor again once conditions have
been improved.)
The image on the rear view monitor
system screen can be adjusted,
refer to the “Navigation and
multimedia system Owner’s
manual”.
The image is blurry
Dirt or foreign matter (such as water
droplets, snow, mud etc.) is adher-
ing to the camera.
Flush the camera with a large quan-
tity of water and wipe the camera
lens clean with a soft and wet cloth.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 325 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
326
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
The image is out of alignment
The camera or surrounding area has
received a strong impact.
Have the vehicle inspected by any
authorized Toyota dealer or repairer,
or another duly qualified and
equipped professional.
The fixed guide lines are very far out of alignment
The camera position is out of align-
ment.
Have the vehicle inspected by any
authorized Toyota dealer or repairer,
or another duly qualified and
equipped professional.
•The vehicle is tilted (there is a
heavy load on the vehicle, tire
pressure is low due to a tire punc-
ture, etc.)
•The vehicle is used on an incline.
If this happens due to these causes,
it does not indicate a malfunction.
Back up while visually checking the
vehicle’s surroundings.
Likely cause Solution
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 326 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
327
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
WARNING
■ When using the rear view monitor system
The rear view monitor system is a supplemental device intended to assist
the driver when backing up. When backing up, be sure to visually check all
around the vehicle both directly and using the mirrors before proceeding.
Observe the following precautions to avoid an accident that could result in
death or serious injuries.
● Never depend on the rear view monitor system entirely when backing up.
The image and the position of the guide lines displayed on the screen may
differ from the actual state.
Use caution, just as you would when backing up any vehicle.
● Be sure to back up slowly, depressing the brake pedal to control vehicle
speed.
● The instructions given are only guide lines.
When and how much to turn the steering wheel will vary according to traf-
fic conditions, road surface conditions, vehicle condition, etc. when park-
ing. It is necessary to be fully aware of this before using the rear view
monitor system.
● When parking, be sure to check that the parking space will accommodate
your vehicle before maneuvering into it.
● Do not use the rear view monitor system in the following cases:
•On icy or slick road surfaces, or in snow
•When using tire chains
•When the tailgate is not closed completely
•On roads that are not flat or straight, such as curves or slopes.
● In low temperatures, the screen may darken or the image may become
faint. The image could distort when the vehicle is moving, or you may
become unable to see the image on the screen. Be sure to visually check
all around the vehicle both directly and using the mirrors before proceed-
ing.
● If the tire sizes are changed, the position of the fixed guide lines displayed
on the screen may change.
● The camera uses a special lens. The distances between objects and
pedestrians that appear in the image displayed on the screen will differ
from the actual distances.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 327 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
328
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
NOTICE
■ How to use the camera
● The rear view monitor system may not operate properly in the following
cases.
•If the back of the vehicle is hit, the position and mounting angle of the
camera may change.
•As the camera has a water proof construction, do not detach, disassem-
ble or modify it. This may cause incorrect operation.
•When cleaning the camera lens, flush the camera with a large quantity
of water and wipe it with a soft and wet cloth. Strongly rubbing the cam-
era lens may cause the camera lens to be scratched and unable to
transmit a clear image.
•Do not allow organic solvent, car wax, window cleaner or glass coat to
adhere to the camera. If this happens, wipe it off as soon as possible.
•If the temperature changes rapidly, such as when hot water is poured
on the vehicle in cold weather, the system may not operate normally.
•When washing the vehicle, do not apply intensive bursts of water to the
camera or camera area. Doing so may result in the camera malfunc-
tioning.
•When the camera is used under fluorescent lights, sodium light or mer-
cury light etc., the lights and the illuminated areas may appear to flicker.
● Do not expose the camera to strong impact as this could cause a malfunc-
tion. If this happens, have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Toyota
dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional as
soon as possible.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 328 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
329
4
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Four-wheel drive system
∗
H2 (high speed position, two-
wheel drive)
Use this for normal driving on dry
hard
-surfaced roads. This position
gives greater economy, quietest
ride and least wear.
H4 (high speed position, four-
wheel drive)
Use this for driving only on tracks
that permit the tires slide, like off-
road, icy or snow-covered roads.
This position provides greater trac-
tion than two-wheel drive.
The four-wheel drive indicator
light comes on
L4 (low speed position, four-
wheel drive)
Use this for maximum power and traction. Use L4 for climbing or descend-
ing steep hills, off-road driving, and hard pulling in sand, mud or deep
snow.
The four-wheel drive and low speed four-wheel drive indicator lights
come on
The A.D.D. can be engaged or disengaged by the shifting operations
described in the following shifting procedures.
∗: If equipped
Use the front-wheel drive control switch to select the following
transfer modes.
1
2
3
A.D.D. (automatic disconnecting differential) (if equipped)
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 329 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
330
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■
Shifting from H2 to H4
Reduce the vehicle speed to
less than 100 km/h (62 mph).
The transfer mode cannot be
switched if the vehicle speed is
more than 100 km/h (62 mph).
Turn the front-wheel drive
control switch to H4.
The four-wheel drive indicator
light flashes while switching.
If turning the front-wheel drive
control switch when the vehicle
speed is more than 100 km/h
(62 mph), the four-wheel drive
indicator light flashes and a
buzzer sounds.
Reduce the vehicle speed to less than 100 km/h (62 mph), or return the
front-wheel drive control switch to H2 and try step again.
Check that the four-wheel
drive indicator light comes on.
The four-wheel drive indicator
light comes on when switching
the transfer mode is completed.
If the four-wheel drive indicator
light does not stop flashing after
turning the front-wheel drive
control switch from H2 to H4,
perform any of the followings
while driving straight.
•Accelerating
•Decelerating
•Driving in reverse
The four-wheel drive indicator light may not stop flashing if the front-
wheel drive control switch is turned from H2 to H4 while the vehicle is
stopped. In this case, perform any of the followings.
•Driving forward
•Driving in reverse
Shifting between H2 and H4
100 km/h
(62 mph)
1
(Flashes)
2
1
(Comes on)
3
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 330 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
331
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■
Shifting from H4 to H2
Turn the front-wheel drive
control switch to H2.
The four-wheel drive indicator
light flashes while switching.
Check that the four-wheel
drive indicator light goes off.
The four-wheel drive indicator
light goes off when switching the
transfer mode is completed.
If the four-wheel drive indicator
light does not stop flashing after
turning the front-wheel drive
control switch from H4 to H2,
perform the followings while
driving straight.
•Accelerating
•Decelerating
•Driving in reverse
If the four-wheel drive indicator light is still flashing, perform the opera-
tions above while turning the steering wheel left and right.
Impact may be felt through the vehicle body and steering. However, this
does not indicate a malfunction.
(Flashes)
1
(Goes off)
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 331 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
332
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■
Shifting from H4 to L4
Stop the vehicle.
The transfer mode cannot be
switched if the vehicle is mov-
ing.
Shift the shift lever to N.
Keep the shift lever in N until
switching the transfer mode is
completed (indicator on).
The transfer mode cannot be
switched if the shift lever is in
other than N.
Push and turn the front-
wheel drive control switch to
L4.
The low speed four-wheel drive
indicator light flashes while
switching.
If turning the front-wheel drive
control switch without following
steps and , the low speed
four-wheel drive indicator light
flashes and a buzzer sounds.
Return the front-wheel drive
control switch to H4 and try
steps and again.
If the shift lever is shifted to other than N while the low speed four-wheel
drive indicator light is flashing, gear noise may be caused. Immediately
shift the shift lever to N and wait until switching the transfer mode is
completed.
Shifting between H4 and L4 (automatic transmission)
0 km/h (0 mph)
1
2
(Flashes)
3
1 2
1 2
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 332 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
333
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Check that the low speed
four-wheel drive indicator
light comes on.
The low speed four-wheel drive
indicator light comes on when
switching the transfer mode is
completed.
Shift the shift lever from N to D
or R to drive the vehicle.
■
Shifting from L4 to H4
Stop the vehicle.
The transfer mode cannot be
switched if the vehicle is mov-
ing.
Shift the shift lever to N.
Keep the shift lever in N until
switching the transfer mode is
completed (indicator off).
The transfer mode cannot be
switched if the shift lever is in
other than N.
(Comes on)
4
0 km/h (0 mph)
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 333 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
334
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Turn the front-wheel drive
control switch to H4.
The low speed four-wheel drive
indicator light flashes while
switching.
If turning the front-wheel drive
control switch without following
steps and , the low speed
four-wheel drive indicator light
flashes and a buzzer sounds.
Return the front-wheel drive
control switch to L4 and try
steps and again.
If the shift lever is shifted to other than N while the low speed four-wheel
drive indicator light is flashing, gear noise may be caused. Immediately
shift the shift lever to N and wait until switching the transfer mode is
completed.
Check that the low speed
four-wheel drive indicator
light goes off.
The low speed four-wheel drive
indicator light goes off when
switching the transfer mode is
completed.
Shift the shift lever from N to D
or R to drive the vehicle.
(Flashes)
3
1 2
1 2
(Goes off)
4
NOTICE
■ Shifting between H4 and L4
Do not shift the shift lever to other than N or depress the accelerator pedal
while the low speed four-wheel drive indicator light is flashing. Failure to do
so may cause gear noise and result in a malfunction.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 334 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
335
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■
Shifting from H4 to L4
Stop the vehicle.
The transfer mode cannot be
switched if the vehicle is mov-
ing.
Firmly depress the clutch
pedal.
Keep depressing the clutch
pedal until switching the transfer
mode is completed (indicator
on).
The transfer mode cannot be
switched if the clutch pedal is
not fully depressed.
Push and turn the front-
wheel drive control switch to
L4.
The low speed four-wheel drive
indicator light flashes while
switching.
If turning the front-wheel drive
control switch without following
steps and , the low speed
four-wheel drive indicator light
flashes and a buzzer sounds.
Return the front-wheel drive
control switch to H4 and try
steps and again.
If the clutch pedal is released while the low speed four-wheel drive indi-
cator light is flashing, gear noise may be caused. Immediately depress
the clutch pedal firmly and wait until switching the transfer mode is com-
pleted.
Shifting between H4 and L4 (manual transmission)
0 km/h (0 mph)
1
2
(Flashes)
3
1 2
1 2
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 335 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
336
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Check that the low speed
four-wheel drive indicator
light comes on.
The low speed four-wheel drive
indicator light comes on when
switching the transfer mode is
completed.
Release the clutch pedal to
drive the vehicle.
■
Shifting from L4 to H4
Stop the vehicle.
The transfer mode cannot be
switched if the vehicle is mov-
ing.
Firmly depress the clutch
pedal.
Keep depressing the clutch
pedal until switching the transfer
mode is completed (indicator
off).
The transfer mode cannot be
switched if the clutch pedal is
not fully depressed.
(Comes on)
4
0 km/h (0 mph)
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 336 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
337
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Turn the front-wheel drive
control switch to H4.
The low speed four-wheel drive
indicator light flashes while
switching.
If turning the front-wheel drive
control switch without following
steps and , the low speed
four-wheel drive indicator light
flashes and a buzzer sounds.
Return the front-wheel drive
control switch to L4 and try
steps and again.
If the clutch pedal is released while the low speed four-wheel drive indi-
cator light is flashing, gear noise may be caused. Immediately depress
the clutch pedal firmly and wait until switching the transfer mode is com-
pleted.
Check that the low speed
four-wheel drive indicator
light goes off.
The low speed four-wheel drive
indicator light goes off when
switching the transfer mode is
completed.
Release the clutch pedal to
drive the vehicle.
(Flashes)
3
1 2
1 2
(Goes off)
4
NOTICE
■ Shifting between H4 and L4
Do not release the clutch pedal or depress the accelerator pedal while the
low speed four-wheel drive indicator light is flashing. Failure to do so may
cause gear noise and result in a malfunction.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 337 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
338
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■ Four-wheel drive usage frequency (vehicles with A.D.D.)
You s hould drive in fou r-w h eel d rive for at lea st 16 k m (1 0 mile s) eac h mont h .
This will assure that the front drive components are lubricated.
■ Shifting between H2 and H4
If you have trouble shifting in cold weather, reduce your speed or stop the
vehicle and reshift.
■ Shifting to L4 (vehicles with VSC)
VSC is automatically turned off.
■ When driving on dry paved surface roads and expressway
Use H2 position. If the vehicle is driven in H4 or L4 position for a long time, a
warning buzzer sounds, and the four-wheel drive indicator light flashes rap-
idly or a warning message is shown on the multi-information display. If the
warning message is shown on the multi-information display, follow the mes-
sage.
■ If “DIFFERENTIAL OIL TEMP HIGH SHIFT TO 2WD MODE COOLING TIME
REQUIRED”/“Differential oil temp high Shift to 2WD mode Cooling time
required” is shown on the multi-information display (vehicles with multi-
information display)
The differential oil temperature is too high.
Turn the front-wheel drive control switch to H2, and wait until the warning
message goes off.
WARNING
■ While driving
● Never turn the front-wheel drive control switch from H2 to H4 if the wheels
are slipping. Stop the slipping or spinning before shifting.
● For normal driving on dry and hard surface roads, use H2 position. Driving
on dry and hard surface roads in H4 or L4 position may cause drive com-
ponent oil leakage, seizure, or other problems resulting in an accident.
Further, it may cause tire wear and increased fuel consumption.
● Avoid turning suddenly in H4 or L4 position. If you do turn suddenly, the
difference in turning speeds between the front and rear wheels may have
a similar effect to braking, thus making driving difficult.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 338 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
339
4
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Rear differential lock system
∗
Press the rear differential lock
switch to lock the rear differential.
The rear differential lock indicator
comes on.
To u nlo ck th e re ar di ff er en tia l, p us h
the switch again.
∗: If equipped
The rear differential lock system is provided for use only when
wheel spinning occurs in a ditch or on a slippery or ragged sur-
face.
This differential lock system is effective in case one of the rear
wheels is spinning.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 339 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
340
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
4WD models only: Before using
the rear differential lock system,
turn the front-wheel drive con-
trol switch to L4 and try to move
the vehicle. (→P. 3 3 2, 3 3 5 )
If this is not sufficient, use the rear
differential lock system as well.
Reduce the vehicle speed to
less than 8 km/h (5 mph).
Make sure that the wheels are not
spinning.
Press the rear differential lock
switch.
The rear differential lock indicator
flashes while the rear differential is
being locked.
If pressing the rear differential lock
switch without following steps
and , the rear differential lock
indicator flashes three times and a
buzzer sounds three times, and the
rear differential cannot be locked.
Try steps and again.
Using the rear differential lock system
1
8 km/h (5 mph)
2
(Flashes)
3
1
2
1 2
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 340 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
341
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Gently depress the accelerator
pedal.
Check that the rear differential
lock indicator comes on.
The rear differential lock indicator
comes on when locking the rear
differential is completed.
If the rear differential lock indicator
does not stop flashing after press-
ing the rear differential lock switch,
perform any of the followings while
turning the steering wheel left and
right.
•Accelerating
•Decelerating
Unlock the rear differential as soon as the vehicle moves. To unlock
the rear differential, push the switch again.
4
(Comes on)
5
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 341 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
342
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■ Locking the rear differential
The following systems do not operate when the rear differential is locked.
It is normal operation for the ABS warning light, VSC OFF indicator (if
equipped) and “TRC OFF” indicator (if equipped) to be on or for “TRC
TURNED OFF”/“TRC turned off” to be displayed on the multi-information dis-
play (if equipped) at this time.
•ABS
•Brake assist (if equipped)
•VSC (if equipped)
•TRC/A-TRC (if equipped)
•Trailer Sway Control (if equipped)
•Hill-start assist control (if equipped)
•Downhill assist control (if equipped)
■ For easy unlocking
Slightly turn the steering wheel in either direction while the vehicle is in
motion.
■ Automatic system cancelation of the rear differential lock system
The rear differential lock is also unlocked in any of the following situations:
● The front-wheel drive control switch is turned to H2 or H4 (4WD models)
● The engine switch is turned to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position (vehicles with-
out smart entry & start system) or ACCESSORY or off (vehicles with smart
entry & start system)
■ After unlocking the rear differential
Check that the indicator goes off.
WARNING
■ To avoid an accident
Failure to observe the following precautions may result in an accident.
● Do not use the rear differential lock system except when wheel spinning
occurs in a ditch or on a slippery or rugged surface. Large steering effort
and careful cornering control will be required.
● Do not lock the rear differential until the wheels have stopped spinning.
Otherwise, the vehicle may move in an unexpected direction when the dif-
ferential lock is engaged, resulting in an accident. This may also lead to
possible damage to rear differential lock component parts.
● Do not drive over 8 km/h (5 mph) when the differential is locked.
● Do not keep driving with the rear differential lock switch on.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 342 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
343
4
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Stop & Start system (Smart Stop)
∗
■ Stopping the engine
Vehicles with automatic
transmission
While driving in D or S, depress
the brake pedal, and stop the
vehicle.
The Stop & Start indicator will
come on.
Vehicles with manual trans-
mission
Stop the vehicle With the clutch pedal fully depressed, shift the shift
lever to N, and release the clutch pedal.
The Stop & Start indicator will come on.
■ Restarting the engine
Vehicles with automatic transmission
Release the brake pedal.
The Stop & Start indicator will go off.
Vehicles with manual transmission
Check that the shift lever is in N and depress the clutch pedal.
The Stop & Start indicator will go off.
∗: If equipped
The Stop & Start system stops and restarts the engine according
to the brake pedal operation (automatic transmission) or clutch
pedal operation (manual transmission) for stopping and starting
the vehicle.
Stop & Start system operation
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 343 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
344
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Press the Stop & Start cancel
switch to disable the Stop & Start
system.
The Stop & Start cancel indicator
will come on.
Press the switch again to re-enable
the Stop & Start system.
■
Automatic reactivation of the Stop & Start system
Even if the Stop & Start system is disabled by the Stop & Start can-
cel switch, it will be automatically re-enabled once the engine
switch is turned to the “LOCK” position (vehicles without smart
entry & start system) or off (vehicles with smart entry & start sys-
tem), and then the engine is started.
■ If the Stop & Start cancel switch is pressed while the vehicle is
stopped
● When the engine is stopped by the Stop & Start system, pressing
the Stop & Start cancel switch will restart the engine.
From the next time the vehicle is stopped (after Stop & Start sys-
tem has been turned off), the engine will not be stopped.
● With the Stop & Start system disabled, pressing the Stop & Start
cancel switch will re-enable the system but not stop the engine.
From the next time the vehicle is stopped (after Stop & Start sys-
tem has been turned on), the engine will be stopped.
Disabling the Stop & Start system
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 344 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
345
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
After the engine is stopped by the Stop & Start system when the vehi-
cle is on an incline, brake force is temporarily maintained to prevent
rolling backwards until the engine is restarted and drive force is gener-
ated. When drive force is generated, the maintained brake force is
automatically canceled.
● This system operates on flat surfaces as well as steep grades.
● Sound may be generated by the brakes, but this is not a malfunc-
tion.
● The brake pedal response may change and vibration may occur,
but these are not malfunctions.
■ Operating conditions
● The Stop & Start system is operational when all of the following conditions
are met:
•Vehicles with automatic transmission: The brake pedal is being
depressed firmly
•Vehicles with manual transmission: The clutch pedal is not being
depressed.
•The engine is adequately warmed up.
•The outside temperature is -5 °C (23 °F) or higher
•Vehicles with automatic transmission: The shift lever is in D or S, or P
after driving in D or S.
•Vehicles with manual transmission: The shift lever is in N.
•Vehicles with automatic air conditioning system: is off.
•The hood is closed. (→P. 3 4 7)
•The driver’s seat belt is fastened.
•The driver’s door is closed.
•The accelerator pedal is not being depressed.
● In the following circumstances, the engine may not be stopped by the Stop
& Start system. This is not a malfunction of the Stop & Start system.
•The air conditioning system is being used when the ambient temperature
is high or low.
•The battery is not sufficiently charged, or is undergoing a periodic
recharge.
•The brake booster vacuum is low.
•The vehicle is stopped on a steep hill.
Hill-start assist control
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 345 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
346
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
•When the steering wheel is being operated
•Due to traffic or other circumstances the vehicle is stopped repeatedly,
resulting in the amount of time the engine is stopped by the Stop & Start
system to become excessively high.
•At high altitude.
•Engine coolant temperature or transmission fluid temperature is too low
or too high.
•The battery fluid temperature is excessively high or low.
•After the battery terminals have been disconnected and reconnected.
•For a while after a battery replacement.
•When the front-wheel drive control switch is in the L4 position or the rear
differential is locked.
● In the following circumstances, the engine will automatically restart when
the engine is stopped by the Stop & Start system.
•The air conditioning system is turned on.
•Vehicles with automatic air conditioning system: is turned on.
•When the steering wheel is being operated.
•Vehicles with automatic transmission: The shift lever is in any position
other than D, S or P.
•Vehicles with manual transmission: The shift lever is in any position other
than N
•The driver’s seat belt is unfastened.
•The driver’s door is opened.
•The accelerator pedal is depressed.
•The Stop & Start cancel switch is pressed.
•The vehicle starts to roll on an incline.
In order to have the engine stopped by the Stop & Start system again, drive
the vehicle once.
Vehicles with automatic transmission: The engine may be stopped by Stop
& Start system automatically without driving the vehicle if the idling stop
time is set to “Long”. (→P. 3 48 )
● In the following circumstances, the engine may automatically restart when
the engine is stopped by the Stop & Start system.
•The brake pedal is pumped or strongly depressed.
•The air conditioning system is being used.
•The battery is not sufficiently charged.
In order to have the engine stopped by the Stop & Start system again, drive
the vehicle once.
Vehicles with automatic transmission: The engine may be stopped by Stop
& Start system automatically without driving the vehicle if the idling stop
time is set to “Long”. (→P. 3 48 )
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 346 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
347
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■ Hood
● If the hood is opened while the engine is stopped by the Stop & Start sys-
tem, the engine may not be restarted by the Stop & Start system or by the
automatic engine start function. In this case, shift the shift lever to P (vehi-
cles with automatic transmission) or N (vehicles with manual transmission)
and restart the engine with the engine switch operation. (→P. 2 3 6 , 23 9)
● Even if the hood is closed after the engine is started with the hood open, the
Stop & Start system does not operate. Close the hood, turn the engine
switch to the “LOCK” position (vehicles without smart entry & start system)
or off (vehicles with smart entry & start system), wait 30 seconds or more,
and then start the engine.
■ Steering wheel operation
When the engine is stopped by the Stop & Start system, the steering wheel
may become heavier than when driving.
■ When to use the Stop & Start system
● Use the Stop & Start system when stopping the vehicle temporarily at red
lights, intersections, etc. When stopping the vehicle for a longer period of
time, turn off the engine completely.
● When the system cannot operate, is canceled, or is malfunctioning, warning
messages and the warning buzzer are used to inform the driver. (→P. 3 49 )
● Even if an attempt is made to start the engine during an engine stop, the
engine does not automatically restart. Start the engine by shifting the shift
lever to P (vehicles with automatic transmission) or N (vehicles with manual
transmission) and performing a normal engine start operation.
● When the engine restarts after having been stopped by the Stop & Start sys-
tem, the power outlet may be temporarily unusable, but this is not a mal-
function.
● Installation and removal of electrical components and wireless devices may
affect the Stop & Start system, contact any authorized Toyota dealer or
repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional.
■ If the windshield is fogged up while the engine is stopped by the Stop &
Start system
Vehicles with manual air conditioning system:
Restart the engine by pressing the Stop & Start cancel switch, and then set
the air outlet selection dial to . (→P. 4 4 9 )
Vehicles with automatic air conditioning system:
Turn the windshield defogger on. (The engine will start due to the automatic
engine start function.) (→P. 4 58 )
If the windshield fogs up frequently, press the Stop & Start cancel switch to
deactivate the system.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 347 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
348
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■ Air conditioning system while the engine is stopped by the Stop & Start
system
While the engine is stopped by the Stop & Start system, the air conditioning
system (cooling, heating and dehumidifying functions) is cancelled and it only
blows air or stops blowing air. In order to prevent the air conditioning system
from being cancelled, deactivate the Stop & Start system by pressing the Stop
& Start cancel switch.
■ If an odor comes from the air conditioning system while the engine is
stopped by the Stop & Start system
Vehicles with manual air conditioning system:
If the idling stop time is set to “Long”, change the setting to “Normal”. If an
odor occurs even when “Normal” is selected, press the Stop & Start cancel
switch to deactivate the Stop & Start system.
Vehicles with automatic air conditioning system:
Press the Stop & Start cancel switch to deactivate the Stop & Start system.
■ Switching the idling stop time with the air conditioning system on
When the air conditioning system is on, the Stop & Start system idling stop
time can be adjusted by performing the following operation.
Use the meter control switches to select while the vehicle is stopped
and press , and select and press .
Select “Normal” or “Long”, and then press .
■ The Stop & Start system protection feature
● When an excessively loud sound is being projected by the audio system,
the audio system may be automatically cut off in order to reduce battery
consumption. If it occurs, turn the engine switch to the “LOCK” position
(vehicles without smart entry & start system) or off (vehicles with smart entry
& start system), wait for 3 seconds or longer and then turn it to the “ACC” or
“ON” position (vehicles without smart entry & start system), or ACCES-
SORY mode or IGNITION ON mode (vehicles with smart entry & start sys-
tem) to re-enable the audio system.
● The audio system may not be activated when the battery terminals are dis-
connected and then reconnected. If it occurs, turn the engine switch to the
“LOCK” position (vehicles without smart entry & start system) or off (vehicles
with smart entry & start system), and then repeat the following operation
twice to activate the audio system normally.
•Turn the engine switch to the “ON” position (vehicles without smart entry
& start system), or IGNITION ON mode (vehicles with smart entry & start
system), and then to the “LOCK” position (vehicles without smart entry &
start system) or off (vehicles with smart entry & start system).
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 348 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
349
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■ Replacing battery
→P. 6 10
■ Displaying the Stop & Start system status
Operation status of the Stop & Start system can be displayed on the
(Drive information) screen of multi-information display. (→P. 1 39 )
The display of “After Reset” can be reset.
● To re s e t t he di s pla y, p r e s s of t h e m et e r c o n t r ol s w i t che s, p r es s “ <” or “ > ”
to select “Reset”, and then press and hold .
● To s t o p t h e r e s et p r o c ed ur e, p r e ss .
■ Multi-information display messages
When the engine cannot be stopped by the Stop & Start system, and when
the engine automatically restarts while stopped by the Stop & Start system,
the following messages are displayed on the multi-information display.
● When the engine cannot be stopped by the Stop & Start system
Smart Stop
Displays the current engine stop time. Also, the
engine stop time when the air conditioning sys-
tem is on can be adjusted using the meter con-
trol switches. (→P. 3 4 8)
After Start
Displays the cumulative time that the engine is
stopped by the Stop & Start system from when
the engine is started until the engine is stopped.
After Reset
Displays the cumulative time that the engine is
stopped by the Stop & Start system from the
previous reset until the system is reset again.
Message Details/Actions
“Depress brake
firmly to activate”
The brake pedal is not depressed enough.
→ Operates when the brake pedal is
depressed further after stopping the
vehicle.
“For climate con-
trol”
Vehicles with automatic air conditioning sys-
tem:
•The air conditioning system is being used
when the ambient temperature is high or
low.
→ Readily operates when the difference
between the set temperature and cabin
temperature is small.
• is pressed.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 349 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
350
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
“Battery charging”
•The battery charge amount may be low.
→ Engine stop is temporarily prohibited
to prioritize charging of the battery, but
if the engine is operated for a short
while, engine stop is allowed.
•A refresh charge may be occurring (Exam-
ples: A short time after replacing the bat-
tery, removing battery terminals, etc.)
→ After a refresh charge of approximately
5 to 40 minutes completes, the system
can be operated.
•The engine may have been started with
the hood opened.
→ Close the hood, turn the engine switch
to the “LOCK” position (vehicles with-
out smart entry & start system) or off
(vehicles with smart entry & start sys-
tem), wait 30 seconds or more, and
then start the engine.
•The battery may be cold.
→ Operating the engine for a short while
allows the system to recover due to
the temperature increase in the engine
compartment.
•The battery may be extremely hot.
→ If the engine is stopped and the engine
compartment is allowed to cool suffi-
ciently, the system recovers.
“For brake
system”
•The brake booster load decreased.
•The vehicle is operated at a high elevation.
→ When a predetermined load is gener-
ated by the brake booster, the system
recovers.
“Driver seat belt
unbuckled”
The driver seat belt is not fastened.
“Non-dedicated
battery”
A non-dedicated battery for the Stop & Start
system may have been installed.
→ The Stop & Start system does not
operate. Have the vehicle inspected by
any authorized Toyota dealer or
repairer, or another duly qualified and
equipped professional.
Message Details/Actions
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 350 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
351
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
● When the engine automatically restarts while stopped by the Stop & Start
system
■ If “Stop & Start system malfunction Visit your dealer” is shown on the
multi-information display (if equipped)
The system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by any autho-
rized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped profes-
sional.
■ If the Stop & Start cancel indicator continues to flash
The system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by any autho-
rized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped profes-
sional.
Message Details/Actions
“For climate
control”
Vehicles with automatic air conditioning sys-
tem:
•The air conditioning system is turned on or
the air conditioning is being used.
• is turned on.
“For brake
system”
The brake pedal is strongly depressed fur-
ther or pumped.
→ When a predetermined load is gener-
ated from the brake booster by driving
the vehicle, the system recovers.
“Battery charging”
The battery charge amount may be low.
→ The engine is restarted to prioritize
battery charging. Operating the engine
for a short while allows the system to
recover.
“Steering wheel
turned”
The steering wheel is turned.
“Driver seat belt
unbuckled”
The driver seat belt is not fastened.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 351 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
352
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
WARNING
■ When the Stop & Start system is operating
● Keep the shift lever in N (manual transmission), depress the brake pedal
or apply the parking brake when necessary while the engine is stopped
due to the Stop & Start system (while the Stop & Start indicator is on).
Unexpected accidents may occur due to the automatic engine start func-
tion.
● Do not allow anyone to leave the vehicle while the engine is stopped due
to the Stop & Start system (while the Stop & Start indicator is on).
Unexpected accidents may occur due to the automatic engine start func-
tion.
● Ensure that the engine is not stopped by the Stop & Start system while the
vehicle is in a poorly ventilated area. The engine may restart due to the
automatic engine start function, causing exhaust gases to collect and
enter the vehicle and resulting in death or a serious health hazard.
■ Off-road driving precaution
When driving off-road, such as driving through water, press the Stop & Start
cancel switch to disable the Stop & Start system. Failure to do so may
cause the engine to be unable to restart.
NOTICE
■ To ensure the system operates correctly
If any one of the following situations occurs, the Stop & Start system may
not operate correctly. Have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Toyota
dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional.
● While the driver’s seat belt is fastened, the driver’s and front passenger’s
seat belt reminder light flashes.
● Even when the driver’s seat belt is not fastened, the driver’s and front pas-
senger’s seat belt reminder light remains off.
● Even when the driver’s door is closed, the symbol indicating the driver’s
door is open is shown on the multi-information display, or the personal/
interior lights come on when the personal/interior light main switch or inte-
rior light switch (if equipped) is in the door position.
● Even when the driver’s door is opened, the symbol indicating the driver’s
door is open is not shown on the multi-information display, or the personal/
interior lights do not come on when the personal/interior light main switch
or interior light switch (if equipped) is in the door position.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 352 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
353
4
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Driving assist systems
◆ ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)
Helps to prevent wheel lock when the brakes are applied suddenly, or if the
brakes are applied while driving on a slippery road surface
◆ Brake assist (if equipped)
Generates an increased level of braking force after the brake pedal is
depressed when the system detects a panic stop situation
◆ VSC (Vehicle Stability Control) (if equipped)
Helps the driver to control skidding when swerving suddenly or turning on
slippery road surfaces
◆ TRC (Traction Control) for Pre Runner and H2 position on 4WD
models (if equipped)
Helps to maintain drive power and prevent the drive wheels from spinning
when starting the vehicle or accelerating on slippery roads
◆ A-TRC (Active Traction Control) for H4 and L4 position on 4WD
models (if equipped)
Helps to maintain drive power and prevent the four wheels from spinning
when starting the vehicle or accelerating on slippery roads
◆ Hill-start assist control (if equipped)
Helps to prevent the vehicle from rolling backward when starting on an
incline or slippery slope
To help enhance driving safety and performance, the following
systems operate automatically in response to various driving
situations. Be aware, however, that these systems are supple-
mentary and should not be relied upon too heavily when operat-
ing the vehicle.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 353 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
354
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
◆ PCS (Pre-Crash Safety system) (if equipped)
→P. 2 87
◆ Emergency brake signal (if equipped)
When the brakes are applied suddenly, the emergency flashers automati-
cally flash to alert the vehicle behind.
◆ Trailer Sway Control (if equipped)
Helps the driver to control trailer sway by selectively applying brake pres-
sure for individual wheels and reducing engine torque when trailer sway is
detected.
Trailer Sway Control is part of the VSC system and will not operate if VSC
turned off or experiences a malfunction.
The slip indicator will flash while
the TRC/A-TRC/VSC/Trailer
Sway Control systems are operat-
ing.
When the TRC/A-TRC/VSC/Trailer Sway Control systems are
operating
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 354 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
355
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
If the vehicle gets stuck in fresh snow or mud, the TRC/A-TRC sys-
tems may reduce power from the engine to the wheels. Pressing
to turn the system off may make it easier for you to rock the vehicle in
order to free it.
Vehicles without multi-information display
To turn the T R C/A -TRC syst e m s
off, quickly press and release
.
The “TRC OFF” indicator light will
come on.
Press again to turn the system
back on.
Vehicles with multi-information display
To turn the T R C/A -TRC syst e m s
off, quickly press and release
.
The “TRC TURNED OFF”/“TRC
turned off” will be shown on the
multi-information display.
Press again to turn the system back on.
Disabling the TRC/A-TRC systems
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 355 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
356
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■ Turning off TRC, A-TRC, VSC and Trailer Sway Control systems
Vehicles without multi-information display
To tu r n t he T R C, A -TR C , V SC an d Tra i le r S wa y C ont r ol sys te ms off, pre ss
and hold for more than 3 seconds while the vehicle is stopped.
The “TRC OFF” indicator light and VSC OFF indicator light will come on.
*
Press again to turn the system back on.
Vehicles with multi-information display
To tu r n t he T R C, A -TR C , V SC an d Tra i le r S wa y C ont r ol sys te ms off, pre ss
and hold for more than 3 seconds while the vehicle is stopped.
The VSC OFF indicator light will come on and the “TRC TURNED OFF”/“TRC
turned off” will be shown on the multi-information display.
*
Press again to turn the system back on.
*:On vehicles with pre-crash safety system, pre-crash brake assist and pre-
crash braking will also be disabled. The PCS warning light will come on and
the message will be shown on the multi-information display. (→P. 3 56 )
■ If “TRC OFF” indicator light comes on or “TRC TURNED OFF”/“TRC
turned off” is shown on the multi-information display even if has not
been pressed
TRC, A-TRC and downhill assist control cannot be operated. Contact any
authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped
professional.
■ If “VSC TURNED OFF PRE-CRASH BRAKE SYSTEM UNAVAILABLE”/
“VSC Turned Off Pre-Crash Brake System Unavailable” is shown on the
multi-information display
The pre-crash brake assist and pre-crash braking functions are stopped since
VSC was turned off. To activate the functions, turn VSC on.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 356 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
357
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■ Sounds and vibrations caused by the ABS, brake assist, VSC, Trailer
Sway Control, TRC, A-TRC and the hill-start assist control systems
● A sound may be heard from the engine compartment when the brake pedal
is depressed repeatedly, when the engine is started or just after the vehicle
begins to move. This sound does not indicate that a malfunction has
occurred in any of these systems.
● Any of the following conditions may occur when the above systems are
operating. None of these indicates that a malfunction has occurred.
•Vibrations may be felt through the vehicle body and steering.
•A motor sound may be heard after the vehicle comes to a stop.
•The brake pedal may pulsate slightly after the ABS is activated.
•The brake pedal may move down slightly after the ABS is activated.
■ Automatic reactivation of TRC, A-TRC, VSC and Trailer Sway Control
systems
After turning the TRC, A-TRC, VSC and Trailer Sway Control systems off, the
systems will be automatically re-enabled in the following situations:
● When the engine switch is turned to the “LOCK” position (vehicles without
smart entry & start system) or off (vehicles with smart entry & start system).
● If only the TRC/A-TRC system is turned off, the TRC/A-TRC will turn on
when vehicle speed increases.
If the TRC, A-TRC, VSC and Trailer Sway Control systems are turned off,
automatic re-enabling will not occur when vehicle speed increases.
■ Operating conditions of the hill-start assist control
Vehicles with automatic transmission
•When on an uphill: The shift lever is in a position other than P, R and N.
•When on a downhill: The shift lever is in a position R.
•When the vehicle is stopped.
•The parking brake is not set.
•The accelerator pedal is not depressed.
Vehicles with manual transmission
•When on an uphill: The shift lever is in a position other than R.
•When on a downhill: The shift lever is in a position R.
•When the vehicle is stopped.
•The parking brake is not set.
•The accelerator pedal is not depressed.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 357 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
358
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■ Automatic system cancelation of the hill-start assist control
Vehicles with automatic transmission
•When on an uphill: The shift lever is in a position P, R and N.
•When on a downhill: The shift lever is in a position other than R.
•The accelerator pedal is depressed.
•The parking brake is set.
•Maximum 2 seconds elapse after the brake pedal is released.
Vehicles with manual transmission
•When on an uphill: The shift lever is in a position R.
•When on a downhill: The shift lever is in a position other than R.
•The accelerator pedal is depressed.
•The parking brake is set.
•Maximum 2 seconds elapse after the brake pedal is released.
■ Operating conditions of emergency brake signal
When the following three conditions are met, the emergency brake signal will
operate:
● The emergency flashers are off.
● Actual vehicle speed exceeds approximately 55 km/h (35 mph).
● The brake pedal is depressed in a manner that cause the system to judge
from the vehicle deceleration that this is a sudden braking operation.
■ Automatic system cancelation of emergency brake signal
The emergency brake signal will turn off in any of the following situations:
● The emergency flashers are turned on.
● The brake pedal is released.
● The system judges from the vehicle deceleration that is not a sudden brak-
ing operation.
■ If the slip indicator light comes on
It may indicate a malfunction in the TRC, A-TRC, VSC, Trailer Sway Control
or hill-start assist control systems. Consult any authorized Toyota dealer or
repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 358 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
359
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
WARNING
■ The ABS does not operate effectively when
● The limits of tire gripping performance have been exceeded (such as
excessively worn tires on a snow covered road).
● The vehicle hydroplanes while driving at high speed on the wet or slick
road.
■ Stopping distance when the ABS is operating may exceed that of nor-
mal conditions
The ABS is not designed to shorten the vehicle’s stopping distance. Always
maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you, especially in the
following situations:
● When driving on dirt, gravel or snow-covered roads
● When driving with tire chains
● When driving over bumps in the road
● When driving over roads with potholes or uneven surfaces
■ TRC/A-TRC may not operate effectively when
Directional control and power may not be achievable while driving on slip-
pery road surfaces, even if the TRC/A-TRC system is operating.
Drive the vehicle carefully in conditions where stability and power may be
lost.
■ Hill-start assist control
● Do not overly rely on the hill-start assist control. The hill-start assist control
may not operate effectively on steep inclines and roads covered with ice.
● Unlike the parking brake, the hill-start assist control is not intended to hold
the vehicle stationary for an extended period of time. Do not attempt to use
the hill-start assist control to hold the vehicle on an incline, as doing so
may lead to an accident.
■ When the VSC/Trailer Sway Control is activated
The slip indicator light flashes. Always drive carefully.
Reckless driving may cause an accident. Exercise particular care when the
indicator light flashes.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 359 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
360
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
WARNING
■ When the TRC/A-TRC/VSC/Trailer Sway Control systems are turned off
Be especially careful and drive at a speed appropriate to the road condi-
tions. As these are the systems to help ensure vehicle stability and driving
force, do not turn the TRC/A-TRC/VSC/Trailer Sway Control systems off
unless necessary.
■ Replacing tires
Make sure that all tires are of the specified size, brand, tread pattern and
total load capacity. In addition, make sure that the tires are inflated to the
recommended tire inflation pressure level.
The ABS, TRC, A-TRC, VSC, Trailer Sway Control, hill-start assist control
and downhill assist control systems will not function correctly if different tires
are installed on the vehicle.
Contact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified
and equipped professional for further information when replacing tires or
wheels.
■ Handling of tires and the suspension
Using tires with any kind of problem or modifying the suspension will affect
the driving assist systems, and may cause the system to malfunction.
■ Trailer Sway Control precaution
The Trailer Sway Control system is not able to reduce trailer sway in all situ-
ations. Depending on many factors such as the conditions of the vehicle,
trailer, road surface, and driving environment, the Trailer Sway Control sys-
tem may not be effective. Refer to your trailer owner’s manual for informa-
tion on how to tow your trailer properly.
■ If trailer sway occurs (vehicles with Trailer Sway Control)
Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may cause death or serious injury.
● Firmly grip the steering wheel. Steer straight ahead.
Do not try to control trailer swaying by turning the steering wheel.
● Begin releasing the accelerator pedal immediately but very gradually to
reduce speed.
Do not increase speed. Do not apply vehicle brakes.
If you make no extreme correction with the steering or brakes, your vehicle
and trailer should stabilize. (→P. 23 1)
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 360 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
361
4
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Downhill assist control system
∗
Press the “DAC” switch. The
downhill assist control system
indicator light comes on and the
system will operate.
When the system is in operation,
the slip indicator light will flash, and
the stop lights/high mounted stop
lights will be lit.
∗: If equipped
The downhill assist control system helps to prevent excessive
speed on steep downhill slopes.
The system will operate when the vehicle is traveling under
30 km/h (18 mph), the front-wheel drive control switch is in the
L4 or H4 position and the rear differential is not locked.
System operation
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 361 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
362
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■ Operating tips
Vehicles with automatic transmission
The system will operate when the shift lever is in a position other than P, how-
ever to make effective use of the system it is recommended that the shift
lever be shifted to range 2 or 1 of S.
Vehicles with manual transmission
To ma k e e ff e c tiv e us e of th e sy st em , i t is re c o m me nd ed t o dr iv e in a low ge a r.
■ If the downhill assist control system indicator flashes
● In the following situations, the indicator flashes and the system will not oper-
ate:
•The front-wheel drive control switch is in the H2 position.
•The shift lever is in P. (vehicles with automatic transmission)
•The rear differential is locked. (if equipped)
•The accelerator or brake pedal is depressed.
•The vehicle speed exceeds approximately 30 km/h (18mph).
•The brake system overheats.
The system will cease operation. At this time, a buzzer sounds, the down-
hill assist control system indicator flashes and “TRC turned off” is shown
on the multi-information display. Refrain from using the system until the
downhill assist control system indicator stays on and “TRC turned off” dis-
played on the multi-information display goes out. (The vehicle can be
driven normally during this time.)
● In the following situations, the indicator flashes to alert the driver, but the
system will operate:
•The shift lever is in N. (vehicles with automatic transmission)
•The shift lever is in N and the clutch pedal is depressed. (vehicles with
manual transmission)
•The “DAC” switch is turned off while the system is operating.
The system will gradually ceases operation. The indicator will flash during
operation, and then go off when the system is fully off.
■ Sounds and vibrations caused by the downhill assist control system
● A sound may be heard from the engine compartment when the engine is
started or just after the vehicle begins to move. This sound does not indicate
that a malfunction has occurred in downhill assist control system.
● Either of the following conditions may occur when the downhill assist control
system is operating. None of these are indicators that a malfunction has
occurred.
•Vibrations may be felt through the vehicle body and steering.
•A motor sound may be heard after the vehicle comes to a stop.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 362 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
363
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■ System malfunction
● The downhill assist control system indicator does not come on when the
engine switch is turned to the “ON” position (vehicles without smart entry &
start system) or IGNITION ON mode (vehicles with smart entry & start sys-
tem).
● The downhill assist control system indicator does not come on when the
“DAC” switch is pressed.
● The slip indicator comes on.
In the above cases, have your vehicle checked by any authorized Toyota
dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional.
WARNING
■ When using downhill assist control system
● Do not rely overmuch on the downhill assist control system. This function
does not extend the vehicle’s performance limitations. Always thoroughly
check the road conditions, and drive safely.
● Vehicles with manual transmission: Drive in a low gear. Driving in a high
gear when using downhill assist control system may cause the engine to
stall, which may lose the brake effectiveness and lock the tires, resulting in
an accident.
● Vehicles with manual transmission: On a steep slope, use the engine brak-
ing efficiently. If the vehicle is driven in N or with the clutch pedal
depressed on a steep slope, the load on the brake increases and control-
ling the vehicle speed may be impossible, resulting in an accident.
■ The system may not operate on the following surfaces, which may lead
to an accident causing death or serious injury
● Slippery surfaces such as wet or muddy roads
● Icy surface
● Unpaved roads
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 363 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
364
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
DPF (Diesel Particulate Filter) system
∗
◆ Regeneration
Regeneration is performed as necessary in accordance with driving
conditions.
◆ System characteristics
The DPF system has the following characteristics:
● Idle speed increases during regeneration
● The smell of the exhaust gas differs from that of a conventional
diesel vehicle
● White smoke may be emitted from the exhaust pipe during
regeneration. However, this does not indicate a malfunction.
Vehicles without DPF system switch
● If the DPF system warning message “DPF FULL SEE OWNER’S
MANUAL”/“DPF full See owner’s manual” appears on the display,
drive continuously. (→P. 5 8 1)
● If the DPF system warning message “DPF FULL VISIT YOUR
DEALER”/“DPF full Visit your dealer” appears on the display and
the malfunction indicator lamp comes on, have the vehicle
inspected by any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another
duly qualified and equipped professional immediately.
∗: If equipped
When the deposit collected by the filter reaches a predetermined
amount, it is automatically regenerated.
DPF system failure warning
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 364 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
365
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Vehicles with DPF system switch
● If the DPF system warning message “DPF FULL MANUAL
REGENERATION REQUIRED SEE OWNER’S MANUAL”/“DPF full
Manual regeneration required See owner’s manual” appears on the
display, follow the procedure below to regenerate.
Stop the vehicle in a safe place.
Shift the shift lever to P (automatic transmission) or N (manual
transmission), and firmly set the parking brake.
Do not stop the engine.
Also, make sure that there are no flammable materials near the exhaust
pipe. (→P. 36 6)
Check the engine is warmed up. If the engine is cold, warm up the engine
by depressing the accelerator pedal.
*
1
Press the DPF system switch.
The DPF system warning message
shown in the illustration appears
on the display, and the idling
engine speed will increase.
Regeneration will take around 30 - 40 minutes to complete.*
2
When the DPF system warning message goes out, the idling engine
speed will have finished returning to normal.
The DPF system switch may not operate when the vehicle is higher
than 4000 m (13123 ft.) above sea level.
*
1
:Depending on the situation, it may be necessary to depress the accelera-
tor pedal until the engine speed is increased to 3000 rpm. If the engine
coolant temperature or exhaust gas temperature is low, it may take a long
time to regenerate, or regeneration may be impossible.
*
2
:Time required for regeneration differs in accordance with the outside tem-
perature. Also, if the engine speed is still approximately 2000 rpm 10 min-
utes after pressing the DPF system switch, the exhaust gas temperature
may be low. In this case, depress the accelerator pedal to run the engine
at approximately 3000 rpm for a while.
1
2
3
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 365 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
366
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
● If the DPF system warning message “DPF FULL VISIT YOUR
DEALER”/“DPF full Visit your dealer” appears on the display and
the malfunction indicator lamp comes on, have the vehicle
inspected by any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another
duly qualified and equipped professional immediately.
■ Regeneration with the DPF system switch (if equipped)
● After pressing the DPF system switch, depressing the accelerator pedal or
clutch pedal (manual transmission) will stop regeneration. If regeneration
has been stopped, restart regeneration as soon as possible.
● After regeneration is finished, race the engine several time to clean the
exhaust system.
■ DPF system warning
Under the following driving conditions, the DPF system warning message
may come on earlier than normal.
*
● When only driving at low speeds (for example 20 km/h [12 mph] or below).
● If the engine is turned on and off frequently (if the engine is not left running
for more than 10 minutes at a time).
*:Differs in accordance with weather, driving conditions, etc.
WARNING
■ During regeneration
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in serious injury such as burns caused by the hot
exhaust pipe and exhaust gases, or may cause a fire.
● Do not stop the vehicle where flamma-
ble materials, such as dry grass, are
near the exhaust pipe.
● Make sure that there are no people
near the exhaust pipe.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 366 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
367
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
WARNING
● Vehicles with DPF system switch: Do not carry out regeneration when the
vehicle is in an enclosed area, such as a garage.
● Do not touch the exhaust pipe and exhaust gases during regeneration.
■ If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on
The malfunction indicator lamp comes on if you continue driving while the
DPF system warning message appears on the display. In this event, dam-
age may be caused to the vehicle or an accident may occur. Have the vehi-
cle inspected by any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly
qualified and equipped professional immediately.
NOTICE
■ To prevent the DPF system from failing
● Do not drive for long periods of time while the DPF system warning mes-
sage “DPF FULL VISIT YOUR DEALER”/“DPF full Visit your dealer”
appears on the display
● Do not use fuel other than the specified type
● Do not use engine oil other than the recommended type
● Do not modify the exhaust pipe
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 367 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
368
4-6. Driving tips
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Winter driving tips
● Use fluids that are appropriate to the prevailing outside tempera-
tures.
•Engine oil
•Engine coolant
•Washer fluid
● Have a service technician inspect the condition of the battery.
● Have the vehicle fitted with four snow tires or purchase a set of tire
chains for the rear tires.
Ensure that all tires are the same size and brand, and that chains match
the size of the tires.
Perform the following according to the driving conditions:
● Do not try to forcibly open a window or move a wiper that is frozen.
Pour warm water over the frozen area to melt the ice. Wipe away
the water immediately to prevent it from freezing.
● To e nsu re p r o p e r opera t i o n of th e cl imate co n t r ol s y s t e m fan,
remove any snow that has accumulated on the air inlet vents in
front of the windshield.
● Check for and remove any excess ice or snow that may have accu-
mulated on the exterior lights, vehicle’s roof, chassis, around the
tires or on the brakes.
● Remove any snow or mud from the bottom of your shoes before
getting in the vehicle.
Carry out the necessary preparations and inspections before
driving the vehicle in winter. Always drive the vehicle in a man-
ner appropriate to the prevailing weather conditions.
Preparation for winter
Before driving the vehicle
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 368 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
369
4-6. Driving tips
4
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Accelerate the vehicle slowly, keep a safe distance between you and
the vehicle ahead, and drive at a reduced speed suitable to road con-
ditions.
● Park the vehicle and move the shift lever to P (automatic transmis-
sion) or 1 or R (manual transmission) without setting the parking
brake. The parking brake may freeze up, preventing it from being
released. If the vehicle is parked without setting the parking brake,
make sure to block the wheels.
Failure to do so may be dangerous because it may cause the vehi-
cle to move unexpectedly, possibly leading to an accident.
● Vehicles with automatic transmission: If the vehicle is parked with-
out setting the parking brake, confirm that the shift lever cannot be
moved out of P
*.
*:The shift lever will be locked if it is attempted to be shifted from P to any
other position without depressing the brake pedal. If the shift lever can be
shifted from P, there may be a problem with the shift lock system. Have the
vehicle inspected by any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another
duly qualified and equipped professional.
Use the correct tire chain size when mounting the snow chains.
Chain size is regulated for each tire size.
Regulations regarding the use of tire chains vary depending on loca-
tion and type of road. Always check local regulations before installing
chains.
When driving the vehicle
When parking the vehicle (in the winter time or in the cold lati-
tudes)
Selecting tire chains
Regulations on the use of tire chains
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 369 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
370
4-6. Driving tips
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■ Tire chain installation
Observe the following precautions when installing and removing chains:
● Install and remove tire chains in a safe location.
● Install tire chains on the rear tires. Do not install tire chains on the front tires.
● Install tire chains on rear tires as tightly as possible. Retighten chains after
driving 0.5 - 1.0 km (1/4 - 1/2 mile).
● Install tire chains following the instructions provided with the tire chains.
WARNING
■ Driving with snow tires
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents.
Failing to do so may result in a loss of vehicle control and cause death or
serious injury.
● Use tires of the specified size.
● Maintain the recommended level of air pressure.
● Do not drive at speeds in excess of the speed limit or the speed limit spec-
ified for the snow tires being used.
● Use snow tires on all, not just some wheels.
■ Driving with tire chains
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents.
Failing to do so may result in the vehicle being unable to be driven safely,
and may cause death or serious injury.
● Do not drive in excess of the speed limit specified for the tire chains being
used, or 50 km/h (30 mph), whichever is lower.
● Avoid driving on bumpy road surfaces or over potholes.
● Avoid sudden acceleration, abrupt steering, sudden braking and shifting
operations that cause sudden engine braking.
● Slow down sufficiently before entering a curve to ensure that vehicle con-
trol is maintained.
● Do not use LDA (Lane Departure Alert) system.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 370 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
371
4-6. Driving tips
4
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
NOTICE
■ Repairing or replacing snow tires (vehicles with tire pressure warning
system)
Request repairs or replacement of snow tires from Toyota dealers or legiti-
mate tire retailers.
This is because the removal and attachment of snow tires affects the opera-
tion of the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters.
■ Fitting tire chains (vehicles with tire pressure warning system)
The tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not function correctly
when tire chains are fitted.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 371 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
372
4-6. Driving tips
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 372 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
373
5
Audio system
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
5-1. Basic Operations
Audio system types ...........374
Steering wheel audio
switches...........................376
AUX port/USB port ............379
5-2. Using the audio system
Optimal use of the audio
system .............................380
5-3. Using the radio
Radio operation .................382
5-4. Playing an audio CD and
MP3/WMA discs
CD player operation...........387
5-5. Using an external device
Listening to an iPod ...........397
Listening USB memory
device ..............................405
Using the AUX port............412
5-6. Using Bluetooth
®
devices
Bluetooth
®
audio/phone.....413
Using the steering
wheel switches ................418
Registering a Bluetooth
®
device ..............................419
5-7. “SETUP” menu
Using the “SETUP” menu
(“Bluetooth
*” menu).........420
Using the “SETUP” menu
(“TEL” or “PHONE”
menu) ..............................426
5-8. Bluetooth
®
Audio
Operating a Bluetooth
®
enabled portable
player...............................433
5-9. Bluetooth
®
Phone
Making a phone call...........435
Receiving a phone call.......437
Speaking on the phone......438
5-10.Bluetooth
®
Bluetooth
®
.........................440
*: The Bluetooth
®
word mark and logos are registered
trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 373 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
374
5-1. Basic Operations
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Audio system types
∗
Vehicles with navigation system or multimedia system
Refer to the “Navigation and multimedia system Owner’s manual”.
Vehicles without navigation system or multimedia system
CD player with AM/FM radio
● Type A
● Type B
This illustration is for a left-hand drive vehicle. Some button positions
are reversed for right-hand drive vehicles. (type B only)
∗: If equipped
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 374 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
375
5-1. Basic Operations
5
Audio system
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■ Using cellular phones
Interference may be heard through the audio system’s speakers if a cellular
phone is being used inside or close to the vehicle while the audio system is
operating.
WARNING
■ Certification for the disc player
CAUTION
This product is a class 1 laser product classified under the Safety of laser
products, IEC 60825-1:2007.
NOTICE
■ To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the audio system on longer than necessary with the engine
stopped.
■ To avoid damaging the audio system
Ta k e c a re n ot t o s pi l l dr ink s o r o t h e r f lu id s o ve r t he a u di o s yst em .
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 375 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
376
5-1. Basic Operations
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Steering wheel audio switches
∗
Volume
Radio mode:
Selects a radio station
CD mode:
Selects a track and file (MP3
and WMA)
Bluetooth
®
audio mode:
Selects a track
iPod mode:
Selects a song
USB memory mode:
Selects a file
Power on, select audio source
∗: If equipped
Some audio features can be controlled using the switches on
the steering wheel.
Operation may differ depending on the type of audio system or
navigation system. For details, refer to the manual provided with
the audio system or navigation system.
1
2
3
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 376 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
377
5-1. Basic Operations
5
Audio system
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Press the “MODE” switch when the audio system is turned off.
Press the “MODE” switch when the audio system is turned on. The
audio source changes as follows each time the button is pressed. If a
mode cannot be used, it will be skipped.
AM→FM1→FM2
*→CD mode→iPod or USB memory→
Bluetooth
®
audio*→AUX
*:If equipped
Press the “+” switch to increase the volume and the “-” switch to
decrease the volume.
Hold down the switch to continue increasing or decreasing the volume.
Press and hold the “MODE” switch.
To c anc el , pr ess a nd ho ld th e s wit c h a ga in.
Press the “MODE” switch to select the radio mode.
Press the “∧” or “∨” switch to select a preset station.
To sc an f or r ec ei v a ble stati on s, pre ss an d ho ld t h e swit c h un til you he ar a
beep.
Turning on the power
Changing the audio source
Adjusting the volume
Silencing a sound
Selecting a radio station
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 377 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
378
5-1. Basic Operations
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Press the “MODE” switch to select the CD, Bluetooth
®
audio, iPod
or USB memory mode.
Press the “∧” or “∨” switch to select the desired track/file or song.
Press the “MODE” switch to select Bluetooth
®
audio mode.
Press and hold the “∧” or “∨” switch until you hear a beep.
Press the “MODE” switch to select CD or USB memory mode.
Press and hold the “∧” or “∨” switch until you hear a beep.
Selecting a track/file or song
Selecting an album
Selecting a folder (MP3 and WMA or USB memory)
WARNING
■ To reduce the risk of an accident
Exercise care when operating the audio switches on the steering wheel.
1
2
1
2
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 378 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
379
5
5-1. Basic Operations
Audio system
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
AUX port/USB port
■ iPod
Open the cover and connect an
iPod using an iPod cable.
Turn on the power of the iPod if
it is not turned on.
■
USB memory
Open the cover and connect the USB memory device.
Turn on the power of the USB memory device if it is not turned on.
■ Portable audio player
Open the cover and connect the portable audio player.
Turn on the power of the portable audio player if it is not turned on.
Connect an iPod, USB memory device or portable audio player
to the AUX port/USB port as indicated below. Press the “MODE”
button to select “iPod”, “USB” or “AUX”.
Connecting using the AUX port/USB port
WARNING
■ While driving
Do not connect a device or operate the device controls.
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to portable audio device or its terminal
● Do not leave the portable audio device in the vehicle. The temperature
inside the vehicle may become high, resulting in damage to the device.
● Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the portable audio
device while it is connected.
● Do not insert foreign objects into the port.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 379 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
380
5-2. Using the audio system
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Optimal use of the audio system
Displays the “SETUP” menu/
Selecting the mode
Changes the following settings
•Sound quality and volume
balance
→P. 3 80
The sound quality and balance
setting can be changed to pro-
duce the best sound.
•Automatic Sound Levelizer
→P. 3 81
■ Changing sound quality modes
Press the “SETUP ENTER” button
Press the “TUNE >” or “< SELECT” button to select “Sound Set-
ting”, and press the “SETUP ENTER” button.
Press the “TUNE >” or “< SELECT” button as corresponds to the
desired mode.
“BASS”, “TREBLE”, “FADER”, “BALANCE”, or “ASL” can be selected.
Press the “SETUP ENTER” button.
The sound quality, volume balance and ASL settings can be
adjusted.
1
2
Using the audio control function
1
2
3
4
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 380 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
381
5-2. Using the audio system
5
Audio system
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■
Adjusting sound quality
Pressing the “TUNE >” or “< SELECT” button adjusts the level.
*
1
:The sound quality level is adjusted individually in each audio mode.
*
2
:For the vehicles with 2 speakers system, the sound will be mute if the
sound balance is adjusted to the maximum level at the rear.
Press the “SETUP ENTER” button or (BACK) to return to the
sound setting menu.
■ Adjusting the Automatic Sound Levelizer (ASL)
When ASL is selected, press the “TUNE >” or “< SELECT” button to
change the amount of ASL.
“LOW”, “MID”, “HIGH”, or “OFF” can be selected.
ASL automatically adjusts the volume and tone quality according to
vehicle speed.
Press the “SETUP ENTER” button or (BACK) to return to the
sound setting menu.
Sound
quality mode
Mode
displayed
Level
Press the
“< SELECT”
Press the
“TUNE >”
Bass*
1
“BASS” -5 to 5
Low High
Treble*
1
“TREBLE” -5 to 5
Front/rear volume
balance
*
2
“FADER” F7 to R7 Shifts to rear Shifts to front
Left/right
volume
balance
“BALANCE”
L7 to R7 Shifts to left Shifts to right
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 381 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
382
5-3. Using the radio
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Radio operation
Type A
Press the “MODE” button until “AM” or “FM” is displayed.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 382 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
383
5-3. Using the radio
5
Audio system
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Type B
Search for the desired stations by pressing the “TUNE >”,
“< SELECT”, “SEEK >” or “< TRACK” button.
Press and hold one of the station selectors ( ) to be set until you
hear a beep.
Power
Volume
AM/FM mode button
AF/region code/TA mode setup
(type B only)
Adjusting the frequency
Seeking the frequency
Station selectors
Displaying the station list
(type B only)
Setting station presets
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 383 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
384
5-3. Using the radio
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■
Updating the station list
Press (LIST).
The station list will be displayed.
Press (UPDATE) to update the list.
“Updating” is displayed while the searching is in process, and then avail-
able stations will be listed on the display.
To ca n c el t h e up d a t ing p r o ce ss , pr e s s
(BACK).
■ Selecting a station from the station list
Press (LIST).
The station list will be displayed.
Press the “TUNE >” or “< SELECT” button to select a station.
Press the “SETUP ENTER” button to tune in the station.
To re t u r n t o t h e p r e v io us d is pla y, pr e s s (BACK).
This feature allows your radio to receive station.
■ Listening to stations of the same network
Press the “SETUP ENTER” button.
Press the “TUNE >” or “< SELECT” button to select “RADIO”,
and press the “SETUP ENTER” button.
Press the “TUNE >” or “< SELECT” button as corresponds to the
desired mode: “FM AF” or “Region code”.
Press the “SETUP ENTER” button to select “ON” or “OFF”.
FM AF ON mode:
The station among those of the same network with strong recep-
tion is selected.
Region code ON mode:
The station among those of the same network with strong recep-
tion and broadcasting the same program is selected.
Using the station list (type B only)
RDS (Radio Data System) (type B only)
1
2
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 384 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
385
5-3. Using the radio
5
Audio system
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■
Traffic information
Press the “SETUP ENTER” button.
Press the “TUNE >” or “< SELECT” button to select “RADIO”,
and press the “SETUP ENTER” button.
Press the “TUNE >” or “< SELECT” button to select “FM TA”
mode.
Press the “SETUP ENTER” button to select “ON” or “OFF”.
TP mode:
The system automatically switches to traffic information when a
broadcast with a traffic information signal is received.
The station returns to the previous one when the traffic information
ends.
TA mode:
The system automatically switches to traffic information when a
broadcast with a traffic information signal is received. In FM
modes, the system will be mute unless traffic information is being
broadcast.
The audio system returns to the previous mode when the traffic informa-
tion ends.
1
2
3
4
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 385 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
386
5-3. Using the radio
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■ EON (Enhanced Other Network) system (for traffic announcement func-
tion) (type B only)
If the RDS station (with EON data) you are listening to is not broadcasting a
traffic information program and the audio system is in the TA (traffic
announcement) mode, the radio will be switched automatically to a station
broadcasting a traffic information program in the EON AF list when traffic
information begins.
■ When the battery is disconnected
Stations presets are erased.
■ Reception sensitivity
● Maintaining perfect radio reception at all times is difficult due to the continu-
ally changing position of the antenna, differences in signal strength and sur-
rounding objects, such as trains, transmitters, etc.
● The radio antenna is mounted on the roof. The antenna can be removed
from the base by turning it.
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage, remove the antenna in the following cases
● The antenna will touch the ceiling of a garage.
● A cover will be put on the roof.
● When driving through an automatic car wash.
● Any other cases where there is a risk of touching surrounding parts.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 386 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
387
5
5-4. Playing an audio CD and MP3/WMA discs
Audio system
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
CD player operation
Type A
Insert a disc, press the “MODE” button to begin listening to a
CD.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 387 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
388
5-4. Playing an audio CD and MP3/WMA discs
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Type B
Insert a CD.
Press and remove the CD.
CD eject
Power
Volume
Changing the audio source/
playback
Selecting a track from the list
Moving the cursor to select a
desired item from the list
Selecting a track, fast forward-
ing or rewinding
Random play or back button
Repeat play
Displaying track list
Displaying text message
Loading CDs
Ejecting CDs
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 388 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
389
5-4. Playing an audio CD and MP3/WMA discs
5
Audio system
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■
Selecting a track
Press the “SEEK >” or “< TRACK” button to move up or down until
the desired track number is displayed.
■ Selecting a track from a track list
Press (LIST).
The track list will be displayed.
Press the “TUNE >” or “< SELECT” button to select a track, and
press the “SETUP ENTER” button.
To re t u r n t o th e pr ev io u s d is pla y, pr e ss ( BA C K ).
■ Fast-forwarding and rewinding tracks
Press and hold the “SEEK >” or “< TRACK” button.
■ Random play
Press (RDM).
To ca n c el , p r e s s ( R D M ) ag a i n .
■
Repeat play
Press (RPT).
To ca n c el , p r e s s ( R PT ) a g a in.
■ Switching the display
Press (TEXT) to display or hide the CD title.
If there are continuing texts, is displayed.
Press and hold (TEXT) to display the remaining texts.
Using the CD player
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 389 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
390
5-4. Playing an audio CD and MP3/WMA discs
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■
Selecting folders one at a time
Press (<FOLDER) or (FOLDER>) to select the desired
folder.
■ Selecting a folder and file from folder list
Press (LIST).
The folder list will be displayed.
Press the “TUNE >” or “< SELECT” button to select a folder and
file, and press the “SETUP ENTER” button.
To re t u r n t o t h e p r e v io us d is pla y, pr e s s ( B A C K ).
■ Returning to the first folder
Press and hold (<FOLDER) until you hear a beep.
■ Selecting a file
Press the “SEEK >” or “< TRACK” button to select the desired file.
■ Fast-forwarding and rewinding files
Press and hold the “SEEK >” or “< TRACK” button.
■ Random play
Pressing (RDM) changes modes in the following order:
Folder random→Disc random→Off
■ Repeat play
Pressing (RPT) changes modes in the following order:
File repeat→Folder repeat
*→Off
*:Available except when RDM (random play) is selected
■
Switching the display
Press (TEXT) to display or hide the album title.
If there are continuing texts, is displayed.
Press and hold (TEXT) to display the remaining texts.
Playing back MP3 and WMA discs
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 390 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
391
5-4. Playing an audio CD and MP3/WMA discs
5
Audio system
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■ Display
Depending on the contents recorded, the characters may not be displayed
properly or may not be displayed at all.
■ Error messages
If an error message is displayed, refer to the following table and take the
appropriate measures. If the problem is not rectified, take the vehicle to any
authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped
professional.
■ Discs that can be used
Discs with the marks shown below can be used.
Playback may not be possible depending on recording format or disc fea-
tures, or due to scratches, dirt or deterioration.
CDs with copy-protect features may not play correctly.
■ CD player protection feature
To pr o te ct t he i nte r nal c om p on ents , pl ay b ac k is a ut oma ti cal ly st op pe d wh en a
problem is detected while the CD player is being used.
■ If a CD is left inside the CD player or in the ejected position for extended
periods
The CD may be damaged and may not play properly.
■ Lens cleaners
Do not use lens cleaners. Doing so may damage the CD player.
Message Cause/Correction procedures
“ERROR”
This indicates a problem either in the CD or
inside the player.
“CD CHECK”
The CD may be dirty, damaged or inserted
upside-down.
“WAIT”
Operation has stopped due to a high tempera-
ture inside the player. Wait for a while and
then press the “MODE” button. If the CD still
cannot be played back, contact any autho-
rized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly
qualified and equipped professional.
“NO SUPPORT”
This indicates that the MP3/WMA file is not
included in the CD.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 391 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
392
5-4. Playing an audio CD and MP3/WMA discs
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■ MP3 and WMA files
MP3 (MPEG Audio LAYER3) is a standard audio compression format.
Files can be compressed to approximately 1/10 of their original size by using
MP3 compression.
WMA (Windows Media Audio) is a Microsoft audio compression format.
This format compresses audio data to a size smaller than that of the MP3 for-
mat.
There is a limit to the MP3 and WMA file standards and to the media/formats
recorded by them that can be used.
● MP3 file compatibility
•Compatible standards
MP3 (MPEG1 LAYER3, MPEG2 LSF LAYER3)
•Compatible sampling frequencies
MPEG1 LAYER3: 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 16, 22.05, 24 (kHz)
•Compatible bit rates (compatible with VBR)
MPEG1 LAYER3: 32—320 (kbps)
MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 8—160 (kbps)
•Compatible channel modes: stereo, joint stereo, dual channel and mon-
aural
● WMA file compatibility
•Compatible standards
WMA Ver. 7, 8, 9
•Compatible sampling frequencies
32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
•Compatible bit rates (only compatible with 2-channel playback)
Ver. 7, 8: CBR 48—192 (kbps)
Ver. 9: CBR 48—320 (kbps)
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 392 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
393
5-4. Playing an audio CD and MP3/WMA discs
5
Audio system
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
● Compatible media
Media that can be used for MP3 and WMA playback are CD-Rs and CD-
RWs.
Playback in some instances may not be possible, depending on the status
of the CD-R or CD-RW. Playback may not be possible or the audio may
jump if the disc is scratched or marked with fingerprints.
● Compatible disc formats
The following disc formats can be used.
•Disc formats:
CD-ROM Mode 1 and Mode 2
CD-ROM XA Mode 2, Form 1 and Form 2
•File formats:
ISO9660 Level 1, Level 2, (Romeo, Joliet)
MP3 and WMA files written in any format other than those listed above
may not play correctly, and their file names and folder names may not be
displayed correctly.
Items related to standards and limitations are as follows.
•Maximum directory hierarchy: 8 levels
•Maximum length of folder names/file names: 32 characters
•Maximum number of folders: 192 (including the root)
•Maximum number of files per disc: 255
● File names
The only files that can be recognized as MP3/WMA and played are those
with the extension .mp3 or .wma.
● Multi-sessions
As the audio system is compatible with multi-sessions, it is possible to play
discs that contain MP3 and WMA files. However, only the first session can
be played.
● ID3 and WMA tags
ID3 tags can be added to MP3 files, making it possible to record the track
title and artist name, etc.
The system is compatible with ID3 Ver. 1.0, 1.1, and Ver. 2.2, 2.3 ID3 tags.
(The number of characters is based on ID3 Ver. 1.0 and 1.1.)
WMA tags can be added to WMA files, making it possible to record the
track title and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 393 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
394
5-4. Playing an audio CD and MP3/WMA discs
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
● MP3 and WMA playback
When a disc containing MP3 or WMA files is inserted, all files on the disc
are first checked. Once the file check is finished, the first MP3 or WMA file
is played. To make the file check finish more quickly, we recommend you do
not write in any files other than MP3 or WMA files or create any unneces-
sary folders.
If the discs contain a mixture of music data and MP3 or WMA format data,
only music data can be played.
● Extensions
If the file extensions .mp3 and .wma are used for files other than MP3 and
WMA files, they will be mistakenly recognized and played as MP3 and
WMA files. This may result in large amounts of interference and damage to
the speakers.
● Playback
•To play MP3 file with steady sound quality, we recommend a fixed bit rate
of 128 kbps and a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz.
•CD-R or CD-RW playback may not be possible in some instances,
depending on the characteristics of the disc.
•There is a wide variety of freeware and other encoding software for MP3
and WMA files on the market, and depending on the status of the encod-
ing and the file format, poor sound quality or noise at the start of playback
may result. In some cases, playback may not be possible at all.
•When files other than MP3 or WMA files are recorded on a disc, it may
take more time to recognize the disc and in some cases, playback may
not be possible at all.
•Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Media are the registered trademarks
of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and other countries.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 394 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
395
5-4. Playing an audio CD and MP3/WMA discs
5
Audio system
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
NOTICE
■ CDs and adapters that cannot be used
Do not use the following types of CDs.
Also, do not use 8 cm (3 in.) CD adapters, DualDiscs or printable discs.
Doing so may damage the player and/or the CD insert/eject function.
● CDs that have a diameter that is not 12
cm (4.7 in.)
● Low-quality and deformed CDs
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 395 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
396
5-4. Playing an audio CD and MP3/WMA discs
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
NOTICE
■ CD Player precautions
Failure to follow the precautions below may result in serious damage to the
CDs or the player itself.
● Do not insert anything other than CDs into the CD slot.
● Do not apply oil to the CD player.
● Store CDs away from direct sunlight.
● Never try to disassemble any part of the CD player.
● CDs with a transparent or translucent
recording area
● CDs that have tape, stickers or CD-R
labels attached to them, or that have
had the label peeled off
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 396 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
397
5
5-5. Using an external device
Audio system
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Listening to an iPod
→P. 3 79
Type A
Connecting an iPod enables you to enjoy music from the vehicle
speakers.
Connecting an iPod
Control panel
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 397 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
398
5-5. Using an external device
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Type B
Press (MENU) to select iPod menu mode.
Pressing the “TUNE >” button changes the play mode in the follow-
ing order:
“Playlists” → “Artists” → “Albums” → “Songs” → “Podcasts” →
“Genres” → “Composers” → “Audiobooks”
Press the “SETUP ENTER” button to select the desired play mode.
Power
Volume
Changing the audio source/
playback
Selecting an iPod menu/song
from the list
Moving the cursor to select a
desired item from the list
Selecting a song, fast-forward-
ing or rewinding
Random play or back button
Repeat play
iPod menu mode, playback
Displaying song list
Displaying text message
Selecting a play mode
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
1
2
3
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 398 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
399
5-5. Using an external device
5
Audio system
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■
Play mode list
■ Selecting a list
Press the “TUNE >” or “< SELECT” button to display the first
selection list.
Press the “SETUP ENTER” button to select the desired item and
display the second selection list.
Repeat the same procedure to select the desired item.
To re t u r n t o t h e p r e v io u s se le c ti o n li st , p r e ss (B A C K ).
Press (PLAY) to play the desired selection.
Play mode
First
selection
Second
selection
Third
selection
Fourth
selection
“Playlists”
Playlists
select
Songs select - -
“Artists” Artists select
Albums
select
Songs select -
“Albums”
Albums
select
Songs select - -
“Songs” Songs select - - -
“Podcasts”
Podcasts
select
Episodes
select
- -
“Genres” Genre select Artists select
Albums
select
Songs select
“Composers”
Composers
select
Albums
select
Songs select -
“Audiobooks”
Audiobooks
select
Chapter
select
- -
1
2
3
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 399 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
400
5-5. Using an external device
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Press the “SEEK >” or “< TRACK” button to select the desired song.
Press (LIST).
The song list will be displayed.
Press the “TUNE >” or “< SELECT” button to select a song.
Press the “SETUP ENTER” button to play the song.
To r et ur n to the p re vio us di spl ay, p r es s (B AC K).
Press and hold the “SEEK >” or “< TRACK” button.
Press (RPT).
To c an c e l, pr ess (RP T) ag a in .
Pressing (RDM) changes modes in the following order:
Track random→Album random→Off
Selecting songs
Selecting a song from the song list
Fast-forwarding and rewinding songs
Repeat play
Random play
1
2
3
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 400 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
401
5-5. Using an external device
5
Audio system
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Press (TEXT) to display or hide the album title.
If there are continuing texts, is displayed.
Press and hold (TEXT) to display the remaining texts.
■ About iPod
● “Made for iPod” and “Made for iPhone” mean that an electronic accessory
has been designed to connect specifically to iPod, or iPhone, respectively,
and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance
standards.
● Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance
with safety and regulatory standards. Please note that the use of this
accessory with iPod or iPhone may affect wireless performance.
● iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano, iPod shuffle, and iPod touch are
trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
■ iPod functions
● When an iPod is connected and the audio source is changed to iPod mode,
the iPod will resume play from the same point in which it was last used.
● Depending on the iPod that is connected to the system, certain functions
may not be available. Disconnecting the device and reconnecting it once
again may resolve some malfunctions.
● While connected to the system, the iPod cannot be operated with its own
controls. It is necessary to use the controls of the vehicle’s audio system
instead.
Switching the display
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 401 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
402
5-5. Using an external device
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■ iPod problems
To r es ol v e mo s t p ro bl e ms e nc o un te r ed wh en u si ng yo ur i Pod , dis c o nne c t
your iPod from the vehicle iPod connection and reset it.
For instructions on how to reset your iPod, refer to your iPod Owner’s Man-
ual.
■ Display
→P. 3 91
■ Error messages
If an error message is displayed, refer to the following table and take the
appropriate measures. If the problem is not rectified, take the vehicle to any
authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped
professional.
Message Cause/Correction procedures
“ERROR”
This indicates a problem in the iPod or its con-
nection.
“NO SONGS”
This indicates that there is no music data in
the iPod.
“NO PLAYLIST”
This indicates that some available songs are
not found in a selected playlist.
“UPDATE YOUR iPod”
This indicates that the version of the iPod is
not compatible. Upgrade your iPod software
to the latest version.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 402 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
403
5-5. Using an external device
5
Audio system
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■ Compatible models
The following iPod
®
, iPod nano
®
, iPod classic
®
, iPod touch
®
and iPhone
®
devices can be used with this system.
● Made for
•iPod touch (5th generation)
•iPod touch (4th generation)
•iPod touch (3rd generation)
•iPod touch (2nd generation)
•iPod touch (1st generation)
•iPod classic
•iPod with video
•iPod nano (7th generation)
•iPod nano (6th generation)
•iPod nano (5th generation)
•iPod nano (4th generation)
•iPod nano (3rd generation)
•iPod nano (2nd generation)
•iPod nano (1st generation)
•iPhone 5s
•iPhone 5c
•iPhone 5
•iPhone 4S
•iPhone 4
•iPhone 3GS
•iPhone 3G
•iPhone
Depending on differences between models or software versions etc., some
models might be incompatible with this system.
Items related to standards and limitations are as follows:
● Maximum number of lists in device: 9999
● Maximum number of songs in device: 65535
● Maximum number of songs per list: 65535
WARNING
■ While driving
Do not connect iPod or operate the controls. Doing so may cause an acci-
dent, resulting in death or serious injury.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 403 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
404
5-5. Using an external device
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to iPod
● Do not leave iPod in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehicle may
become high, resulting in damage to the iPod.
● Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the iPod while it is
connected as this may damage the iPod or its terminal.
● Do not insert foreign objects into the port as this may damage the iPod or
its terminal.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 404 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
405
5
5-5. Using an external device
Audio system
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Listening USB memory device
→P. 3 79
Type A
Connecting a USB memory enables you to enjoy music from the
vehicle speakers.
Connecting a USB memory
Control panel
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 405 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
406
5-5. Using an external device
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Type B
Power
Volume
Changing the audio source/
playback
Selecting a song, file or folder
from the list
Moving the cursor to select a
desired item from the list
Selecting a file, fast-forward-
ing or rewinding
Random play or back button
Repeat play
Selecting a folder
Displaying folder list
Displaying text message
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 406 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
407
5-5. Using an external device
5
Audio system
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■
Selecting folders one at a time
Press (<FOLDER) or (FOLDER>) to select the desired
folder.
■ Selecting a folder and file from folder list
Press (LIST).
The folder list will be displayed.
Press the “TUNE >” or “< SELECT” button to select a folder and
file, and press the “SETUP ENTER” button.
To re t u r n t o th e pr ev io u s d is pla y, pr e ss ( BA C K ).
■ Returning to the first folder
Press and hold (<FOLDER) until you hear a beep.
Press the “SEEK >” or “< TRACK” button to select the desired file.
Press and hold the “SEEK >” or “< TRACK” button.
Pressing (RDM) changes modes in the following order:
Folder random→All folder random→Off
Pressing (RPT) changes modes in the following order:
File repeat→Folder repeat
*→Off
*:Available except when RDM (random play) is selected
Press (TEXT) to display or hide the album title.
If there are continuing texts, is displayed.
Press and hold (TEXT) to display the remaining texts.
Selecting a folder
Selecting a file
Fast-forwarding and rewinding files
Random play
Repeat play
Switching the display
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 407 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
408
5-5. Using an external device
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■ USB memory functions
● Depending on the USB memory that is connected to the system, the device
itself may not be operable and certain functions may not be available. If the
device is inoperable or a function is unavailable due to a malfunction (as
opposed to a system specification), disconnecting the device and recon-
necting it once again may resolve the problem.
● If the USB memory still does not begin operation after being disconnected
and reconnected, format the memory.
■ Display
→P. 3 91
■ Error messages
If an error message is displayed, refer to the following table and take the
appropriate measures. If the problem is not rectified, take the vehicle to any
authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped
professional.
■ USB memory
● Compatible devices
USB memory that can be used for MP3 and WMA playback
● Compatible device formats
The following device formats can be used:
•USB communication formats: USB2.0 FS (12mbps)
•File formats: FAT12/16/32 (Windows)
•Correspondence class: Mass storage class
MP3 and WMA files written in any format other than those listed above may
not play correctly, and their file names and folder names may not be dis-
played correctly.
Items related to standards and limitations are as follows:
•Maximum directory hierarchy: 8 levels
•Maximum number of folders in a device: 999 (including the root)
•Maximum number of files in a device: 9999
•Maximum number of files per folder: 255
Message Cause/Correction procedures
“ERROR”
This indicates a problem in the USB memory
or its connection.
“NO MUSIC”
This indicates that no MP3/WMA files are
included in the USB memory.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 408 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
409
5-5. Using an external device
5
Audio system
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
● MP3 and WMA files
MP3 (MPEG Audio LAYER3) is a standard audio compression format.
Files can be compressed to approximately 1/10 of their original size by
using MP3 compression.
WMA (Windows Media Audio) is a Microsoft audio compression format.
This format compresses audio data to a size smaller than that of the MP3
format.
There is a limit to the MP3 and WMA file standards and to the media/for-
mats recorded by them that can be used.
● MP3 file compatibility
•Compatible standards
MP3 (MPEG1 LAYER3, MPEG2 LSF LAYER3)
•Compatible sampling frequencies
MPEG1 LAYER3: 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 16, 22.05, 24 (kHz)
•Compatible bit rates (compatible with VBR)
MPEG1 LAYER3: 32—320 (kbps)
MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 8—160 (kbps)
•Compatible channel modes: stereo, joint stereo, dual channel and mon-
aural
● WMA file compatibility
•Compatible standards
WMA Ver. 7, 8, 9
•Compatible sampling frequencies
32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
•Compatible bit rates (only compatible with 2-channel playback)
Ver. 7, 8: CBR 48—192 (kbps)
Ver. 9: CBR 48—320 (kbps)
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 409 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
410
5-5. Using an external device
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
● File names
The only files that can be recognized as MP3/WMA and played are those
with the extension .mp3 or .wma.
● ID3 and WMA tags
ID3 tags can be added to MP3 files, making it possible to record the track
title, artist name, etc.
The system is compatible with ID3 Ver. 1.0, 1.1, and Ver. 2.2, 2.3, 2.4 ID3
tags. (The number of characters is based on ID3 Ver. 1.0 and 1.1.)
WMA tags can be added to WMA files, making it possible to record the
track title and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.
● MP3 and WMA playback
•When a device containing MP3 or WMA files is connected, all files in the
USB memory device are checked. Once the file check is finished, the first
MP3 or WMA file is played. To make the file check finish more quickly, we
recommend that you do not include any files other than MP3 or WMA
files or create any unnecessary folders.
•When the USB device is connected and the audio source is changed to
USB memory mode, the USB device will start playing the first file in the
first folder. If the same device is removed and reinserted (and the con-
tents have not been changed), the USB memory will resume play from
the same point in which it was last used.
● Extensions
If the file extensions .mp3 and .wma are used for files other than MP3 and
WMA files, they will be skipped (not played).
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 410 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
411
5-5. Using an external device
5
Audio system
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
● Playback
•To play MP3 files with steady sound quality, we recommend a fixed bit
rate of at least 128 kbps and a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz.
•There is a wide variety of freeware and other encoding software for MP3
and WMA files on the market, and depending on the status of the encod-
ing and the file format, poor sound quality or noise at the start of playback
may result. In some cases, playback may not be possible at all.
•Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Media are registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries.
WARNING
■ While driving
Do not connect USB memory or operate the controls. Doing so may cause
an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to USB memory
● Do not leave USB memory in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehi-
cle may become high, resulting in damage to the USB memory.
● Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the USB memory
while it is connected as this may damage the USB memory or its terminal.
● Do not insert foreign objects into the port as this may damage the USB
memory or its terminal.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 411 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
412
5-5. Using an external device
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Using the AUX port
→P. 3 79
■ Operating portable audio devices connected to the audio system
The volume can be adjusted using the vehicle’s audio controls. All other
adjustments must be made on the portable audio device itself.
■ When using a portable audio device connected to the power outlet
Noise may occur during playback. Use the power source of the portable
audio device.
This port can be used to connect a portable audio device and lis-
ten to it using the vehicle’s speakers.
Connecting a portable player
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 412 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
413
5
5-6. Using Bluetooth
®
devices
Audio system
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Bluetooth
®
audio/phone
◆ Bluetooth
®
audio
The Bluetooth
®
audio system enables you to enjoy music played on
a portable digital audio player (portable player) from the vehicle
speakers via wireless communication.
This audio system supports Bluetooth
®
, a wireless data system
capable of playing portable audio music without cables. If your por-
table player does not support Bluetooth
®
, the Bluetooth
®
audio sys-
tem will not function.
◆ Bluetooth
®
phone (hands-free phone system)
This system supports Bluetooth
®
, which allows you to make or
receive calls without using cables to connect a cellular phone and
the system, and without operating the cellular phone.
The following can be performed using Bluetooth
®
wireless com-
munication:
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 413 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
414
5-6. Using Bluetooth
®
devices
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Device registration/connection flow
1. Register the Bluetooth
®
device to be used with audio
system (→P. 4 1 9 )
2. Connect the registered Bluetooth
®
device to be used
(→P. 4 20 , 4 2 2 )
5. Use Bluetooth
®
audio
(→P. 4 33 )
5. Use Bluetooth
®
phone
(→P. 4 35 )
3. Set automatic connection of the device
(→P. 4 24 )
4. Check Bluetooth
®
connection condition
(→P. 4 15 )
To b e use d f o r a ud i o
To be u s e d f or h a n d s - f r e e p h o n e
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 414 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
415
5-6. Using Bluetooth
®
devices
5
Audio system
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Bluetooth
®
connection condition
If “BT” is not displayed, the Bluetooth
®
audio/phone cannot be used.
Display
A message, name, number, etc. is displayed.
Lower-case characters and special characters may not be displayed.
“SETUP ENTER” button
Displays set up menu or inputs the selected item
“TUNE >” or “< SELECT” button
Selects items such as menu and number
Selects speed dials (Bluetooth
®
phone operation)
On-hook switch
Turns the hands-free system off/ends a call/refuses a call
Off-hook switch
Turns the hands-free system on/starts a call
Press and hold:
Displays information that is too long to be displayed at one time on
the display (Bluetooth
®
audio operation)
Audio unit
Type A Type B
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 415 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
416
5-6. Using Bluetooth
®
devices
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
You ca n use the microph one
when talking on the phone.
The person you are speaking to
can be heard from the speakers.
To use th e han ds- fr ee syst em, you
must register your Bluetooth
®
phone in the system. (→P. 4 1 9 )
*:The Bluetooth
®
word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
Microphone
Menu list of the Bluetooth
®
audio/phone
First menu Second menu Third menu Operation details
“Bluetooth*”
“Pairing” -
Registering a
Bluetooth
®
device
“List phone” -
Listing the registered
cellular phones
“List audio” -
Listing the registered
portable players
“Passkey” -
Changing the pass-
key
“BT power” -
Setting automatic
connection of the
device on or off
“Bluetooth
* info”
“Device name”
“Device address”
Displaying the
device status
“Display setting” -
Setting the auto-
matic connection
confirmation display
to on or off
“Initialize” -
Initializing the set-
tings
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 416 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
417
5-6. Using Bluetooth
®
devices
5
Audio system
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■ Bluetooth
®
audio/phone system functions
Depending on the Bluetooth
®
device, certain functions may not be available.
First menu Second menu Third menu Operation details
“TEL” or
“PHONE”
“Phonebook”
“Add contacts”
Adding a new num-
ber
“Add SD”
Registering a speed
dial
“Delete call
history”
Deleting a number
stored in the call his-
tory
“Delete contacts”
Deleting a number
stored in the phone-
book
“Delete other PB”
Deleting a phone-
book’s data
“Auto transfer” -
Setting automatic
transferring of the
phonebook to on or
off
“HF sound
setting”
“Call volume” Setting call volume
“Ringtone
volume”
Setting ring tone vol-
ume
“Ringtone” Setting the ring tone
“Transfer
histories”
-
Transferring the call
histories
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 417 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
418
5-6. Using Bluetooth
®
devices
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Using the steering wheel switches
Volume
The voice guidance volume cannot
be adjusted using this button.
Off-hook switch
Turns the hands-free system on/
starts a call
On-hook switch
Turns the hands-free system off/
ends a call/refuses a call
The steering wheel switches can be used to operate a connected
cellular phone, or portable digital audio player (portable player).
Operating Bluetooth
®
phone using the steering wheel switches
1
2
3
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 418 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
419
5
5-6. Using Bluetooth
®
devices
Audio system
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Registering a Bluetooth
®
device
Press the “SETUP ENTER” button.
Select “Bluetooth
*” using the “TUNE >” or “< SELECT” button, and
press the “SETUP ENTER” button.
Select “Pairing” using the “TUNE >” or “< SELECT” button, and
press the “SETUP ENTER” button.
A passkey will be displayed.
SSP (Secure Simple Pairing) incompatible Bluetooth
®
devices:
Input the passkey into the device.
SSP (Secure Simple Pairing) compatible Bluetooth
®
devices:
Select “YES” to register the device. Depending on the type of
device, it may register automatically.
If a Bluetooth
®
device has both music player and cellular phone func-
tions, both functions will be registered at the same time. When delet-
ing the device, both functions will be deleted at the same time.
If the off-hook switch is pressed and the “TEL” or “PHONE” mode is
entered when no phones have been registered, the registration
screen will be automatically displayed.
*:The Bluetooth
®
word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
Before using the Bluetooth
®
audio/phone, it is necessary to reg-
ister a Bluetooth
®
device in the system. Follow the procedure
below to register (pair) a device:
How to register a Bluetooth
®
device
1
2
3
4
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 419 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
420
5-7. “SETUP” menu
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Using the “SETUP” menu (“Bluetooth*”
menu)
Press the “SETUP ENTER” button.
Select “Bluetooth
*” using the “TUNE >” or “< SELECT” button, and
press the “SETUP ENTER” button.
Select one of the following functions using the “TUNE >” or
“< SELECT” button.
● Registering a Bluetooth
®
device
“Pairing”
● Listing the registered cellular phones
“List phone”
● Listing the registered portable players
“List audio”
● Changing the passkey
“Passkey”
● Setting automatic connection of the device on or off
“BT power”
● Displaying the device status
“Bluetooth
* info”
● Setting the automatic connection confirmation display to on or off
“Display setting”
● Initialization
“Initialize”
*:The Bluetooth
®
word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
Registering a Bluetooth
®
device in the system allows the system
to function. The following functions can be used for registered
devices:
Functions and operation procedures
1
2
3
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 420 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
421
5-7. “SETUP” menu
5
Audio system
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Select “Pairing” using the “TUNE >” or “< SELECT” button, and press
the “SETUP ENTER” button, and press (Add New).
● If a Bluetooth
®
device is not connected currently
Perform the procedure for registering a Bluetooth
®
device from step
. (→P. 4 19 )
● If other Bluetooth
®
device is connected currently
The Bluetooth
®
device needs to be disconnected.
After disconnecting, perform the procedure for registering a
Bluetooth
®
device from step . (→P. 4 1 9 )
● If device list is full
Select the Bluetooth
®
device to be deleted using the “TUNE >” or
“< SELECT” button, and press the “SETUP ENTER” button.
Press (YES).
Registering a Bluetooth
®
device
4
2
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 421 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
422
5-7. “SETUP” menu
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Select “List phone” using the “TUNE >” or “< SELECT” button, and
press the “SETUP ENTER” button. The list of registered cellular
phones will be displayed.
● Connecting the registered cellular phone to the audio system
Select the name of the cellular phone to be connected using the
“TUNE >” or “< SELECT” button, and press the “SETUP ENTER”
button.
Select “Select” using the “TUNE >” or “< SELECT” button, and
press the “SETUP ENTER” button.
● Deleting a registered cellular phone
Select the name of the cellular phone to be deleted using the
“TUNE >” or “< SELECT” button, and press the “SETUP ENTER”
button.
Select “Delete” using the “TUNE >” or “< SELECT” button, and
press the “SETUP ENTER” button.
Press (YES).
● Disconnecting the registered cellular phone from the audio system
Select the name of the cellular phone to be disconnected using
the “TUNE >” or “< SELECT” button, and press the “SETUP
ENTER” button.
Select “Disconnect” using the “TUNE >” or “< SELECT” button,
and press the “SETUP ENTER” button.
Press (YES).
Listing the registered cellular phones
1
2
1
2
3
1
2
3
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 422 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
423
5-7. “SETUP” menu
5
Audio system
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Select “List audio” using the “TUNE >” or “< SELECT” button, and
press the “SETUP ENTER” button. The list of registered portable play-
ers will be displayed.
● Connecting the registered portable player to the audio system
Select the name of the portable player to be connected using the
“TUNE >” or “< SELECT” button, and press the “SETUP ENTER”
button.
Select “Select” using the “TUNE >” or “< SELECT” button, and
press the “SETUP ENTER” button.
● Deleting the registered portable player
Select the name of the portable player to be deleted using the
“TUNE >” or “< SELECT” button, and press the “SETUP ENTER”
button.
Select “Delete” using the “TUNE >” or “< SELECT” button, and
press the “SETUP ENTER” button.
Press (YES).
● Disconnecting the registered portable player from the audio system
Select the name of the portable player to be disconnected using
the “TUNE >” or “< SELECT” button, and press the “SETUP
ENTER” button.
Select “Disconnect” using the “TUNE >” or “< SELECT” button,
and press the “SETUP ENTER” button.
Press (YES).
● Selecting the connection method
Select the name of the desired portable player using the
“TUNE >” or “< SELECT” button, and press the “SETUP ENTER”
button.
Select “Connection method” using the “TUNE >” or “< SELECT”
button, and press the “SETUP ENTER” button.
Select “From vehicle” or “From audio” using the “TUNE >” or
“< SELECT” button, and press the “SETUP ENTER” button.
Listing the registered portable players
1
2
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 423 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
424
5-7. “SETUP” menu
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Select “Passkey” using the “TUNE >” or “< SELECT” button, and
press the “SETUP ENTER” button.
Select a 4 to 8-digit passkey using the “TUNE >”, “< SELECT” and
“SETUP ENTER” button.
Input the number 1 digit at a time.
When the entire number to be registered as a passkey has been
input, press (ENTER).
If the passkey to be registered has 8 digits, pressing (ENTER) is not
necessary.
If “BT power” is set to on, the registered device will be connected
automatically when the engine switch is turned to the “ACC” position
(vehicles without smart entry & start system) or ACCESSORY mode
(vehicles with smart entry & start system).
Select “BT power” using the “TUNE >” or “< SELECT” button, and
press the “SETUP ENTER” button.
Select “ON” or “OFF” using the “SETUP ENTER” button.
Select “Bluetooth
* info” using the “TUNE >” or “< SELECT” button,
and press the “SETUP ENTER” button.
● Displaying the device name
Select “Device name” using the “TUNE >” or “< SELECT” button,
and press the “SETUP ENTER” button.
● Displaying the device address
Select “Device address” using the “TUNE >” or “< SELECT” button,
and press the “SETUP ENTER” button.
*:The Bluetooth
®
word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
Changing the passkey
Setting automatic connection of the device on or off
Displaying the device status
1
2
3
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 424 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
425
5-7. “SETUP” menu
5
Audio system
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
If the “Display setting” is set to on, the portable player connection sta-
tus will be displayed when the engine switch is turned to the “ACC”
position (vehicles without smart entry & start system) or ACCESSORY
mode (vehicles with smart entry & start system).
Select “Display setting” using the “TUNE >” or “< SELECT” button,
and press the “SETUP ENTER” button.
Select “ON” or “OFF” using the “SETUP ENTER” button.
Select “Initialize” using the “TUNE >” or “< SELECT” button, and press
the “SETUP ENTER” button.
● Initializing the sound settings
Select “Sound setting” using the “TUNE >” or “< SELECT” button
and press (YES).
For details about sound settings: →P. 42 6
● Initializing the device information
Select “Car device info” using the “TUNE >” or “< SELECT” button
and press (YES).
Automatic connection of a portable device, automatic connection confirma-
tion display and the passkey will be initialized.
● Initializing the all settings
Select “All initialize” using the “TUNE >” or “< SELECT” button and
press (YES).
■ The number of Bluetooth
®
device that can be registered
Up to 5 Bluetooth
®
device can be registered in the system.
■ Bluetooth
®
audio/phone system functions
Certain functions may not be available during driving.
Setting the automatic connection confirmation display to on or off
Initialization
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 425 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
426
5-7. “SETUP” menu
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Using the “SETUP” menu (“TEL” or
“PHONE” menu)
To en t er the men u f o r each func t i o n , pre ss th e “S ET UP EN T E R ” bu t -
ton and follow the steps below using the “TUNE >” or “< SELECT” but-
ton:
● Adding a new phone number
1. “TEL” or “PHONE” → 2. “Phonebook” → 3. “Add contacts”
● Setting speed dials
1. “TEL” or “PHONE” → 2. “Phonebook” → 3. “Add SD”
● Deleting call histories
1. “TEL” or “PHONE” → 2. “Phonebook” → 3. “Delete call history”
● Deleting a registered phone number
1. “TEL” or “PHONE” → 2. “Phonebook” → 3. “Delete contacts”
● Deleting another cellular phone’s phonebook
1. “TEL” or “PHONE” → 2. “Phonebook” → 3. “Delete other PB”
● Setting automatic transferring of the phonebook to on or off
1. “TEL” or “PHONE” → 2. “Auto transfer”
● Setting call volume
1. “TEL” or “PHONE” → 2. “HF sound setting” → 3. “Call volume”
● Setting ring tone volume
1. “TEL” or “PHONE” → 2. “HF sound setting” → 3. “Ringtone vol-
ume”
● Setting ring tone
1. “TEL” or “PHONE” → 2. “HF sound setting” → 3. “Ringtone”
● Transferring call histories
1. “TEL” or “PHONE” → 2. “Transfer histories”
Functions and operation procedures
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 426 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
427
5-7. “SETUP” menu
5
Audio system
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Select “Add contacts” using the “TUNE >” or “< SELECT” button, and
press the “SETUP ENTER” button.
● Transferring all contacts from the cellular phone
Select “Overwrite all” using the “TUNE >” or “< SELECT” button,
and press the “SETUP ENTER” button.
Press (YES).
● Transferring one contact from the cellular phone
Select “Add one contact” using the “TUNE >” or “< SELECT” but-
ton, and press the “SETUP ENTER” button.
Press (YES).
Select “Add SD” using the “TUNE >” or “< SELECT” button, and
press the “SETUP ENTER” button.
Select the desired data using the “TUNE >” or “< SELECT” button,
and press the “SETUP ENTER” button.
Press the desired preset button (from [1] to [5]).
For details about setting speed dials from the call history: →P. 4 3 6
For details about deleting speed dials: →P. 4 35
Adding a new phone number
Setting speed dials
1
2
1
2
1
2
3
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 427 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
428
5-7. “SETUP” menu
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Select “Delete call history” using the “TUNE >” or “< SELECT” button,
and press the “SETUP ENTER” button.
● Deleting outgoing call history
Select “Outgoing calls” using the “TUNE >” or “< SELECT” but-
ton, and press the “SETUP ENTER” button.
Select the desired phone number using the “TUNE >” or
“< SELECT” button, and press the “SETUP ENTER” button.
Press (YES).
To delete all outgoing call history data, press (ALL) and then
press (YES).
● Deleting incoming call history
Select “Incoming calls” using the “TUNE >” or “< SELECT” but-
ton, and press the “SETUP ENTER” button.
Select the desired phone number using the “TUNE >” or
“< SELECT” button, and press the “SETUP ENTER” button.
Press (YES).
To delete all incoming call history data, press (ALL) and then
press (YES).
Deleting call histories
1
2
3
1
2
3
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 428 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
429
5-7. “SETUP” menu
5
Audio system
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
● Deleting missed call history
Select “Missed calls” using the “TUNE >” or “< SELECT” button,
and press the “SETUP ENTER” button.
Select the desired phone number using the “TUNE >” or
“< SELECT” button, and press the “SETUP ENTER” button.
Press (YES).
To de lete al l mi s s e d cal l his t o r y da ta, p re s s ( A L L ) and th en
press (YES).
● Deleting a number from all call histories (Outgoing calls, Incoming
calls and Missed calls)
Select “All calls” using the “TUNE >” or “< SELECT” button, and
press the “SETUP ENTER” button.
Select the desired phone number using the “TUNE >” or
“< SELECT” button, and press the “SETUP ENTER” button.
press (YES).
To delet e a l l o f t h e c a l l h i st ori es d a ta, press (A L L ) a n d then
press (YES).
1
2
3
1
2
3
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 429 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
430
5-7. “SETUP” menu
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Select “Delete contacts” using the “TUNE >” or “< SELECT” button,
and press the “SETUP ENTER” button.
Select the desired phone number using the “TUNE >” or
“< SELECT” button, and press the “SETUP ENTER” button.
Press (YES).
To d e lete al l th e reg i s te red p h o n e nu m be rs, p r e ss (ALL ) a nd
then press (YES).
Press (A-Z) to display the registered names in alphabetical order
of the initial.
Select “Delete other PB” using the “TUNE >” or “< SELECT” button,
and press the “SETUP ENTER” button.
Select the desired phonebook using the “TUNE >” or “< SELECT”
button, and press the “SETUP ENTER” button.
Press (YES).
When the “Auto transfer” is set to on, the phone’s contact data and
history are automatically transferred after HFP connection is success-
ful.
Select “Auto transfer” using the “TUNE >” or “< SELECT” button,
and press the “SETUP ENTER” button.
Select “ON” or “OFF” using the “SETUP ENTER” button.
For details about PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile) Automatic Transfer:
→P. 4 36
Deleting a registered phone number
Deleting another cellular phone’s phonebook
Setting automatic transferring of the phonebook to on or off
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 430 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
431
5-7. “SETUP” menu
5
Audio system
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Select “Call volume” using the “TUNE >” or “< SELECT” button, and
press the “SETUP ENTER” button.
Change the call volume.
To d ecr e ase th e vo lum e: Pr es s t he “ < SEL EC T” b u tt on .
To i ncr ea s e th e vol um e : Pr ess t he “T U N E > ” bu tt on.
To s et th e v o lum e , pr es s ( BA CK ) .
Select “Ringtone volume” using the “TUNE >” or “< SELECT” but-
ton, and press the “SETUP ENTER” button.
Change the ring tone volume.
To d ecr e ase th e vo lum e: Pr es s t he “ < SEL EC T” b u tt on .
To i ncr ea s e th e vol um e : Pr ess t he “T U N E > ” bu tt on.
To s et th e v o lum e , pr es s ( BA CK ) .
Setting call volume
Setting ring tone volume
1
2
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 431 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
432
5-7. “SETUP” menu
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Select “Ringtone” using the “TUNE >” or “< SELECT” button, and
press the “SETUP ENTER” button.
Select a ring tone (1 - 3) using the “TUNE >” or “< SELECT” button,
and press the “SETUP ENTER” button. To set the selected ring
tone, press (BACK).
Select “Transfer histories” using the “TUNE >” or “< SELECT” but-
ton, and press the “SETUP ENTER” button.
Press (YES).
■ Phone number
Up to 1000 names can be stored.
■ Call history
Up to 10 numbers can be stored in each of the outgoing, incoming and
missed call history memories.
■ Limitation of number of digits
A phone number that exceeds 24 digits cannot be registered.
■ Bluetooth
®
phone system functions
Certain functions may not be available during driving.
Setting ring tone
Transferring call histories
1
2
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 432 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
433
5
5-8. Bluetooth
®
Audio
Audio system
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Operating a Bluetooth
®
enabled portable
player
Type A
Type B
Power
Volume
Changing the audio source/
playback
Selecting a track, fast-forward-
ing or rewinding
Random play or back button
Repeat play
Selecting an album
Playback/pause
Displaying text message
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 433 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
434
5-8. Bluetooth
®
Audio
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Press (<FOLDER) or (FOLDER>) to select desired album.
Press the “SEEK >” or “< TRACK” button to select the desired track.
Press and hold the “SEEK >” or “< TRACK” button.
Pressing (RPT) changes modes in the following order:
Track repeat→Album repeat→Off
Pressing (RDM) changes modes in the following order:
Album random→All track random→Off
Press ( ).
Press (TEXT) to display or hide the album title.
If there are continuing texts, is displayed.
Press and hold the button to display the remaining texts.
■ Bluetooth
®
audio system functions
Depending on the portable player that is connected to the system, certain
functions may not be available.
■ Display
→P. 3 91
Selecting an album
Selecting a track
Fast-forwarding and rewinding tracks
Repeat play
Random play
Playing and pausing tracks
Switching the display
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 434 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
435
5
5-9. Bluetooth
®
Phone
Audio system
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Making a phone call
Select “Phonebook” using the “TUNE >” or “< SELECT” button, and
press the “SETUP ENTER” button.
Select the desired name using the “TUNE >” or “< SELECT” button,
and press the off-hook switch.
By pressing (Add S. Dial) and one of the speed dial buttons
(from [1] to [5]) while the desired name is selected, it can
be registered as a speed dial.
Press (A-Z) to display the registered names in alphabetical order
of the initial.
Select “Speed dials” using the “TUNE >” or “< SELECT” button, and
press the “SETUP ENTER” button.
Press the desired preset button (from [1] to [5]) and
press the off-hook switch.
To d elet e a regi s t e r e d sp e e d dia l, afte r sele c ti ng the de s i r e d pr e s e t
button (from [1] to [5]) press (DELETE) and then
press (YES).
Select “Dial by number” using the “TUNE >” or “< SELECT” button,
and press the “SETUP ENTER” button.
Enter the phone number and press the off-hook switch.
To enter the “TEL” or “PHONE” mode, press the off-hook switch.
Dialing by selecting a name
Speed dialing
Dialing by entering the number
1
2
1
2
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 435 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
436
5-9. Bluetooth
®
Phone
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Select “All calls”, “Missed calls”, “Incoming calls” or “Outgoing calls”
using the “TUNE >” or “< SELECT” button, and press the “SETUP
ENTER” button.
Select a desired number using the “TUNE >” or “< SELECT” button,
and press the off-hook switch.
The following operations can be performed:
● Registering a number as a speed dial
Press (Add S. Dial) and then press the desired preset button
(from [1] to [5]).
● Deleting the selected number
Press (DELETE) and press (YES).
If your cellular phone is not PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile) com-
patible, the contacts cannot be transferred.
Depending on the type of Bluetooth
®
phone, it may be necessary to
perform additional steps on the phone when transferring contact data.
Setting automatic transferring of the phonebook to on. (→P. 4 3 0 )
Default setting is on.
After HFP connection is successful, the phone’s contact data and
history are automatically transferred, and then “Transfer waiting” is
displayed when “TEL” mode is selected.
● If automatic transfer is successful, “Transferred” is displayed except
for Power off mode.
● If automatic transfer is failed, “Failed to transfer part of contact” or
“Transfer failed” is displayed.
If phone book memory is full, “Failed to transfer part of contacts” is
displayed.
● Automatic transfer is canceled by pushing (CANCEL) or On-
hook switch.
● When “Display setting” is set to off, it doesn’t display the PBAP
automatic transfer result confirmation. (→P. 4 2 5)
Dialing from call histories
PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile) Automatic Transfer
1
2
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 436 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
437
5
5-9. Bluetooth
®
Phone
Audio system
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Receiving a phone call
Press the off-hook switch.
Press the on-hook switch.
Press the off-hook switch.
Pressing the off-hook switch again returns you to the previous call.
To d e c r ease t h e v ol um e: Press t he “V OL -” b u tton.
To i n cr ease th e vo lu m e : Pre s s the “V OL + ” but to n.
Answering the phone
Refusing the call
Receiving a call when on another call
Adjusting the ring tone volume when receiving a call
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 437 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
438
5-9. Bluetooth
®
Phone
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Speaking on the phone
A call can be transferred between the cellular phone and system while
dialing, receiving a call, or during a call. Use one of the following
methods:
a. Operate the cellular phone.
Refer to the manual that comes with the cellular phone for the operation of
the phone.
b. Press the (PHONE).*
*
:This operation can be performed only when transferring a call from the cel-
lular phone to the system during a call.
Press (MUTE).
Press (0-9).
Press the “TUNE >” or “< SELECT” button to select the number,
and then press the “SETUP ENTER” button.
If tone data is saved, press (SEND) to send the data all at once.
Press
(EXIT) to delete the tone data.
When finished, press (BACK) to return to the previous screen.
To d e c r ease t h e v ol um e: Press t he “V OL -” b u tton.
To i n cr ease th e vo lu m e : Pre s s the “V OL + ” but to n.
Transferring a call
Muting your voice
Inputting digits
Setting call volume
1
2
3
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 438 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
439
5-9. Bluetooth
®
Phone
5
Audio system
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■ When talking on the phone
● Do not talk simultaneously with the other party.
● Keep the volume of the received voice down. Otherwise, voice echo will
increase.
■ Automatic volume adjustment
When vehicle speed is 80 km/h (50 mph) or more, the volume automatically
increases. The volume returns to the previous volume setting when vehicle
speed drops to 70 km/h (43 mph) or less.
■ Phone call system functions
Depending on the cellular phone, certain functions may not be available.
■ Situations where the system may not recognize your voice
● When driving on a rough road
● When driving at high speeds
● When air is blowing out of the vents onto the microphone
● When the air conditioning fan emits a loud noise
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 439 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
440
5-10. Bluetooth
®
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Bluetooth
®
■ Conditions affecting operation
The Bluetooth
®
audio/phone may not operate normally in the following situa-
tions:
● The portable player does not support Bluetooth
®
● The cellular phone is located outside the service area
● The Bluetooth
®
device is switched off
● The Bluetooth
®
device has a low battery
● The Bluetooth
®
device is not connected to the system
● The Bluetooth
®
device is behind the seat or in the glove box or console box,
or metal material covers or touches the device
■ When transferring ownership of the vehicle
Be sure to initialize the system to prevent personal data from being improp-
erly accessed. (→P. 42 5 )
■ About Bluetooth
®
The Bluetooth
®
word mark and logos are
registered trademarks owned by
Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such
marks by FUJITSU TEN LIMITED is
under license. Other trademarks and
trade names are those of their respective
owners.
The Bluetooth
®
word mark and logos are
registered trademarks owned by
Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such
marks by PIONEER CORPORATION is
under license. Other trademarks and
trade names are those of their respective
owners.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 440 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
441
5-10. Bluetooth
®
5
Audio system
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■ Compatible models
● Bluetooth
®
specifications:
Ver. 1.1, or higher (Recommended: Ver. 2.1 + EDR or higher)
● Following Profiles:
•A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile) Ver. 1.0 or higher (recom-
mended: Ver. 1.2 or higher)
•AVRCP (Audio/Video Remote Control Profile) Ver. 1.0 or higher (recom-
mended: Ver. 1.3 or higher)
Portable players must correspond to the above specifications in order to be
connected to the Bluetooth
®
audio/phone. However, please note that some
functions may be limited depending on the type of portable player.
● Cellular phone
•HFP (Hands Free Profile) Ver. 1.0 or higher (Recommended: Ver. 1.5)
•OPP (Object Push Profile) Ver. 1.1
•PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile) Ver. 1.0
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 441 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
442
5-10. Bluetooth
®
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■ Certification
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 442 Wednesday, April 27, 2016 4:17 PM
443
5-10. Bluetooth
®
5
Audio system
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 443 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
444
5-10. Bluetooth
®
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 444 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
445
5-10. Bluetooth
®
5
Audio system
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 445 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
446
5-10. Bluetooth
®
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
WARNING
■ While driving
Do not use the portable audio player or connect the Bluetooth
®
system.
■ Caution regarding interference with electronic devices
● Your audio unit is fitted with Bluetooth
®
antennas. People with implantable
cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization therapy-pacemakers or
implantable cardioverter defibrillators should maintain a reasonable dis-
tance between themselves and the Bluetooth
®
antennas. The radio waves
may affect the operation of such devices.
● Before using Bluetooth
®
devices, users of any electrical medical device
other than implantable cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization
therapy-pacemakers or implantable cardioverter defibrillators should con-
sult the manufacturer of the device for information about its operation
under the influence of radio waves. Radio waves could have unexpected
effects on the operation of such medical devices.
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to portable players
Do not leave portable players in the vehicle. The temperature inside the
vehicle may become high, resulting in damage to the player.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 446 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
447
6
Interior features
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
6-1. Using the air conditioning
system and defogger
Manual air conditioning
system .............................448
Automatic air conditioning
system .............................456
Seat heaters ......................465
6-2. Using the interior lights
Interior lights list.................466
•Personal/interior light
main switch....................467
•Personal/interior
lights ..............................467
•Interior light....................467
6-3. Using the storage features
List of storage features ......469
•Glove box......................470
•Console box..................470
•Cup holders...................471
•Bottle holders................472
•Auxiliary boxes..............473
Luggage compartment
features............................476
6-4. Using the other interior
features
Other interior features........477
•Sun visors......................477
•Vanity mirror..................477
•Clock.............................478
•Power outlets.................479
•Grocery bag hooks........481
•Coat hooks....................482
•Armrest..........................482
ERA-GLONASS.................483
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 447 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
448
6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Manual air conditioning system
∗
■ Adjusting the fan speed setting
Turn clockwise (increase) or counterclockwise (decrease).
Turning the dial to “OFF” turns off the fan.
■
Adjusting the temperature setting
Turn clockwise (warm) or counterclockwise (cool).
If (if equipped) is not pressed, the system will blow ambient tem-
perature air or heated air.
■
Changing the air flow mode
Set to the desired position.
The positions between the air outlet selections can also be selected for
more delicate adjustment.
∗: If equipped
Air conditioning controls
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 448 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
449
6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
6
Interior features
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■
Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes
Move the outside/recirculated air mode lever.
The mode switches between (introduces air from outside the vehi-
cle) and (recycles air inside the vehicle) each time the lever is
moved.
■
Defogging the windshield (vehicles with )
Set to
position.
Set the outside/recirculated air mode lever to outside air mode if recircu-
lated air mode is used.
Perform the following operations accordingly:
● To adj u s t the fa n sp eed , tu rn .
● To adjust the temperature setting, turn .
● If the dehumidification function is not operating, press to
operate the dehumidification function.
To de fog th e w ind shie l d a n d th e si de win do w s ear l y, turn the a i r
flow and temperature up.
■ Defogging the rear window and outside rear view mirrors (if
equipped)
Defoggers are used to defog the rear window, and to remove rain-
drops, dew and frost from the outside rear view mirrors.
Press
Other functions
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 449 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
450
6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■
Heater idle up (if equipped)
This feature is used to heat the engine coolant, speed up warming
of the cab in cold weather, and keep the cab warm when the vehicle
is not moving.
Press the switch to turn the
heater idle up on/off.
If you do not turn the switch to
off, the engine speed may be
increased when the engine is
started.
■
Power heater (if equipped)
This feature is used to heat the engine coolant, speed up warming
of the cab in cold weather, and keep the cab warm.
Press the switch to turn the
power heater on/off.
If you do not turn the switch to
off, the engine speed may be
increased when the engine is
started.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 450 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
451
6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
6
Interior features
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■
Location of air outlets
The air outlets and air volume
changes according to the
selected air flow mode.
:Some models
■ Adjusting the position of and opening and closing the air out-
lets
Center outlets
Direct air flow to the left or
right, up or down.
Close the vents.
Side outlets
Direct air flow to the left or
right, up or down.
Close the vents.
Air outlets
1
2
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 451 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
452
6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■ Fogging up of the windows
● The windows will easily fog up when the humidity in the vehicle is high.
Turning (if equipped) on will dehumidify the air from the outlets and
defog the windshield effectively.
● If you turn (if equipped) off, the windows may fog up more easily.
● The windows may fog up if the recirculated air mode is used.
■ Outside/recirculated air mode
When driving on dusty roads such as tunnels or in heavy traffic, set the out-
side/recirculated air mode lever to . This is effective in preventing outside
air from entering the vehicle interior. During cooling operation, setting the
recirculated air mode will also cool the vehicle interior effectively.
■ When the outside temperature falls to nearly 0°C (32°F) (vehicles with
)
The dehumidification function may not operate even when is pressed.
■ Ventilation and air conditioning odors
● To l e t f re s h a i r in , s e t th e a i r c o n d iti on in g s ys t e m t o t h e o u ts i d e a ir mo d e.
● During use, various odors from inside and outside the vehicle may enter into
and accumulate in the air conditioning system. This may then cause odor to
be emitted from the vents.
● To r edu ce po t e n ti a l od o rs f r o m o c c u rr in g:
It is recommended that the air conditioning system be set to outside air
mode prior to turning the vehicle off.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 452 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
453
6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
6
Interior features
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■ Air conditioning system operations when the engine is stopped due to
the Stop & Start system (vehicles with Stop & Start system)
When the engine is stopped due to Stop & Start system operations, the man-
ual air conditioning cooling, heating and dehumidification functions turn off.
To sto p the a ir con dit io nin g sys te m fr om tu rn ing off , p res s th e Stop & Star t
cancel switch and refrain from using the Stop & Start system.
■ An odor comes from the air conditioning system due to the Stop & Start
system operation (vehicles with Stop & Start system)
When the engine is stopped due to Stop & Start system operations, an odor
caused by moisture may be detected. This does not indicate a malfunction.
■ Air conditioning filter
→P. 5 30
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 453 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
454
6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■ Air conditioning refrigerant (vehicles with )
Type: R-134a (HFC-134a)
Capacity: 0.50 ± 0.05 kg (1.10 ± 0.11 lb.)
GWP (Global Warming Potential): 1430
CO2 equivalent: 0.72 t (1587.33 lb.)
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 454 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
455
6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
6
Interior features
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
WARNING
■ To prevent the windshield from fogging up
● Do not set to during cool air operation in extremely humid
weather. The difference between the temperature of the outside air and
that of the windshield can cause the outer surface of the windshield to fog
up, blocking your vision.
■ To prevent burns (vehicles with outside rear view mirror defoggers)
Do not touch the rear view mirror surfaces when the outside rear view mirror
defoggers are on.
NOTICE
■ To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the air conditioning system on longer than necessary when the
engine is not running.
● Do not place anything on the instrument
panel which may cover the air outlets.
Otherwise, air flow may be obstructed,
preventing the windshield defoggers
from defogging.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 455 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
456
6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Automatic air conditioning system
∗
This illustration is for a left-hand drive vehicle. Some button positions
differ for right-hand drive vehicles.
■ Adjusting the fan speed setting
Turn clockwise (increase) or counterclockwise (decrease).
Press to turn the fan off.
■
Adjusting the temperature setting
Turn clockwise (warm) or counterclockwise (cool).
If is not pressed, the system will blow ambient temperature air or
heated air.
∗: If equipped
Air outlets and fan speed are automatically adjusted according
to the temperature setting.
Air conditioning controls
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 456 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
457
6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
6
Interior features
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■
Changing the air flow mode
Press to change the air
outlets.
The air outlets used are
switched each time the button is
pressed.
Press .
The dehumidification function begins to operate. Air outlets and fan
speed are automatically adjusted according to the temperature set-
ting.
Turn clockwise (warm) or counterclockwise (cool) to adjust
the temperature.
To s t o p the o p era t i o n , pr e s s .
■ Automatic mode indicator
If the fan speed setting or air flow modes are operated, the auto-
matic mode indicator goes off. However, automatic mode for func-
tions other than that operated is maintained.
Using automatic mode
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 457 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
458
6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■
Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes
Press to switch to recirculated air mode and press to
switch to outside air mode.
■ Defogging the windshield
Press .
The dehumidification function operates and fan speed increases.
Press if the recirculated air mode is used. (It may switch automati-
cally.)
To d ef o g t he w i nd sh ie ld a n d t he s i de w i n do ws e ar l y, t u r n t h e a ir f l ow a n d
temperature up.
To r et u rn t o t h e p re v io us mo d e , pr es s a g a i n w h e n t he w in ds h ie ld
is defogged.
■
Defogging the rear window and outside rear view mirrors (if
equipped)
Defoggers are used to defog the rear window, and to remove rain-
drops, dew and frost from the outside rear view mirrors.
Vehicles without outside rear view mirror defoggers
Press
The defoggers will automatically turn off after approximately 15 minutes.
Vehicles with outside rear view mirror defoggers
Press
The defoggers will automatically turn off after approximately 15 minutes.
Other functions
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 458 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
459
6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
6
Interior features
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■
Power heater (if equipped)
This feature is used to heat the engine coolant, speed up warming
of the cab in cold weather, and keep the cab warm.
Press the switch to turn the
power heater on/off
If you do not turn the switch to
off, the engine speed may be
increased when the engine is
started.
■
Location of air outlets
The air outlets and air volume
changes according to the
selected air flow mode.
:Some models
■ Adjusting the position of and opening and closing the air out-
lets
Center outlets
Direct air flow to the left or
right, up or down.
Close the vents.
Air outlets
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 459 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
460
6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Side outlets
Direct air flow to the left or
right, up or down.
Close the vents.
Rear outlets
Direct air flow to the left or
right, up or down.
Close the vents.
■ Using automatic mode
Fan speed is adjusted automatically according to the temperature setting and
the ambient conditions.
Therefore, the fan may stop for a while until warm or cool air is ready to flow
immediately after is pressed.
■ Fogging up of the windows
● The windows will easily fog up when the humidity in the vehicle is high.
Turning on will dehumidify the air from the outlets and defog the wind-
shield effectively.
● If you turn off, the windows may fog up more easily.
● The windows may fog up if the recirculated air mode is used.
1
2
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 460 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
461
6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
6
Interior features
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■ Outside/recirculated air mode
● When driving on dusty roads such as tunnels or in heavy traffic, press .
This is effective in preventing outside air from entering the vehicle interior.
During cooling operation, setting the recirculated air mode will also cool the
vehicle interior effectively.
● Outside/recirculated air mode may automatically switch depending on the
temperature setting or the inside temperature.
■ Operation of the air conditioning system in Eco drive mode (if equipped)
● In Eco drive mode, the air conditioning system is controlled as follows to pri-
oritize fuel efficiency:
•Engine speed and compressor operation controlled to restrict heating/
cooling capacity
•Fan speed restricted when automatic mode is selected
● To i m p r o ve a ir c o n d iti on i ng p er f o r ma nce , p er fo r m t he f o ll ow i n g o pe r at i o n s.
•Adjust the fan speed
•Turn off Eco drive mode
•Adjust the temperature setting
■ When the outside temperature falls to nearly 0°C (32°F)
The dehumidification function may not operate even when is pressed.
■ Ventilation and air conditioning odors
● To l e t f re s h a i r in , s e t th e a i r c o n d iti on in g s ys t e m t o t h e o u ts i d e a ir mo d e.
● During use, various odors from inside and outside the vehicle may enter into
and accumulate in the air conditioning system. This may then cause odor to
be emitted from the vents.
● To r edu ce po t e n ti a l od o rs f r o m o c c u rr in g:
•It is recommended that the air conditioning system be set to outside air
mode prior to turning the vehicle off.
•For some models: The start timing of the blower may be delayed for a
short period of time immediately after the air conditioning system is
started in automatic mode.
■ Air conditioning system operations when the engine is stopped due to
the Stop & Start system (vehicles with Stop & Start system)
When the engine is stopped due to Stop & Start system operations, the
automatic air conditioning cooling, heating and dehumidification functions
turn off and the fan speed is decreased according to the outside tempera-
ture etc. or air blowing stops. To stop the air conditioning system from turn-
ing off, press the Stop & Start cancel switch and refrain from using the Stop
& Start system.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 461 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
462
6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■ An odor comes from the air conditioning system due to the Stop & Start
system operation (vehicles with Stop & Start system)
When the engine is stopped due to Stop & Start system operations, an odor
caused by moisture may be detected. This does not indicate a malfunction.
■ Air conditioning filter
→P. 5 30
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 462 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
463
6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
6
Interior features
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■ Air conditioning refrigerant
Type: R-134a (HFC-134a)
Capacity: 0.50 ± 0.05 kg (1.10 ± 0.11 lb.)
GWP (Global Warming Potential): 1430
CO2 equivalent: 0.72 t (1587.33 lb.)
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 463 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
464
6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
WARNING
■ To prevent the windshield from fogging up
● Do not use during cool air operation in extremely humid weather. The
difference between the temperature of the outside air and that of the wind-
shield can cause the outer surface of the windshield to fog up, blocking
your vision.
■ To prevent burns (vehicles with outside rear view mirror defoggers)
Do not touch the rear view mirror surfaces when the outside rear view mirror
defoggers are on.
NOTICE
■ To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the air conditioning system on longer than necessary when the
engine is not running.
● Do not place anything on the instrument
panel which may cover the air outlets.
Otherwise, air flow may be obstructed,
preventing the windshield defoggers
from defogging.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 464 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
465
6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
6
Interior features
Seat heaters
∗
Turns on the front left seat
heater
The indicator light comes on.
Turns on the front right seat
heater
The indicator light comes on.
● The seat heaters can be used when the engine switch is in the “ON” position
(vehicles without smart entry & start system) or IGNITION ON mode (vehi-
cles with smart entry & start system).
● When not in use, press the seat heater switch to turn the seat heater off.
The indicator light turns off.
∗: If equipped
1
2
WARNING
● Care should be taken to prevent injury if anyone in the following categories
comes in contact with the seats when the heater is on:
•Babies, small children, the elderly, the sick and the physically chal-
lenged
•Persons with sensitive skin
•Persons who are fatigued
•Persons who have taken alcohol or drugs that induce sleep (sleeping
drugs, cold remedies, etc.)
● Observe the following precautions to prevent minor burns or overheating:
•Do not cover the seat with a blanket or cushion when using the seat
heater.
•Do not use seat heater more than necessary.
NOTICE
● Do not put heavy objects that have an uneven surface on the seat and do
not stick sharp objects (needles, nails, etc.) into the seat.
● To pr ev en t b at te ry di s c har ge , d o n ot u s e th e f un cti on s w h en the eng ine is
not running.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 465 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
466
6-2. Using the interior lights
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Interior lights list
Interior light (if equipped) (→P. 4 6 7 )
Personal/interior lights (→P. 4 67 )
Engine switch light (if equipped)
1
2
3
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 466 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
467
6-2. Using the interior lights
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
6
Interior features
Door position
The personal/interior lights come
on when a door is opened. They
turn off when the doors are closed.
Off
The personal/interior lights can be
individually turned on or off.
On/off
Off
Door position
The interior light comes on when a
door is opened. It turns off when
the doors are closed.
On
Personal/interior light main switch
1
2
Personal/interior lights
Interior light (if equipped)
1
2
3
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 467 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
468
6-2. Using the interior lights
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
● Illuminated entry system (if equipped):
Vehicles without smart entry & start system
The lights automatically turn on/off according to the engine switch position,
whether the doors are locked/unlocked, and whether the doors are opened/
closed.
Vehicles with smart entry & start system
The lights automatically turn on/off according to engine switch mode,
whether the doors are locked/unlocked, and whether the doors are opened/
closed.
● If the following lights remain on when the engine switch is turned to the
“LOCK” position (vehicles without smart entry & start system) or off (vehicles
with smart entry & start system), the lights will go off automatically after 20
minutes:
•Personal/interior light
•Interior light (if equipped)
•Engine switch light (if equipped)
NOTICE
To p re v e nt ba tt e r y d i s ch a rg e, do no t le av e t he li g h ts o n l o ng e r t ha n n ec e s-
sary when the engine is not running.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 468 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
469
6-3. Using the storage features
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
6
Interior features
List of storage features
Bottle holders (if equipped)
(→P. 4 72 )
Cup holders (if equipped)
(→P. 4 71 )
Auxiliary boxes (if equipped)
(→P. 4 73 )
Glove box (→P. 47 0 )
Console box (if equipped)
(→P. 4 70 )
1
2
3
4
5
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 469 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
470
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
6-3. Using the storage features
Open (push button)
Unlock with the master key or
the mechanical key
Lock with the master key or the
mechanical key
Lift the lid while pulling up the
knob to release the lock.
WARNING
● Do not leave glasses, lighters or spray cans in the storage spaces, as this
may cause the following when cabin temperature becomes high:
•Glasses may be deformed by heat or cracked if they come into contact
with other stored items.
•Lighters or spray cans may explode. If they come into contact with other
stored items, the lighter may catch fire or the spray can may release
gas, causing a fire hazard.
● When driving or when the glove box and the console box are not in use,
keep it closed.
In the event of sudden braking or sudden swerving, an accident may occur
due to an occupant being struck by an open lid or the items stored inside.
Glove box
1
2
3
Console box (if equipped)
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 470 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
471
6-3. Using the storage features
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
6
Interior features
Cup holders
Type A Type B (if equipped)
Press in and pull the cup holder.
Type C (if equipped) Type D (if equipped)
Type E (if equipped)
Pull the armrest down.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 471 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
472
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
6-3. Using the storage features
● When using the holder as a bottle holder:
•When storing a bottle, close the cap.
•The bottle may not be stored depending on its size or shape.
WARNING
Do not place anything other than cups or beverage cans in the cup holders.
Even when the lid is closed, items must not be stored in the cup holders.
Other items may be thrown out of the holders in the event of sudden brak-
ing, sudden swerving or an accident, cause injury. If possible, cover hot
drinks to prevent burns.
Bottle holders
For front seats For rear seats (if equipped)
WARNING
Do not place anything other than a bottle in the bottle holders.
Other items may be thrown out of the holders in the event of an accident or
sudden braking and cause injury.
NOTICE
Do not place open bottles or glass and paper cups containing liquid in the
bottle holders. The contents may spill and glasses may break.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 472 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
473
6-3. Using the storage features
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
6
Interior features
Auxiliary boxes
Type A Type B
Press the button. Press in and pull the cup holder,
and push the cup tray.
Type C Type D*
Press in the lid.
The auxiliary box is useful for tem-
porarily storing sunglasses and
similar small items.
Type E (if equipped) Type F (if equipped)
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 473 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
474
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
6-3. Using the storage features
*:The shape of the auxiliary box may differ depending on the grade, etc.
● Air conditioning-linked temperature regulation function (type A) (if
equipped):
By introducing air from the air conditioning system into the auxiliary box,
canned drinks etc. can be kept hot or cold. However, as the temperature
inside the auxiliary box will become the same as the temperature of the air
flowing from the air conditioning system, extreme heating and cooling are
not possible. In high humidity condition, be careful of objects inside the aux-
iliary box, as condensation may form.
● Using the air conditioning-linked temperature regulation function (type A) (if
equipped):
Allow the air conditioning system to operate, and use or to
select either or . (→P. 4 4 8, 4 5 7 )
Adjust the temperature. (→P. 4 48 , 45 6)
Type G (if equipped)
Open the air intake lid inside the aux-
iliary box.
To b lo w a la r ge a mo un t o f ai r i n t o t h e
auxiliary box, close the passenger
side vent. (→P. 4 51 , 4 5 9 )
1
2
3
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 474 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
475
6-3. Using the storage features
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
6
Interior features
● Normal use (type A) (if equipped):
Close the air intake lid inside the auxiliary box.
● Items unsuitable for the auxiliary box (type A) (if equipped):
•Drinks in unsealed container
•Fragile items, perishables or anything with strong odor
WARNING
● Do not store items heavier than 0.2 kg (0.4 lb.).
Doing so may cause the auxiliary box to open and the items inside may fall
out, resulting in an accident. (type C)
● Keep the auxiliary boxes closed. In the event of sudden braking, an acci-
dent may occur due to an occupant being struck by an open auxiliary box
or the items stored inside. (type A, B and C)
● When using the auxiliary boxes, do not use the cup tray.
If a cup, aluminum can or bottle is placed in the auxiliary box, it may be
thrown out of the box in the event of an accident or sudden braking, result-
ing in injury. (type B)
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 475 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
476
6-3. Using the storage features
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Luggage compartment features
Deck hooks are provided for
securing loose items.
Deck hooks (if equipped)
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 476 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
477
6-4. Using the other interior features
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
6
Interior features
Other interior features
To s e t th e vis o r in th e forwa r d
position, flip it down.
To se t t h e v i sor in th e s ide p o si-
tion, flip down, unhook, and
swing it to the side.
Open the cover to use.
Sun visors
1
2
Vanity mirror (if equipped)
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 477 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
478
6-4. Using the other interior features
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
The clock can be adjusted by pressing the buttons.
Adjusts the hours
Adjusts the minutes
Rounds to the nearest hour
*
*
:e.g.1:00 to 1:29 → 1:00
1:30 to 1:59 → 2:00
● The clock is displayed when:
Vehicles without smart entry & start system
The engine switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.
Vehicles with smart entry & start system
The engine switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode.
● When disconnecting and reconnecting battery terminals:
The time display will automatically be set to 1:00.
Clock
1
2
3
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 478 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
479
6-4. Using the other interior features
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
6
Interior features
The power outlet can be used for the following components:
12 V DC:
Please use as a power supply for electronic goods that use less than
12 V DC / 10 A (power consumption of 120 W).
When using electronic goods, make sure that the power consumption
of all the connected power outlets is less than 120 W.
220 V AC:
Accessories that use less than 100 W.
■ 12 V DC
Open the cover.
■ 220 V AC
Open the cover.
Power outlets (if equipped)
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 479 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
480
6-4. Using the other interior features
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
● The power outlet can be used when:
Vehicles without smart entry & start system
12 V DC: The engine switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.
220 V AC: The engine switch is in the “ON” position.
Vehicles with smart entry & start system
12 V DC: The engine switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode.
220 V AC: The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
● Vehicles with Stop & Start system: When the engine restarts after having
been stopped by the Stop & Start system, the power outlet may be tempo-
rarily unusable, but this is not a malfunction.
NOTICE
● To av o id dama gi ng the po we r out le ts , clo se th e pow er ou tle t lid wh en t he
power outlet is not in use.
Foreign objects or liquids that enter the power outlet may cause a short
circuit.
● To pr ev en t blo wn fu se :
12 V DC
Do not use an accessory that uses more than 12 V 10 A.
220 V AC
Do not use a 220 V AC appliance that requires more than 100 W.
If a 220 V AC appliance that consumes more than 100 W is used, the pro-
tection circuit will cut the power supply.
● To pr ev en t bat te ry di s ch ar ge, d o not u se th e p ow er ou tle t lon ge r th a n n ec -
essary when the engine is not running.
● The following 220 V AC appliances may not operate properly even if their
power consumption is under 100 W:
•Appliances with high initial peak wattage
•Measuring devices that process precise data
•Other appliances that require an extremely stable power supply
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 480 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
481
6-4. Using the other interior features
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
6
Interior features
Grocery bag hooks (if equipped)
WARNING
Keep the hooks returned in place when not in use.
NOTICE
Do not hang any object heavier than 4 kg (8.8 lb.).
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 481 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
482
6-4. Using the other interior features
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
The coat hooks are provided
above the back window.
Fold down the armrest for use.
Coat hooks (if equipped)
Armrest (if equipped)
NOTICE
To p r e v en t da m a g e to th e ar m r e s t , d o no t ap p ly t o o m u ch l o a d on th e ar m -
rest.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 482 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
483
6-4. Using the other interior features
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
6
Interior features
ERA-GLONASS
∗
Microphone
“SOS” button
Indicator lights
■ Automatic Collision Notification
If any airbag deploys, the system is designed to automatically call
the Public Safety Answering Point (PSAP). The responding agent
receives the vehicle’s location and attempts to speak with the vehi-
cle occupants to assess the level of emergency. If the occupants
are unable to communicate, the agent automatically treats the call
as an emergency, contacts the nearest emergency services pro-
vider to describe the situation, and requests that assistance be sent
to the location.
∗: If equipped
ERA-GLONASS is a telematics service that uses Global Naviga-
tion Satellite System (GLONASS) data and embedded cellular
technology to enable the following emergency calls to be made:
Automatic emergency calls (Automatic Collision Notification)
and manual emergency calls (by pressing the “SOS” button).
This service is required by Eurasian Customs Union Regula-
tions.
System components
1
2
3
Emergency Notification Services
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 483 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
484
6-4. Using the other interior features
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■
Emergency Assistance Button (“SOS”)
In the event of an emergency, push the “SOS” button to reach the
Public Safety Answering Point (PSAP). The answering agent will
determine your vehicle’s location, assess the emergency, and dis-
patch the necessary assistance required.
If you accidentally press the “SOS” button, tell the agent that you are not
experiencing an emergency.
When the engine switch is turned to the “ON” position (vehicles with-
out smart entry & start system) or IGNITION ON mode (vehicles with
smart entry & start system), the red indicator light will illuminate for 10
seconds and then the green indicator light will illuminate for 2 sec-
onds, indicating that the system is enabled. The indicator lights indi-
cate the following:
● If the green indicator light illuminates and stays on, the system is
enabled.
● If the green indicator light flashes, an emergency call is being made
(either automatically or manually).
● If no indicator lights illuminate, the system is not enabled.
● If the red indicator light illuminates any time other than immediately
after the engine switch is turned to the “ON” position (vehicles with-
out smart entry & start system) or IGNITION ON mode (vehicles
with smart entry & start system), the system may be malfunctioning
or the backup battery may be depleted. Contact any authorized
Toyota d eal er or r epai r e r, o r a n ot her du ly q uali fied a nd e qu ipp ed
professional.
The service life of the backup battery is 3 years or more.
Indicator lights
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 484 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
485
7
Maintenance and care
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
7-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle exterior ..........486
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle interior ...........489
7-2. Maintenance
Maintenance
requirements....................492
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Do-it-yourself service
precautions ......................495
Hood ..................................497
Engine compartment..........499
Tires...................................518
Tire inflation pressure ........526
Wheels...............................528
Air conditioning filter ..........530
Wireless remote control/
electronic key battery.......532
Checking and
replacing fuses ................535
Light bulbs .........................540
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 485 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
486
7-1. Maintenance and care
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Cleaning and protecting the vehicle
exterior
● Working from top to bottom, liberally apply water to the vehicle
body, wheel wells and underside of the vehicle to remove any dirt
and dust.
● Wash the vehicle body using a sponge or soft cloth, such as a
chamois.
● For hard-to-remove marks, use car wash soap and rinse thoroughly
with water.
● Wipe away any water.
● Wax the vehicle when the waterproof coating deteriorates.
If water does not bead on a clean surface, apply wax when the vehicle
body is cool.
■ Automatic car washes
● Fold the mirrors and remove the antenna before washing the vehicle. Start
washing from the front of the vehicle. Make sure to re-install the antenna
and extend the mirrors before driving.
● Brushes used in automatic car washes may scratch the vehicle surface and
harm your vehicle’s paint.
■ High pressure car washes
● Do not allow the nozzles of the car wash to come within close proximity of
the windows.
● Vehicles with fuel filler door: Before using the car wash, check that the fuel
filler door on your vehicle is closed properly.
Perform the following to protect the vehicle and maintain it in
prime condition:
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 486 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
487
7-1. Maintenance and care
7
Maintenance and care
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■ Aluminum wheels (if equipped)
● Remove any dirt immediately by using a neutral detergent. Do not use hard
brushes or abrasive cleaners. Do not use strong or harsh chemical clean-
ers.
Use the same mild detergent and wax as used on the paint.
● Do not use detergent on the wheels when they are hot, for example after
driving for long distance in the hot weather.
● Wash detergent from the wheels immediately after use.
■ Bumpers
Do not scrub with abrasive cleaners.
WARNING
■ When washing the vehicle
Do not apply water to the inside of the engine compartment. Doing so may
cause the electrical components etc. to catch fire.
■ Precautions regarding the exhaust pipe
Exhaust gasses cause the exhaust pipe to become quite hot.
When washing the vehicle, be careful not to touch the pipe until it has
cooled sufficiently, as touching a hot exhaust pipe can cause burns.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 487 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
488
7-1. Maintenance and care
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
NOTICE
■ To prevent paint deterioration and corrosion on the body and compo-
nents (aluminum wheels etc.)
● Wash the vehicle immediately in the following cases:
•After driving near the sea coast
•After driving on salted roads
•If coal tar or tree sap is present on the paint surface
•If dead insects, insect droppings or bird droppings are present on the
paint surface
•After driving in an area contaminated with soot, oily smoke, mine dust,
iron powder or chemical substances
•If the vehicle becomes heavily soiled with dust or mud
•If liquids such as benzene and gasoline are spilled on the paint surface
● If the paint is chipped or scratched, have it repaired immediately.
● To p re ve nt the wh ee l s f ro m co r ro din g, re mov e a ny d irt an d s to r e in a p lac e
with low humidity when storing the wheels.
■ Cleaning the exterior lights
● Wash carefully. Do not use organic substances or scrub with a hard brush.
This may damage the surfaces of the lights.
● Do not apply wax to the surfaces of the lights.
Wax may cause damage to the lenses.
■ Antenna installation and removal precautions
● Before driving, ensure that the antenna is installed.
● When the antenna is removed, such as before entering an automatic car
wash, make sure to store it in a suitable place so as not to lose it. Also,
before driving, make sure to reinstall the antenna in its original position.
■ When using a high pressure car wash
Do not bring the nozzle tip close to boots (rubber or resin manufactured
cover), connectors or the following parts. The parts may be damaged if they
come into contact with high-pressure water.
•Traction related parts
•Steering parts
•Suspension parts
•Brake parts
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 488 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
489
7-1. Maintenance and care
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
7
Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting the vehicle
interior
● Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner. Wipe dirty surfaces
with a cloth dampened with lukewarm water.
● If dirt cannot be removed, wipe it off with a soft cloth dampened with
neutral detergent diluted to approximately 1%.
● Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly wipe off
remaining traces of detergent and water.
● Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner.
● Wipe off any excess dirt and dust with a soft cloth dampened with
diluted detergent.
Use a diluted water solution of approximately 5% neutral wool detergent.
● Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly wipe off
all remaining traces of detergent.
● Wipe the surface with a dry, soft cloth to remove any remaining
moisture. Allow the leather to dry in a shaded and ventilated area.
● Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner.
● Wipe it off with a soft cloth dampened with neutral detergent diluted
to approximately 1%.
● Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly wipe off
remaining traces of detergent and water.
The following procedures will help protect your vehicle’s interior
and keep it in top condition:
Protecting the vehicle interior
Cleaning the leather areas
Cleaning the synthetic leather areas
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 489 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
490
7-1. Maintenance and care
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■ Caring for leather areas
Toyo ta r ec om men ds cl ea nin g th e int er ior o f th e v eh icl e a t le ast t wi ce a ye ar to
maintain the quality of the vehicle’s interior.
■ Shampooing the carpets
There are several commercial foaming-type cleaners available. Use a sponge
or brush to apply the foam. Rub in overlapping circles. Do not use water.
Wipe dirty surfaces and let them dry. Excellent results are obtained by keep-
ing the carpet as dry as possible.
■ Seat belts
Clean with mild soap and lukewarm water using a cloth or sponge. Also
check the belts periodically for excessive wear, fraying or cuts.
WARNING
■ Water in the vehicle
● Do not splash or spill liquid in the vehicle.
Doing so may cause electrical components etc. to malfunction or catch
fire.
● Do not get any of the SRS components or wiring in the vehicle interior wet.
(→P. 4 6)
An electrical malfunction may cause the airbags to deploy or not function
properly, resulting in death or serious injury.
■ Cleaning the interior (especially instrument panel)
Do not use polish wax or polish cleaner. The instrument panel may reflect
off the windshield, obstructing the driver’s view and leading to an accident,
resulting in death or serious injury.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 490 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
491
7-1. Maintenance and care
7
Maintenance and care
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
NOTICE
■ Cleaning detergents
● Do not use the following types of detergent, as they may discolor the vehi-
cle interior or cause streaks or damage to painted surfaces:
•Non-seat portions: Organic substances such as benzene or gasoline,
alkaline or acidic solutions, dye, and bleach
•Seats: Alkaline or acidic solutions, such as thinner, benzene, and alco-
hol
● Do not use polish wax or polish cleaner. The instrument panel’s or other
interior part’s painted surface may be damaged.
■ Preventing damage to leather surfaces
Observe the following precautions to avoid damage to and deterioration of
leather surfaces:
● Remove any dust or dirt from leather surfaces immediately.
● Do not expose the vehicle to direct sunlight for extended periods of time.
Park the vehicle in the shade, especially during summer.
● Do not place items made of vinyl, plastic, or containing wax on the uphol-
stery, as they may stick to the leather surface if the vehicle interior heats
up significantly.
■ Water on the floor
Do not wash the vehicle floor with water.
Vehicle systems such as the audio system may be damaged if water comes
into contact with electrical components such as the audio system above or
under the floor of the vehicle. Water may also cause the body to rust.
■ When cleaning the inside of the windshield (vehicles with Toyota
Safety Sense)
Do not allow glass cleaner to contact the lens. Also, do not touch the lens.
(→P. 28 1)
■ Cleaning the inside of the rear window (vehicles with rear window
defogger)
● Do not use glass cleaner to clean the rear window, as this may cause
damage to the rear window defogger heater wires. Use a cloth dampened
with lukewarm water to gently wipe the window clean. Wipe the window in
strokes running parallel to the heater wires.
● Be careful not to scratch or damage the heater wires.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 491 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
492
7-2. Maintenance
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Maintenance requirements
Scheduled maintenance should be performed at specified intervals
according to the maintenance schedule.
For full details of your maintenance schedule, refer to the “Toyota Service
Booklet” or “Toyota Warranty Booklet”.
What about do-it-yourself maintenance?
Many maintenance items are easy to do yourself if you have a little
mechanical ability and a few basic automotive tools.
Note, however, that some maintenance tasks require special tools and
skills. These are best performed by qualified technicians. Even if you’re an
experienced do-it-yourself mechanic, we recommend that repairs and
maintenance be conducted by any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or
another duly qualified and equipped professional. Any authorized Toyota
dealer or repairer will keep a record of maintenance, which could be useful
should you ever require Warranty Service. Should you choose to select a
qualified and equipped professional other than an authorized Toyota
repairer to service or maintain your vehicle, we recommend that you
request that a record of maintenance be kept.
To ensure safe and economical driving, day-to-day care and reg-
ular maintenance are essential. Toyota recommends the follow-
ing maintenance:
Scheduled maintenance
Do-it-yourself maintenance
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 492 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
493
7-2. Maintenance
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
7
Maintenance and care
■ Where to go for maintenance service?
In order to maintain your vehicle in the best possible condition, Toyota recom-
mends that maintenance service operations as well as other inspections and
repairs be carried out by authorized Toyota dealers or repairers or other duly
qualified and equipped professionals. For repairs and services covered by
your warranty, please visit an authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, who will
use genuine Toyota parts in repairing any difficulties you may encounter.
There can also be advantages in utilizing authorized Toyota dealers or repair-
ers for non-warranty repairs and services, as members of the Toyota network
will be able to expertly assist you with any difficulties you may encounter.
Your Toyo ta de aler o r re paire r, or another duly qualified and equipped profes-
sional will perform all of the scheduled maintenance on your vehicle reliably
and economically due to their experience with Toyota vehicles.
■ Does your vehicle need repairs?
Be on the alert for changes in performance and sounds, and visual tip-offs
that indicate service is needed. Some important clues are:
● Engine missing, stumbling or pinging
● Appreciable loss of power
● Strange engine noises
● A fluid leak under the vehicle (However, water dripping from the air condi-
tioning system after use is normal.)
● Change in exhaust sound (This may indicate a dangerous carbon monoxide
leak. Drive with the windows open and have the exhaust system checked
immediately.)
● Flat-looking tires, excessive tire squeal when cornering, uneven tire wear
● Vehicle pulls to one side when driven straight on a level road
● Strange noises related to suspension movement
● Loss of brake effectiveness, spongy feeling brake pedal or clutch pedal,
pedal almost touches the floor, vehicle pulls to one side when braking
● Engine coolant temperature continually higher than normal
If you notice any of these clues, take your vehicle to any authorized Toyota
dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional as
soon as possible. Your vehicle may need adjustment or repair.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 493 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
494
7-2. Maintenance
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
WARNING
■ If your vehicle is not properly maintained
Improper maintenance could result in serious damage to the vehicle and
possible serious injury or death.
■ Handling of the battery
Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead com-
pounds which are known to cause brain damage. Wash your hands after
handling. (→P. 5 0 7)
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 494 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
495
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
7
Maintenance and care
Do-it-yourself service precautions
If you perform maintenance by yourself, be sure to follow the
correct procedure as given in these sections.
Items Parts and tools
Battery condition
(→P. 5 0 7 )
•Warm water •Baking soda •Grease
•Conventional wrench (for terminal clamp bolts)
•Distilled water
Engine coolant
level (→P. 5 05 )
•“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or a similar high
quality ethylene glycol-based non-silicate, non-
amine, non-nitrite and non-borate coolant with long-
life hybrid organic acid technology
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is pre-mixed with
50% coolant and 50% deionized water.
•Funnel (used only for adding coolant)
Engine oil level
(→P. 5 0 2 )
•“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent
•Rag or paper towel
•Funnel (used only for adding engine oil)
Fuses (→P. 53 5) •Fuse with same amperage rating as original
Light bulbs
(→P. 5 4 0 )
•Bulb with same number and wattage rating as origi-
nal
•Phillips-head screwdriver
•Flathead screwdriver •Wrench
Radiator,
condenser and
intercooler
(if equipped)
(→P. 5 0 6 )
Tire inflation
pressure
(→P. 5 2 6 )
•Tire pressure gauge • Compressed air source
Washer fluid
(→P. 5 11 )
•Water or washer fluid containing antifreeze (for win-
ter use)
•Funnel (used only for adding water or washer fluid)
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 495 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
496
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
WARNING
The engine compartment contains many mechanisms and fluids that may
move suddenly, become hot, or become electrically energized. To avoid death
or serious injury, observe the following precautions.
■ When working on the engine compartment
● Keep hands, clothing and tools away from the moving fan and engine
drive belt.
● Be careful not to touch the engine, radiator, exhaust manifold, etc. right
after driving as they may be hot. Oil and other fluids may also be hot.
● Do not leave anything that may burn easily, such as paper and rags, in the
engine compartment.
● Do not smoke, cause sparks or expose an open flame to fuel or the bat-
tery. Fuel and battery fumes are flammable.
● Be extremely cautious when working on the battery. It contains poisonous
and corrosive sulfuric acid.
● Ta k e c are b ec au s e br ak e fl uid c an har m y ou r hand s or eye s an d d am ag e
painted surfaces. If fluid gets on your hands or in your eyes, flush the
affected area with clean water immediately.
If you still experience discomfort, consult a doctor.
■ Safety glasses
Wear safety glasses to prevent flying or falling material, fluid spray, etc.
from getting in your eyes.
NOTICE
■ If you remove the air cleaner filter
Driving with the air cleaner filter removed may cause excessive engine wear
due to dirt in the air.
■ If the fluid level is low or high
It is normal for the brake fluid level to go down slightly as the brake pads
wear or when the fluid level in the accumulator is high.
If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, it may indicate a serious problem.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 496 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
497
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
7
Maintenance and care
Hood
Pull the hood lock release lever.
The hood will pop up slightly.
Pull up the auxiliary catch lever
and lift the hood.
Hold the hood open by inserting
the supporting rod into either of
the slots.
Lower
Normal
Release the lock from the inside of the vehicle to open the hood.
1
2
3
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 497 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
498
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
WARNING
■ Pre-driving check
Check that the hood is fully closed and locked.
If the hood is not locked properly, it may open while the vehicle is in motion
and cause an accident, which may result in death or serious injury.
■ After installing the support rod into the slot
Make sure the rod supports the hood securely from falling down on to your
head or body.
NOTICE
■ When closing the hood
Be sure to return the support rod to its clip before closing the hood. Closing
the hood with the support rod up could cause the hood to bend.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 498 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
499
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
7
Maintenance and care
Engine compartment
2TR-FE engine
Engine coolant reservoir
(→P. 5 0 5 )
Engine oil level dipstick
(→P. 5 0 2 )
Engine oil filler cap (→P. 5 0 3 )
Fuse box (→P. 5 3 5 )
Battery (→P. 5 0 7 )
Washer fluid tank (→P. 5 11 )
Condenser (→P. 5 0 6 )
Radiator (→P. 5 0 6 )
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 499 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
500
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
1GD-FTV and 2GD-FTV engines
Battery (if equipped)
(→P. 5 0 7 )
Engine coolant reservoir
(→P. 5 0 5 )
Engine oil filler cap (→P. 5 0 3 )
Engine oil level dipstick
(→P. 5 0 2 )
AdBlue™ tank cap
(if equipped) (→P. 5 1 3)
Fuel filter (→P. 5 1 2 , 61 6 )
Fuse box (→P. 5 3 5 )
Battery (→P. 5 0 7 )
Washer fluid tank (→P. 5 11 )
Intercooler (→P. 50 6 )
Radiator (→P. 5 0 6 )
Condenser (if equipped)
(→P. 5 0 6 )
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 500 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
501
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
7
Maintenance and care
2KD-FTV engine
Battery (if equipped)
(→P. 5 0 7 )
Engine coolant reservoir
(→P. 5 0 5 )
Engine oil filler cap (→P. 5 0 3 )
Engine oil level dipstick
(→P. 5 0 2 )
Fuel filter (→P. 5 1 2 , 61 6 )
Fuse box (→P. 5 3 5 )
Battery (→P. 5 0 7 )
Washer fluid tank (→P. 5 11 )
Condenser (→P. 5 0 6 )
Radiator (→P. 5 0 6 )
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 501 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
502
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
With the engine at operating temperature and turned off, check the oil
level on the dipstick.
■ Checking the engine oil
Park the vehicle on level ground. After warming up the engine
and turning it off, wait more than 5 minutes for the oil to drain
back into the bottom of the engine.
Remove the sand and dust from around the dipstick.
Holding a rag under the end,
pull the dipstick out.
Wipe the dipstick clean.
Make sure that the inlet of the oil level gauge guide and O-ring of the
dipstick are free from sand and dust.
If the O-ring is damaged, replace it with a new one.
Reinsert the dipstick fully.
Holding a rag under the end,
pull the dipstick out and
check the oil level.
Low
Normal
Excessive
The shape of the dipstick may
differ depending on the type
of vehicle or engine.
Wipe the dipstick and reinsert it fully.
Engine oil
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
7
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 502 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
503
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
7
Maintenance and care
■ Adding engine oil
If the oil level is below or near
the low level mark, add engine
oil of the same type as that
already in the engine.
Make sure to check the oil type and prepare the items needed
before adding oil.
Remove the sand and dust from around the oil filler cap.
Remove the oil filler cap by turning it counterclockwise.
Add engine oil slowly, checking the dipstick.
Install the oil filler cap by turning it clockwise.
■ Engine oil consumption
A certain amount of engine oil will be consumed while driving. In the following
situations, oil consumption may increase, and engine oil may need to be
refilled in between oil maintenance intervals.
● When the engine is new, for example directly after purchasing the vehicle or
after replacing the engine
● If low quality oil or oil of an inappropriate viscosity is used
● When driving at high engine speeds or with a heavy load, when towing
(models for model code destination W
*), or when driving while accelerating
or decelerating frequently
● When leaving the engine idling for a long time, or when driving frequently
through heavy traffic
*:See “Checking your vehicle’s model” if you are not sure of which model
your vehicle is. (→P. 11 )
Engine oil selection →P. 6 28
Oil quantity
(Low → Full)
2TR-FE, 1GD-FTV and
2GD-FTV engines
1.5 L (1.6 qt., 1.3 Imp.qt.)
2KD-FTV engine 1.6 L (1.7 qt., 1.4 Imp.qt.)
Items Clean funnel
1
2
3
4
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 503 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
504
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■ After changing the engine oil (models for model code destination W
*)
The engine oil maintenance data should be reset. Perform the following pro-
cedures:
Switch the display to the trip meter A (→P. 1 30 ) w he n t he en gi ne sw it ch is
in the “ON” position (vehicles without smart entry & start system) or IGNI-
TION ON mode (vehicles with smart entry & start system).
Turn the engine switch to the “LOCK” position (vehicles without smart entry
& start system) or off (vehicles with smart entry & start system).
While pressing the odometer/trip meter display change button (→P. 1 3 0 ) ,
turn the engine switch to the “ON” position (vehicles without smart entry &
start system) or IGNITION ON mode (vehicles with smart entry & start sys-
tem). (Do not start the engine because reset mode will be canceled.) Con-
tinue to press and hold the button for more than one second after the trip
meter displays “000000”.
*:See “Checking your vehicle’s model” if you are not sure of which model
your vehicle is. (→P. 11 )
WARNING
■ Used engine oil
● Used engine oil contains potentially harmful contaminants which may
cause skin disorders such as inflammation and skin cancer, so care
should be taken to avoid prolonged and repeated contact. To remove used
engine oil from your skin, wash thoroughly with soap and water.
● Dispose of used oil and filters only in a safe and acceptable manner. Do
not dispose of used oil and filters in household trash, in sewers or onto the
ground. Call any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly
qualified and equipped professional, service station or auto parts store for
information concerning recycling or disposal.
● Do not leave used engine oil within the reach of children.
NOTICE
■ To prevent serious engine damage
Check the oil level on a regular basis.
■ When replacing the engine oil
● Be careful not to spill engine oil on the vehicle components.
● Avoid overfilling, or the engine could be damaged.
● Check the oil level on the dipstick every time you refill the vehicle.
● Be sure the engine oil filler cap is properly tightened.
1
2
3
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 504 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
505
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
7
Maintenance and care
The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the “F” and “L” lines on
the reservoir when the engine is cold.
If the level is on or below the “L” line, add coolant up to the “F” line.
(→P. 6 13 )
■ Coolant selection
Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or a similar high quality ethylene
glycol based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant with
long-life hybrid organic acid technology.
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant and 50% deion-
ized water. (Minimum temperature: -35°C [-31°F])
For more details about engine coolant, contact any authorized Toyota dealer
or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional.
■ If the coolant level drops within a short time of replenishing
Visually check the radiator, hoses, engine coolant reservoir cap, drain cock
and water pump. If you cannot find a leak, have any authorized Toyota dealer
or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional test the cap
and check for leaks in the cooling system.
Engine coolant
Gasoline engine Diesel engine
Reservoir cap
“F” line
“L” line
1
2
3
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 505 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
506
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Check the radiator, condenser and intercooler and clear away any for-
eign objects. If any of the above parts is extremely dirty or you are not
sure of their condition, have your vehicle inspected by any authorized
Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped pro-
fessional.
WARNING
■ When the engine is hot
Do not remove the radiator cap or the engine coolant reservoir cap.
The cooling system may be under pressure and may spray hot coolant if the
cap is removed, causing serious injuries, such as burns.
NOTICE
■ When adding coolant
Coolant is neither plain water nor straight antifreeze. The correct mixture of
water and antifreeze must be used to provide proper lubrication, corrosion
protection and cooling. Be sure to read the antifreeze or coolant label.
■ If you spill coolant
Be sure to wash it off with water to prevent it from damaging parts or paint.
■ Notice on coolant quality
Do not use improper coolant. If improper coolant is used, the engine cooling
system may be damaged.
Radiator, condenser and intercooler (if equipped)
WARNING
■ When the engine is hot
Do not touch the radiator, condenser or intercooler as they may be hot and
cause serious injuries, such as burns.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 506 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
507
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
7
Maintenance and care
Check the battery as follows.
■ Caution symbols
The meanings of each caution symbol on the top of the battery are
as follows:
■ Battery exterior
Make sure that the battery terminals are not corroded and that
there are no loose connections, cracks, or loose clamps.
Ter m i na ls
Hold-down clamp
Battery
No smoking, no naked
flames, no sparks
Battery acid
Shield eyes
Note operating
instructions
Keep away from
children
Explosive gas
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 507 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
508
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■
Checking battery fluid (vehicles with maintenance type bat-
tery)
If there are lines on the side of the battery:
Check that the level is between the upper and lower lines.
Upper line
Lower line
If the fluid level is at or below the
lower line, add distilled water.
If there are not lines on the side of the battery:
Check the fluid level as follows.
Remove the vent plug.
Check the fluid level by look-
ing directly at the cell.
If the fluid level is low, add dis-
tilled water.
Put the vent plug back on and close it securely.
■ Adding distilled water (vehicles with maintenance type bat-
tery)
Remove the vent plug.
Add distilled water.
Put the vent plug back on and close it securely.
1
2
1
Low O.K.
2
3
1
2
3
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 508 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
509
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
7
Maintenance and care
■ Before recharging
When recharging, the battery produces hydrogen gas which is flammable and
explosive. Therefore, observe the following before recharging:
● If recharging with the battery installed on the vehicle, be sure to disconnect
the ground cable.
● Make sure the power switch on the charger is off when connecting and dis-
connecting the charger cables to the battery.
■ After recharging/reconnecting the battery (vehicles with smart entry &
start system)
The engine may not start. Follow the procedure below to initialize the system.
Shift the shift lever to P (automatic transmission) or depress the brake
pedal with the shift lever in N (manual transmission).
Open and close any of the doors.
Restart the engine.
● Unlocking the doors using the smart entry & start system may not be possi-
ble immediately after reconnecting the battery. If this happens, use the wire-
less remote control or the mechanical key to lock/unlock the doors.
● Start the engine with the engine switch in ACCESSORY mode. The engine
may not start with the engine switch turned off. However, the engine will
operate normally from the second attempt.
● The engine switch mode is recorded by the vehicle. If the battery is recon-
nected, the vehicle will return the engine switch mode to the status it was in
before the battery was disconnected. Make sure to turn off the engine
before disconnect the battery. Take extra care when connecting the battery
if the engine switch mode prior to discharge is unknown.
If the system will not start even after multiple attempts, contact any authorized
Toyo ta dea ler o r re pair e r, o r ano th er duly qualified and equipped professional.
■ If a symbol of a battery is shown on the multi-information display (if
equipped)
There is a malfunction in the vehicle’s charging system.
Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact any authorized
Toyo ta dea ler o r re pair e r, o r ano th er duly qualified and equipped professional.
Continuing to drive the vehicle may be dangerous.
1
2
3
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 509 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
510
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
WARNING
■ Chemicals in the battery
Batteries contain poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid and may produce
hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. To reduce the risk of death
or serious injury, take the following precautions while working on or near the
battery:
● Do not cause sparks by touching the battery terminals with tools.
● Do not smoke or light a match near the battery.
● Avoid contact with eyes, skin and clothes.
● Never inhale or swallow electrolyte.
● Wear protective safety glasses when working near the battery.
● Keep children away from the battery.
■ Where to safely charge the battery
Always charge the battery in an open area. Do not charge the battery in a
garage or closed room where there is insufficient ventilation.
■ How to recharge the battery (vehicles with maintenance-free type bat-
tery)
Only perform a slow charge (5 A or less). The battery may explode if
charged at a quicker rate.
■ Emergency measures regarding electrolyte
● If electrolyte gets in your eyes
Flush your eyes with clean water for at least 15 minutes and get immedi-
ate medical attention. If possible, continue to apply water with a sponge or
cloth while traveling to the nearest medical facility.
● If electrolyte gets on your skin
Wash the affected area thoroughly. If you feel pain or burning, get medical
attention immediately.
● If electrolyte gets on your clothes
It can soak through clothing on to your skin. Immediately take off the cloth-
ing and follow the procedure above if necessary.
● If you accidentally swallow electrolyte
Drink a large quantity of water or milk. Get emergency medical attention
immediately.
● When there is insufficient battery fluid
Do not use if there is insufficient fluid in the battery. There is a possible
danger that the battery may explode.
■ When disconnecting the battery
Do not disconnect the negative (-) terminal on the body. The disconnected
negative (-) terminal may touch the positive (+) terminal, which may cause a
short and result in death or serious injury.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 510 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
511
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
7
Maintenance and care
Add washer fluid in the following
situations:
● A washer does not work.
● The warning message appears
on the multi-information display
(if equipped).
NOTICE
■ When recharging the battery
Never recharge the battery while the engine is running. Also, be sure all
accessories are turned off.
■ When adding distilled water (vehicles with maintenance type battery)
Avoid overfilling. Water spilled during battery recharging may cause corro-
sion.
Washer fluid
WARNING
■ When adding washer fluid
Do not add washer fluid when the engine is hot or running as washer fluid
contains alcohol and may catch fire if spilled on the engine etc.
NOTICE
■ Do not use any fluid other than washer fluid
Do not use soapy water or engine antifreeze instead of washer fluid.
Doing so may cause streaking on the vehicle’s painted surfaces.
■ Diluting washer fluid
Dilute washer fluid with water as necessary.
Refer to the freezing temperatures listed on the label of the washer fluid bot-
tle.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 511 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
512
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
You may drain the fu el filter yo urself. H ow ever, as th e op eration i s di f-
ficult, we recommend having it drained by any authorized Toyota
dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped profes-
sional. Even if you decide to drain it yourself, contact any authorized
Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped pro-
fessional.
The water in the fuel filter needs to be drained if one of the following
symptoms occurs:
Vehicles without multi-information display
When the fuel system warning light flashes and a buzzer sounds.
(→P. 5 6 9 )
Vehicles with multi-information display
When “WATER ACCUMULATION IN FUEL FILTER SEE
OWNER’S MANUAL”/“Water accumulation in fuel filter See owner’s
manual” is shown on the multi-information display and a buzzer
sounds
*
1
.
Vehicles without smart entry & start system: Turn the engine switch
to the “LOCK” position.
Vehicles with smart entry & start system: Turn the engine switch off.
Place a small tray under the drain plug or drain hose to catch the
water and any fuel that comes out.
Perform the draining as shown in the illustration.
Turn the drain plug counter-
clockwise about 2 to 2 1/2
turns.
Loosening more than this will
cause water oozing from around
the drain plug.
Operate the priming pump
until fuel begins to run out.
After draining, tighten the drain plug by hand.
*
1
:Models for model code destination V and Blank*
2
*
2
:See “Checking your vehicle’s model” if you are not sure of which model
your vehicle is. (→P. 11 )
Fuel filter (diesel engine only)
1
2
3
1
2
4
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 512 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
513
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
7
Maintenance and care
AdBlue™ is used to reduce the amount of nitrogen oxides in exhaust
gas. AdBlue™ is consumed in the process of driving. Therefore,
observe the following precautions.
● 1.0 L (1.1 qt., 0.9 Imp.qt.) of AdBlue™ is consumed every 1000 km
(621 miles) to 1500 km (932 miles). Normally, after a full refill, the
vehicle can be driven for approximately 15000 km (9321 miles)
before all AdBlue™ is depleted.
However, AdBlue™ may become completely depleted sooner
depending on driving conditions.
● When the possible driving range based on the remaining amount of
AdBlue™ reaches approximately 2400 km (1492 miles), the low
AdBlue™ level warning light turns on and a warning message is
displayed.
● When AdBlue™ is depleted, the engine cannot be restarted.
● If AdBlue™ is accidentally spilled while refilling, vehicle parts, paint,
etc. may be damaged.
When AdBlue™ needs to be refilled, have it refilled at any authorized
Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped pro-
fessional.
It may be a criminal offence to use a vehicle that does not consume
any reagent if it is required for the reduction of emissions.
■ AdBlue™ warning light and warning message
When the AdBlue™ level is low,
the low AdBlue™ level warning
light turns on and a warning
message appears on the multi-
information display. (→P. 5 8 2 )
When refilling AdBlue™ by
yourself in an emergency, be
sure to follow the correct refill-
ing procedures. (→P. 5 1 5 )
AdBlue™ (if equipped)
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 513 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
514
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■ Refilling AdBlue™
● Use AdBlue™ (compliant with ISO 22241-1).
AdBlue™ is a trademark of the German Association of the Automotive
Industry (VDA).
● Before driving for a long period of time in an area where AdBlue™ cannot
be refilled, consult any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly
qualified and equipped professional.
NOTICE
■ When the AdBlue™ level is low
When AdBlue™ is depleted, the engine cannot be restarted.
Be sure to have AdBlue™ refilled at any authorized Toyota dealer or
repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional before it is
completely depleted.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 514 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
515
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
7
Maintenance and care
■ Refilling AdBlue™ by yourself in an emergency
When the engine cannot be restarted due to the depletion of
AdBlue™, adding approximately 5.0 L (5.3 qt., 4.4 Imp.qt.) or more
of AdBlue™ will allow the engine to be started again. Perform the
following procedures to refill AdBlue™. (The AdBlue™ tank has a
capacity of 13.8 L [14.6 qt., 12.1 Imp.qt.].)
Refilling with the refilling equipment
Park the vehicle on a level surface, turn the engine switch off,
and then open the hood. (→P. 49 7 )
Open the AdBlue™ tank cap.
Insert the nozzle and refill
AdBlue™.
Close the AdBlue™ tank cap.
Turn the cap until you hear a
click.
Check that the engine starts.
1
2
3
4
5
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 515 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
516
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Refilling with the bottle
Park the vehicle on a level surface, turn the engine switch off,
and then open the hood. (→P. 49 7 )
Open the AdBlue™ tank cap.
Insert a bottle of AdBlue™
and fully tighten it.
Push down on the bottle.
AdBlue™ will begin to be
refilled. Refill AdBlue™ slowly
so that it does not spill. Do not
remove the bottle until it is
empty.
Check that no AdBlue™
remains in the bottle, and
then remove it.
Repeat steps 3 to 5 until approx-
imately 5.0 L (5.3 qt., 4.4
Imp.qt.) or more of AdBlue™
have been refilled.
1
2
3
4
5
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 516 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
517
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
7
Maintenance and care
Close the AdBlue™ tank cap.
Turn the cap until you hear a
click.
Check that the engine starts.
The way of refilling may differ from those shown in the illustration.
■ When refilling AdBlue™
After refilling AdBlue™, the engine may take a few seconds longer than nor-
mal to start.
6
NOTICE
■ When refilling AdBlue™
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in damage to the vehicle parts, paint, etc.
● Do not use urea solution other than AdBlue™.
● If AdBlue™ comes into contact with any painted surfaces on the vehicle,
immediately wash the affected areas with water.
● If AdBlue™ is spilled inside the engine compartment, immediately wipe it
with a wet cloth.
■ When refilling AdBlue™ with the refilling equipment
Observe the following precautions to prevent AdBlue™ overflowing from the
AdBlue™ tank:
● Securely insert the nozzle into the AdBlue™ filler neck.
● Stop filling the tank after the nozzle automatically clicks off.
● Do not top off the AdBlue™ tank.
■ When storing AdBlue™ containers
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in damage to vehicle parts, paint, etc., and
changes in the chemical compounds of AdBlue™ may cause unpleasant
odors.
● Do not leave AdBlue™ containers inside the vehicle.
● Tightly seal AdBlue™ containers and store them in a cool, dry location
with good ventilation and no exposure to direct sunlight.
7
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 517 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
518
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Tires
Check if the treadwear indicators are showing on the tires. Also check
the tires for uneven wear, such as excessive wear on one side of the
tread.
Check the spare tire condition and pressure if not rotated.
New tread
Worn tread
Treadwear indicator
The location of treadwear indicators is shown by a “TWI” or “∆” mark, etc.,
molded into the sidewall of each tire.
Replace the tires if the treadwear indicators are showing on a tire.
Replace or rotate tires in accordance with maintenance sched-
ules and treadwear.
Checking tires
1
2
3
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 518 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
519
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
7
Maintenance and care
Rotate the tires in the order shown.
To eq ua liz e t ir e w ea r an d he l p e x t e nd ti re life, Toyota recommends that tire
rotation is carried out approximately every 10000 km (6000 miles).
Do not fail to initialize the tire pressure warning system after tire rotation.
(vehicles with tire pressure warning system)
Your ve hicle is eq uippe d with a tire pressure warning system that u ses
tire pressure warning valves and transmitters to detect low tire infla-
tion pressure before serious problems arise.
If the tire pressure drops below a predetermined level, the driver is
warned by a warning light. (→P. 5 7 2 )
◆ Installing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
When replacing tires or wheels, tire pressure warning valves and
transmitters must also be installed.
When new tire pressure warning valves and transmitters are
installed, new ID codes must be registered in the tire pressure
warning computer and the tire pressure warning system must be
initialized. Have tire pressure warning valves and transmitter ID
codes registered by any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or
another duly qualified and equipped professional. (→P. 5 2 1)
Tire rotation
Vehicles with spare tire of a dif-
ferent wheel type from the
installed tires
Vehicles with spare tire of the
same wheel type as the
installed tires
Front
Front
Tire pressure warning system (if equipped)
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 519 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
520
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
◆ Initializing the tire pressure warning system
■ The tire pressure warning system must be initialized in the fol-
lowing circumstances:
● When the tire inflation pressure is changed such as when chang-
ing traveling speed or load weight.
● When the tire inflation pressure is changed such as when the tire
size is changed.
● When rotating the tires.
When the tire pressure warning system is initialized, the current tire
inflation pressure is set as the benchmark pressure.
■ How to initialize the tire pressure warning system
Vehicles without smart entry & start system:
Park the vehicle in a safe place and turn the engine switch to the
“LOCK” position.
Vehicles with smart entry & start system:
Park the vehicle in a safe place and turn the engine switch off.
Initialization cannot be performed while the vehicle is moving.
Adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified cold tire inflation
pressure level. (→P. 6 4 2)
Make sure to adjust the tire pressure to the specified cold tire inflation
pressure level. The tire pressure warning system will operate based on
this pressure level.
Vehicles without smart entry & start system:
Turn the engine switch to the “ON” position.
Vehicles with smart entry & start system:
Turn the engine switch to IGNITION ON mode.
Press and hold the tire pres-
sure
warning reset switch
until the tire pressure warn-
ing light blinks slowly 3 times.
1
2
3
4
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 520 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
521
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
7
Maintenance and care
Vehicles without smart entry & start system: Wait for a few minutes
with the engine switch in the “ON” position and then turn the engine
switch to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position.
Vehicles with smart entry & start system: Wait for a few minutes
with the engine switch in IGNITION ON mode and then turn the
engine switch off.
◆ Registering ID codes
The tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is equipped with a
unique ID code. When replacing a tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter, it is necessary to register the ID code. Have the ID code
registered by any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another
duly qualified and equipped professional.
■ When to replace your vehicle’s tires
Tires should be replaced if:
● The treadwear indicators are showing on a tire.
● You ha ve tire da mage su ch as cuts, spli ts, cra cks deep enough to expo se
the fabric, and bulges indicating internal damage
● A tire goes flat repeatedly or cannot be properly repaired due to the size or
location of a cut or other damage
If you are not sure, consult with any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or
another duly qualified and equipped professional.
■ Replacing tires and wheels (vehicles with tire pressure warning system)
If the ID code of the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is not regis-
tered, the tire pressure warning system will not work properly. After driving for
about 10 minutes, the tire pressure warning light blinks for 1 minute and stays
on to indicate a system malfunction.
■ Tire life
Any tire over 6 years old must be checked by a qualified technician even if it
has seldom or never been used or damage is not obvious.
■ Routine tire inflation pressure checks (vehicles with tire pressure warn-
ing system)
The tire pressure warning system does not replace routine tire inflation pres-
sure checks. Make sure to check tire inflation pressure as part of your routine
of daily vehicle checks.
5
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 521 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
522
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■ Initializing the tire pressure warning system (vehicles with tire pressure
warning system)
Initialize the system with the tire inflation pressure adjusted to the specified
level.
■ If the tread on snow tires wears down below 4 mm (0.16 in.)
The effectiveness of the tires as snow tires is lost.
■ If you press the tire pressure warning reset switch accidentally (vehicles
with tire pressure warning system)
If initialization is performed, adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified
level and initialize the tire pressure warning system again.
■ Situations in which the tire pressure warning system may not operate
properly (vehicles with tire pressure warning system)
●
In the following cases, the tire pressure warning system may not operate
properly.
•If non-genuine Toyota wheels are used.
•A tire has been replaced with a tire that is not an OE (Original Equipment)
tire.
•A tire has been replaced with a tire that is not of the specified size.
•Tire chains etc. are equipped.
•If a window tint that affects the radio wave signals is installed.
•If there is a lot of snow or ice on the vehicle, particularly around the
wheels or wheel housings.
•If the tire inflation pressure is extremely higher than the specified level.
•If tires not equipped with tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
are used.
•If the ID code on the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters is not
registered in the tire pressure warning computer.
•If the spare tire is in a location subject to poor radio wave signal recep-
tion.
•If a large metallic object which can interfere with signal reception is put
near the spare tire.
● Performance may be affected in the following situations.
•Near a TV tower, electric power plant, gas station, radio station, large dis-
play, airport or other facility that generates strong radio waves or electri-
cal noise
•When carrying a portable radio, cellular phone, cordless phone or other
wireless communication device
● When the vehicle is parked, the time taken for the warning to start or go off
could be extended.
●
When tire inflation pressure declines rapidly for example when a tire
has
burst, the warning may not function.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 522 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
523
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
7
Maintenance and care
■ The initialization operation (vehicles with tire pressure warning system)
● Make sure to carry out initialization after adjusting the tire inflation pressure.
Also, make sure the tires are cold before carrying out initialization or tire
inflation pressure adjustment.
● If you have accidentally turned the engine switch to the “LOCK” position
(vehicles without smart entry & start system) or off (vehicles with smart entry
& start system) during initialization, it is not necessary to press the reset
switch again as initialization will restart automatically when the engine
switch has been turned to the “ON” position (vehicles without smart entry &
start system) or IGNITION ON mode (vehicles with smart entry & start sys-
tem) for the next time.
● If you accidentally press the reset switch when initialization is not necessary,
adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified level when the tires are
cold, and conduct initialization again.
■ When initialization of the tire pressure warning system has failed (vehi-
cles with tire pressure warning system)
Initialization can be completed in a few minutes. However, in the following
cases, the settings have not been recorded and the system will not operate
properly. If repeated attempts to record tire inflation pressure settings are
unsuccessful, have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Toyota dealer or
repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional.
● When operating the tire pressure warning reset switch, the tire pressure
warning light does not blink 3 times.
● After driving for a certain period of time since the initialization has been
completed, the warning light stays on after blinking for 1 minute.
■ Warning performance of the tire pressure warning system (vehicles with
tire pressure warning system)
The warning of the tire pressure warning system will change in accordance
with the conditions under which it was initialized. For this reason, the system
may give a warning even if the tire pressure does not reach a low enough
level, or if the pressure is higher than the pressure that was adjusted to when
the system was initialized.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 523 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
524
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■ Certification for tire pressure warning system
WARNING
■ When inspecting or replacing tires
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents.
Failure to do so may cause damage to parts of the drive train as well as
dangerous handling characteristics, which may lead to an accident resulting
in death or serious injury.
● Do not mix tires of different makes, models or tread patterns.
Also, do not mix tires of remarkably different treadwear.
● Do not use tire sizes other than those recommended by Toyota.
● Do not mix differently constructed tires (radial, bias-belted or bias-ply
tires).
● Do not mix summer, all season and snow tires.
● Do not use tires that have been used on another vehicle.
Do not use tires if you do not know how they were used previously.
■ When initializing the tire pressure warning system (vehicles with tire
pressure warning system)
Do not operate the tire pressure warning reset switch without first adjusting
the tire inflation pressure to the specified level. Otherwise, the tire pressure
warning light may not come on even if the tire inflation pressure is low, or it
may come on when the tire inflation pressure is actually normal.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 524 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
525
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
7
Maintenance and care
NOTICE
■ Repairing or replacing tires, wheels, tire pressure warning valves,
transmitters and tire valve caps (vehicles with tire pressure warning
system)
● When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning
valves and transmitters, contact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer,
or another duly qualified and equipped professional as the tire pressure
warning valves and transmitters may be damaged if not handled correctly.
● Make sure to install the tire valve caps. If the tire valve caps are not
installed, water could enter the tire pressure warning valves and the tire
pressure warning valves could be bound.
● When replacing tire valve caps, do not use tire valve caps other than those
specified. The cap may become stuck.
■ To avoid damage to the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
(vehicles with tire pressure warning system)
When a tire is repaired with liquid sealants, the tire pressure warning valve
and transmitter may not operate properly. If a liquid sealant is used, contact
any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and
equipped professional or other qualified service shop as soon as possible.
After use of liquid sealant, make sure to replace the tire pressure warning
valve and transmitter when repairing or replacing the tire. (→P. 5 1 9 )
■ Driving on rough roads
Ta k e pa r t ic ul a r c a r e w h en d r iv i n g on r o a d s w it h l oo s e s u rf a c e s o r p o t ho l e s .
These conditions may cause losses in tire inflation pressure, reducing the
cushioning ability of the tires. In addition, driving on rough roads may cause
damage to the tires themselves, as well as the vehicle’s wheels and body.
■ If tire inflation pressure of each tire becomes low while driving
Do not continue driving, or your tires and/or wheels may be ruined.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 525 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
526
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Tire inflation pressure
■ Effects of incorrect tire inflation pressure
Driving with incorrect tire inflation pressure may result in the following:
● Reduced fuel economy
● Reduced driving comfort and poor handling
● Reduced tire life due to wear
● Reduced safety
● Damage to the drive train
If a tire needs frequent inflating, have it checked by any authorized Toyota
dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional.
■ Instructions for checking tire inflation pressure
When checking tire inflation pressure, observe the following:
● Check only when the tires are cold.
If your vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours or has not been driven
for more than 1.5 km or 1 mile, you will get an accurate cold tire inflation
pressure reading.
● Always use a tire pressure gauge.
It is difficult to judge if a tire is properly inflated based only on its appear-
ance.
● It is normal for the tire inflation pressure to be higher after driving as heat is
generated in the tire. Do not reduce tire inflation pressure after driving.
● Passengers and luggage weight should be placed so that the vehicle is bal-
anced.
Make sure to maintain proper tire inflation pressure. Tire infla-
tion pressure should be checked at least once per month. How-
ever, Toyota recommends that tire inflation pressure be checked
once every two weeks. (→P. 6 4 2 )
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 526 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
527
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
7
Maintenance and care
WARNING
■ Proper inflation is critical to save tire performance
Keep your tires properly inflated.
If the tires are not properly inflated, the following conditions may occur
which could lead to an accident resulting in death or serious injury:
● Excessive wear
● Uneven wear
● Poor handling
● Possibility of blowouts resulting from overheated tires
● Air leaking from between tire and wheel
● Wheel deformation and/or tire damage
● Greater possibility of tire damage while driving (due to road hazards,
expansion joints, sharp edges in the road, etc.)
NOTICE
■ When inspecting and adjusting tire inflation pressure
Be sure to put the tire valve caps back on.
If a valve cap is not installed, dirt or moisture may get into the valve and
cause an air leak, resulting in decreased tire inflation pressure.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 527 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
528
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Wheels
When replacing wheels, care should be taken to ensure that they are
equivalent to those removed in load capacity, diameter, rim width and
inset
*.
Replacement wheels are available at any authorized Toyota dealer or
repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional.
*:Conventionally referred to as “offset”.
Toy o ta do e s not reco m m e n d u sing t h e f ollo wing :
● Wheels of different sizes or types
● Used wheels
● Bent wheels that have been straightened
● Use only Toyota wheel nuts and wrenches designed for use with
your aluminum wheels.
● When rotating, repairing or changing your tires, check that the
wheel nuts are still tight after driving 1600 km (1000 miles).
● Be careful not to damage the aluminum wheels when using tire
chains.
● Use only Toyota genuine balance weights or equivalent and a plas-
tic or rubber hammer when balancing your wheels.
■ When replacing wheels (vehicles with tire pressure warning system)
The wheels of your vehicle are equipped with tire pressure warning valves
and transmitters that allow the tire pressure warning system to provide
advance warning in the event of a loss in tire inflation pressure. Whenever
wheels are replaced, tire pressure warning valves and transmitters must be
installed. (→P. 5 19 )
If a wheel is bent, cracked or heavily corroded, it should be
replaced. Otherwise, the tire may separate from the wheel or
cause a loss of handling control.
Wheel selection
Aluminum wheel precautions (if equipped)
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 528 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
529
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
7
Maintenance and care
WARNING
■ When replacing wheels
● Do not use wheels that are a different size from those recommended in the
Owner’s Manual, as this may result in a loss of handling control.
● Never use an inner tube in a leaking wheel which is designed for a tube-
less tire. Doing so may result in an accident, causing death or serious
injury.
■ When installing the wheel nuts
● Never use oil or grease on the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.
Oil and grease may cause the wheel nuts to be excessively tightened,
leading to bolt or disc wheel damage. In addition, the oil or grease can
cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel may fall off, causing an acci-
dent and resulting in death or serious injury. Remove any oil or grease
from the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.
■ Use of defective wheels prohibited
Do not use cracked or deformed wheels.
Doing so could cause the tire to leak air during driving, possibly causing an
accident.
NOTICE
■ Replacing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters (vehicles with
tire pressure warning system)
● Because tire repair or replacement may affect the tire pressure warning
valves and transmitters, make sure to have tires serviced by any autho-
rized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped pro-
fessional or other qualified service shop. In addition, make sure to
purchase your tire pressure warning valves and transmitters at any autho-
rized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped pro-
fessional.
● Ensure that only genuine Toyota wheels are used on your vehicle. Tire
pressure warning valves and transmitters may not work properly with non-
genuine wheels.
● Be sure to install the wheel nuts with the
tapered ends facing inward. Installing
the nuts with the tapered ends facing
outward can cause the wheel to break
and eventually cause the wheel to come
off while driving, which could lead to an
accident resulting in death or serious
injury.
Tape re d
portion
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 529 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
530
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Air conditioning filter
Vehicles without smart entry & start system: Turn the engine switch
to the “LOCK” position.
Vehicles with smart entry & start system: Turn the engine switch off.
Open the glove box. Turn the
claws as shown in the illustra-
tion.
Pull out the claws.
The air conditioning filter must be changed regularly to maintain
air conditioning efficiency.
Removal method
1
2
3
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 530 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
531
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
7
Maintenance and care
Pull out the damper (if
equipped) as shown in the illus-
tration, and then remove the
glove box.
Remove the filter cover.
Remove the air conditioning fil-
ter and replace it with a new
one.
The “↑UP” marks shown on the fil-
ter should be pointing up.
■ Changing interval
Inspect and replace the air conditioning filter according to the maintenance
schedule. In dusty areas or areas with heavy traffic flow, early replacement
may be required. (For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the
“Toyota Service Booklet” or “Toyota Warranty Booklet”.)
■ If air flow from the vents decreases dramatically
The filter may be clogged. Check the filter and replace if necessary.
4
5
6
NOTICE
■ When using the air conditioning system
Make sure that a filter is always installed.
Using the air conditioning system without a filter may cause damage to the
system.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 531 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
532
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Wireless remote control/electronic key
battery
∗
● Flathead screwdriver
● Small flathead screwdriver
● Lithium battery
Vehicles without smart entry & start system: CR1620
Vehicles with smart entry & start system: CR2032
Vehicles without smart entry & start system
Remove the cover.
To pr ev en t dam ag e to the key,
cover the tip of the screwdriver with
a rag.
Remove the battery cover.
∗: If equipped
Replace the battery with a new one if it is depleted.
You will need the following items:
Replacing the battery
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 532 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
533
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
7
Maintenance and care
Remove the depleted battery.
Insert a new battery with the “+”
terminal facing up.
Vehicles with smart entry & start system
Take ou t t h e m e c han ical k e y.
Remove the cover.
To pr ev en t dam ag e to the key,
cover the tip of the screwdriver with
a rag.
Remove the depleted battery.
Insert a new battery with the “+”
terminal facing up.
3
1
2
3
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 533 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
534
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■ Use a lithium battery
Vehicles without smart entry & start system: CR1620
Vehicles with smart entry & start system: CR2032
● Batteries can be purchased at any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or
another duly qualified and equipped professional, local electrical appliance
shops or camera stores.
● Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manu-
facturer.
● Dispose of used batteries according to local laws.
■ If the key battery is depleted
The following symptoms may occur:
● The smart entry & start system (if equipped) and wireless remote control will
not function properly.
● The operational range will be reduced.
WARNING
■ Removed battery and other parts
These parts are small and if swallowed by a child, they can cause choking.
Keep away from children. Failure to do so could result in death or serious
injury.
■ Certification for the key battery
CAUTION
RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT
TYPE. DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE
INSTRUCTIONS
NOTICE
■ For normal operation after replacing the battery
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents:
● Always work with dry hands.
Moisture may cause the battery to rust.
● Do not touch or move any other component inside the remote control.
● Do not bend either of the battery terminals.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 534 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
535
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
7
Maintenance and care
Checking and replacing fuses
Vehicles without smart entry & start system:
Turn the engine switch to the “LOCK” position.
Vehicles with smart entry & start system:
Turn the engine switch off.
Open the fuse box cover.
In the engine compartment
Push the tab in and pull the lock
release, and lift the lid off.
Under the instrument panel (left-hand drive vehicles)
Remove the lid.
If any of the electrical components do not operate, a fuse may
have blown. If this happens, check and replace the fuses as nec-
essary.
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 535 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
536
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Under the instrument panel (right-hand drive vehicles)
Remove the cover (if
equipped).
Remove the lid.
Behind the instrument panel (left-hand drive vehicles)
Remove the glove box
(→P. 5 3 0 ), a n d r em ov e th e l id .
Behind the instrument panel (right-hand drive vehicles)
Remove the glove box
(→P. 5 3 0 ), a n d r em ov e th e l id .
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 536 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
537
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
7
Maintenance and care
Behind the cowl side panel
Remove the driver’s door scuff
plate (left-hand drive vehicles)
or the front passenger’s door
scuff plate (right-hand drive
vehicles).
Remove the nut and the cowl
side panel.
Remove the fuse.
Only type A fuse can be
removed using the pullout tool.
3
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 537 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
538
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Check if the fuse is blown.
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Type A, B, C and D:
Replace the blown fuse with a new fuse of an appropriate amperage rat-
ing. The amperage rating can be found on the fuse box lid.
Type E:
Contact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified
and equipped professional.
4
1
2
Type A Type B
Type C Type D
Type E
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 538 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
539
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
7
Maintenance and care
■ After a fuse is replaced
● If the lights do not turn on even after the fuse has been replaced, a bulb may
need replacement. (→P. 54 0)
● If the replaced fuse blows again, have the vehicle inspected by any autho-
rized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped pro-
fessional.
■ If there is an overload in a circuit
The fuses are designed to blow, protecting the wiring harness from damage.
WARNING
■ To prevent system breakdowns and vehicle fire
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause damage to the vehicle, and possibly a fire or
injury.
● Never use a fuse of a higher amperage rating than that indicated, or use
any other object in place of a fuse.
● Always use a genuine Toyota fuse or equivalent.
Never replace a fuse with a wire, even as a temporary fix.
● Do not modify the fuses or fuse boxes.
NOTICE
■ Before replacing fuses
Have the cause of electrical overload determined and repaired by any
authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped
professional as soon as possible.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 539 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
540
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Light bulbs
Check the wattage of the light bulb to be replaced. (→P. 6 4 4 )
■ Front
Vehicles with halogen headlights
*:If equipped
You may replace the following bulbs by yourself. The difficulty
level of replacement varies depending on the bulb. As there is a
danger that components may be damaged, we recommend that
replacement is carried out by any authorized Toyota dealer or
repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional.
Preparing for light bulb replacement
Bulb locations
Front turn signal light
Front position light/daytime run-
ning light
*
Headlight
Front fog light
*
1
2
3
4
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 540 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
541
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
7
Maintenance and care
Vehicles with LED headlights
■ Rear
*:If equipped
Headlight (high beam)
Front turn signal light
Front fog light
1
2
3
Rear fog light*
(left-hand drive vehicles)
or back-up light
License plate light
Stop/tail light
Rear fog light
*
(right-hand drive vehicles)
or back-up light
Rear turn signal light
1
2
3
4
5
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 541 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
542
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■
Headlight high/low beams (vehicles with halogen headlights)
Unplug the connector and
remove the rubber cover.
Release the bulb retaining
spring.
Remove the bulb.
To in s ta ll a n ew bu lb , a li g n th e
tabs of the bulb with the cutouts
of the mounting hole.
When installing, reverse the steps listed.
Replacing light bulbs
1
2
3
4
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 542 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
543
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
7
Maintenance and care
■ Headlight high beams (vehicles with LED headlights)
Unplug the connector while
depressing the lock release.
Turn the bulb base counter-
clockwise.
Replace the light bulb, and
install the bulb base.
Align the 3 tabs on the light bulb
with the mounting, and insert.
Turn and secure the bulb
base.
1
2
3
4
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 543 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
544
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Install the connector
Shake the bulb base gently to
check that it is not loose, turn
the headlight high beams on
once and visually confirm that
no light is leaking through the
mounting.
■
Front position lights/daytime running lights (if equipped)
(vehicles with halogen headlights)
Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.
Remove the light bulb.
When installing, reverse the steps listed.
5
1
Vehicles without daytime
running lights
Vehicles with daytime running
lights
2
Vehicles without daytime
running lights
Vehicles with daytime running
lights
3
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 544 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
545
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
7
Maintenance and care
■ Front turn signal lights
Vehicles with halogen headlights
Turn the bulb base counter-
clockwise.
Remove the light bulb.
When installing, reverse the steps listed.
1
2
3
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 545 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
546
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Vehicles with LED headlights
To all o w en o u g h w orki ng
space, turn the steering
wheel to the opposite side
where the bulb to be
replaced is located.
Remove the screws and
clips.
Removing the clip
Installing the clip
1
1
2
Type A Type B
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 546 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
547
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
7
Maintenance and care
Partly remove the fender
liner and turn the bulb base
counterclockwise.
Remove the light bulb.
When installing, reverse the steps listed.
Bumper
Fender
liner
2
3
4
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 547 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
548
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■
Front fog lights (if equipped)
To a llo w en oug h wo r k ing s pa c e, turn th e st e e ring w h eel t o the
opposite side where the bulb to be replaced is located.
Remove the screws and clips.
Removing the clip
Installing the clip
1
Vehicles without steel bumper Vehicles with steel bumper
1
2
Type A Type B
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 548 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
549
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
7
Maintenance and care
Partly remove the fender liner and unplug the connector while
pressing the lock release.
Turn the bulb base counter-
clockwise.
Replace the light bulb, and
install the bulb base.
Align the 3 tabs on the light bulb
with the mounting, and insert.
2
Vehicles without steel bumper Vehicles with steel bumper
Bumper
Fender
liner
3
4
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 549 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
550
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Turn and secure the bulb base.
Install the connector
Shake the bulb base gently to
check that it is not loose, turn
the front fog lights on once and
visually confirm that no light is
leaking through the mounting.
When installing the fender liner, screws and clips, reverse the
removing procedure in steps and .
5
6
7
1 2
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 550 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
551
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
7
Maintenance and care
■ Stop/tail lights, rear turn signal lights and back-up lights or
rear fog light (if equipped)
Remove the securing bolts
and pull the unit sideways to
remove.
Turn the bulb base counter-
clockwise.
Stop/tail light
Rear turn signal light
Back-up light or rear fog
light
Remove the light bulb.
Stop/tail light
Rear turn signal light
Back-up light or rear fog
light
When installing, reverse the steps listed.
1
2
1
2
3
3
1
2
3
4
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 551 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
552
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■
License plate light
Remove the unit.
Turn the bulb base counter-
clockwise.
Remove the light bulb.
When installing, reverse the steps listed.
1
2
3
4
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 552 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
553
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
7
Maintenance and care
■ Replacing the following bulbs
If any of the lights listed below has burnt out, have it replaced by
any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified
and equipped professional.
● Headlight low beams (vehicles with LED headlights)
● Front position lights/daytime running lights (vehicles with LED
headlights)
● Side turn signal lights
● High mounted stoplight (if equipped)
■ When installing the rubber cover of the headlight (vehicles with halogen
headlights)
Ensure the rubber cover is securely attached.
■ LED lights
The headlight low beams (vehicles with LED headlights), front position lights/
daytime running lights (vehicles with LED headlights), side turn signal lights
(mirror mounted type) and high mounted stoplight (if equipped) consists of a
number of LEDs. If any of the LEDs burn out, take your vehicle to any autho-
rized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped profes-
sional to have the light replaced.
■ Condensation build-up on the inside of the lens
Temp o r ar y c on de nsa ti on b uil d- up on th e in si d e of th e he a dl ig h t le n s d o es n ot
indicate a malfunction. Contact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or
another duly qualified and equipped professional for more information in the
following situations:
● Large drops of water have built up on the inside of the lens.
● Water has built up inside the headlight.
Fit the rubber cover outer circumfer-
ence in firmly.
Fit the rubber cover around the light
bulb in until the light bulb plug can be
seen.
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 553 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
554
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
WARNING
■ Replacing light bulbs
● Turn off the lights. Do not attempt to replace the bulb immediately after
turning off the lights.
The bulbs become very hot and may cause burns.
● Do not touch the glass portion of the light bulb with bare hands. When it is
unavoidable to hold the glass portion, use and hold with a clean dry cloth
to avoid getting moisture and oils on the bulb.
Also, if the bulb is scratched or dropped, it may blow out or crack.
● Fully install light bulbs and any parts used to secure them. Failure to do so
may result in heat damage, fire, or water entering the headlight unit. This
may damage the headlights or cause condensation to build up on the lens.
● Do not attempt to repair or disassemble light bulbs, connectors, electric
circuits or component parts.
Doing so may result in death or serious injury due to electric shock.
■ To prevent damage or fire
● Make sure bulbs are fully seated and locked.
● Check the wattage of the bulb before installing to prevent heat damage.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 554 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
555
8
When trouble arises
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
8-1. Essential information
Emergency flashers...........556
If your vehicle has to
be stopped in an
emergency.......................557
8-2. Steps to take in an
emergency
If your vehicle needs
to be towed ......................559
If you think something is
wrong...............................564
Fuel pump shut off
system (gasoline engine
only).................................565
Fire extinguisher ................566
If a warning light turns on
or a warning buzzer
sounds.............................567
If a warning message is
displayed .........................577
If you have a flat tire ..........584
If the engine will not
start..................................601
If the electronic key does
not operate properly
(vehicles with smart
entry & start system)........603
If the vehicle battery is
discharged .......................607
If your vehicle
overheats.........................613
If you run out of fuel
and the engine stalls
(diesel engine only) .........616
If the vehicle becomes
stuck ................................617
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 555 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
556
8-1. Essential information
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Emergency flashers
Press the switch.
All the turn signal lights will flash.
To tu r n t he m off , pre s s t he s wit ch
once again.
■ Emergency flashers
If the emergency flashers are used for a long time while the engine is not
operating, the battery may discharge.
The emergency flashers are used to warn other drivers when the
vehicle has to be stopped in the road due to a breakdown, etc.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 556 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
557
8-1. Essential information
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
8
When trouble arises
If your vehicle has to be stopped in an
emergency
Steadily step on the brake pedal with both feet and firmly depress it.
Do not pump the brake pedal repeatedly as this will increase the effort
required to slow the vehicle.
Shift the shift lever to N.
If the shift lever is shifted to N
After slowing down, stop the vehicle in a safe place by the road.
Stop the engine.
If the shift lever cannot be shifted to N
Keep depressing the brake pedal with both feet to reduce vehicle
speed as much as possible.
Vehicles without smart entry &
start system:
Stop the engine by turning the
engine switch to the “ACC”
position.
Vehicles with smart entry &
start system:
To st o p th e eng ine , pr e s s a n d
hold the engine switch for 2
consecutive seconds or more,
or press it briefly 3 times or
more in succession.
Stop the vehicle in a safe place by the road.
Only in an emergency, such as if it becomes impossible to stop
the vehicle in the normal way, stop the vehicle using the follow-
ing procedure:
1
2
3
4
3
4
Press and hold for 2 seconds or
more, or press briefly 3 times or
more
5
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 557 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
558
8-1. Essential information
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
WARNING
■ If the engine has to be turned off while driving
● Power assist for the brakes and steering wheel will be lost, making the
brake pedal harder to depress and the steering wheel heavier to turn.
Decelerate as much as possible before turning off the engine.
● Vehicles without smart entry & start system: Never attempt to remove the
key, as doing so will lock the steering wheel.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 558 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
559
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
8
When trouble arises
If your vehicle needs to be towed
The following may indicate a problem with your transmission. Contact
any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and
equipped professional or commercial towing service before towing.
● The engine is running but the vehicle does not move.
● The vehicle makes an abnormal sound.
Do not tow with a sling-type truck
to prevent body damage.
If towing is necessary, we recommend having your vehicle
towed by any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another
duly qualified and equipped professional or commercial towing
service, using a wheel-lift type truck or flatbed truck.
Use a safety chain system for all towing, and abide by all state/
provincial and local laws.
Situations when it is necessary to contact dealers before towing
Towing with a sling-type truck
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 559 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
560
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
If your vehicle is transported by a
flatbed truck, it should be tied
down at the locations shown in the
illustration.
When attaching the hooks to the
rear of the vehicle, make sure to
attach them to the inside of the
vehicle.
If you use chains or cables to tie
down your vehicle, the angles
shaded in black must be 45°.
Do not overly tighten the tie
downs or the vehicle may be dam-
aged.
Towing with a wheel-lift type truck
From the front From the rear
Use a towing dolly under the rear
wheels.
Use a towing dolly under the
front wheels.
Using a flatbed truck
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 560 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
561
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
8
When trouble arises
If a tow truck is not available in an emergency, your vehicle may be
temporarily towed using cables or chains secured to the emergency
towing hooks. This should only be attempted on hard surfaced roads
for at most 80 km (50 miles) at under 30 km/h (18 mph).
A driver must be in the vehicle to steer and operate the brakes. The
vehicle’s wheels, drive train, axles, steering and brakes must be in
good condition.
Securely attach cables or
chains to the towing hooks.
Tak e ca re no t t o d am ag e th e v eh i-
cle body.
Enter the vehicle being towed and start the engine.
If the engine does not start, turn the engine switch to the “ON” position
(vehicles without smart entry & start system) or IGNITION ON mode (vehi-
cles with smart entry & start system).
Vehicles with Stop & Start system:
Before towing the vehicle, turn the engine switch to the “LOCK” position
(vehicles without smart entry & start system) or off (vehicles with smart
entry & start system) once, and then start the engine.
4WD models: Turn the front-wheel drive control switch to H2.
(→P. 3 2 9 )
Shift the shift lever to N and release the parking brake.
When the shift lever cannot be shifted (automatic transmission):
→P. 2 5 2
Emergency towing
Emergency towing procedure
1
2
3
4
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 561 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
562
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■ While towing
If the engine is not running, the power assist for the brakes and steering will
not function, making steering and braking more difficult.
WARNING
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
■ When towing the vehicle
■ While towing
● When towing using cables or chains, avoid sudden starts, etc. which place
excessive stress on the towing hooks, cables or chains. The towing hooks,
cables or chains may become damaged, broken debris may hit people,
and cause serious damage.
● Do not turn the engine switch to the “LOCK” position (vehicles without
smart entry & start system) or off (vehicles with smart entry & start sys-
tem).
There is a possibility that the steering wheel is locked and cannot be oper-
ated.
Pre Runner (2WD models): Be sure to
transport the vehicle with all four wheels
raised off the ground. If the vehicle is
towed with the tires contacting the
ground, the drivetrain and related parts
may be damaged or an accident may
occur due to a change in direction of the
vehicle.
4WD models: Be sure to transport the
vehicle with all four wheels raised off the
ground. If the vehicle is towed with the
tires contacting the ground, the drivetrain
and related parts may be damaged, and
the vehicle may fly off the truck.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 562 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
563
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
8
When trouble arises
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the vehicle when towing using a wheel-lift type
truck
● Do not tow the vehicle from the rear when the engine switch is in the
“LOCK” position or the key is removed (vehicles without smart entry & start
system) or the engine switch is turned to off (vehicles with smart entry &
start system). The steering lock mechanism is not strong enough to hold
the front wheels straight.
● When raising the vehicle, ensure adequate ground clearance for towing at
the opposite end of the raised vehicle. Without adequate clearance, the
vehicle could be damaged while being towed.
■ To prevent damage to the vehicle when towing with a sling-type truck
Do not tow with a sling-type truck, either from the front or rear.
■ To prevent damage to the vehicle during emergency towing
Do not secure cables or chains to the suspension components.
■ When towing a vehicle equipped with the Stop & Start system (if
equipped)
When it is necessary to tow the vehicle with all four wheels contacting the
ground, perform the following procedure before towing the vehicle to protect
the system.
Turn the engine switch to the “LOCK” position (vehicles without smart entry
& start system) or off (vehicles with smart entry & start system) once, and
then start the engine. If the engine does not start, turn the engine switch to
the “ON” position (vehicles without smart entry & start system) or IGNITION
ON mode (vehicles with smart entry & start system).
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 563 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
564
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
If you think something is wrong
● Fluid leaks under the vehicle.
(Water dripping from the air conditioning after use is normal.)
● Flat-looking tires or uneven tire wear
● Engine coolant temperature gauge needle continually points higher
than normal.
● Changes in exhaust sound
● Excessive tire squeal when cornering
● Strange noises related to the suspension system
● Pinging or other noises related to the engine
● Engine missing, stumbling or running roughly
● Appreciable loss of power
● Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when braking
● Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when driving on a level road
● Loss of brake effectiveness, spongy feeling, pedal almost touches
the floor
If you notice any of the following symptoms, your vehicle proba-
bly needs adjustment or repair. Contact any authorized Toyota
dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped pro-
fessional as soon as possible.
Visible symptoms
Audible symptoms
Operational symptoms
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 564 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
565
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
8
When trouble arises
Fuel pump shut off system (gasoline engine only)
Follow the procedure below to restart the engine after the system is
activated.
Turn the engine switch to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position (vehicles
without smart entry & start system) or ACCESSORY mode or off
(vehicles with smart entry & start system).
Restart the engine.
To minimize the risk of fuel leakage when the engine stalls or
when an airbag inflates upon collision, the fuel pump shut off
system stops the supply of fuel to the engine.
NOTICE
■ Before starting the engine
Inspect the ground under the vehicle.
If you find that fuel has leaked onto the ground, the fuel system has been
damaged and is in need of repair. Do not restart the engine.
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 565 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
566
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Fire extinguisher
∗
Unhook the tightening strap and
take out the fire extinguisher.
The shape of the fire extinguisher and tightening strap, and the taking out
procedure may differ from those shown in the illustration.
■ After using the fire extinguisher
Store it securely in place. Replace it with a new one as soon as possible.
∗: If equipped
A fire extinguisher is located under the front passenger’s seat. It
is for use in emergencies, such as in the event of a fire.
For information about using, refer to the label on the fire extin-
guisher.
Taking out the fire extinguisher
WARNING
■ When the fire extinguisher is not in use
Keep the fire extinguisher securely in place. Otherwise, it may be thrown
about in the event of sudden braking or a collision.
NOTICE
■ Fire extinguisher
● Do not reuse the fire extinguisher.
Replace it with a new one as soon as possible after using it.
● Use a genuine Toyota fire extinguisher when replacing.
If a non-genuine Toyota fire extinguisher is used, it may not be possible to
secure the fire extinguisher properly and it may come loose.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 566 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
567
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
8
When trouble arises
If a warning light turns on or a warning
buzzer sounds
Calmly perform the following actions if any of the warning lights
comes on or flashes. If a light comes on or flashes, but then
goes off, this does not necessarily indicate a malfunction in the
system. However, if this continues to occur, have the vehicle
inspected by any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or
another duly qualified and equipped professional.
Warning light and warning buzzer list
Warning light Warning light/Details/Actions
Brake system warning light (warning buzzer)
Indicates:
•Low brake fluid
•Malfunction in the brake system
•Low negative pressure in the vacuum tank (diesel
engine)
→ Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and con-
tact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or
another duly qualified and equipped professional.
Continuing to drive the vehicle may be dangerous.
Charging system warning light (if equipped)
Indicates a malfunction in the vehicle’s charging system
→ Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and con-
tact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or
another duly qualified and equipped professional.
Low engine oil pressure warning light (warning buzzer)
(if equipped)
*
1
Indicates that the engine oil pressure is too low (This
warning light may come on if the vehicle is stopped on a
slope. Move to a level surface and check to see if the light
goes off.)
→ Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and con-
tact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or
another duly qualified and equipped professional.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 567 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
568
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Malfunction indicator lamp (warning buzzer)
Indicates the followings if the warning light comes on or
flashes:
•Malfunction in the emission control system. (if equipped)
•Malfunction in the electronic engine control system.
•Malfunction in the electronic automatic transmission
control system. (if equipped)
•The boost pressure in the turbocharger is abnormally
high.
*
2
(diesel engine)
•Malfunction in DPF system. (if equipped)
→ Have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Toyota
dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and
equipped professional immediately.
SRS warning light
Indicates a malfunction in:
•The SRS airbag system;
•The seat belt pretensioner system (if equipped) or
•The front passenger occupant classification system (if
equipped);
→ Have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Toyota
dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and
equipped professional immediately.
ABS warning light
Indicates a malfunction in:
•The ABS; or
•The brake assist system (vehicles with VSC system)
→ Have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Toyota
dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and
equipped professional immediately.
Slip indicator light (if equipped)
Indicates a malfunction in:
•The VSC system (if equipped);
•Trailer sway control system (if equipped);
•The TRC/A-TRC system (if equipped);
•The hill-start assist control system (if equipped); or
•The downhill assist control system (if equipped)
→ Have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Toyota
dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and
equipped professional immediately.
The light will flash when any of the above systems other
than the hill-start assist control system are operating.
Warning light Warning light/Details/Actions
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 568 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
569
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
8
When trouble arises
Four-wheel drive indicator light (warning buzzer)
*
3
(if
equipped)
Indicates that the differential oil temperature is too high
when the light flashes rapidly and a buzzer sounds.
→ Turn the front-wheel drive control switch to H2, and
wait until the warning light goes off.
Indicates a malfunction in the four-wheel drive system
when the light flashes rapidly and a buzzer does not
sound.
→ Have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Toyota
dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and
equipped professional immediately.
Low speed four-wheel drive indicator light (if equipped)
Indicates a malfunction in the four-wheel drive system
when the light flashes rapidly.
→ Have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Toyota
dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and
equipped professional immediately.
Rear differential lock indicator light (if equipped)
Indicates a malfunction in the rear differential lock system
when the light flashes rapidly.
→ Have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Toyota
dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and
equipped professional immediately.
Timing belt replacement warning light (if equipped)
Indicates that the timing belt should be replaced
→ Have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Toyota
dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and
equipped professional.
Fuel system warning light (warning buzzer)
*
4
(if
equipped)
The amount of accumulated water in the fuel filter has
reached the specified level if the light flashes.
→ P. 5 12
The fuel filter need to be replaced if the light comes on.
→ Have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Toyota
dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and
equipped professional immediately.
Warning light Warning light/Details/Actions
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 569 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
570
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Brake Override System warning light (if equipped)
Indicates that the accelerator and brake pedal are being
depressed simultaneously if the warning light comes on
(→P. 2 11 )
→ Release the accelerator or brake pedal.
Indicates a malfunction in the Brake Override System if
the warning light flashes
→ Have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Toyota
dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and
equipped professional immediately.
PCS warning light (if equipped)
When the warning light flashes (and a buzzer sounds):
Indicates a malfunction in PCS (Pre-Crash Safety system)
→ Have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Toyota
dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and
equipped professional immediately.
When the warning light flashes (and a buzzer does not
sounds):
Indicates that PCS (Pre-Crash Safety system) is tempo-
rarily unavailable, possibly due to either of the following
•An area around the radar sensor or camera sensor
being dirty or covered with condensation, ice, stickers,
etc.
→ Clear the dirt, condensation, ice, stickers, etc.
(→P. 2 82 , 2 8 3 )
•Radar sensor or camera sensor operational conditions
(such as temperature etc.) being not met
→ Driving is possible in this case. PCS (Pre-Crash
Safety system) will be enabled if the operational con-
ditions (such as temperature etc.) are met again.
When the warning light is illuminated:
Either VSC (Vehicle Stability Control) or PCS (Pre-Crash
Safety system) is disabled or both are disabled.
→ To enable PCS, enable both VSC and PCS.
(→P. 2 91 , 3 5 6 )
Warning light Warning light/Details/Actions
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 570 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
571
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
8
When trouble arises
LDA indicator (warning buzzer) (if equipped on vehicles
with multi-information display type B)
Indicates that the LDA (Lane Departure Alert) system is
not available temporarily or has detected a malfunction
when the warning light is illuminated in yellow and a warn-
ing message is displayed on the multi-information display.
→ P. 3 07
Open door warning light (warning buzzer)
*
5
(if
equipped)
Indicates that a door is not fully closed
→ Check that all the doors are closed.
Driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt reminder light
(warning buzzer)
*
6
Warns the driver and front passenger to fasten his/her
seat belt
→ Fasten the seat belt.
(On the center panel)
Rear passengers’ seat belt reminder lights (warning
buzzer)
*
8
(if equipped)
Warn the rear passengers to fasten their seat belts
→ Fasten the seat belt.
Low fuel level warning light
Indicates remaining fuel is approximately 12.0 L (3.2 gal.,
2.6 Imp.gal.) or less
→ Refuel the vehicle.
Low engine oil level warning light (if equipped)
Indicates that engine oil level is low (This warning light
may come on if the vehicle is stopped on a slope. Move
the vehicle to a level surface and check to see if the light
goes off.)
→ Check the level of engine oil and add more oil if nec-
essary.
Master warning light (warning buzzer) (if equipped)
A buzzer sounds and the warning light comes on and
flashes to indicate that the master warning system has
detected a malfunction.
→ P. 5 77
Warning light Warning light/Details/Actions
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 571 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
572
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
(Flashes)
Stop & Start cancel indicator (if equipped)
Indicates a malfunction in the Stop & Start system
(The Stop & Start cancel indicator will come on when the
system is canceled: →P. 3 4 4 )
→ Have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Toyota
dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and
equipped professional immediately.
Parking brake indicator light (warning buzzer)*
9
Warns the driver to release parking brake.
→ Release the parking brake.
Speed warning light (warning buzzer)*
10
(if equipped)
Indicates that your vehicle speed reaches or exceeds 120
km/h (75 mph).
→ Reduce vehicle speed.
Low AdBlue™ level warning light (if equipped)
Indicates that AdBlue™ level is low
→ Have AdBlue™ refilled at any authorized Toyota
dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and
equipped professional.
(if equipped)
Tire pressure warning light
When the light comes on:
Low tire inflation pressure such as
•Natural causes (→P. 5 7 4 )
• Flat tire (→P. 5 8 4 )
→ Adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified
level.
The light will turn off after a few minutes. In case the
light does not turn off even if the tire inflation pres-
sure is adjusted, have the system checked by any
authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly
qualified and equipped professional.
When the light comes on after blinking for 1 minute:
Malfunction in the tire pressure warning system
(→P. 5 7 5)
→ Have the system checked by any authorized Toyota
dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and
equipped professional.
Warning light Warning light/Details/Actions
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 572 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
573
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
8
When trouble arises
*
1
:The buzzer sounds if the vehicle reaches a speed of 5 km/h (3 mph).
*
2
:Slow down until the lamp goes off.
*
3
:The buzzer sounds when the differential oil temperature is too high and
turning the front-wheel drive control switch to H2 is required.
*
4
:The buzzer will sound at the same time the warning light flashes.
*
5
:The open door warning buzzer sounds if the vehicle reaches or exceeds a
speed of 5 km/h (3 mph).
*
6
:Models for model code destination V*
7
: The driver’s and front passenger’s
seat belt buzzer sounds to alert the driver and front passenger that his or
her seat belt is not fastened. Once the engine switch is turned to the “ON”
position (vehicles without smart entry & start system) or IGNITION ON
mode (vehicles with smart entry & start system), the buzzer sounds for 6
seconds. If the vehicle reaches a speed of 20 km/h (12 mph), the buzzer
sounds once. If the seat belt is still unfastened after 30 seconds, the
buzzer will sound intermittently for 10 seconds. Then, if the seat belt is still
unfastened, the buzzer will sound in a different tone for 20 more seconds.
Except models for model code destination V
*
7
: The driver’s and front pas-
senger’s seat belt buzzer sounds to alert the driver and front passenger
that his or her seat belt is not fastened. The buzzer sounds intermittently
for 30 seconds after the vehicle reaches a speed of 20 km/h (12 mph).
Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened, the buzzer will sound in a different
tone for 90 more seconds.
*
7
:See “Checking your vehicle’s model” if you are not sure of which model
your vehicle is. (→P. 11 )
*
8
:The rear passengers’ seat belt buzzer sounds to alert the rear passenger
that his or her seat belt is not fastened. The buzzer sounds intermittently
for 30 seconds after the vehicle reaches a speed of 20 km/h (12 mph).
Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened, the buzzer will sound in a different
tone for 90 more seconds.
*
9
:The parking brake engaged warning buzzer sounds if the vehicle reaches a
speed of approximately 5 km/h (3 mph) or more.
*
10
:The speed warning buzzer sounds if the vehicle reaches or exceeds a
speed of 120 km/h (75 mph) and will stop sounding after 6 seconds or if
you decelerate below 120 km/h (75 mph).
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 573 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
574
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Carrying out the corresponding action turns the warning light off.
■ If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on while driving
For some models, malfunction indicator lamp will come on if the fuel tank
becomes completely empty. If the fuel tank is empty, refuel the vehicle imme-
diately. The malfunction indicator lamp will go off after several trips.
If the malfunction indicator lamp does not go off, contact any authorized
Toyo ta d ea ler o r re p a ir er, o r an ot h er d uly q ua lif ied a nd eq ui p pe d pro fe ss i on a l
as soon as possible.
■ When the tire pressure warning light comes on (if equipped)
Carry out the following procedure after the tire temperature has lowered suffi-
ciently.
● Check the tire inflation pressure and adjust to the appropriate level.
● If the warning light does not go out even after several minutes, check that
the tire inflation pressure is at the specified level and carry out initialization.
The warning light may come on again if the above operations are conducted
without first allowing the tire temperature to lower sufficiently.
■ The tire pressure warning light may come on due to natural causes (if
equipped)
The tire pressure warning light may come on due to natural causes such as
natural air leaks and tire inflation pressure changes caused by temperature.
In this case, adjusting the tire inflation pressure will turn off the warning light
(after a few minutes).
■ When a tire is replaced with the spare tire (vehicles with the tire pressure
warning system)
The tire pressure warning light will turn on if the tire inflation pressure of the
spare tire is low. If a tire goes flat, the tire pressure warning light will not turn
off even though the flat tire has been replaced with the spare tire.
Other warning light
Warning light Warning light/Details/Actions
Go to service warning light (warning buzzer) (if
equipped)
Indicates a malfunction in the electronic engine control
system or electronic throttle control system, or the Brake
Override System.
→ Have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Toyota
dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and
equipped professional.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 574 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
575
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
8
When trouble arises
■ Conditions that the tire pressure warning system may not function prop-
erly (if equipped)
→P. 5 22
■ If the tire pressure warning light frequently comes on after blinking for 1
minute (if equipped)
If the tire pressure warning light frequently comes on after blinking for 1
minute when the engine switch is turned on, have it checked by any autho-
rized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped profes-
sional.
WARNING
■ If a warning light comes on or a warning buzzer sounds when a warn-
ing message is shown on the multi-information display (vehicles with
multi-information display)
Check and follow the message shown on the multi-information display. Fail-
ure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
■ If both the ABS and the brake system warning lights remain on
Stop your vehicle in a safe place immediately and contact any authorized
To y ot a d ea l er or re pa ir e r, o r a n o t h er du ly qu a li fie d an d e q u ip pe d pr o f e s -
sional. The vehicle will become extremely unstable during braking, and the
ABS system may fail, which could cause an accident resulting in death or
serious injury.
■ If the tire pressure warning light comes on (vehicles with the tire pres-
sure warning system)
Be sure to observe the following precautions. Failure to do so could cause a
loss of vehicle control and result in death or serious injury.
● Stop your vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible. Adjust the tire infla-
tion pressure immediately.
● If the tire pressure warning light comes on even after tire inflation pressure
adjustment, it is probable that you have a flat tire. Check the tires. If a tire
is flat, change it with the spare tire and have the flat tire repaired by the
nearest authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and
equipped professional.
● Avoid abrupt maneuvering and braking. If the vehicle tires deteriorate, you
could lose control of the steering wheel or the brakes.
■ If a blowout or sudden air leakage should occur (vehicles with the tire
pressure warning system)
The tire pressure warning system may not activate immediately.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 575 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
576
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
NOTICE
■ If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on when the boost pressure in
the turbocharger is abnormally high (diesel engine)
Never drive at high speed or race the engine even after the lamp goes off.
■ If the fuel system warning light flashes (diesel engine)
Never drive the vehicle with the warning light flashing. Continued driving
with water accumulated in the fuel filter will damage the fuel injection pump.
■ To ensure the tire pressure warning system operates properly (vehi-
cles with the tire pressure warning system)
Do not install tires with different specifications or makers, as the tire pres-
sure warning system may not operate properly.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 576 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
577
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
8
When trouble arises
If a warning message is displayed
∗
Master warning light
The master warning light also comes on or flashes in order to indicate that
a message is currently being displayed on the multi-information display.
Multi-information display
Handling method
Follow the instructions of the message on the multi-information display.
If any of the warning messages comes on again after the following
actions have been performed, contact any authorized Toyota dealer or
repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional.
∗: If equipped
The multi-information display shows warnings of system mal-
functions, incorrectly performed operations, and messages that
indicate a need for maintenance. When a message is shown,
perform the correction procedure appropriate to the message.
Vehicles with multi-information
display type A
Vehicles with multi-information
display type B
1
2
3
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 577 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
578
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
The warning lights and warning buzzers operate as follows depending
on the content of the message. If a message indicates the need for
inspection by a dealer, have the vehicle inspected by any authorized
Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped pro-
fessional immediately.
*:A buzzer sounds the first time a message is shown on the multi-informa-
tion display.
Messages and warnings
System
warning
light
Warning
buzzer
*
Warning
Comes on Comes on Sounds
Indicates an important situation, such
as when a system related to driving is
malfunctioning or that danger may
result if the correction procedure is not
performed
Comes on Sounds
Comes on
or flashes
Sounds
Indicates an important situation, such
as when the systems shown on the
multi-information display may be mal-
functioning
Flashes Sounds
Indicates a situation, such as when
damage to the vehicle or danger may
result
Comes on
Does not
sound
Indicates a condition, such as mal-
function of electrical components, their
condition, or indicates the need for
maintenance
Flashes
Does not
sound
Indicates a situation, such as when an
operation has been performed incor-
rectly, or indicates how to perform an
operation correctly
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 578 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
579
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
8
When trouble arises
■ If is shown on the multi-information display
The engine oil pressure is too low. (This warning message may be displayed
if the vehicle is stopped on a slope. Move to a level surface and check to see
if the message goes off.)
Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact any authorized
Toyo ta dea ler o r re pair e r, o r ano th er duly qualified and equipped professional.
Continuing to drive the vehicle may be dangerous.
■ If “ACCELERATOR AND BRAKE PEDALS DEPRESSED SIMULTA-
NEOUSLY”/“Accelerator and brake pedals depressed simultaneously” is
shown on the multi-information display
The accelerator and brake pedal are being depressed simultaneously.
(→P. 2 11 )
Release the accelerator or brake pedal.
■ If “WINDSHIELD WASHER FLUID LOW”/“Windshield washer fluid low” is
shown on the multi-information display
The washer fluid level is low.
Add washer fluid. (→P. 511 )
■ If “OIL MAINTENANCE REQUIRED SOON”/“Oil maintenance required
soon” is shown on the multi-information display
The engine oil is scheduled to be changed.
Check the engine oil, and change if necessary. After changing the engine oil,
the oil change system should be reset. (→P. 5 04 )
For Russia, Ukraine, Byelarus, Moldova, Bosnia Herzegovina, Montenegro,
Serbia and Macedonia: You have forgotten to reset the oil change system.
Change the engine oil in accordance with the maintenance schedule.
■ If “OIL MAINTENANCE REQUIRED”/“Oil maintenance required” is
shown on the multi-information display
The engine oil is scheduled to be changed.
Check and change the engine oil, and oil filter by any authorized Toyota
dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional. After
changing the engine oil, the oil change system should be reset. (→P. 5 04 )
For Russia, Ukraine, Byelarus, Moldova, Bosnia Herzegovina, Montenegro,
Serbia and Macedonia: You have forgotten to reset the oil change system.
Change the engine oil in accordance with the maintenance schedule.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 579 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
580
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■ If “T-BELT MAINTENANCE REQUIRED”/“T-BELT maintenance required”
is shown on the multi-information display
The timing belt is scheduled to be changed.
Have the timing belt checked and/or changed by any authorized Toyota
dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional.
■ If “DIFFERENTIAL OIL TEMP HIGH COOLING TIME REQUIRED”/“Differ-
ential oil temp high Cooling time required” is shown on the multi-infor-
mation display
The differential oil temperature is too high.
Wait until the warning message goes off.
■ If “OVER 120km/h”/“Over 120km/h” is shown on the multi-information
display
The vehicle speed has reached or exceeded 120 km/h (75 mph). At this time,
a buzzer also sounds. The buzzer will stop sounding after 6 seconds or if you
decelerate below 120 km/h (75 mph).
Reduce your vehicle speed.
■ If “ENGINE OIL LEVEL LOW ADD OR REPLACE”/“Engine oil level low
Add or replace” is shown on the multi-information display
The engine oil level is low. (This warning message may be displayed if the
vehicle is stopped on a slope. Move to a level surface and check to see if the
message goes off.)
Check the level of the engine oil and add or replace oil if necessary.
(→P. 4 92 )
■ If “POWER TURNED OFF TO SAVE BATTERY”/“Power turned off to save
battery” is shown on the multi-information display
Power was turned off due to the automatic power off function.
Next time when starting the engine, increase the engine speed slightly and
maintain that level for approximately 5 minutes to recharge the battery.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 580 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
581
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
8
When trouble arises
■ If “DPF FULL SEE OWNER’S MANUAL”/“DPF full See owner’s manual”
or “DPF FULL MANUAL REGENERATION REQUIRED SEE OWNER’S
MANUAL”/“DPF full Manual regeneration required See owner’s manual”
is shown on the multi-information display
The deposit collected in the filter needs to be regenerated.
Vehicles without DPF system switch:
To r eg e ne ra te th e fil ter, th e f oll ow in g d ri v i n g m et hod s ar e rec om me nd ed
*.
● By driving continuously (for example, at around 65 km/h [40 mph] for 20 to
30 minutes).
● By avoiding short trips, or by driving continuously (leaving the engine run-
ning for long periods of time).
When the outside temperature is approximately -15°C (5°F) or lower, check
the engine is warmed up before driving the vehicle to regenerate the filter. If
the engine is cold, warm up the engine by driving the vehicle downshifting to
increase the engine speed. Depending on the situation, it may be necessary
to depress the accelerator pedal until the engine speed is increased to 3000
rpm.
The warning message will disappear when regeneration is completed. How-
ever, if this driving cannot be carried out, or if the message does not disap-
pear even after driving, have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Toyota
dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional imme-
diately.
For details of the DPF system, refer to P. 364.
*:When driving, pay sufficient attention to weather, road conditions, terrain
and traffic conditions, and drive according to traffic laws.
Vehicles with DPF system switch:
→P. 3 65
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 581 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
582
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■ If “PRE-CRASH SAFETY UNAVAILABLE”/“Pre-Crash Safety Unavail-
able” is shown on the multi-information display
PCS (Pre-Crash Safety system) is temporarily unavailable. Wait until the sys-
tem returns. If the message does not disappear, that system may be malfunc-
tioning. Have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Toyota dealer or
repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional immediately.
■ If “FORWARD CAMERA SYSTEM UNAVAILABLE”/“Forward Camera Sys-
tem Unavailable” or “FORWARD CAMERA SYSTEM UNAVAILABLE
CLEAN WINDSHIELD”/“Forward Camera System Unavailable Clean
Windshield” is shown on the multi-information display
The following systems may be suspended until the problem shown in the
message is resolved.
● PCS (Pre-Crash Safety system)
● LDA (Lane Departure Alert)
● RSA (Road Sign Assist)
■ If “Check RSA system” is shown on the multi-information display
The RSA system is malfunctioning.
Have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or
another duly qualified and equipped professional immediately.
■ If “SEE OWNER’S MANUAL”/“See owner’s manual” is shown on the
multi-information display
● If the following messages are shown, follow the instructions accordingly.
•“TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMP HIGH”/“Transmission fluid temp high”
(→P. 2 5 3)
•“WATER ACCUMULATION IN FUEL FILTER”/“Water accumulation in
fuel filter” (→P. 5 1 2 )
•“AdBlue LEVEL LOW FILL UP AdBlue IN 2400 km”/“AdBlue level low Fill
up AdBlue in 2400 km” (→P. 5 13 )
•“AdBlue LEVEL LOW NO START IN 800 km! FILL UP AdBlue”/“AdBlue
level low No start in 800 km! Fill up AdBlue” (→P. 5 13 )
•“AdBlue EMPTY UNABLE TO RESTART ENGINE FILL UP AdBlue”/
“AdBlue empty Unable to restart engine Fill up AdBlue” (→P. 51 3)
● If “SMART ENTRY & START SYSTEM MALFUNCTION”/“Smart entry &
start system malfunction” is shown, this may be a malfunction.
Immediately have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Toyota dealer or
repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional.
● If “Low oil pressure Stop in a safe place” is shown, there may be a malfunc-
tion.
Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact any authorized
To y ota de a l er or r epa i r e r, or a no t her duly qualified and equipped profes-
sional.
Continuing to drive the vehicle may be dangerous.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 582 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
583
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
8
When trouble arises
■ If “VISIT YOUR DEALER”/“Visit your dealer” is shown on the multi-infor-
mation display
The system or part shown on the multi-information display is malfunctioning.
Have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or
another duly qualified and equipped professional immediately.
■ Warning buzzer
In some cases, the buzzer may not be heard due to being in a noisy location
or audio sound.
WARNING
■ If a warning light comes on or a warning buzzer sounds when a warn-
ing message is shown on the multi-information display
Check and follow the message shown on the multi-information display. Fail-
ure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
NOTICE
■ While the engine oil level warning is displayed
Continued engine operation with low engine oil will damage the engine.
■ If “WATER ACCUMULATION IN FUEL FILTER SEE OWNER’S MAN-
UAL”/“Water accumulation in fuel filter See owner’s manual” is shown
on the multi-information display
Never drive the vehicle if the warning message is displayed. Continued driv-
ing with water accumulated in the fuel filter will damage the fuel injection
pump.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 583 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
584
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
If you have a flat tire
● Stop the vehicle in a safe place on a hard, flat surface.
● Set the parking brake.
● Shift the shift lever to P (automatic transmission) or R (manual
transmission).
● Stop the engine.
● Turn on the emergency flashers. (→P. 55 6 )
Vehicles without spare tire
Your vehicle is not equipped with a spare tire.
If your have a flat tire, we recommend having your vehicle towed
by any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly quali-
fied and equipped professional or a commercial towing service.
Vehicles with spare tire
Your vehicle is equipped with a spare tire. The flat tire can be
replaced with the spare tire.
For details about tires: →P. 5 18
WARNING
■ If you have a flat tire
Do not continue driving with a flat tire.
Driving even a short distance with a flat tire can damage the tire and the
wheel beyond repair, which could result in an accident.
Before jacking up the vehicle
Location of the spare tire
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 584 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
585
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
8
When trouble arises
Single-cab models
The jack and tools are stored
behind the seat.
Smart-cab models
The jack and tools are stored
under the lid.
Double-cab models
The jack and tools are stored
under the bottom cushion.
Location of the jack and tools
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 585 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
586
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
WARNING
■ Using the tire jack
Improper use of the tire jack may cause the vehicle to suddenly fall off the
jack, leading to death or serious injury.
● Do not use the tire jack for any purpose other than replacing tires or install-
ing and removing tire chains.
● Only use the tire jack that comes with this vehicle for replacing a flat tire.
Do not use it on other vehicles, and do not use other tire jacks for replac-
ing tires on this vehicle.
● Make sure the tire jack can be moved properly.
● Always check that the tire jack is securely set to the correct jack up point.
● Do not put any part of your body under the vehicle while it is supported by
the jack.
● Do not start or run the engine while your vehicle is supported by the jack.
● Do not raise the vehicle while someone is inside.
● When raising the vehicle, do not put an object on or under the jack.
● Do not raise the vehicle to a height greater than that required to replace
the tire.
● Use a jack stand if it is necessary to get under the vehicle.
Ta k e pa r t ic ul a r ca r e wh e n lo we ri n g t he v eh i cl e t o e n s ur e t h a t n o o ne w o r k -
ing on or near the vehicle may be injured.
■ Using the jack handle
Insert the square head securely until you hear a click to prevent the exten-
sion parts from coming apart unexpectedly.
● Do not continue jacking up once the yel-
low caution line has appeared.
Yellow
caution line
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 586 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
587
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
8
When trouble arises
Single-cab models
Unhook the strap and take out
the tool bag.
Take o u t the j ac k .
For loosening
For tightening
Taking out the jack and tool bag
1
2
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 587 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
588
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Smart-cab models
Vehicles with rear seat cushions:
Remove the rear seat cushions.
(→P. 1 8 8 )
Pull the tag and open the lid.
Unhook the strap and take out
the tool bag.
Take o u t the j ac k .
For loosening
For tightening
1
2
3
4
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 588 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
589
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
8
When trouble arises
Double-cab models
Tumbling the bottom cushion (→P. 1 88 )
Open the lid.
Take ou t t h e t oo l ba g .
Take o u t the j ac k .
For loosening
For tightening
1
2
3
4
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 589 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
590
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Assemble the jack handle end,
jack handle extensions and
wheel nut wrench.
To a sse mbl e t he j ac k ha nd le
extension and wheel nut wrench,
push in the projection on the jack
handle extension.
Insert the jack handle end into
the lowering screw.
Lower the spare tire completely
to the ground.
Remove the holding bracket
and pull out the spare tire.
Taking out the spare tire
1
2
3
4
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 590 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
591
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
8
When trouble arises
Chock the tires.
Remove the wheel ornament, using the beveled end of the wheel
nut wrench as shown.
To pr ot ec t t he wh e el o rn ame nt , pl ace a ra g be tw ee n t he w he el n u t w ren ch
and the wheel ornament.
Replacing a flat tire
1
Flat tire Wheel chock positions
Front
Left-hand side Behind the rear right-hand side tire
Right-hand side Behind the rear left-hand side tire
Rear
Left-hand side In front of the front right-hand side tire
Right-hand side In front of the front left-hand side tire
2
Type A Type B
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 591 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
592
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Slightly loosen the wheel nuts
(one turn).
Assembling the jack handle. (→P. 5 90 )
Position the jack at the jack points as shown.
Front
Under the cross member
Type C
3
4
5
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 592 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
593
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
8
When trouble arises
Rear
Under the rear axle housing
Raise the vehicle until the tire is
slightly raised off the ground.
When positioning the jack under
the rear axle housing, make sure
the groove on the top of the jack
fits with the rear axle housing.
Remove all the wheel nuts and
the tire.
When resting the tire on the
ground, place the tire so that the
wheel design faces up to avoid
scratching the wheel surface.
6
7
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 593 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
594
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
WARNING
■ Replacing a flat tire
● Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in serious injury:
•Lower the spare tire completely to the ground before removing it from
under the vehicle.
•Do not try to remove the wheel ornament by hand. Take due care in
handling the ornament to avoid unexpected personal injury.
•Do not touch the disc wheels or the area around the brakes immediately
after the vehicle has been driven.
After the vehicle has been driven the disc wheels and the area around
the brakes will be extremely hot. Touching these areas with hands, feet
or other body parts while changing a tire, etc. may result in burns.
● Failure to follow these precautions could cause the wheel nuts to loosen
and the tire to fall off, resulting in death or serious injury.
•Have the wheel nuts tightened with a torque wrench to 105N•m
(10.7 kgf•m, 77 ft•lbf) as soon as possible after changing wheels.
•Do not attach a heavily damaged wheel ornament, as it may fly off the
wheel while the vehicle is moving.
•When installing a tire, only use wheel nuts that have been specifically
designed for that wheel.
•If there are any cracks or deformations in the bolt screws, nut threads or
bolt holes of the wheel, have the vehicle inspected by any authorized
Toyo ta d ea le r or r epa i re r, o r ano th er d uly q ua lif ie d and e qu ipp ed pr o fes -
sional.
•When installing the wheel nuts, be sure to install them with the tapered
ends facing inward. (→P. 52 9)
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 594 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
595
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
8
When trouble arises
Remove any dirt or foreign mat-
ter from the wheel contact sur-
face.
If foreign matter is on the wheel
contact surface, the wheel nuts
may loosen while the vehicle is in
motion, causing the tire to come
off.
Install the tire and loosely tighten each wheel nut by hand by
approximately the same amount.
When replacing a steel wheel
with a steel wheel, tighten the
wheel nuts until the tapered
portion comes into loose con-
tact with the disc wheel seat.
When replacing an aluminum
wheel with a steel wheel,
tighten the wheel nuts until the
tapered portion comes into
loose contact with the disc
wheel seat.
When replacing an aluminum
wheel with an aluminum wheel,
turn the wheel nuts until the
washers come into contact with
the disc wheel.
Installing the spare tire
1
2
Disc wheel
seat
Tape re d por ti on
Tape re d por ti on
Disc wheel
seat
Washer
Wheel nut
Disc wheel
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 595 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
596
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Lower the vehicle.
Firmly tighten each wheel nut
two or three times in the order
shown in the illustration.
Tightening torque:
105 N•m (10.7 kgf•m, 77 ft•lbf)
Vehicles with spare tire of the same wheel type as the installed
tires: Reinstall the wheel ornament.
Type A
Align the cutout of the wheel
ornament with the valve stem
as shown.
Type B
3
4
5
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 596 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
597
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
8
When trouble arises
Type C
Lay down the tire with the valve
stem facing up and install the
holding bracket, inserting the
claw into the wheel lug nut hole.
Turn the jack handle extension
clockwise to take up slack in
the chain.
Then, check to ensure the claw is
in the wheel lug nut hole and the
holding bracket is centered in the
wheel hub.
Holding bracket
Claw
WARNING
■ Stowing the flat tire
Failure to follow steps listed under stowing the tire may result in damage to
the spare tire carrier and loss of the tire, which could result in death or seri-
ous injury.
Stowing the flat tire, jack and all tools
incorrect
correct
1
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 597 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
598
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Raise the tire.
While raising, secure the tire, tak-
ing care that the tire goes straight
up without catching on any sur-
rounding part, to prevent it from fly-
ing forward during a collision or
sudden braking.
After the tire goes half way up,
check that the suspended chain is
able to enter the tire hole, for
proper storage.
Tightening torque:
37.0 N•m (3.8 kgf•m, 27.3 ft•lbf)
Confirm that the tire is not loose
after tightening:
Push and pull the tire
Try rotating
Visually check to ensure the tire is
not hung on surrounding parts.
If looseness or misassembly exists, repeat step and step .
Repeat step , any time the tire is lowered or disturbed.
Push in the projection on the
jack handle and disassemble
the jack handle end, jack han-
dle extensions and wheel nut
wrench.
Stow the tools and jack securely.
2
3
1
2
2 3
4 3
5
6
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 598 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
599
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
8
When trouble arises
■ Certification for the jack
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 599 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
600
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
WARNING
■ After using the tools and jack
Before driving, make sure all the tools and jack are securely in place in their
storage location to reduce the possibility of personal injury during a collision
or sudden braking.
NOTICE
■ When stowing the flat tire
Ensure that there is no object caught between the tire and the vehicle
underbody.
■ When assembling the jack handle extension
Insert the square head securely until you hear a click. Otherwise the exten-
sion may come off and it may damage the paint or vehicle body.
■
When replacing the tires (vehicles with tire pressure warning sys-
tem)
When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning valve
and transmitter, contact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another
duly qualified and equipped professional as the tire pressure warning valve
and transmitter may be damaged if not handled correctly.
■ To avoid damage to the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
(vehicles with tire pressure warning system)
When a tire is repaired with liquid sealants, the tire pressure warning valve
and transmitter may not operate properly. If a liquid sealant is used, contact
any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and
equipped professional or other qualified service shop as soon as possible.
Make sure to replace the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter when
replacing the tire. (→P. 51 9 )
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 600 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
601
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
8
When trouble arises
If the engine will not start
One of the following may be the cause of the problem:
● There may not be sufficient fuel in the vehicle’s tank.
Gasoline engine: Refuel the vehicle.
Diesel engine: →P. 6 16
● The engine may be flooded. (gasoline engine)
Try to restart the engine again following correct starting procedures.
(→P. 2 3 6 , 2 3 9 )
● There may be a malfunction in the engine immobilizer system.
(if equipped: →P. 1 0 7)
One of the following may be the cause of the problem:
● The battery may be discharged. (→P. 6 0 7 )
● The battery terminal connections may be loose or corroded.
The engine starting system may be malfunctioning due to an electrical
problem such as an open circuit or a blown fuse. However, an interim
measure is available to start the engine. (→P. 60 2 )
If the engine will not start even though correct starting proce-
dures are being followed (→P. 2 36 , 23 9 ), con s id er e ac h of th e
following points:
The engine will not start even though the starter motor operates
normally.
The starter motor turns over slowly, the interior lights and head-
lights are dim, or the horn does not sound or sounds at a low
volume.
The starter motor does not turn over (vehicles with smart entry &
start system).
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 601 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
602
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
One of the following may be the cause of the problem:
● One or both of the battery terminals may be disconnected.
● The battery may be discharged. (→P. 6 0 7 )
● There may be a malfunction in the steering lock system. (vehicles
with smart entry & start system)
Contact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified
and equipped professional if the problem cannot be repaired, or if repair
procedures are unknown.
When the engine does not start, the following steps can be used as an
interim measure to start the engine if the engine switch is functioning
normally.
Set the parking brake.
Shift the shift lever to P (automatic transmission) or N (manual
transmission).
Turn the engine switch to ACCESSORY mode.
Press and hold the engine switch for about 15 seconds while
depressing the brake pedal and clutch pedal (manual transmission)
firmly.
Even if the engine can be started using the above steps, the system
may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your any
authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and
equipped professional.
The starter motor does not turn over, the interior lights and head-
lights do not turn on, or the horn does not sound.
Emergency start function (vehicles with smart entry & start sys-
tem)
1
2
3
4
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 602 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
603
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
8
When trouble arises
If the electronic key does not operate properly
(vehicles with smart entry & start system)
Use the mechanical key (→P. 1 51 )
in order to perform the following
operations:
Locks all doors
Unlocks all doors
If communication between the electronic key and vehicle is
interrupted (→P. 1 73 ) or t h e el e ct ro n ic k e y c an no t b e u s ed
because the battery is depleted, the smart entry & start system
and wireless remote control cannot be used. In such cases, the
doors can be opened and the engine can be started by following
the procedure below.
Locking and unlocking the doors
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 603 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
604
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Automatic transmission
Ensure that the shift lever is in P and depress the brake pedal.
Touch the area behind the lock
button and unlock button on the
electronic key to the engine
switch.
When the electronic key is
detected, a buzzer sounds and the
engine switch will turn to IGNITION
ON mode.
When the smart entry & start sys-
tem is deactivated in customization
setting, the engine switch will turn
to ACCESSORY mode.
Firmly depress the brake pedal.
A message indicating how to start the engine will be displayed on the
multi-information display.
Press the engine switch.
In the event that the engine still cannot be started, contact any autho-
rized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped
professional.
Starting the engine
1
2
3
4
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 604 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
605
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
8
When trouble arises
Manual transmission
Ensure that the shift lever is in N and depress the clutch pedal.
Touch the area behind the lock
button and unlock button on the
electronic key to the engine
switch.
When the electronic key is
detected, a buzzer sounds and the
engine switch will turn to IGNITION
ON mode.
When the smart entry & start sys-
tem is deactivated in customization
setting, the engine switch will turn
to ACCESSORY mode.
Firmly depress the clutch pedal.
A message indicating how to start the engine will be displayed on the
multi-information display.
Press the engine switch.
In the event that the engine still cannot be started, contact any autho-
rized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped
professional.
1
2
3
4
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 605 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
606
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■ Stopping the engine
Shift the shift lever to P (automatic transmission) or N (manual transmission)
and press the engine switch as you normally do when stopping the engine.
■ Replacing the key battery
As the above procedure is a temporary measure, it is recommended that the
electronic key battery be replaced immediately when the battery is depleted.
(→P. 5 32 )
■ Alarm (vehicles with alarm for Kazakhstan and Morocco)
Using the mechanical key to lock the doors will not set the alarm system.
If a door is unlocked using the mechanical key when the alarm system is set,
the alarm may be triggered.
■ Changing engine switch modes
Release the brake pedal (automatic transmission) or clutch pedal (manual
transmission) and press the engine switch in step above.
The engine does not start and modes will be changed each time the switch is
pressed. (→P. 2 4 2 )
■ When the electronic key does not work properly
● Make sure that the smart entry & start system has not been deactivated in
the customization setting. If it is off, turn the function on.
(Customizable features: →P. 64 8)
● Check if battery-saving mode is set. If it is set, cancel the function.
(→P. 1 7 1)
3
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 606 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
607
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
8
When trouble arises
If the vehicle battery is discharged
If you have a set of jumper (or booster) cables and a second vehicle
with a 12-volt battery, you can jump start your vehicle by following the
steps below.
Open the hood. (→P. 49 7 )
Connect the jumper cables according to the following procedure:
Connect a positive jumper cable clamp to the positive (+) battery
terminal on your vehicle.
Connect the clamp on the other end of the positive cable to the
positive (+) battery terminal on the second vehicle.
Connect a negative cable clamp to the negative (-) battery termi-
nal on the second vehicle.
Connect the clamp at the other end of the negative cable to a
solid, stationary, unpainted metallic point away from the battery
and any moving parts, as shown in the illustration.
2TR-FE engine
The following procedures may be used to start the engine if the
vehicle’s battery is discharged.
You can also call any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or
another duly qualified and equipped professional or a qualified
repair shop.
1
2
1
2
3
4
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 607 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
608
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
1GD-FTV and 2GD-FTV engines
2KD-FTV engine
3
2
4
1
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 608 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
609
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
8
When trouble arises
Start the engine of the second vehicle. Increase the engine speed
slightly and maintain at that level for approximately 5 minutes to
recharge the battery of your vehicle.
Vehicles with smart entry & start system: Open and close any of the
doors with the engine switch off.
Maintain the engine speed of the second vehicle and start the
engine of your vehicle by turning the engine switch to the “ON”
position (vehicles without smart entry & start system) or IGNITION
ON mode (vehicles with smart entry & start system).
Once the vehicle’s engine has started, remove the jumper cables in
the exact reverse order from which they were connected.
Once the engine starts, have the vehicle inspected at any authorized
Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped pro-
fessional as soon as possible.
■ Starting the engine when the battery is discharged (vehicles with auto-
matic transmission)
The engine cannot be started by push-starting.
■ To prevent battery discharge
● Turn off the headlights and the audio system while the engine is off.
(Vehicles with Stop & Start system: Except when the engine is stopped due
to the Stop & Start system)
● Turn off any unnecessary electrical components when the vehicle is running
at a low speed for an extended period, such as in heavy traffic.
■ When the battery is removed or discharged
● Information stored in the ECU is cleared. When the battery is depleted, have
the vehicle inspected at any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another
duly qualified and equipped professional.
● The power windows may not close normally. In this case, initialize the power
windows. (if equipped) (→P. 2 0 2)
■ Charging the battery
The electricity stored in the battery will discharge gradually even when the
vehicle is not in use, due to natural discharge and the draining effects of cer-
tain electrical appliances. If the vehicle is left for a long time, the battery may
discharge, and the engine may be unable to start. (The battery recharges
automatically during driving.)
3
4
5
6
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 609 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
610
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■ When recharging or replacing the battery (vehicles with smart entry &
start system)
● In some cases, it may not be possible to unlock the doors using the smart
entry & start system when the battery is discharged. Use the wireless
remote control or the mechanical key to lock or unlock the doors.
● The engine may not start on the first attempt after the battery has recharged
but will start normally after the second attempt. This is not a malfunction.
● The engine switch mode is memorized by the vehicle. When the battery is
reconnected, the system will return to the mode it was in before the battery
was discharged. Before disconnecting the battery, turn the engine switch off.
If you are unsure what mode the engine switch was in before the battery dis-
charged, be especially careful when reconnecting the battery.
● Vehicles with Stop & Start system: After charging the battery or reconnecting
the battery terminals, the Stop & Start system may not automatically stop
the engine for approximately 5 to 40 minutes.
■ When exchanging the battery
● Use a battery that conforms to European regulations.
● Use a battery with the same case size as the previous battery and an equiv-
alent 20 hour rate capacity (20HR) or greater.
•If the sizes differ, the battery cannot be properly secured.
•If the 20 hour rate capacity is low, even if the time period where the vehi-
cle is not used is a short time, the battery may discharge and the engine
may not be able to start.
● Vehicles with Stop & Start system: Use a battery specified for use with the
Stop & Start system and equivalent to a genuine battery. If an unsupported
battery is used, Stop & Start system functions may be restricted to protect
the battery.
Also, battery performance may decrease and the engine may not be able to
restart. Contact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly
qualified and equipped professional for details.
● For details, consult any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly
qualified and equipped professional.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 610 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
611
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
8
When trouble arises
WARNING
■ When removing the battery terminals
Always remove the negative (-) terminal first. If the positive (+) terminal con-
tacts any metal in the surrounding area when the positive (+) terminal is
removed, a spark may occur, leading to a fire in addition to electrical shocks
and death or serious injury.
■ Avoiding battery fires or explosions
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidentally igniting the flam-
mable gas that may be emitted from the battery:
● Make sure each jumper cable is connected to the correct terminal and that
it is not unintentionally in contact with any other than the intended terminal.
● Do not allow the other end of the jumper cable connected to the “+” termi-
nal to come into contact with any other parts or metal surfaces in the area,
such as brackets or unpainted metal.
● Do not allow the + and - clamps of the jumper cables to come into contact
with each other.
● Do not smoke, use matches, cigarette lighters or allow open flame near
the battery.
■ Battery precautions
The battery contains poisonous and corrosive acidic electrolyte, while
related parts contain lead and lead compounds. Observe the following pre-
cautions when handling the battery:
● When working with the battery, always wear safety glasses and take care
not to allow any battery fluids (acid) to come into contact with skin, clothing
or the vehicle body.
● Do not lean over the battery.
● In the event that battery fluid comes into contact with the skin or eyes,
immediately wash the affected area with water and seek medical attention.
Place a wet sponge or cloth over the affected area until medical attention
can be received.
● Always wash your hands after handling the battery support, terminals, and
other battery-related parts.
● Do not allow children near the battery.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 611 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
612
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
WARNING
■ When exchanging the battery
● When the vent plug and indicator are close to the hold down bracket, the
battery fluid (sulfuric acid) may leak.
● For information regarding battery replacement, contact any authorized
Toy ota d ea ler or r e pai r er, or a no th er duly qu al ifi ed and equ ipp ed p ro fe s -
sional.
■ To prevent damage to the vehicle (vehicles with manual transmission)
Do not pull- or push-start the vehicle as the three-way catalytic converter or
catalytic converter may overheat and become a fire hazard.
NOTICE
■ When handling jumper cables
When connecting the jumper cables, ensure that they do not become entan-
gled in the cooling fan or belt.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 612 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
613
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
8
When trouble arises
If your vehicle overheats
● The needle of the engine coolant temperature gauge (→P. 1 28 )
enters the red zone or a loss of engine power is experienced. (For
example, the vehicle speed does not increase.)
● Steam comes out from under the hood.
Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn off the air conditioning sys-
tem, and then stop the engine.
If you see steam:
Carefully lift the hood after the steam subsides.
If you do not see steam:
Carefully lift the hood.
After the engine has cooled down sufficiently, inspect the hoses and
radiator core (radiator) for any leaks.
Radiator
Cooling fan
If a large amount of coolant
leaks, immediately contact any
authorized Toyota dealer or
repairer, or another duly quali-
fied and equipped professional.
The following may indicate that your vehicle is overheating.
Correction procedures
1
2
3
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 613 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
614
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the “F” and “L” lines
on the reservoir.
Reservoir
“F” line
“L” line
Radiator cap (if equipped)
Add engine coolant if necessary. (→P. 6 3 6 )
Water can be used in an emergency if engine coolant is unavailable.
4
1
2
3
4
Gasoline engine Diesel engine
5
Gasoline engine Diesel engine
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 614 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
615
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
8
When trouble arises
Start the engine to check that the radiator cooling fan operates and
to check for coolant leaks from the radiator or hoses.
If the fan is not operating:
Stop the engine immediately and contact any authorized Toyota
dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped profes-
sional.
If the fan is operating:
Have the vehicle inspected at the nearest authorized Toyota dealer
or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional.
WARNING
■ When inspecting under the hood of your vehicle
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in serious injury such as burns.
● If steam is seen coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until
the steam has subsided. The engine compartment may be very hot.
● Keep hands and clothing (especially a tie, a scarf or a muffler) away from
the fans and belts. Failure to do so may cause the hands or clothing to be
caught, resulting in serious injury.
● Do not loosen the radiator cap or the coolant reservoir cap while the
engine and radiator are hot. High temperature steam or coolant could
spray out.
NOTICE
■ When adding engine coolant
Add coolant slowly after the engine has cooled down sufficiently. Adding
cool coolant to a hot engine too quickly can cause damage to the engine.
■ To prevent damage to the cooling system
Observe the following precautions:
● Avoid contaminating the coolant with foreign matter (such as sand or dust
etc.).
● Do not use any coolant additive.
6
7
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 615 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
616
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
If you run out of fuel and the engine stalls
(diesel engine only)
If you run out of fuel and the engine stalls:
Refuel your vehicle.
To blee d the f u el sys tem, oper-
ate the priming pump until you
feel more resistance.
Start the engine. (→P. 2 3 6 , 2 39 )
If the engine does not start after the above steps have been performed,
wait for 10 seconds and try steps and again. If the engine still does
not start, contact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly
qualified and equipped professional.
After starting the engine, depress the accelerator pedal lightly until the
engine runs smoothly.
1
2
NOTICE
■ When restarting the engine
● Do not crank the engine before refueling and operating the priming pump.
This may damage the engine and fuel system.
● Do not crank the engine for more than 30 seconds at a time. This may
overheat the starter and wiring system.
3
2 3
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 616 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
617
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
8
When trouble arises
If the vehicle becomes stuck
Stop the engine. Set the parking brake and shift the shift lever to P
(automatic transmission) or N (manual transmission).
Remove the mud, snow or sand from around the stuck tire.
Place wood, stones or some other material under the tires to help
provide traction.
Restart the engine.
Vehicles with rear differential lock system: Lock the rear differential.
(→P. 3 3 9 )
Shift the shift lever to the D or R position (automatic transmission)
or 1 or R position (manual transmission) and carefully apply the
accelerator to free the vehicle.
■ When it is difficult to free the vehicle (vehicles with TRC/A-TRC system)
Press to turn off TRC/A-TRC.
Vehicles without multi-information display
Vehicles with multi-information display
Carry out the following procedures if the tires spin or the vehicle
becomes stuck in mud, dirt or snow:
1
2
3
4
5
6
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 617 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
618
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
WARNING
■ When attempting to free a stuck vehicle
If you choose to push the vehicle back and forth to free it, make sure the
surrounding area is clear to avoid striking other vehicles, objects or people.
The vehicle may also lunge forward or lunge back suddenly as it becomes
free. Use extreme caution.
■ When shifting the shift lever
For vehicles with automatic transmission, be careful not to shift the shift
lever with the accelerator pedal depressed.
This may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may
cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
NOTICE
■ To avoid damage to the transmission and other components
● Avoid spinning the wheels and depressing the accelerator pedal more
than necessary.
● If the vehicle remains stuck even after these procedures are performed,
the vehicle may require towing to be freed.
● Vehicles with automatic transmission: When a warning message for the
automatic transmission fluid temperature is displayed while attempting to
free a stuck vehicle, immediately remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal and wait until the warning message disappears. Otherwise, the
transmission may become damaged. (→P. 2 53 )
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 618 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
619
9
Vehicle specifications
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
9-1. Specifications
Maintenance data
(fuel, oil level, etc.)...........620
Fuel information .................645
9-2. Customization
Customizable features.......648
9-3. Initialization
Items to initialize ................655
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 619 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
620
9-1. Specifications
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Maintenance data (fuel, oil level, etc.)
*
1
:Unladen vehicle
*
2
:With tailgate type A (→P. 1 67 )
*
3
:With tailgate type B (→P. 1 67 )
*
4
:Without the front steel bumper
*
5
:With the front steel bumper
*
6
:Without side step
*
7
:With side step
*
8
:With 205R16C tires
*
9
:With 225/70R17C tires
*
10
:With 265/65R17 or 265/60R18 tires
Dimensions
Overall length
Without rear bumper
5265 mm (207.3 in.)
*
2
5285 mm (208.1 in.)*
3
With rear bumper
5335 mm (210.0 in.)
*
4
5330 mm (209.8 in.)*
5
Overall width
Without over fender
1800 mm (70.9 in.)
*
6
1815 mm (71.5 in.)*
7
With over fender 1855 mm (73.0 in.)
Overall height*
1
Single-cab models 1795 mm (70.7 in.)
Smart-cab models 1810 mm (71.3 in.)
Double-cab models 1815 mm (71.5 in.)
Wheelbase 3090 mm (121.7 in.)
Front tread
1505 mm (59.3 in.)*
8
1495 mm (58.9 in.)*
9
1535 mm (60.4 in.)*
10
Rear tread
1520 mm (59.8 in.)
*
8
1510 mm (59.4 in.)*
9
1550 mm (61.0 in.)*
10
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 620 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
621
9
9-1. Specifications
Vehicle specifications
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Weights
∗
∗: Models for model code destination W (See “Checking your vehicle’s model”
if you are not sure of which model your vehicle is. [→P. 11] )
Gross vehicle mass
Single-cab
models
4WD
models
3080 kg (6790 lb.)
Pre
Runner
2950 kg (6504 lb.)
Smart-cab
models
4WD
models
3150 kg (6945 lb.)
Pre
Runner
3000 kg (6614 lb.)
Double-
cab
models
4WD
models
2910 kg (6415 lb.)
*
1
3210 kg (7077 lb.)*
2
Pre
Runner
2810 kg (6195 lb.)
*
3
3050 kg (6724 lb.)*
4
Maximum
permissible
axle
capacity
Front 1420 kg (3131 lb.)
Rear
Single-cab models 1850 kg (4079 lb.)
Smart-cab models 1920 kg (4233 lb.)
Double-
cab
models
4WD
models
1650 kg (3638 lb.)
*
1
1920 kg (4233 lb.)*
2
Pre
Runner
1650 kg (3638 lb.)
*
3
1920 kg (4233 lb.)*
4
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 621 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
622
9-1. Specifications
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
*
1
:For Russia, Ukraine, EURO V and VI models*
5
for Israel, and EURO V
models
*
5
for Turkey
*
2
:Except for Russia, Ukraine, EURO V and VI models*
5
for Israel, and
EURO V models
*
5
for Turkey
*
3
:For EURO V models*
5
for Turkey
*
4
:Except for EURO V models*
5
for Turkey
*
5
:EURO V and VI are emission standards. If it is not clear that your vehicle
meets relevant standards, contact any authorized Toyota dealer or
repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional.
Drawbar load
Single-cab
models
4WD
models
140 kg (309 lb.)
Pre
Runner
115 kg (254 lb.)
Smart-cab
models
4WD
models
140 kg (309 lb.)
*
6
130 kg (287 lb.)*
7
Pre
Runner
120 kg (265 lb.)
Double-
cab
models
4WD
models
130 kg (287 lb.)
Pre
Runner
115 kg (254 lb.)
*
3
120 kg (265 lb.)*
4
Towi n g
capacity
Without brake 750 kg (1653 lb.)
With brake
Single-cab
models
4WD
models
3500 kg (7716 lb.)
Pre
Runner
2800 kg (6173 lb.)
Smart-cab
models
4WD
models
3500 kg (7716 lb.)
*
6
3200 kg (7055 lb.)*
7
Pre
Runner
3000 kg (6614 lb.)
Double-
cab
models
4WD
models
3200 kg (7055 lb.)
Pre
Runner
2800 kg (6173 lb.)
*
3
3000 kg (6614 lb.)*
4
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 622 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
623
9
9-1. Specifications
Vehicle specifications
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
*
6
:Vehicles without rear seat cushion and GUN125L-CNFSHW3 model*
8
*
7
:Vehicles with rear seat cushion except for GUN125L-CNFSHW3 model*
8
*
8
:The model code is indicated on the manufacturer’s plate or label.
(
→P. 6 23 )
■
Vehicle identification number
The vehicle identification number (VIN) is the legal identifier for
your vehicle. This is the primary identification number for your
Toyota. It is used in registering the ownership of your vehicle.
This number is stamped on the
rear right frame.
Single-cab models (models
made in South Africa
*):
This number is also on the
manufacturer’s label.
Smart-cab models (models
made in South Africa
*):
This number is also on the
manufacturer’s label.
Vehicle identification
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 623 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
624
9-1. Specifications
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Double-cab models (models
made in South Africa
*):
This number is also on the
manufacturer’s label.
Models made in Thailand
*:
This number is also on the
manufacturer’s plate.
Models for model code destina-
tion V
*:
This number is also on the top
left of the instrument panel.
*:See “Checking your vehicle’s model” if you are not sure of which model
your vehicle is. (→P. 11 )
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 624 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
625
9
9-1. Specifications
Vehicle specifications
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■
Engine number
The engine number is stamped on the engine block as shown.
2TR-FE engine
2TR-FE engine 1GD-FTV and 2GD-FTV
engines
2KD-FTV engine
Engine
Model 2TR-FE
Type 4 cylinder in line, 4 cycle, gasoline
Bore and stroke 95.0 × 95.0 mm (3.74 × 3.74 in.)
Displacement 2694 cm
3
(164.4 cu.in.)
Valve clearance Automatic adjustment
Drive belt tension Automatic adjustment
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 625 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
626
9-1. Specifications
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
1GD-FTV engine
2GD-FTV engine
2KD-FTV engine
Model 1GD-FTV
Type
4 cylinder in line, 4 cycle, diesel
(with turbocharger)
Bore and stroke 92.0 × 103.6 mm (3.62 × 4.08 in.)
Displacement 2755 cm
3
(168.1 cu.in.)
Valve clearance Automatic adjustment
Drive belt tension Automatic adjustment
Model 2GD-FTV
Type
4 cylinder in line, 4 cycle, diesel
(with turbocharger)
Bore and stroke 92.0 × 90.0 mm (3.62 × 3.54 in.)
Displacement 2393 cm
3
(146.0 cu.in.)
Valve clearance Automatic adjustment
Drive belt tension Automatic adjustment
Model 2KD-FTV
Type
4 cylinder in line, 4 cycle, diesel
(with turbocharger)
Bore and stroke 92.0 × 93.8 mm (3.62 × 3.69 in.)
Displacement 2494 cm
3
(152.2 cu.in.)
Valve clearance
(engine cold)
Intake: 0.20 0.30 mm (0.008 0.012 in.)
Exhaust: 0.35 0.45 mm (0.014 0.018 in.)
Drive belt tension Automatic adjustment
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 626 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
627
9
9-1. Specifications
Vehicle specifications
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Gasoline engine
Diesel engine
Fuel
Fuel type Unleaded gasoline only
Research Octane
Number
91 or higher
Fuel tank capacity
(Reference)
80 L (21.1 gal., 17.6 Imp.gal.)
Fuel type
EU area
Diesel fuel conforming to European standard
EN590
Except EU area (except Russia)
Diesel fuel only
Except EU area (Russia)
Diesel fuel confirming to GOST R52368-2005
Cetane number 48 or higher
Fuel tank capacity
(Reference)
80 L (21.1 gal., 17.6 Imp.gal.)
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 627 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
628
9-1. Specifications
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
2TR-FE engine (for EURO IV and V models*
1
)
*
1
:EURO IV and V are emission standards. If it is not clear that your vehicle
meets relevant standards, contact any authorized Toyota dealer or
repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional.
*
2
:The engine oil capacity is a reference quantity to be used when changing
the engine oil. Warm up and turn off the engine, wait more than 5 minutes,
and check the oil level on the dipstick.
■
Engine oil selection
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used in your Toyota vehicle. Use
Toyota approv e d “ To yo ta G e n u i ne M otor Oil ” o r e quiv al e nt to sat i s f y
the following grade and viscosity.
Oil grade:
0W-20, 5W-20, 5W-30 and 10W-30:
API grade SL “Energy-Conserving”, SM “Energy-Conserving” or SN
“Resource-Conserving”; or ILSAC multigrade engine oil
15W-40:
API grade SL, SM or SN multigrade engine oil
Recommended viscosity (SAE):
If you use SAE 10W-30 or a
higher viscosity engine oil in
extremely low temperatures,
the engine may become difficult
to start, so SAE 0W-20, 5W-20
or 5W-30 engine oil is recom-
mended.
Lubrication system
Oil capacity
(Drain and refill Reference
*
2
)
With filter
Without filter
5.6 L (5.9 qt., 4.9 Imp.qt.)
5.3 L (5.6 qt., 4.7 Imp.qt.)
Te m pe r a t ur e r an g e a n tic ipa t e d
before next oil change
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 628 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
629
9
9-1. Specifications
Vehicle specifications
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Oil viscosity (0W-20 is explained here as an example):
•The 0W in 0W-20 indicates the characteristic of the oil which
allows cold startability. Oils with a lower value before the W allow
for easier starting of the engine in cold weather.
•The 20 in 0W-20 indicates the viscosity characteristic of the oil
when the oil is at high temperature. An oil with a higher viscosity
(one with a higher value) may be better suited if the vehicle is
operated at high speeds, or under extreme load conditions.
How to read oil container labels:
Either or both API registered marks are added to some oil contain-
ers to help you select the oil you should use.
API Service Symbol
To p p o r t i on : “A PI S E RV I C E S N”
means the oil quality designa-
tion by American Petroleum
Institute (API).
Center portion: “SAE 0W-20”
means the SAE viscosity grade.
Lower portion: “Resource-Con-
serving” means that the oil has
fuel-saving and environmental
protection capabilities.
ILSAC Certification Mark
The International Lubricant Specification Advisory Committee (ILSAC)
Certification Mark is displayed on the front of the container.
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 629 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
630
9-1. Specifications
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
2TR-FE engine (except for EURO IV and V models*
1
)
*
1
:EURO IV and V are emission standards. If it is not clear that your vehicle
meets relevant standards, contact any authorized Toyota dealer or
repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional.
*
2
:The engine oil capacity is a reference quantity to be used when changing
the engine oil. Warm up and turn off the engine, wait more than 5 minutes,
and check the oil level on the dipstick.
■
Engine oil selection
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used in your Toyota vehicle. Use
Toyota approv e d “ To yo ta G e n u i ne M otor Oil ” o r e quiv al e nt to sat i s f y
the following grade and viscosity.
Oil grade:
0W-20, 5W-20, 5W-30 and 10W-30:
API grade SL “Energy-Conserving”, SM “Energy-Conserving” or SN
“Resource-Conserving”; or ILSAC multigrade engine oil
15W-40 and 20W-50:
API grade SL, SM or SN multigrade engine oil
Recommended viscosity (SAE):
If you use SAE 10W-30 or a
higher viscosity engine oil in
extremely low temperatures,
the engine may become difficult
to start, so SAE 0W-20, 5W-20
or 5W-30 engine oil is recom-
mended.
Oil capacity
(Drain and refill Reference*
2
)
With filter
Without filter
5.6 L (5.9 qt., 4.9 Imp.qt.)
5.3 L (5.6 qt., 4.7 Imp.qt.)
Te m pe r a t ur e r a n g e a n ti c ip a t e d
before next oil change
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 630 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
631
9
9-1. Specifications
Vehicle specifications
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Oil viscosity (0W-20 is explained here as an example):
•The 0W in 0W-20 indicates the characteristic of the oil which
allows cold startability. Oils with a lower value before the W allow
for easier starting of the engine in cold weather.
•The 20 in 0W-20 indicates the viscosity characteristic of the oil
when the oil is at high temperature. An oil with a higher viscosity
(one with a higher value) may be better suited if the vehicle is
operated at high speeds, or under extreme load conditions.
How to read oil container labels:
Either or both API registered marks are added to some oil contain-
ers to help you select the oil you should use.
API Service Symbol
To p p o r t i on : “A PI S E RV I C E S N”
means the oil quality designa-
tion by American Petroleum
Institute (API).
Center portion: “SAE 0W-20”
means the SAE viscosity grade.
Lower portion: “Resource-Con-
serving” means that the oil has
fuel-saving and environmental
protection capabilities.
ILSAC Certification Mark
The International Lubricant Specification Advisory Committee (ILSAC)
Certification Mark is displayed on the front of the container.
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 631 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
632
9-1. Specifications
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
1GD-FTV and 2GD-FTV engines (for EURO V and VI models*
1
)
*
1
:EURO V and VI are emission standards. If it is not clear that your vehicle
meets relevant standards, contact any authorized Toyota dealer or
repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional.
*
2
:The engine oil capacity is a reference quantity to be used when changing
the engine oil. Warm up and turn off the engine, wait more than 5 minutes,
and check the oil level on the dipstick.
■
Engine oil selection
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used in your Toyota vehicle. Toyota
recommends the use of approved “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil”.
Another motor oil of matching quality can also be used.
Oil grade: ACEA C2
Oil capacity
(Drain and refill
reference
*
2
)
With filter
Without filter
7.5 L (7.9 qt., 6.6 Imp.qt.)
7.0 L (7.4 qt., 6.2 Imp.qt.)
NOTICE
Using engine oil other than ACEA C2 may damage the catalytic converter.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 632 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
633
9
9-1. Specifications
Vehicle specifications
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Recommended viscosity (SAE):
SAE 0W-30 is filled into your
Toyota ve h i cl e at m a nufa ct u r-
ing, and the best choice for
good fuel economy and good
starting in cold weather.
Oil viscosity (0W-30 is explained here as an example):
•The 0W in 0W-30 indicates the characteristic of the oil which
allows cold startability. Oils with a lower value before the W allow
for easier starting of the engine in cold weather.
•The 30 in 0W-30 indicates the viscosity characteristic of the oil
when the oil is at high temperature. An oil with a higher viscosity
(one with a higher value) may be better suited if the vehicle is
operated at high speeds, or under extreme load conditions.
Temp e r at ur e r an ge a nt i ci pat e d
before next oil change
Preferred
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 633 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
634
9-1. Specifications
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
1GD-FTV and 2GD-FTV engines (for EURO IV models*
1
)
*
1
:EURO IV is an emission standard. If it is not clear that your vehicle meets
relevant standards, contact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or
another duly qualified and equipped professional.
*
2
:The engine oil capacity is a reference quantity to be used when changing
the engine oil. Warm up and turn off the engine, wait more than 5 minutes,
and check the oil level on the dipstick.
■
Engine oil selection
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used in your Toyota vehicle. Use
Toyota approved “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent to sat-
isfy the following grade and viscosity.
Oil grade: API CF-4, CF or ACEA B1
Recommended viscosity (SAE):
SAE 5W-30 is the best choice
for good fuel economy and
good starting in cold weather.
If you use SAE 10W-30 or a
higher viscosity engine oil in
extremely low temperatures,
the engine may become difficult
to start, so SAE 5W-30 engine
oil is recommended.
Oil viscosity (5W-30 is explained here as an example):
•The 5W in 5W-30 indicates the characteristic of the oil which
allows cold startability. Oils with a lower value before the W allow
for easier starting of the engine in cold weather.
•The 30 in 5W-30 indicates the viscosity characteristic of the oil
when the oil is at high temperature. An oil with a higher viscosity
(one with a higher value) may be better suited if the vehicle is
operated at high speeds, or under extreme load conditions.
Oil capacity
(Drain and refill —
reference
*
2
)
With filter
Without filter
7.5 L (7.9 qt., 6.6 Imp.qt.)
7.0 L (7.4 qt., 6.2 Imp.qt.)
Temp er at ure r ang e a nt ici pate d
before next oil change
Preferred
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 634 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
635
9
9-1. Specifications
Vehicle specifications
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
2KD-FTV engine
*:The engine oil capacity is a reference quantity to be used when changing
the engine oil. Warm up and turn off the engine, wait more than 5 minutes,
and check the oil level on the dipstick.
■
Engine oil selection
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used in your Toyota vehicle. Use
Toyota approv e d “ To yo ta G e n u i ne M otor Oil ” o r e quiv al e nt to sat i s f y
the following grade and viscosity.
Oil grade: API CF-4, CF or ACEA B1
(You may also use API CE or CD.)
Recommended viscosity (SAE):
If you use SAE 10W-30 or a
higher viscosity engine oil in
extremely low temperatures,
the engine may become difficult
to start, so SAE 5W-30 engine
oil is recommended.
Oil viscosity (10W-30 is explained here as an example):
•The 10W in 10W-30 indicates the characteristic of the oil which
allows cold startability. Oils with a lower value before the W allow
for easier starting of the engine in cold weather.
•The 30 in 10W-30 indicates the viscosity characteristic of the oil
when the oil is at high temperature. An oil with a higher viscosity
(one with a higher value) may be better suited if the vehicle is
operated at high speeds, or under extreme load conditions.
Oil capacity
(Drain and refill
reference
*)
With filter
Without filter
6.9 L (7.3 qt., 6.1 Imp.qt.)
6.6 L (7.0 qt., 5.8 Imp.qt.)
Te m pe r a t ur e ra n g e a n tic ipa ted
before next oil change
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 635 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
636
9-1. Specifications
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
*:EURO IV, V and VI are emission standards. If it is not clear that your vehi-
cle meets relevant standards, contact any authorized Toyota dealer or
repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional.
Cooling system
Capacity
2TR-FE engine
With automatic transmission
8.1 L (8.6 qt., 7.1 Imp.qt.)
With manual transmission
7.8 L (8.2 qt., 6.9 Imp.qt.)
1GD-FTV
and
2GD-FTV
engines
EURO IV
models
*
Without power heater
8.6 L (9.1 qt., 7.6 Imp.qt.)
With power heater
8.9 L (9.4 qt., 7.8 Imp.qt.)
EURO V
models*
With automatic transmission
9.6 L (10.1 qt., 8.4 Imp.qt.)
With manual transmission
9.1 L (9.6 qt., 8.0 Imp.qt.)
EURO VI
models*
With automatic transmission
9.7 L (10.3 qt., 8.5 Imp.qt.)
With manual transmission
9.2 L (9.7 qt., 8.1 Imp.qt.)
2KD-FTV engine 9.8 L (10.4 qt., 8.6 Imp.qt.)
Coolant type
Use either of the following:
•“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”
•Similar high-quality ethylene gly-
col-based non-silicate, non-amine,
non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant
with long-life hybrid organic acid
technology
Do not use plain water alone.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 636 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
637
9
9-1. Specifications
Vehicle specifications
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Ignition system (gasoline engine)
Spark plug
Make DENSO FK20HR-A8
Gap 0.8 mm (0.031 in.)
NOTICE
■ Iridium-tipped spark plugs
Use only iridium-tipped spark plugs. Do not adjust the spark plug gap.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 637 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
638
9-1. Specifications
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Vehicles with maintenance type battery
Vehicles with maintenance-free type battery
*:The fluid capacity is the quantity of reference.
If replacement is necessary, contact any authorized Toyota dealer or
repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional.
Electrical system
Battery
Specific gravity reading
at 20°C (68°F):
1.250 1.290 Fully charged
1.160 1.200 Half charged
1.060 1.100 Discharged
Charging rates
Quick charge
Slow charge
15 A max.
5 A max.
Battery
Open voltage at 20°C
(68°F):
12.6 12.8 V Fully charged
12.2 12.4 V Half charged
11.8 12.0 V Discharged)
(Voltage is checked 20 minutes after the engine
and all the lights are turned off.)
Charging rates 5 A max.
Automatic transmission
Fluid
capacity
*
Gasoline engine 8.5 L (9.0 qt., 7.5 Imp.qt.)
Diesel engine 9.5 L (10.0 qt., 8.4 Imp.qt.)
Fluid type To y ota Ge nu i n e AT F W S
NOTICE
■ Automatic transmission fluid type
Using transmission fluid other than “Toyota Genuine ATF WS” may cause
deterioration in shift quality, locking up of your transmission accompanied
by vibration, and ultimately damage the transmission of your vehicle.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 638 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
639
9
9-1. Specifications
Vehicle specifications
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
*:Your Toyota vehicle is filled with “Toyota Genuine Transfer Gear oil LF” at
the factory. Use Toyota approved “Toyota Genuine Transfer Gear oil LF” or
an equivalent oil of matching quality that satisfies the above specifications.
Please contact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly
qualified and equipped professional for further details.
Manual transmission
Oil
capacity
5-speed models 2.2 L (2.3 qt., 1.9 Imp.qt.)
6-speed
models
4WD models 2.5 L (2.6 qt., 2.2 Imp.qt.)
Pre Runner 2.7 L (2.9 qt., 2.4 Imp.qt.)
Oil type
TOYOTA Genuine Manual
Transmission Gear Oil API GL-3
(GL-4) or equivalent
Recommended oil viscosity
Above -10°C (14°F):
SAE 75W-90, 80W or 80W-90
Below -10°C (14°F):
SAE 75W-90
NOTICE
■ Manual transmission gear oil
Please be aware that depending on the particular characteristics of the gear
oil used or the operating conditions, idle sound, shift feeling and/or fuel effi-
ciency may be different or affected. Toyota recommends to use “TOYOTA
Genuine Manual Transmission Gear Oil” to achieve optimal performance.
Transfer (4WD models)
Oil capacity 1.0 L (1.1 qt., 0.9 Imp.qt.)
Oil type*
Toyo ta Ge nu ine Tra n s f er Ge ar oil L F o r
equivalent
Recommended oil viscosity SAE 75W
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 639 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
640
9-1. Specifications
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
*
1
:Your Toyota vehicle is filled with “Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil” at
the factory. Use Toyota approved “Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil” or
an equivalent oil of matching quality that satisfies the above specifications.
Please contact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly
qualified and equipped professional for further details.
*
2
:Models made in Thailand*
4
*
3
:Models made in South Africa*
4
*
4
:See “Checking your vehicle’s model” if you are not sure of which model
your vehicle is. (→P. 11 )
Differential
Oil
capacity
Front
(4WD
models)
Without A.D.D. 1.45 L (1.53 qt., 1.28 Imp.qt.)
With A.D.D. 1.60 L (1.69 qt., 1.41 Imp.qt.)
Rear
Without rear differ-
ential lock system
3.65 L (3.86 qt., 3.21 Imp.qt.)*
2
3.75 L (3.96 qt., 3.30 Imp.qt.)*
3
With rear differential
lock system
3.60 L (3.80 qt., 3.17 Imp.qt.)
Oil type*
1
and oil viscosity
Toyo ta G e n uin e Di f f er en tia l
gear oil LT 75W-85 GL-5 or
equivalent
Clutch (vehicles with manual transmission)
Pedal free play 5 15 mm (0.2 0.6 in.)
Fluid type
SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or
SAE J1704 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 4
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 640 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
641
9
9-1. Specifications
Vehicle specifications
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
*
1
:Minimum pedal clearance when depressed with a force of 490 N (50 kgf,
110 lbf) while the engine is running
*
2
:Parking brake lever travel when pulled up with a force of 200 N (20 kgf,
45 lbf)
*
3
:Without 205R16C tires
*
4
:With 205R16C tires
*
1
:Models made in Thailand*
3
*
2
:With grease fitting only
*
3
:See “Checking your vehicle’s model” if you are not sure of which model
your vehicle is. (→P. 11 )
Brakes
Pedal
clearance*
1
Left-hand
drive vehicles
Without
VSC
91 mm (3.6 in.)*
3
92 mm (3.6 in.)*
4
With VSC 91 mm (3.6 in.)
Right-hand drive vehicles 90 mm (3.5 in.)
Pedal free play
1.0 6.0 mm
(0.04 0.24 in.)
Parking brake lever travel*
2
7 9 clicks
Fluid type
SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116
DOT 3 or SAE J1704 or FMVSS
No.116 DOT 4
Chassis lubrication
Propeller
shafts
Front (4WD
models)
Spider
Lithium base chassis grease,
NLGI No.2
Slide
yoke
*
1
Molybdenum-disulfide lithium
base chassis grease, NLGI No.2
or lithium base chassis grease,
NLGI No.2
Rear Spider*
2
Lithium base chassis grease,
NLGI No.2
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 641 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
642
9-1. Specifications
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
16 inch tires
17 inch tires (type A)
Steering
Free play Less than 30 mm (1.2 in.)
Power steering fluid type Automatic transmission fluid DEXRON
®
II or III
Tires and wheels
Tire size 205R16C 8PR 110/108S
Tire inflation
pressure
(Recommended
cold tire inflation
pressure)
Front wheel
kPa (kgf/cm
2
or
bar, psi)
Rear wheel
(unladen)
kPa (kgf/cm
2
or
bar, psi)
Rear wheel
(full load)
kPa (kgf/cm
2
or
bar, psi)
270 (2.7, 39) 270 (2.7, 39) 340 (3.4, 49)
Wheel size 16 × 6J
Wheel nut torque 105 N•m (10.7 kgf•m, 77 ft•lbf)
Tire size 225/70R17C 108/106S
Tire inflation
pressure
(Recommended
cold tire inflation
pressure)
Front wheel
kPa (kgf/cm
2
or
bar, psi)
Rear wheel
(unladen)
kPa (kgf/cm
2
or
bar, psi)
Rear wheel
(full load)
kPa (kgf/cm
2
or
bar, psi)
240 (2.4, 35) 240 (2.4, 35) 300 (3.0, 44)
Wheel size 17 × 6J
Wheel nut torque 105 N•m (10.7 kgf•m, 77 ft•lbf)
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 642 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
643
9
9-1. Specifications
Vehicle specifications
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
17 inch tires (type B)
18 inch tires
■ When towing a trailer (models for model code destination W*)
Add 20.0 kPa (0.2 kgf/cm
2
or bar, 3 psi) to the recommended tire inflation
pressure and drive at speeds below 100 km/h (62 mph).
*:See “Checking your vehicle’s model” if you are not sure of which model
your vehicle is. (→P. 11 )
Tire size 265/65R17 112S
Tire inflation
pressure
(Recommended
cold tire inflation
pressure)
Front wheel
kPa (kgf/cm
2
or
bar, psi)
Rear wheel
(unladen)
kPa (kgf/cm
2
or
bar, psi)
Rear wheel
(full load)
kPa (kgf/cm
2
or
bar, psi)
Without stop &
start system
200 (2.0, 29) 200 (2.0, 29) 250 (2.5, 36)
With stop &
start system
230 (2.3, 33) 230 (2.3, 33) 250 (2.5, 36)
Wheel size 17 × 7 1/2J
Wheel nut torque 105 N•m (10.7 kgf•m, 77 ft•lbf)
Tire size 265/60R18 110H
Tire inflation
pressure
(Recommended
cold tire inflation
pressure)
Front wheel
kPa (kgf/cm
2
or
bar, psi)
Rear wheel
(unladen)
kPa (kgf/cm
2
or
bar, psi)
Rear wheel
(full load)
kPa (kgf/cm
2
or
bar, psi)
Without stop &
start system
200 (2.0, 29) 200 (2.0, 29) 250 (2.5, 36)
With stop &
start system
230 (2.3, 33) 230 (2.3, 33) 250 (2.5, 36)
Wheel size 18 × 7 1/2J
Wheel nut torque 105 N•m (10.7 kgf•m, 77 ft•lbf)
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 643 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
644
9-1. Specifications
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
*
1
: If equipped
*
2
: The wattage differs depending on the specification. When replacing, use a
light bulb with the same wattage as the original bulb.
Light bulbs
Light bulbs W Type
Exterior
Headlights
High/low beams (halogen headlights)
High beams (LED headlights)
60/55
60
A
B
Front fog lights*
1
19 C
Front position lights (halogen headlights)
Without daytime running lights
With daytime running lights
5
21/5
D
D
Front turn signal lights
Halogen headlights
LED headlights
21
21
E
F
Rear turn signal lights 21 E
Back-up lights 21 G
Rear fog light
*
1
21 G
License plate light 5 D
Stop/tail lights 21/5 G
Interior
Interior light
*
1
8H
Personal/interior lights 5 or 8*
2
D
A: H4 halogen bulbs
B: HB3 halogen bulbs
C: H16 halogen bulbs
D: Wedge base bulbs (clear)
E: Single end bulbs (amber)
F: Wedge base bulbs (amber)
G: Single end bulbs (clear)
H: Double end bulbs
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 644 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
645
9-1. Specifications
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
9
Vehicle specifications
Fuel information
◆ Gasoline engine
You must only use unleaded gasoline.
Select unleaded gasoline with a Research Octane Number of 91 or
higher for optimum engine performance.
◆ Diesel engine
EU area:
You must only use diesel fuel conforming to European standard
EN590.
Except EU area (except Russia):
You must only use diesel fuel with a cetane number of 48 or higher.
Except EU area (Russia):
You must only use diesel fuel with a cetane number of 48 or higher.
Your vehicle must use only diesel fuel conforming to GOST
R52368-2005.
■ Use of ethanol blended gasoline in a gasoline engine
Toyo ta a l lo ws th e u se of e th an ol bl e nd ed ga so lin e w he r e th e e th an ol c on t en t
is up to 10%. Make sure that the ethanol blended gasoline to be used has a
Research Octane Number that follows the above.
■ If you plan to drive in foreign countries (vehicles with DPF system)
Low sulfur diesel fuel may not be available, so please check the availability
with your distributor.
■ If your engine knocks
● Consult any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified
and equipped professional.
● You may o cc asion ally n otice ligh t kn o ckin g f o r a sho rt tim e w hile acceler at-
ing or driving uphill. This is normal and there is no need for concern.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 645 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
646
9-1. Specifications
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
NOTICE
■ Notice on gasoline fuel quality
● Do not use improper fuels. If improper fuels are used, the engine will be
damaged.
● Do not use leaded gasoline.
Leaded gasoline will cause the three-way catalytic converter to lose its
effectiveness and the emission control system to function improperly.
● Do not use the methanol blended gasoline such as M15, M85, M100. The
use of gasoline containing methanol may cause engine damage or failure.
● For Kazakhstan: Bioethanol fuel sold under names such as “E50” or “E85”
and fuel containing a large amount of ethanol should not be used. Your
vehicle can use gasoline mixed with 10% max ethanol. The use of fuel
with more than 10% ethanol content (E10) will damage the vehicle’s fuel
system. You must ensure that refueling is carried out only from a source
where fuel specification and quality can be guaranteed. In case of any
doubt, ask any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly quali-
fied and equipped professional.
■ Notice on diesel fuel quality
● Do not use improper fuels. If improper fuels are used, the engine will be
damaged.
● EU area: FAME (Fatty Acid Methyl Ester) fuel sold under names such as
“B30” or “B100” and fuel containing a large amount of FAME should not be
used. The use of these fuels will damage the vehicle’s fuel system. In case
of any doubt, ask any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly
qualified and equipped professional.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 646 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
647
9
9-1. Specifications
Vehicle specifications
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
NOTICE
● Except EU area (except Russia and models for model code destination V
and Blank*): FAME (Fatty Acid Methyl Ester) fuel sold under names such
as “B30” or “B100” and fuel containing a large amount of FAME should not
be used. Your vehicle can use diesel mixed with 5% max biodiesel FAME
(B5). The use of fuel with more than 5% FAME content (B5) will damage
the vehicle’s fuel system. You must ensure that refueling is carried out only
from a source where fuel specification and quality can be guaranteed.
In case of any doubt, ask any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or
another duly qualified and equipped professional.
● Except EU area (Russia): FAME (Fatty Acid Methyl Ester) fuel sold under
name such as “B30” or “B100” and fuel containing a large amount of
FAME should not be used.
The use of these fuel will damage the vehicle’s fuel system. In case of any
doubt, ask any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly quali-
fied and equipped professional.
*:See “Checking your vehicle’s model” if you are not sure of which model
your vehicle is. (→P. 11 )
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 647 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
648
9-2. Customization
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Customizable features
■ Changing using the multi-information display
Vehicles with multi-information display type A
Press the “DISP” button to display the “SETTINGS” screen while
the vehicle is stopped, and then press and hold the “DISP” button
to display the customize mode screen.
Press the “DISP” button and select the item, and then press and
hold the “DISP” button.
Press the “DISP” button and select the desired setting, and then
press and hold the “DISP” button.
To e x i t th e c us t omi ze m o d e , p re ss th e “ D I S P ” b ut ton to s e l e ct t he
“EXIT”, and then press and hold the “DISP” button.
Vehicles with multi-information display type B
Use the meter control switches to select while the vehicle is
stopped, and then press to display the customize mode
screen.
Select the desired item, and then press .
Select the desired setting, and then press .
To g o bac k t o the p r e v io us s c ree n o r e x i t t h e c ustomiz e mod e,
press .
Your vehicle includes a variety of electronic features that can be
personalized to your preferences. The settings of these features
can be changed using the multi-information display or at any
authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified
and equipped professional.
Some function settings are changed simultaneously with other func-
tions being customized. Contact any authorized Toyota dealer or
repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional for fur-
ther details.
Customizing vehicle features
1
2
3
1
2
3
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 648 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
649
9-2. Customization
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
9
Vehicle specifications
Settings that can be changed using the multi-information display
Settings that can be changed by any authorized Toyota dealer or
repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional
Definition of symbols: O = Available,
–
= Not available
■ Gauges, meters and multi-information display*
1
(→P. 1 3 3 , 13 6)
Vehicles with multi-information display type A
Customizable features
1
2
Function*
2
Default setting
Customized
setting
Language*
3
English
German
O–
French
Spanish
Italian
Russian
Turkish
Thai
Portuguese
Indonesian
Units*
3
km (L/100 km)
km (km/L)
O–
miles (MPG)
Eco Driving Indicator
Light
*
1
On
(Self-lighting)
Off O –
1 2
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 649 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
650
9-2. Customization
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Vehicles with multi-information display type B
Function*
2
Default setting
Customized
setting
Language*
3
English
German
O–
French
Spanish
Italian
Russian
Turkish
Thai
Portuguese
Indonesian
Arabic
Units
*
3
km (L/100 km)
km (km/L)
O–
miles (MPG)
Eco Driving Indicator
Light
*
1
On
(Self-lighting)
Off O –
switch settings
Drive
information 1
Desired status
screen
*
4
O–
Drive information 1
Current fuel
economy
*
5
O–
Average fuel
economy
O–
Drive information 2
Distance to
empty
*
5
O–
Average speed O –
Pop-up display
*
1
On Off O –
Accent color
*
3
Light blue
Blue
O–Orange
Yellow
1 2
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 650 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
651
9-2. Customization
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
9
Vehicle specifications
*
1
:If equipped
*
2
:For details about each function: →P. 1 3 3, 1 3 6
*
3
:The default setting and the customized setting items that can be displayed
vary according to country.
*
4
:Some status screens cannot be registered (indicated on multi-information
display).
*
5
:Customized items are the following items except for default setting items:
current fuel economy (bar type), current fuel economy (value type), aver-
age fuel economy (after reset), average fuel economy (after start), average
fuel economy (after refuel), average speed (after reset), average speed
(after start), elapsed time (after reset), elapsed time (after start), distance
(range), distance (after start), blank.
*
6
:The values can be changed using the meter control switches.
Function Default setting
Customized
setting
Eco
Saving
Fuel
consumption
comparison
10.0 *
6
O –
Fuel price
150
*
6
O –
Currency*
3
(No currency unit)
(Baht)
O –
(Rupiah)
(Euro)
1 2
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 651 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
652
9-2. Customization
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■
RSA (Road Sign Assist)*
1
(→P. 30 9 )
*
1
:If equipped
*
2
:If a speed limit with supplemental mark is exceeded, the warning buzzer
does not operate.
*
3
:No-overtaking notification only
■
Stop & Start system* (→P. 3 48 )
*:If equipped
Function Default setting
Customized
setting
RSA (Road Sign Assist) On Off O –
Notification
method
Excess
speed
Only visual
No notification
O –
Visual and
audible*
2
Others*
3
Only visual
No notification
O –
Visual and
audible
*
2
Excess speed notification
level
2 km/h (1 mph)
5 km/h (3 mph)
O –
10 km/h (5 mph)
1 2
Function Default setting
Customized
setting
Idling stop Normal Long O –
1 2
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 652 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
653
9-2. Customization
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
9
Vehicle specifications
■ Door lock (→P. 16 3)
*
1
:If equipped
*
2
:Setting that can be changed manually (→P. 164) or at any authorized
Toy ota dea ler o r re pa ir e r, or an o th er d uly q ua lif ie d a nd e qu ipp ed pr of es -
sional
■
Smart entry & start system* (→P. 17 0)
*:If equipped
■
Automatic light control system* (→P. 2 6 2)
*:If equipped
Function Default setting
Customized
setting
Speed linked door locking
function
*
1
On Off – O*
2
Driver’s door linked door
unlocking function*
1
Off On – O*
2
1 2
Function Default setting
Customized
setting
Smart entry & start system On Off – O
Operational signal
(buzzer)*
Level 5
Off
– O
Level 1 to 7
1 2
Function Default setting
Customized
setting
Light sensor sensitivity Standard -2 to 2 – O
1 2
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 653 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
654
9-2. Customization
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
■
Turn signal lever (→P. 26 0 )
Function Default setting
Customized
setting
Times of flashing of the
lane change signal flashers
3
4
– O
5
6
7
Off
WARNING
■ During customization
As the engine needs to be running during customization, ensure that the
vehicle is parked in a place with adequate ventilation. In a closed area such
as a garage, exhaust gases including harmful carbon monoxide (CO) may
collect and enter the vehicle. This may lead to death or a serious health
hazard.
NOTICE
■ During customization
To p re v e n t b a t te r y di sc ha r g e , e ns u r e t ha t t h e e n gin e i s r u nn i n g w h i l e c u s -
tomizing features.
1 2
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 654 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
655
9-3. Initialization
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
9
Vehicle specifications
Items to initialize
The following items must be initialized for normal system opera-
tion after such cases as the battery is reconnected, or mainte-
nance is performed on the vehicle.
Item When to initialize Reference
Engine oil
maintenance data
(if equipped)
After changing engine oil P. 5 04
Tire pressure warning
system (if equipped)
•When the tire inflation
pressure is changed such
as when changing travel-
ing speed or load weight
•When the tire inflation
pressure is changed such
as when the tire size is
changed
•When rotating the tires
P. 5 20
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 655 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
656
9-3. Initialization
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 656 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
657
Index
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
What to do if...
(Troubleshooting) .....................658
Alphabetical index ......................662
For vehicles with navigation system or multimedia system,
refer to the “Navigation and multimedia system Owner’s
manual” for information regarding the equipment listed below.
•Navigation system
•Audio system
•Hands-free system (for cellular phone)
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 657 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
658
What to do if... (Troubleshooting)
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
What to do if... (Troubleshooting)
● If you lose your keys or mechanical keys, new genuine keys or mechanical
keys can be made by any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another
duly qualified and equipped professional. (→P. 1 5 2)
● Vehicles with smart entry & start system:
If you lose your electronic keys, the risk of vehicle theft increases signifi-
cantly. Contact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly
qualified and equipped professional immediately. (→P. 1 59 )
● Is the key battery weak or depleted? (→P. 5 32 )
● Vehicles with smart entry & start system:
Is the engine switch in IGNITION ON mode?
When locking the doors, turn the engine switch off. (→P. 24 2)
● Vehicles with smart entry & start system:
Is the electronic key left inside the vehicle?
When locking the doors, make sure that you have the electronic key on
your person.
● The function may not operate properly due to the condition of the radio
wave. (→P. 1 65 , 17 3)
● Is the rear door child-protector lock set?
The rear door cannot be opened from inside the vehicle when the lock is
set. Open the rear door from outside and then unlock the rear door child-
protector lock. (→P. 1 63 )
If you have a problem, check the following before contacting any
authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified
and equipped professional.
The doors cannot be locked, unlocked, opened or closed
You lose your keys
The doors cannot be locked or unlocked
The rear door cannot be opened
(vehicles with rear door child-protector lock)
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 658 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
659
What to do if... (Troubleshooting)
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
● Vehicles with manual transmission:
Do you turn the key with the clutch pedal depressed firmly? (→P. 2 36 )
● Vehicles with automatic transmission:
Is the shift lever in P? (→P. 2 36 )
● Is the steering wheel unlocked? (→P. 23 8 )
● Is the battery discharged? (→P. 6 0 7)
● Did you press the engine switch while firmly depressing the brake pedal?
(→P. 2 39 )
● Vehicles with automatic transmission:
Is the shift lever in P? (→P. 2 39 )
● Is the electronic key anywhere detectable inside the vehicle? (→P. 17 1)
● Is the steering wheel unlocked? (→P. 24 4 )
● Is the electronic key battery weak or depleted?
In this case, the engine can be started in a temporary way. (→P. 6 0 4 )
● Is the battery discharged? (→P. 6 0 7)
● Vehicles without smart entry & start system:
Is the engine switch in the “ON” position?
If you cannot release the shift lever by depressing the brake pedal with the
engine switch in the “ON” position: →P. 25 2
● Vehicles with smart entry & start system:
Is the engine switch in IGNITION ON mode?
If you cannot release the shift lever by depressing the brake pedal with the
engine switch in IGNITION ON mode: →P. 25 2
If you think something is wrong
The engine does not start
(vehicles without smart entry & start system)
The engine does not start
(vehicles with smart entry & start system)
The shift lever cannot be shifted from P even if you depress
the brake pedal (vehicles with automatic transmission)
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 659 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
660
What to do if... (Troubleshooting)
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
● Vehicles without smart entry & start system:
It is locked to prevent theft of the vehicle if the key is removed from the
engine switch. (→P. 23 8 )
● Vehicles with smart entry & start system:
It is locked automatically to prevent theft of the vehicle. (→P. 2 44 )
● Is the window lock switch pressed?
The power window except for the one at the driver’s seat cannot be oper-
ated if the window lock switch is pressed. (→P. 20 1 )
● The auto power off function will be operated if the vehicle is left in ACCES-
SORY or IGNITION ON mode (the engine is not operating) for a period of
time. (→P. 24 3)
● The seat belt reminder light is flashing
Are the driver and passengers wearing the seat belts? (→P. 5 7 1)
● The parking brake indicator light is on
Is the parking brake released? (→P. 26 1 )
Depending on the situation, other types of warning buzzer may also sound.
(→P. 5 67 , 5 7 7 )
● Did anyone inside the vehicle open a door during setting the alarm?
The sensor detects it and the alarm sounds. (→P. 11 6)
To st o p the ala rm , tur n the eng i ne sw itc h to th e “ON ” posi tio n (ve hic les wi th -
out smart entry & start system) or IGNITION ON mode (vehicles with smart
entry & start system) or start the engine.
The steering wheel cannot be turned after the engine is
stopped
The windows do not open or close by operating the power
window switches (if equipped)
The engine switch is turned off automatically
(vehicles with smart entry & start system)
A warning buzzer sounds during driving
An alarm is activated and the horn sounds (if equipped)
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 660 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
661
What to do if... (Troubleshooting)
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
● Is the message displayed on the multi-information display?
Check the message on the multi-information display.
● When a warning light turns on or a warning message is displayed, refer to
P. 5 67 , 57 7.
● Stop the vehicle in a safe place and replace the flat tire with the spare tire.
(→P. 5 84 )
● Try the procedure for when the vehicle becomes stuck in mud, dirt, or
snow. (→P. 61 7)
A warning buzzer sounds when leaving the vehicle
(vehicles with smart entry & start system)
A warning light turns on or a warning message is displayed
When a problem has occurred
If you have a flat tire
The vehicle becomes stuck
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 661 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
662
Alphabetical index
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Alphabetical index
A/C.....................................448, 456
Air conditioning filter..............530
Automatic air conditioning
system ................................ 456
Manual air conditioning
system ................................ 448
ABS (Anti-lock Brake
System) ..................................353
Function ................................353
Warning light.........................568
Access panels..........................166
AdBlue™...................................513
Capacity................................515
Low AdBlue™ level
warning light .......................572
Refilling ................................. 515
Air conditioning filter ..............530
Air conditioning
system ............................ 448, 456
Air conditioning filter..............530
Automatic air conditioning
system ................................ 456
Manual air conditioning
system ................................ 448
Airbags .......................................45
Airbag manual on-off
system ..................................62
Airbag operating
conditions .............................52
Airbag precautions for
your child ..............................47
Airbag warning light ..............568
Correct driving posture............38
Curtain shield airbag
operating conditions .............53
Curtain shield airbag
precautions...........................49
Front passenger occupant
classification system.............57
General airbag
precautions........................... 47
Locations of airbags................ 45
Modification and
disposal of airbags ...............51
Side airbag operating
conditions ............................. 53
Side airbag precautions .......... 49
Side and curtain shield
airbags operating
conditions ............................. 53
Side and curtain shield
airbags precautions.............. 49
SRS airbags............................ 45
Airbag manual on-off
system...................................... 62
Alarm ........................................ 116
Antenna ............................ 386, 486
Antennas (smart entry &
start system).......................... 170
Anti-lock brake system
(ABS) ...................................... 353
Function................................ 353
Warning light......................... 568
Armrest..................................... 482
Audio input
* ............ 397, 405, 412
Audio system ........................... 374
Antenna ........................ 386, 486
Audio input............................ 379
AUX port ............................... 379
Bluetooth
®
audio................... 433
CD player ............................. 387
iPod....................................... 397
MP3/WMA disc ..................... 387
Optimal use........................... 380
Portable music
player.................................. 412
Radio .................................... 382
Steering wheel audio
switches.............................. 376
USB memory ........................ 405
A
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 662 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
663
Alphabetical index
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Automatic air conditioning
system
Air conditioning filter..............530
Automatic air conditioning
system ................................ 456
Automatic disconnecting
differential ..............................329
Automatic light
control system....................... 266
Automatic transmission.......... 247
If the shift lever cannot be
shifted from P .....................252
AUX port
*.................................412
Auxiliary boxes ........................473
Back window ............................205
Back-up lights
Replacing light bulbs.............551
Wattage................................. 644
Battery
Battery checking ...................507
If the vehicle battery is
discharged.......................... 607
Preparing and checking
before winter.......................368
Warning light.........................567
Bluetooth
®
*..............................440
Audio system ........................433
Hands-free system
(for cellular phone).............. 413
Registering/removing a
Bluetooth
®
device............... 421
Selecting a Bluetooth
®
device .........................422, 423
Wireless
communication ...................413
Bluetooth
®
audio*...................413
Bluetooth
®
phone*.................. 413
Deleting the call history......... 428
Making a call......................... 435
Managing speed dials........... 435
Managing the contacts.......... 430
Phone settings...................... 426
Receiving a call..................... 437
Speaking on the phone......... 435
Bottle holders .......................... 472
Brake
Fluid...................................... 641
Override system warning
light..................................... 570
Parking brake........................ 261
Warning light......................... 567
Brake assist ............................. 353
Break-in tips............................. 211
Brightness control
Instrument panel light
control................................. 130
Care
Aluminum wheels.................. 487
Exterior ................................. 486
Interior................................... 489
Seat belts.............................. 490
CD player
*................................ 387
Chains....................................... 369
Child restraint system............... 65
Child seats definition............... 67
Child seats installation ...... 80, 95
Installing CRS with
ISOFIX rigid anchor.............. 91
Installing CRS with
seat belts.............................. 73
Installing CRS with
top strap ............................. 104
B
C
*: Refer to “Navigation and multimedia system Owner’s manual”.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 663 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
664
Alphabetical index
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Child safety ................................64
Airbag precautions ..................47
Battery precautions .......510, 611
Child restraint system .............65
How your child should
wear the seat belt .................42
Installing child restraints....80, 95
Power window lock
switch..................................201
Power window precautions ...203
Rear door child-protectors ....163
Removed key battery
precautions......................... 534
Seat belt precautions ..............44
Seat heater precautions........465
Child-protectors.......................163
Cleaning............................486, 489
Aluminum wheels..................487
Exterior..................................486
Interior...................................489
Seat belts..............................490
Clock......................................... 478
Clutch........................................640
Coat hooks ...............................482
Condenser ................................ 506
Console box .............................470
Cooling system
Engine overheating...............613
Cruise control ..........................314
Cup holders..............................471
Curtain shield airbags ...............45
DAC........................................... 361
Daytime running light
system.................................... 266
Deck hooks .............................. 476
Defogger
Outside rear view
mirrors ........................ 449, 458
Rear window................. 449, 458
Windshield .................... 449, 458
Differential
Oil ......................................... 640
Dimension ................................ 620
Display
LDA (Lane Departure
Alert)................................... 310
Multi-information
display ........................ 133, 136
Trip information............. 134, 138
Do-it-yourself maintenance .... 495
Doors
Door glasses......................... 200
Door lock............................... 160
Open door warning light........ 571
Outside rear view mirrors...... 197
Rear door child-protectors .... 163
Side doors............................. 160
Downhill assist control
system.................................... 361
DPF (Diesel Particulate Filter)
system.................................... 364
Warning message................. 581
Driver’s seat belt
reminder light ........................ 571
Driving
Break-in tips.......................... 211
Correct posture ....................... 38
Procedures ........................... 208
Winter drive tips .................... 368
D
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 664 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
665
Alphabetical index
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Eco Driving Indicator.......124, 126
Emergency flashers.................556
Electronic key
If the electronic key does
not operate properly ...........603
Replacing the battery ............532
Emergency, in case of
If a warning buzzer
sounds................................567
If a warning light turns on......567
If the electronic key does
not operate properly ...........603
If the engine will not start ......601
If the vehicle battery is
discharged.......................... 607
If you have a flat tire.............. 584
If you lose your keys .............152
If you run out of fuel and
the engine stalls.................. 616
If you think something is
wrong.................................. 564
If your vehicle becomes
stuck ...................................617
If your vehicle has to be
stopped in an
emergency.......................... 557
If your vehicle needs to be
towed..................................559
If your vehicle overheats.......613
Engine
“ACC” position ...................... 237
Compartment........................ 499
Engine switch................ 236, 239
Hood ..................................... 497
How to start the
engine......................... 236, 239
Identification number ............ 625
If the engine will not start ...... 601
If you run out of fuel and the
engine stalls ....................... 616
If your vehicle has to be
stopped in an
emergency.......................... 557
Ignition switch
(engine switch) ........... 236, 239
Overheating ..........................613
Engine coolant
Capacity................................ 636
Checking............................... 505
Preparing and checking
before winter....................... 368
Engine coolant
temperature gauge................ 130
Engine immobilizer system .... 107
Engine oil
Capacity................................ 628
Checking............................... 502
Oil level warning light............ 571
Oil pressure warning light ..... 567
Preparing and checking
before winter....................... 368
Engine oil maintenance
data......................................... 504
E
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 665 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
666
Alphabetical index
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Engine switch
(ignition switch).............236, 239
Auto power off function .........243
Changing the engine
switch modes......................242
Changing the engine
switch position ....................237
If your vehicle has to be
stopped in an
emergency.......................... 557
Starting the engine........ 236, 239
Engine switch light
(ignition switch light) ............466
ERA-GLONASS ........................483
Fire extinguisher......................566
Flat tire......................................584
Floor mat ....................................36
Fluid
Automatic transmission......... 638
Brake.....................................641
Clutch....................................640
Steering.................................642
Transfer.................................639
Washer.................................. 511
Fog lights
Replacing light bulbs.....548, 551
Switch ...................................269
Wattage................................. 644
Four-wheel drive system
Front-wheel drive control
switch..................................329
Warning light.........................569
Front fog lights
Replacing light bulbs.............548
Switch ...................................269
Wattage................................. 644
Front passenger occupant
classification system .............. 57
Front position lights
Light switch........................... 262
Replacing light bulbs............. 544
Wattage ................................ 644
Front seats
Adjustment............................ 186
Cleaning................................ 489
Correct driving posture ........... 38
Head restraints ..................... 191
Seat heaters ......................... 465
Front turn signal lights
Replacing light bulbs............. 545
Turn signal lever ................... 260
Wattage ................................ 644
Fuel
Capacity................................ 627
Fuel filter............................... 512
Fuel gauge............................ 129
Fuel pump shut off system.... 565
Gas station information......... 676
If you run out of fuel
and the engine stalls .......... 616
Information............................ 645
Refueling............................... 274
Type...................................... 627
Warning light......................... 569
Fuel consumption
information ............................ 144
Fuel filler door.......................... 274
Refueling............................... 274
Fuel filter .......................... 512, 569
Fuel pump shut off system..... 565
Fuses ........................................ 535
F
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 666 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
667
Alphabetical index
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Gauges...................................... 128
Glove box .................................470
Grocery bag hooks ..................481
Hands-free system
(for cellular phone)
*..............413
Head restraints.........................191
Headlights ................................262
Light switch ........................... 262
Replacing light bulbs.............542
Wattage................................. 644
Heaters
Automatic air conditioning
system ................................ 456
Manual air conditioning
system ................................ 448
Seat heaters.......................... 465
Outside rear view mirrors......458
High mounted stoplight
Replacing..............................553
Hill-start assist control............353
Hood.......................................... 497
Hooks
Coat hooks............................482
Grocery bag hooks................ 481
Retaining hooks (floor mat).....36
Horn ..........................................195
Identification
Engine................................... 625
Vehicle.................................. 623
Ignition switch (engine
switch)............................ 236, 239
Auto power off function......... 243
Changing the engine
switch modes...................... 242
Changing the engine
switch position.................... 237
If your vehicle has to be
stopped in an
emergency.......................... 557
Starting the engine........ 236, 239
Ignition switch light
(engine switch light) ............. 466
Illuminated entry system ........ 468
Immobilizer system ................. 107
Indicators ................................. 120
Initialization
Engine oil maintenance
data .................................... 504
Items to initialize ................... 655
Tire pressure warning
system................................ 520
Inside rear view mirror ............ 196
Instrument panel light
control .................................... 130
Intercooler ................................ 506
Interior lights............................ 466
Switch ................................... 467
Wattage ................................ 644
Jack
Vehicle-equipped jack........... 585
Jack handle .............................. 590
Jam protection function
Power windows..................... 201
G
H
I
J
*: Refer to “Navigation and multimedia system Owner’s manual”.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 667 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
668
Alphabetical index
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Keyless entry
Smart entry & start system....160
Wireless remote control ........150
Keys ..........................................148
Electronic key........................148
Engine switch........................236
If the electronic key does
not operate properly ...........603
If you lose your keys .............152
Key number plate.................. 148
Keyless entry ........................150
Keys ......................................148
Replacing the battery ............532
Wireless remote
control key ..........................150
Lever
Auxiliary catch lever ..............497
Hood lock release lever ........497
Shift lever......................247, 254
Turn signal lever ...................260
Wiper lever............................271
LDA (Lane Departure Alert) .... 300
License plate light
Light switch ........................... 262
Replacing light bulbs.............552
Wattage................................. 644
Light
Engine switch light ................466
Fog light switch .....................269
Headlight switch.................... 262
Illuminated entry system .......468
Interior lights .........................467
Interior light list...................... 466
Personal/interior lights ..........467
Replacing light bulbs.............540
Turn signal lever ...................260
Wattage................................. 644
Light bulbs
Replacing.............................. 540
Wattage ................................ 644
Lock steering column ..... 238, 244
Maintenance
Do-it-yourself maintenance... 495
Maintenance data ................. 620
Maintenance requirements ... 492
Malfunction indicator lamp..... 568
Manual headlight
leveling dial............................ 264
Manual transmission............... 254
Master warning light................ 571
Meter
Indicators .............................. 120
Instrument panel light
control................................. 130
Meters................................... 128
Multi-information
display ........................ 133, 136
Warning lights....................... 567
Microphone .............................. 416
Mirrors
Inside rear view mirror .......... 196
Outside rear view mirror
defoggers ................... 449, 458
Outside rear view mirrors...... 197
Vanity mirror ......................... 477
MP3 disc
*................................. 390
Multimedia system
*
Multi-information display
LDA (Lane Departure
Alert)................................... 303
Switching the display ............ 134
Trip information..................... 134
Navigation system
*
K
L
M
N
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 668 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
669
Alphabetical index
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Odometer.................................. 130
Oil
Differential oil ........................640
Engine oil ..............................628
Manual transmission oil ........639
Transfer oil............................639
Opener
Fuel filler door .......................274
Hood .....................................497
Outside rear view mirrors .......197
Adjusting and folding.............197
Outside rear view mirror
defoggers............................458
Outside temperature
display....................................129
Overhead console....................473
Overheating, Engine................ 613
Parking brake
Operation ..............................261
Parking brake indicator
light.....................................572
PCS (Pre-Crash Safety
system)................................... 287
Enabling/disabling the
system ................................ 291
Function ................................287
Warning light.........................570
Warning message.................582
Personal lights .........................466
Switch ...................................467
Wattage................................. 644
Power heater ............................450
Power outlets ...........................479
Power steering
Fluid ......................................642
Power windows
Jam protection function......... 201
Operation.............................. 200
Window lock switch............... 201
Pre-Crash Safety system
(PCS) ...................................... 287
Enabling/disabling the
system................................ 291
Function................................ 287
Warning light......................... 570
Warning message................. 582
Quarter windows ..................... 204
Radiator .................................... 506
Radio
* ...................................... 382
Radio data system
*................. 384
RDS
*......................................... 384
Rear differential lock
system.................................... 339
Rear fog light
Replacing light bulb .............. 551
Switch ................................... 269
Wattage ................................ 644
Rear passengers’ seat belt
reminder light ........................ 571
Rear seat
Removing the rear seat
cushions ............................. 188
Raising the bottom
cushion............................... 188
Rear step bumper.................... 168
Rear turn signal lights
Replacing light bulbs............. 551
Turn signal lever ................... 260
Wattage ................................ 644
O
P
Q
R
*: Refer to “Navigation and multimedia system Owner’s manual”.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 669 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
670
Alphabetical index
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Rear view mirror
Inside rear view mirror ..........196
Outside rear view mirrors......197
Rear view monitor system ...... 318
Rear window defogger ....449, 458
Refueling ..................................274
Capacity................................627
Fuel types .............................627
Opening the fuel tank cap.....274
Replacing
Electronic key battery............532
Fuses .................................... 535
Light bulbs.............................540
Tires......................................584
Wireless remote control
battery.................................532
Reset the maintenance data ...504
Road Sign Assist .....................309
RSA (Road Sign Assist) ..........309
Seat belts....................................40
Adjusting the seat belt.............41
Child restraint system
installation.............................65
Cleaning and maintaining the
seat belt..............................490
Emergency Locking
Retractor...............................42
How to wear your seat belt .....38
How your child should
wear the seat belt .................42
Pregnant women, proper
seat belt use .........................43
Reminder light and
buzzer................................. 571
Seat belt pretensioners ...........42
SRS warning light .................568
Seat heaters .............................465
Seats
Adjustment............................ 186
Adjustment precautions ........ 187
Child seats/child restraint
system installation................ 65
Cleaning................................ 489
Head restraint ....................... 191
Properly sitting in the seat ...... 38
Raising the bottom
cushion............................... 188
Removing the rear seat
cushions ............................. 188
Seat heaters ......................... 465
Sensor
Automatic headlight
system................................ 266
LDA (Lane Departure
Alert)................................... 300
Service reminder
indicators............................... 120
Shift lever
Automatic transmission......... 247
If the shift lever cannot be
shifted from P ..................... 252
Manual transmission............. 254
Shift lock system ..................... 251
Side airbags ............................... 45
Side doors................................ 160
Side mirrors ............................. 197
Adjusting and folding ............ 197
Heaters ......................... 449, 458
Side turn signal lights
Replacing light bulbs............. 553
Turn signal lever ................... 260
Smart entry & start system..... 170
Antenna location ................... 170
Entry functions ...................... 160
Starting the engine................ 239
Warning message................. 577
S
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 670 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
671
Alphabetical index
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Snow tires.................................368
“SOS” button ........................... 483
Spare tire
Inflation pressure .................. 642
Storage location ....................584
Spark plug ................................637
Specifications .......................... 620
Speedometer............................129
Steering
Column lock release .....238, 244
Fluid ......................................642
Steering wheel
Adjustment............................ 194
Audio switches...................... 376
Meter control switches ..........137
Stop & Start system.................343
Stop lights
Replacing light bulbs.............551
Wattage................................. 644
Storage feature ........................469
Storage precautions................469
Stuck
If your vehicle becomes
stuck ...................................617
Sun visors ................................477
Switch
Audio remote control
switches
*............................ 376
Cruise control switch............. 314
“DISP” button ........................134
Door lock switch....................162
Emergency flashers switch ...556
Engine switch................236, 239
Fog light switch .....................269
Front-wheel drive control
switch..................................329
Heater idle up switch.............450
Ignition switch ...............236, 239
LDA (Lane Departure
Alert)................................... 303
Light switches ....................... 262
Meter control switches.......... 137
Outside rear view mirror
switches.............................. 197
Power door lock switch ......... 162
Power window switch............ 200
Rear differential lock
switch ................................. 339
Rear window and outside
rear view mirror
defoggers switch ........ 449, 458
Seat heater switches ............ 465
“SOS” button......................... 483
Talk switch
*
Telephone switches*............ 418
Tire pressure warning
reset switch ........................ 520
Window lock switch............... 201
Windshield wipers and
washer switch..................... 271
Tachometer .............................. 129
Tailgate..................................... 167
Tail lights
Light switch........................... 262
Replacing light bulbs............. 551
Wattage ................................ 644
Talk switch
*
Telephone switches* .............. 418
Theft deterrent system
Alarm .................................... 116
Engine immobilizer system ... 107
Tire inflation pressure
Maintenance data ................. 642
Warning light......................... 572
T
*: Refer to “Navigation and multimedia system Owner’s manual”.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 671 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
672
Alphabetical index
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Tire pressure warning
system .................................... 519
Function ................................519
Initializing ..............................520
Installing tire pressure
warning valves and
transmitters.........................519
Registering ID codes.............521
Tire pressure warning
reset switch.........................520
Warning light.........................572
Tires ..........................................518
Chains................................... 369
Checking...............................518
If you have a flat tire.............. 584
Inflation pressure .......... 526, 642
Replacing..............................584
Rotating tires.........................519
Size.......................................642
Snow tires .............................368
Spare tire ..............................584
Tire pressure warning
system ................................ 519
Warning light.........................572
Tools .........................................587
Towing
Emergency towing ................ 559
Towing hook..........................561
Trailer towing ................222, 223
Toyota Safety Sense................279
Traction control .......................353
Trailer towing ...................222, 223
Transmission
Automatic transmission......... 247
If the shift lever cannot be
shifted from P .....................252
Manual transmission.............254
TRC (Traction Control)............ 353
Trip information ...............134, 138
Trip meters ............................... 130
Turn signal lights
Replacing light
bulbs................... 545, 551, 553
Turn signal lever ................... 260
Wattage ................................ 644
USB memory............................ 405
USB port
*................................. 379
Valet key................................... 148
Vanity mirror ............................ 477
Vehicle identification
number ................................... 623
Vehicle Stability Control
(VSC) ...................................... 353
VSC (Vehicle Stability
Control) .................................. 353
Warning buzzers
Fuel filter............................... 569
Key reminder ........................ 238
Pre-crash braking ................. 287
Seat belt reminder ................ 571
U
V
W
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 672 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
673
Alphabetical index
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
Warning lights
ABS.......................................568
Brake Override system .........570
Brake system ........................567
Charging system ................... 567
Electronic engine control
system ................................ 568
Four-wheel drive system....... 569
Fuel system........................... 569
Go to service.........................574
Lane departure...................... 571
Low AdBlue™ .......................572
Low engine oil level...............571
Low engine oil pressure........567
Low fuel level ........................571
Malfunction indicator lamp ....568
Master warning light.............. 571
Open door.............................571
Parking brake........................572
Pre-Crash Safety system ......570
Seat belt reminder light.........571
Slip indicator .........................568
SRS.......................................568
Timing belt replacement........569
Tire pressure......................... 572
Washer
Checking............................... 511
Preparing and checking
before winter....................... 368
Switch ................................... 271
Washing and waxing............... 486
Weights..................................... 621
Wheels ...................................... 528
Replacing wheels.................. 584
Size....................................... 642
Window glasses....................... 200
Window lock switch ................ 201
Windows
Power windows..................... 200
Rear window
defogger ..................... 449, 458
Washer ................................. 271
Windshield wipers
Intermittent windshield
wipers................................. 271
Winter driving tips................... 368
Wireless communication ........ 413
Wireless remote control
key .......................................... 150
Locking/Unlocking................. 150
Replacing the battery............ 532
WMA disc
* ............................... 387
*: Refer to “Navigation and multimedia system Owner’s manual”.
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 673 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
674
Alphabetical index
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 674 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
675
Alphabetical index
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 675 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
676
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE)
*: If equipped
GAS STATION INFORMATION
Auxiliary catch lever Fuel filler door*
P. 4 97 P. 2 76
Hood lock release
lever
Fuel filler door
opener
*
Tire inflation pressure
P. 4 97 P. 2 76 P. 6 42
Fuel tank capacity (Reference) 80 L (21.1 gal., 17.6 Imp.gal.)
Fuel type P. 627
Cold tire inflation pressure P. 642
Engine oil capacity
(Drain and refill
— reference)
Gasoline
engine
L (qt., Imp. qt.)
With filter 5.6 (5.9, 4.9)
Without filter 5.3 (5.6, 4.7)
Diesel
engine
L (qt., Imp. qt.)
1GD-FTV and 2GD-FTV engines
With filter 7.5 (7.9, 6.6)
Without filter 7.0 (7.4, 6.2)
2KD-FTV engine
With filter 6.9 (7.3, 6.1)
Without filter 6.6 (7.0, 5.8)
Engine oil type P. 628
HILUX_OM_OM0K287E_(EE).book Page 676 Tuesday, April 26, 2016 11:00 AM
